Ospvol12016 Auth DCBT PDF [PDF]
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only Army Code No. 71810 Capability Directorate Combat Dismounted Close Combat Trai
47 1 8MB
Papiere empfehlen
![Ospvol12016 Auth DCBT PDF [PDF]](https://vdoc.tips/img/200x200/ospvol12016-auth-dcbt-pdf.jpg)
- Author / Uploaded
- rob
Datei wird geladen, bitte warten...
Zitiervorschau
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Army Code No. 71810
Capability Directorate Combat Dismounted Close Combat Training - Volume I Skill at Arms - Individual Training
Operational Shooting Policy Volume 1 - Personal Weapons 2016
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only Copyright & Handling Instructions The information contained within this publication is British Crown Copyright and the intellectual property rights belong exclusively to the Ministry of Defence (MOD). Material and information contained in this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system and transmitted for MOD use only Security This OFFICIAL document is issued for the information of such persons who need to know its contents in the course of their duties. Any person finding this document should hand it to a British Forces unit or to a police station for its safe return to the Ministry of Defence, Def Sy, Main Building, Whitehall, LONDON SW1A 2HB with particulars of how it was found. The unauthorised retention or destruction of this document may be an offence under the Official Secrets Acts 1911 – 89 or other legislation. This information is released by the United Kingdom Government to international organisations and national governments for defence purposes only. The information must be afforded the same degree of protection as that afforded to information of an equivalent classification originated by the recipient organisation or nation, or as required by the recipient organisation or nation’s security regulations. The information may only be disclosed within the Defence Departments of the recipient organisation or nation, except as otherwise authorised by the UK MOD. This information may be subject to privately owned rights. Status This publication has been produced under the direction and authority of the Chief of the General Staff by Director Land Warfare in his capacity as sponsor of Army Doctrine. The contents constitute mandatory regulations or an MOD Approved Code of Practice (ACOP) and provide clear military information concerning the most up to date experience and best practice available for commanders and troops to use for operations and training. If you are prosecuted for a breach of health and safety law and it is proved that you have not followed the relevant provisions of the ACOP, a court may find you criminally liable unless you can show that you have complied with the requirements of health and safety legislation, since it is a breach of this legislation which renders a person criminally liable. Breaches or omissions could result in disciplinary action under the provisions of the Armed Forces Act. It is the individual’s responsibility to ensure that he or she is using the latest version of this publication. If in doubt the individual should contact Combat Publications. Amendments Amdt No
Date
Amdt No
Date
Amdt No
Date
DISTRIBUTION (See page v) FOR THE ATTENTION OF ALL SCALE HOLDERS Units requiring an increase or decrease to their scale should apply to Army Publications, Army Media & Comm, c/o Army Headquarters, Zone 2, IDL 25, 2nd Floor Blenheim Bldg, Marlborough Lines, ANDOVER, SP11 8HTwho will arrange for a revised distribution. Any request to exceed the scale must be supported by a written justification which is to be referred by Army Publications to CD Combat for approval.
ii
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Army Code No. 71810
Capability Directorate Combat Dismounted Close Combat Training - Volume I Skill at Arms - Individual Training
OPERATIONAL SHOOTING POLICY Volume 1 - Personal Weapons
Prepared under the direction of the Chief of the General Staff Ministry of Defence January 2016 Crown Copyright Reserved
2016 iii
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
iv
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
FOREWORD 1. Any person wishing to propose amendments to this pamphlet is invited to write to Combat Publications, Waterloo Lines, WARMINSTER, BA12 0DJ. Any such proposals will be given consideration and, if there is a requirement for them, the appropriate amendments will be prepared and published. 2. This pamphlet supersedes Infantry Training, Volume I, Army Operational Shooting Policy, Volume 1 — Personal Weapons 2015 (Army Code No. 71810) which should now be destroyed. 3. This pamphlet is also available on the British Army Electronic Battle Box (BAeBB). Access is available via the latest edition of the Army Official Publications DVD or via the web version on the Intranet. Access the web version through the Army Portal, then under Reference. Follow the links to access this pamphlet under Combat. Combat Publications is then sub-divided under the appropriate volumes.
DISTRIBUTION
(Also see notes on page vii) Army Infantry Regular/Reserve Infantry Battalions and HS Battalions................ Regular/Reserve Independent/Detached Infantry Companies...... HQ SASC...................................................................................... OSTT 1 & 3 Div............................................................................. ITDU ......................................................................................... SAS Regiments............................................................................. Other Arms and Services (Regular and Reserve) Major Units.................................................................................... Minor Units.................................................................................... Training Centres/Schools/Training Areas/Training Teams Infantry Battle School, Brecon....................................................... Support Weapons School, Warminster......................................... ITC Catterick.................................................................................. Training Team Brunei.................................................................... Army Training Regiments.............................................................. Army Foundation College.............................................................. Royal Military Academy Sandhurst................................................ RTMC ......................................................................................... All UK Training Areas.................................................................... Other Arms Schools/Training Establishments............................... Army Training Units....................................................................... University Officer Training Corps...................................................
30 copies each 5 copies each 40 copies 40 copies each 5 copies 30 copies each 10 copies each 3 copies each 300 copies 100 copies 160 copies 5 copies 40 copies each 40 copies 500 copies 5 copies 1 copy each 20 copies each 10 copies each 5 copies each v
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Cadet Training Teams.................................................................... BATSUB........................................................................................ BATUS ......................................................................................... BATUK ......................................................................................... Royal Navy and Royal Marines Royal Navy Royal Naval Air Stations................................................................ Her Majesty’s Ships....................................................................... Fleet Protection Group.................................................................. HMS Raleigh................................................................................. Royal Marines Commandos Royal Marine............................................................ Independent Companies............................................................... CTC RM......................................................................................... SBS ......................................................................................... RMR ......................................................................................... RAF and RAF Regiment RAF RAF Cranwell................................................................................ All SPFS........................................................................................ Joint Nuclear Biological and Chemical Regiment.......................... RAF Regiment RAF Honington.............................................................................. Regular/Auxillary Squadrons.........................................................
vi
1 copy each 2 copies 10 copies 10 copies
2 copies each 2 copies each 7 copies 5 copies 50 copies each 5 copies each 200 copies 5 copies 2 copies each
10 copies 5 copies each 2 copies 150 copies each 2 copies each
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Notes: 1. The previous system of A to F scaling is being phased out for GSPs as new or revised publications are issued. Units will in future receive a specific initial entitlement as decided by the sponsor. 2. Requests for additional copies must be fully justified and are to be made to Army Media Comm (AMC), Publications in the first instance. Requests will fall into one of three categories and are to be specified: a. Replacement Issue. To bring units back up to entitlement as a result of loss or damage. b. Supplementary Issue. This applies when a unit’s role or circumstance changes necessitating an increase to the original entitlement. c. New Issue. This is where a unit has not previously been scaled for a particular publication. 3. Units are reminded that all publications are accountable documents and their issue and receipt should be the responsibility of a nominated officer or SNCO.
vii
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
viii
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
CONTENTS Page
Foreword ....................................................................................................... v Distribution...................................................................................................... v References And Associated Publications........................................................ xii Introduction...................................................................................................... xiii CHAPTER 1 Operational Shooting Policy and its Implementation (Personal Weapons)..... 1-1 CHAPTER 2 Management of Shooting Training (Personal Weapons)................................. 2-1 CHAPTER 3 The Rifle ....................................................................................................... 3-1 CHAPTER 4 The Light Support Weapon (LSW).................................................................. 4-1 CHAPTER 5 Infantry Section Designated Marksman (SDM (LSW)).................................... 5-1 CHAPTER 6 Sharpshooter Rifle 7.62MM L129A1............................................................... 6-1 CHAPTER 7 The Light Machine Gun (LMG)........................................................................ 7-1 CHAPTER 8 Service PistoL.................................................................................................. 8-1 CHAPTER 9 Reserved CHAPTER 10 Transition to Live Firing Tactical Training........................................................ 10-1
ix
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Page
CHAPTER 11
Live Firing Tactical Training (Personal Weapons)........................................... 11-1 CHAPTER 12 Ammunition Scales (Personal Weapons)........................................................ 12-1 CHAPTER 13 Operational Shooting Competitions................................................................. 13-1 CHAPTER 14 Advanced Operational Marksmanship Assessments...................................... 14-1
x
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
REFERENCES AND ASSOCIATED PUBLICATIONS For the latest edition and/or amendments of each publication see ‘Catalogue of Army Publications’ Parts 1 and 2, Army Code No. 12123. References
Code No.
Title
A 71855 DCC Training Volume IV, Ranges, Pamphlet No. 21, Training Regulations for Armoured Fighting Vehicles, Infantry Weapons and Pyrotechnics. B
71807 DCC Training Volume II, Skill at Arms
(Personal Weapons), The SA80 A2 (5.56 mm) System (Rifle, Light Support Weapon and Carbine) and Associated Equipment. C
71811 DCC Training Volume II, Skill at Arms (Personal Weapons), Light Machine Gun.
D 72014 DCC Training Volume II, Skill at Arms (Personal Weapons), Sharpshooter Assault Rifle 7.62mm L129A1 E 71996 DCC Training Volume II, Skill at Arms (Personal Weapons), General Service Pistol L131A1. F 71850 Operational Shooting Policy, Volume 2, Section & Platoon Weapons. G 71852 Operational Shooting Policy, Volume 3, Support Weapons.
xi
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
xii
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
INTRODUCTION 1. Aim. The aim of the OSP is: ‘To train all personnel and maintain them at a standard where they can apply marksmanship principles and are capable in the application of effective small arms fire in accordance with their operational role.’ 2. Purpose. The purpose of the OSP is to detail a progressive regime of shoots designed to introduce novice firers to shooting, to build their confidence and skills and then to train the battle shot for likely operational tasks. It also provides a means to assess whether minimum standards are being achieved in order to allow the individual firer and the chain of command to take appropriate action. Marksmanship and the effective application of fire are no longer the preserve of the Infantry. In the hybrid nature of the modern operational environment, it is a fundamental and essential All Arms skill. 3. Success. Shooting is not a skill that responds well to uneven practice. Regular and routine shooting helps to maintain standards and provides a platform for further development – all personnel should complete skill at arms training on a regular basis. Firers’ confidence is a major factor in both accuracy and effectiveness; this can only be achieved through competency which is a product of the correct culture. The key criterion for good shooting is the correct cultural approach. 4. Standards. Marksmanship and the effective application of fire is a battle winning factor. It is a command responsibility to ensure that sufficient training opportunities are available and an individual duty to achieve the highest possible standards. Required shooting standards are detailed in this volume. These represent the basic minimum and higher achievement standards and are to be encouraged. 5. Characteristics. The characteristics of the shooting training detailed in OSP are as follows: a. It commences with initial training and is to be continued regularly and routinely thereafter. b. It is a universal skill with the standards to be achieved by different force elements related to role. c. It is progressive and developmental, allowing firers to build on their skills with coaching support if required; at the higher levels it combines skill at arms and marksmanship with field craft and tactics on an individual and collective basis. d. It is evolutionary and will change as the nature of conflict, technology and the operational requirement dictates.
xiii
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
xiv
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
CHAPTER 1 OPERATIONAL SHOOTING POLICY AND ITS IMPLEMENTATION (PERSONAL WEAPONS)
Background
0101. The ability to shoot effectively on operations is a fundamental skill, which depends on training to achieve the highest standards in weapon handling and individual marksmanship in realistic battle shooting conditions 0102. There is a need for a mandatory day and night shooting progression which emphasises movement and realistic fire positions as opposed to concentrating on static prone shooting. There is a clear need to ensure high individual marksmanship standards as the keystone for combined fire effectiveness.
CONTENTS BACKGROUND 1-1 SHOOTING POLICY
1-1
SCOPE OF OPERATIONAL SHOOTING VOLUME I
1-2
OPERATIONAL SHOOTING REQUIREMENTS (OSR)
1-2
OPERATIONAL MARKSMANSHIP STANDARDS (OMS)
1-3
SIMULATION 1-4 GUIDANCE TO COMMANDERS
1-4
PROGRESSION OF SHOOTING TRAINING AND TESTING 1-6 VALIDATION 1-8 EXERCISING TROOPS
1-8
0103. A new approach to the training and testing of weapon handling and shooting was introduced in the first version of the Army Operational Shooting Policy (AOSP) not only to meet operational shooting requirements; but in doing so to integrate small arms simulation and technology. Shooting Policy 0104. Army Shooting Policy Paper (ASPP). This policy was endorsed by the Executive Committee of the Army Board (ECAB) in the ASPP. This paper addressed both the needs of operational small arms shooting and competition shooting. Competition shooting is relevant to operational requirements and details have been included in Chapters 13 & 14 of this pamphlet. 0105. Shooting Requirements. In establishing operational shooting policy the ASPP set out two key principles: a. All shooting practices and standards should be directly related to the operational requirement for each Arm or Service. b. There should be a distinction between the common standard of shooting required for all trained service personnel and that required of trained (combat) infantrymen. (Definition: An Infantry officer who has completed Platoon Commanders Battle Course (PCBC); an Infantry soldier who has completed Infantry Phase 2 Training (Combat Infantryman’s Course from Jan 93)). 1-1
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
0106. Following a complete review of Operational Shooting in 2008, it was identified that whilst on operations, certain elements of the Other Arms and Services were involved in combat operations, yet, had not been trained to the same standard as their immediate counterparts, the Infantry. This was identified as a shortfall in training and, as a result, one of the recommendations from the review was to re-examine the operational standards for those units employed in the Dismounted Close Combat Role and those units in the Basic Close Combat Role. The following definitions are offered to enable the Chain of Command to identify which elements are likely to be in which role: a. Dismounted Close Combat Role. Those units or elements of a unit that in order to achieve their mission are expected to come into contact with the enemy. b. The Basic Close Combat Role. Those units or elements of a unit that in order to achieve their mission are not expected to come into contact with the enemy. 0107. Sponsorship. The Operational Shooting Policy (OSP) is sponsored by Director Combat in his role as The Army Competent Advisor and Inspectorate for Dismounted Close Combat and, as such, the special-to-arm advisor to other Directorates, the chain of command and Army HQ. Scope of Operational Shooting Policy Volume I 0108. The Operational Shooting Policy contains the battle shooting concept which is to be understood and executed in full by all Arms and Services in order to ensure effective operational shooting using personal weapons. 0109. The concept is based on Operational Shooting Requirements (OSR) and the establishment of Operational Marksmanship Standards (OMS) for all Arms and Services. Both OSR and OMS have been incorporated into the progression for Training the Battle Shot. 0110. The progression for operational shooting training and testing is a package. It contains Live Firing (LF) lessons, Weapon Handling Tests (WHT) and lays down annual shooting tests known as Annual Combat Marksmanship Tests (ACMT). The use of DCCT and SARTS are integrated throughout the package where appropriate. The personal weapon LF lessons are contained in the relevant weapon chapter. Ammunition allocations to complete LF lessons and ACMTs are contained in the chapter on ammunition scales. 0111. OSP Volume I, therefore, is a self-contained document meeting all the requirements of the Operational Shooting Policy regarding personal weapons. Operational Shooting Requirements 0112. Three distinct OSR have been set out - one for service personnel employed in the Dismounted Close Combat (DCC) Role, one for service personnel employed in the Basic Close Combat (BCC) Role and one for professionally qualified officers and service personnel employed in the Base Location. 1-2
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The DCC Role. Service personnel employed in the DCC Role must be able to react quickly and to fire accurately to kill or suppress an enemy to the limits of the battle range of his personal weapon, or at close quarters, from different static positions, on the move and from cover. Four-man fire teams must be able to kill or suppress an enemy in defence and in offensive operations at battle ranges to 600 metres. The BCC Role. Service personnel employed in the Basic Close Combat Role must be able to fire accurately to kill or suppress an enemy as an individual or as a member of a four-man fire team out to 300 metres. Base Location. Service personnel employed in a base location who will remain inside the confines of a secure area e.g. Main Operating Base (MOB) must be able to fire accurately out to 100 metres. 0113. The conditions of these OSR raise several issues within the context of the shooting package. Foremost of these is the re-definition of personal and alternate personal weapon marksmanship standards. Operational Marksmanship Standards 0114. OMS have been determined for service personnel employed in the DCC Role the BCC Role and the Base Location and will be evaluated in the Annual Combat Marksmanship Test (ACMT) for each role. 0115. The Personal Weapon Concept is discussed in Chapter 2. In summary, there is one OMS per weapon system, dependent on the role being employed in either the DCC Role the BCC Role or in the Base Location. The weapons concerned are: a. Rifle L85A2 (both Optic and Iron Sight) issued to all Arms and Services as a personal weapon. (1) The L22A1 Carbine is categorised as a Rifle and issued to specific personnel as a personal weapon. (2) Rifle L85A2 with L17A2 Underslung Grenade Launcher (UGL) fitted issued to designated personnel, as a personal weapon. Firers are to achieve the OMS as per the Rifle. b. Light Support Weapon L86A2 (LSW) issued to designated personnel, as a personal weapon. c. Light Machine Gun (LMG) issued to DCC designated gunners as a personal weapon. d.
Pistol issued to all Arms and Services either as a personal weapon.
1-3
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
0116. Should personnel who are employed in the Basic Close Combat Role and issued with a rifle and iron sight be upgraded to an optic sight, they must still achieve the standard of the Basic Close Combat Role. 0117.
The detail of all ACMTs is contained in the specific personal weapon chapter.
Simulation 0118. The integration of small arms simulation equipment Dismounted Close Combat Trainer (DCCT) is fundamental to training the battle shot. It provides the vehicle for accessible and cost-effective remedial, refresher and progressive shooting training and gives service personnel the opportunity to practice skills before firing live. Furthermore, certain Rifle LF lessons are DCCT predominantly. It is essential, therefore, that all units have access to these systems and ensure personnel are trained in its use so it can be utilised to maximum effect. 0119. Small Arms Range Target System (SARTS). Vital shooting and coaching information can be gained with time, manpower and ammunition saved by the correct use of SARTS. It permits one to one coaching and supervision with Grouping, Zeroing and Elementary Application of Fire lessons on both ETR and CGR ranges. In Advanced Application of Fire lessons SARTS can be used to indicate to the firer and coach where shots are hitting or missing the target. RCO’s are to ensure their coaches are thoroughly familiar with SARTS before any LF lessons begin. Guidance To Commanders 0120. Commanders are responsible for training their unit in accordance with their deployment status. Key to operational success is the standard of a unit’s shooting. Detailed instructions on shooting training are to be found in the following chapters of OSP and will be of primary use to training staff. The aim of this short section is to provide a brief overview of OSP and to offer guidance to Commanders on how they can train their units in this fundamental battle winning skill as part of both foundation and deployment training. There are five stages to training the battle shot each of which is sequential with progression dependent on achieving satisfactory standards at each level. The five stages are: Stage 1
Live Fire Marksmanship Training (LFMT)
Grouping and Zeroing at 25 m
Stage 2
Live Fire Marksmanship Training (LFMT) Annual Combat Marksmanship Test (ACMT)
Applying fire to the centre of a target at 100 – 300 m Annual shooting test
Transition to Live Firing Tactical Training (TLFTT) Live Firing Tactical Training (LFTT)
Operational shooting skills including Fire and Movement Test (FMT) Combination of marksmanship and tactics including Fire Team Attack (FTA)
Stage 3 Stage 4 Stage 5
1-4
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
0121. Each Stage contains a number of LF lessons, some of which are discretionary, others must be passed at a specified standard. All are designed to be progressive and developmental. Coaching will improve standards and should be given to all firers, but will be of specific benefit to those who have difficulty in applying marksmanship principles to achieve required standards. Safety is a major factor in shooting training, but it should not be regarded as a restrictive constraint. Much productive shooting training can be conducted on a SA (B) (90) qualification, including the FMT for other Arms and Services. The tables at the end of this chapter detail the mandatory and objective shoots to be completed as part of initial, foundation and high readiness training. 0122. LFTT, in particular, must be conducted in a progressive manner. This allows for lessons to be learned during low level, simple activities before moving to exercises of greater complexity. 0123. Additional guidance is available from SASC Advisors or from HQ SASC, Warminster. The first steps to ensuring high standards of individual marksmanship and an operationally effective unit are the correct priority of shooting training, effective coaching, progressive development of firers, regular shooting activity and forward planning. These generate the culture required to develop and sustain good shooting standards at individual and unit level. Most importantly, shooting must receive the command attention it deserves. 0124. Concept in Detail. The concept of Training the Battle Shot is founded on inter-dependence. Stages are mutually reinforcing. Service personnel should not move on to another stage until they have attained the standards required. 0125. Stage 1 — Preliminary Grouping and Zeroing. Service personnel are to be trained to group consistently to the required standard from all firing positions. Training will progress from DCCT — where basic weapon lessons will be confirmed and faults in applying marksmanship principles corrected — to full bore shoots at 25 metres. No personnel are to zero their personal weapon until they can achieve the required grouping standard. A firers success in applying fire is directly related to their ability to group consistently. They are unlikely to pass the Annual Combat Marksmanship Test in Stage 3 until they can do so. 0126. Stage 2 — Application of Fire. The firer is then to progress to shooting at longer ranges in conditions relevant to OSR and from all firing positions required in the OMS. They will be taught how to overcome the effects of wind and extremes of light. They will also be introduced to different target types and be trained in snap and rapid shooting, and in quickly adopting fire positions. This stage progresses from firing at targets superimposed on witness screens to silhouette targets. 0127. Stage 3 — Annual Combat Marksmanship Test. The OMS for all service personnel are to be tested in Annual Combat Marksmanship Tests. There are two elements to the requirement: a. Weapon Handling Tests (WHT). All service personnel are to complete their WHTs twice a year for all weapons they will be required to operate. 1-5
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
b. ACMTs. The ACMT is to be fired in accordance with MATTs for the weapon system they will be required to operate as specified in the relevant chapter of this publication. 0128. In ACMTs, firers will engage a variety of targets from different firing positions out to the battle range of their weapon. These tests ensure the foundations for transition to and execution of LFTT. 0129. Stage 4 — Transition to Live Firing Tactical Training. In TLFTT operational shooting skills are developed beyond the basic standards achieved in LFMT. TLFTT applies to all Arms and Services and comprises Firing at Moving Targets, Firing in CBRN Conditions, Automatic Fire, Close Quarter Marksmanship (Turning and Firing, Short Range Engagements), Firing with NVD/TI sights, Firing at the LNV, Firing with HMNVS and LA and the Fire and Movement Test. The Fire and Movement Test (BCC Roled units only) has replaced the Fire Team Assessment and will combine battle fitness with marksmanship to practice team fire effectiveness. This will allow commanders to identify strengths and weaknesses of both individuals and fire teams. 0130. Stage 5 — Live Firing Tactical Training. LFTT is the culmination of training the battle shot. It will bring together and practice all OMS within realistic operational shooting conditions set out in the OSR. For the Infantry the annual IFFC is the vehicle for completing Stage 5 and is mandatory. The scope and conduct of an IFFC programme will be directed by the Chain of Command and influenced by resource factors. COs are to conduct a progressive LFTT package starting with low level exercises and culminating in sub unit level offensive live firing exercises by day. 0131. Contained within the progression of LFTT is the Fire Team Attack that is to be used by the Chain of Command to assess the operational marksmanship standard of the Fire Team within a unit. Progression of Shooting Training and Testing 0132. Detailed Application of LFMT. a. Initial Officer and Services Phase 1 Recruit Training. During all Phase 1 recruit training and initial officer training, all LF lessons in LFMT Stages 1 and 2 Rifle are to be fired. These progressive shoots prepare the recruit for his LFMT Stage 3 ACMT (BCC). Other Arms and Services Reserve recruits are to achieve the same standards as regular recruits. Regular and Army Reserve Infantry recruit service personnel are to complete the Combat Infantryman Course (CIC). During this the Infantry recruit soldier is to achieve a higher standard of marksmanship with the Rifle by completing additional designated LF lessons in LFMT Stages 1 and 2 Rifle and then passing the LFMT Stage 3 ACMT (DCC Role). They are also to complete the LF lessons in LFMT Stages 1 and 2 LMG to prepare him for LMG ACMT. Infantry Army Reserve recruits are to achieve the same standards as regular recruits. 1-6
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
b. DCC Role — Regular and Reserve Units. In Regular and Reserve units operating within the DCC Role, personnel depending on the weapon system they will be required to operate, are to maintain and test their shooting standards by firing the ACMT Preparation and then fire the LFMT Stage 3 Rifle/SDM ACMT (DCC Role) or Pistol/LMG ACMT as appropriate. c. BCC Role — Regular and Reserve Units. In Regular and Reserve units, Other Arms and Services personnel are to maintain and test their shooting standards by firing the ACMT Preparation Rifle and then fire the ACMT (BCC Role). Those service personnel appointed as LSW gunners are to fire the ACMT Preparation LSW and complete the LSW ACMT. Those service personnel allocated a Pistol as their personal weapon are to fire the ACMT Preparation then the Pistol ACMT. 0133. Detailed Application of TLFTT and LFTT. a. Services Phase 1 Training. The TLFTT shoots carried out at phase 1 training establishment are as described within the initial training tables. b. DCC Role — Regular and Reserve Units. In Regular and Reserve units, DCC roled personnel who are issued with the Rifle or LMG — will complete Firing at CQM Targets and also complete other TLFTT (operational shooting skills) as appropriate (see Initial Trg and Notes). In addition regular Infantry battalions are to carry out an annual IFFC. The progression for this LFTT is given in Chapter 11. It is recognised for Reserve Infantry battalions that the opportunities for LFTT may be limited. Therefore it is not a mandatory requirement for Reserve Infantry battalions to carry out an Infantry Field Firing Camp (IFFC), but where the safety requirements of Chapter 11 have been met and resources of training area, time, ammunition and qualified safety staff exist, a CO should conduct appropriate LFTT. c. BCC Role— Regular and Reserve Units. In Regular and Reserve units, BCC Role service personnel — less those personnel in headquarters and the training organisation who are issued with the Rifle or LSW will complete the Fire and Movement Test. The Fire and Movement Test will include a battle fitness element and shoot. Formations that require troops, as part of directed training, to carry out LFTT are to ensure that LFMT and TLFTT (operational shooting skills) have been achieved to the required standards contained in the relevant weapon chapters and Chapter 10 to this volume. Formations are also to ensure that the necessary resources to support the planned LFTT have been bid for. d. BCC units, elements of units or personnel that operate in support of DCC units but who are not trained to conduct DCC operations are to complete both the mandatory and objective activities listed in the Commanders Guide.
1-7
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Validation 0134. The results of ACMTs are to be formally recorded for every individual. Units are to hold statistics containing the following additional data: a.
Overall Pass Rates.
b.
First Time Pass Rates.
c.
Standards achieved Pass/Marksman.
0135. In addition, Regular and Reserve units are to record the results of TLFTT shoots as appropriate. 0136. Records and statistics of all unit shooting training and test results — with IFFC records for Infantry battalions — will form part of Operational Deployment Records (ODR) returns. Exercising Troops 0137. The exercising troops are to be sufficiently trained to cope with the demands of the exercise. They are to be trained and tested to ensure competency on all weapons and pyrotechnics they may use during such training. This training is to be documented and the testing carried out by an appropriately qualified instructor is to be recorded. The progression of training is detailed in the Commanders Guides. 0138. The mandatory requirements specified need not be completed in a single exercise period. The minimum requirement is that they are completed no more than the specified period prior to the exercise and that the Exercise Director and/or Senior Planning Officer is satisfied that the troops remain competent. Weapon Handling Tests (WHT) are to be successfully completed no more than 6 months prior to the exercise. 0139. Exceptions to these requirements are outlined in Military Annual Training Tests (MATTs), Policy Updates and Operational Mounting Instructions. For example: a. The Mission Specific Training Requirement is that MATT 1 (WHTs and ACMT) are to have been completed within the previous six calendar months prior to deployment. b. Post OP currency, individuals that return from an operational tour during the period 1 Oct to 31 Mar are deemed to be MATTs current until 1 Apr the following year. c. If, for any reason, an individuals’ ACMT currency lapses because the tour lasts in excess of six months or a unit are redeployed or extended in deployment then the individuals’ ACMT will remain extant until the end of the tour date, up to a maximum of 12 months from the deployment date.
1-8
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
GUIDE TO COMMANDERS – ARMY RIFLE INITIAL TRAINING Mandatory
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory = The mandated minimum standard to meet generic operational training requirements, fully re sourced. Objective = The objective standard to meet generic operational training requirements, conducted as resources allow. Discretionary = Conducted to support a specific training requirement, as resources allow.
Ser
Practice
Range
RCO Qual
BCC
DCC
Nil
-
WHT
WHT
1
WHT
2
LF1 Grouping Prone 4 x 5 rd Groups Supported 4 x 5 rd Groups Unsupported
DCCT
B
LF1
LF1
3
LF2 Grouping Prone 4 x 5 rd Groups Supported 4 x 5 rd Groups Unsupported
25m
B
LF2
LF2
4
LF3 Grouping Other Positions 2 x 5 rd Groups Sitting,Kneeling/Squatting, Standing Unsupported, Kneeling/Squatting, Standing Supported
DCCT
B
LF3
LF3
5
LF4 Grouping Other Positions 2 x 5 rd Groups Sitting,Kneeling/Squatting, Standing Unsupported, Kneeling/Squatting, Standing Supported
25m
B
LF4
LF4
6
WHT Zeroing
Nil
-
WHT
WHT
7
LF5 Zeroing 25m Zeroing Procedure with Retests as required
25m
B
LF5
LF5
8
PRAC 1 Stage 1 Consolidation Repeat of practices from LF 2 and 4 for those yet to achieve the guide standards
DCCT
B
PRAC 1
PRAC 1
9
LF 6 CQM Identifying POA
10 11
Remarks
STAGE 1 GROUPING AND ZEROING
STAGE 2 APPLICATION OF FIRE 15 to 3m
A or B
LF6
LF6
LF 7 CQM Accelerated Fire
15 to 3m
A or B
LF7
LF7
LF 8 CQM Failure to Stop
15 to 3m
A or B
LF8
LF8
12
LF9 CQM Multiple Targets
15 to 3m
A or B
LF9
LF9
13
WHT Wind Allowance, Miss Drill and Application of fire.
Nil
-
WHT
WHT
14
LF10 Establish POA and Apply Fire Apply fire from all positions at ranges up to 300m
DCCT
B
LF10
LF10
15
LF11 Establish POA and Apply Fire Apply fire from all positions at 100m
100m
B
LF11
LF11
16
LF12 Establish POA and Apply Fire Apply fire from all positions at ranges from 200m to 300m
200m
B
LF12
LF12
RCO requires the SA (A)(90) qual if conducted on a LFTTA
DCC Only 300m
17
LF13 Advanced Application of Fire Apply fire from all positions at ranges up to 300m
DCCT
B
LF13
LF13
18
LF 14 Advanced Application of Fire Apply fire from all positions at 100m
100m
B
LF14
LF14
1-9
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
19
LF15 Advanced Application of Fire Apply fire from all positions at ranges up to 300m
20 21
200m DCC Only 300m
B
LF15
LF15
PRAC 2 Stage 2 Consolidation
DCCT
B
PRAC 2
PRAC 2
LF16 Advanced Application of Fire Apply fire from all positions at ranges up to 100m
100m
B
LF16
22
LF17 Advanced Application of Fire Apply fire from all positions at ranges up to 200m
200m
B
LF17
23
LF18 Advanced Application of Fire Apply fire from all positions at ranges up to 300m
300m
B
LF18
24
Prac 3 Stage 2 DCC Consolidation
DCCT
B
25
ACMT
200m
B
300m
B
200m
B
Annual CBRN
Annual CBRN
IBSR
B
IBS
IBS
26 27
Annual CBRN Instruction and Assessment
PRAC 3 ACMT (BCC)
Practice 1 is only fired if LF 6 to 9 has been fired ACMT (DCC)
STAGE 4 TLFTT 28
IBSR (Fixed Firing Points Only)
29
Automatic Fire
DCCT/ ETR/ LFTTA
B
Auto Fire
Auto Fire
LF is mandatory if auto fire is used on LFTT. If not DCCT maybe used
30
Moving Targets
DCCT/ MMTTR
B
Moving Target
Moving Target
Desirable LF, DCCT is acceptable.
31
LNV
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
LNV
LNV
LNV shoot can be conducted at any time during the training progression after LF9
32
Firing with NVD and TI Sights
25m/ ETR/ GR/ CGR
B
NVD
NVD
Range as per LF Lesson
33
Fire and Movement Test (FMT)
ETR
B
FMT
STAGE 5 LFTT 34
Sect Def (Day)
LFTTA
A
Sect Def (Day)
Sect Def (Day)
35
Sect Def (Night)
LFTTA
A
Sect Def (Night)
Sect Def (Night)
36
Individual (Ind) Battle Shooting or Ind CQB
IBSR/ LFTTA
A
IBS/Ind CQB
IBS/Ind CQB
37
Ind F&M (Day)
LFTTA
A
Ind F&M (Day)
Ind F&M (Day)
38
Fire Team Attack (FTA) (Day)
LFTTA
A
(FTA) (Day)
(FTA) (Day)
39
FTA (Night)
LFTTA
A
FTA (Night)
FTA (Night)
40
Sect Attack (Day)
LFTTA
A
Sect Attack (Day)
Sect Attack (Day)
41
Sect Attack (Night)
LFTTA
A
Sect Attack (Night)
Sect Attack (Night)
1-10
Acceptable on DCCT with firing point furniture.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
ARMY LSW INITIAL TRAINING Mandatory
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory = The mandated minimum standard to meet generic operational training requirements, fully re sourced. Objective = The objective standard to meet generic operational training requirements, conducted as resources allow. Discretionary = Conducted to support a specific training requirement, as resources allow.
Ser 1
Practice WHT
Range
RCO Qual
BCC
Nil
-
WHT
Remarks
STAGE 1 GROUPING AND ZEROING 2
LF1 Introduction Prone Single Shots And Bursts
25m
B
LF1
3
LF2 Grouping Prone Zeroing at 25m
25m
B
LF2
STAGE 2 APPLICATION OF FIRE 4
LF3 Establish POA and Apply Fire Apply fire from all positions at 100m
100m
B
LF3
5
LF4 Establish POA and Apply Fire Apply fire from all positions at ranges from 200-400m
400m
B
LF4
6
LF5 Advanced Application of Fire Apply fire from all positions at ranges from 100-400m
400m
B
LF5
7
ACMT
400m
B
ACMT
8
Annual CBRN Instruction and Assessment
200m
B
Annual CBRN
ARMY SDM (LSW) INITIAL TRAINING Ser 1
Practice WHT
Range
RCO Qual
DCC
Nil
-
WHT
Remarks
STAGE 1 GROUPING AND ZEROING 2
LF1 introductory Shoot at 25m
25m
B
LF1
3
LF2 Grouping Prone Zeroing at 25m
25m
B
LF2
STAGE 2 APPLICATION OF FIRE 4
LF3 Grouping at 100m
100m
B
LF3
5
LF4 Elementary Application of Fire 200-400m
400m
B
LF4
6
LF5 Elementary Application of Fire 400-600m
400m
B
LF5
7
LF6 Advanced Application of Fire 100-400m
400m
B
LF6
8
LF7 Advanced Application of Fire 400-600m
600m
B
LF7
9
ACMT
600m
B
ACMT
10
Annual CBRN Instruction and Assessment
600m
B
Annual CBRN
1-11
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
ARMY L129A1 INITIAL TRAINING Mandatory
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory = The mandated minimum standard to meet generic operational training requirements, fully re sourced. Objective = The objective standard to meet generic operational training requirements, conducted as resources allow. Discretionary = Conducted to support a specific training requirement, as resources allow.
Ser 1
Practice WHT
Range
RCO Qual
DCC
Nil
-
WHT
100m
B
LF1
STAGE 1 GROUPING AND ZEROING 2
LF1 Grouping/Zeroing Zeroing at 100m all positions
STAGE 2 APPLICATION OF FIRE 3
LF2 Establish POA and Apply Fire Apply fire from all positions at ranges up to 300m
300m
B
LF2
4
LF3 Establish POA and Apply Fire Apply fire from all positions at ranges from 400-600m
600m
B
LF3
5
LF4 Advanced Application of Fire Apply fire from all positions at ranges from 100-300m
300m
B
LF4
6
LF5 Advanced Application of Fire Apply fire from all positions at ranges from 400-600m
600m
B
LF5
7
ACMT
600m
B
ACMT
8
Annual CBRN Instruction and Assessment
200m
B
Annual CBRN
1-12
Remarks
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
ARMY LMG INITIAL TRAINING Mandatory
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory = The mandated minimum standard to meet generic operational training requirements, fully re sourced. Objective = The objective standard to meet generic operational training requirements, conducted as resources allow. Discretionary = Conducted to support a specific training requirement, as resources allow.
Ser 1
Practice WHT
Range
RCO Qual
DCC
Nil
-
WHT
Remarks
STAGE 1 GROUPING AND ZEROING 2
LF1 Introduction Familiarisation of controlled bursts
25m
B
LF1
3
LF2 Grouping Grouping at 100m
100m
B
LF2
4
LF3 Zeroing Zeroing at 100m
100m
B
LF3
STAGE 2 APPLICATION OF FIRE 5
LF4 Establish POA and Apply Fire Apply fire from prone and Fire Trench at ranges up to 200m
200m
B
LF4
6
LF5 Establish POA and Apply Fire Apply fire from prone and Fire Trench at ranges from 300 -400m
400m
B
LF5
7
LF6 Advanced Application of Fire Apply fire from all positions at ranges from 200-400m
400m
B
LF6
8
ACMT
400m
B
ACMT
9
Annual CBRN Instruction and Assessment
300m
B
Annual CBRN
1-13
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
GUIDE TO COMMANDERS – ARMY SERVICE PISTOL INITIAL TRAINING Mandatory
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory = The mandated minimum standard to meet generic operational training requirements, fully re sourced. Objective = The objective standard to meet generic operational training requirements, conducted as resources allow. Discretionary = Conducted to support a specific training requirement, as resources allow.
Ser 1
Practice WHT
Range
RCO Qual
User
Nil
-
WHT
25m
B
LF1
STAGE 1 GROUPING AND ZEROING 2
LF1 Introduction Grouping at 10m all positions
STAGE 2 APPLICATION OF FIRE 3
LF2 Identify POA Establish POA at ranges from 3-15m
25m
B
LF2
4
LF3 Accelerated Fire Apply accelerated fire to achieve multiple rapid hits on tgt
25m
B
LF3
5
LF4 Failure to Stop Apply accelerated fire to achieve multiple rapid hits on tgt using 2 POA
25m
B
LF4
6
LF5 Close Range Multiple Tgts engaging multiple targets by shooting at close range.
25m
B
LF5
7
LF6 Advanced Snap Shooting Single fleeting enemy from the standing, kneeling and sitting positions at ranges up to 25 metres. .
25m
B
LF6
8
ACMT
25m
B
ACMT
9
Annual CBRN Instruction and Assessment
25m
B
Annual CBRN
1-14
rapid
Remarks
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
GUIDE TO COMMANDERS – ARMY OTHER TASKS YEAR Mandatory
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory = The mandated minimum standard to meet generic operational training requirements, fully re sourced. Objective = The objective standard to meet generic operational training requirements, conducted as resources allow. Discretionary = Conducted to support a specific training requirement, as resources allow. Ser
Stage
1
–
2
1 and 2 Zeroing/ Application of Fire
3
3 ACMT
4
Practice WHT
Range
RCO Qual
BCC
DCC
WHT
WHT
Nil
SAA Instr
ACMT Preparation
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
Rifle ACMT (100m)
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
Base Location
Rifle ACMT
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
ACMT (BCC)
5
ACMT Prep
LF5 to be completed as the progression to this ACMT.
ACMT (DCC)
6
LSW ACMT
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
7
SDM LSW ACMT
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
User
8
Sharpshooter ACMT
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
User
9
LMG ACMT
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
User
10
Service Pistol ACMT
25m
B
User
11
Annual CBRN Instruction and Assessment
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
Annual CBRN
IBSR Fixed Firing Points Only
IBSR
B
IBS
IBS
12
4 TLFTT
Remarks
Minimum standard for individual deployment.
User
1. TLFTT activities provide the link to LFTT but are unconnected to each other and do not have to be completed in a particular sequence.
13
Automatic Fire
B
Auto Fire
Auto Fire
14
Moving Targets
DCCT/ MMTTR
B
Moving Target
Moving Target
15
LNV
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
LNV
LNV
2. Operational Shooting Skills are only mandatory if employed during LFTT
16
Firing with NVD and TI Sights
25m/ ETR/GR/ CGR
B
NVD
NVD
3. FMT is the minimum standard for deployment in the BCC role.
17
Firing with HMNVS & LA
25m/ ETR/GR/ CGR
LA
LA
18
Fire and Movement Test (FMT)
ETR
B
19
Adv Application 700-800m (Sharpshooter)
LFTTA
A
Flank Contact Static Vehicle
LFTTA
A
S/Veh
S/Veh
Flank Contact Moving Vehicle
LFTTA
A
M/Veh
M/Veh
22
Moving Targets at Longer Ranges
DCCT
A
MTLR
MTLR
23
Long Range Suppression
DCCT
A
LRS
LRS
20 21
4 TLFTT (Spec to Role)
FMT Adv As per Operational Mounting Instruction.
1-15
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Identifying the POA
25m
B
CQM
LMG Only
25
Accelerated Fire
25m
B
CQM
LMG Only
26
Failure to Stop
25m
B
CQM
LMG Only
27
Multiple Tgts
25m
B
CQM
LMG Only
28
The Transition
25m
B
CQM
CQM
29
Turning and Pivoting
25m
B
CQM
CQM
30
Firing whilst Closing
25m
B
CQM
CQM
Rifle CQM LF lessons 6-9 must be completed once either during initial training or before these LF lessons can be conducted.
31
Moving Target
DCCT
B
CQM
CQM
Sect Def (Day)
LFTTA
A
Sect Def (Day)
Sect Def (Day)
Sect Def (Night)
LFTTA
A
Sect Def (Night)
Sect Def (Night)
1. Defensive exercises require separate skills to offensive exercises. There is no requirement to do a defensive exercise before doing offensive exercises.
34
Pl Def (Day)
LFTTA
A
Pl Def (Day)
Pl Def (Day)
2. Night exercises must be conducted at the day level first.
35
Pl Def (Night)
LFTTA
A
Pl Def (Night)
Pl Def (Night)
24
CQM
32
5 LFTT Defence Exercises
33
Ind Battle Shooting or Ind CQB
IBSR/ LFTTA
A
IBS/Ind CQB
IBS/Ind CQB
Ind F&M (Day)
LFTTA
A
Ind F&M (Day)
Ind F&M (Day)
38
Fire Team Attack (FTA) (Day).
LFTTA
A
(FTA) (Day)
(FTA) (Day)
39
Sect Attack (Day)
LFTTA
A
Sect Attack (Day
Sect Attack (Day)
40
Pl Attack (Day)
LFTTA
A
36
5 LFTT Offensive Exercises (Day)
37
Pl Attack (Day)
Participation in IBS/Ind CQB and Ind F&M during initial training or in Unit Fire Team or greater level Attack within 24 months permits exercising troops to start the progression of training at Fire Team level.
1. FTA (Day) is the minimum standard for individuals deploying in the DCC role. 2. Participation in Fire Team, Sect, Pl or Coy level attacks within 12 months permits exercising troops to start the progression of training at the day level previously participated in. 3. Offensive exercises are to be completed in sequence. Though there is no requirement to complete a night exercise before the next level of day exercise.
41
42
5 FTA (Night) LFTT Offensive Exercises (NIGHT) Sect Attack (Night)
43
Pl Attack (Night)
LFTTA
A
FTA (Night)
FTA (Night)
1. Night exercises must be conducted at the day level first.
LFTTA
A
Sect Attack (Night)
Sect Attack (Night)
LFTTA
A
2. Night exercises without illumination (including IR Light) are complex and a separate progression of training from Fire Team is required
Pl Attack (Night)
3. There is no need to complete night exercises with illumination before exercise without illumination. 4. Switching from a night exercise without illumination to using illumination is acceptable providing the exercising troops have previously participated in a night exercise with illumination. 5. Participation in Fire Team, Sect or Multiple Pl level night attacks within 12 months permits exercising troops to start the progression of training at that level.
1-16
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
GUIDE TO COMMANDERS – ARMY TRAINING YEAR Mandatory
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory = The mandated minimum standard to meet generic operational training requirements, fully re sourced. Objective = The objective standard to meet generic operational training requirements, conducted as resources allow. Discretionary = Conducted to support a specific training requirement, as resources allow. Ser
Stage
1
–
2
1 and 2 Zeroing/ Application of Fire
3
3 ACMT
4
Practice WHT
Range
RCO Qual
BCC
DCC
WHT
WHT
Nil
SAA Instr
ACMT Preparation
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
Rifle ACMT (100m)
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
Base Location
Rifle ACMT
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
ACMT (BCC)
5
ACMT Prep
LF5 to be completed as the progression to this ACMT.
ACMT (DCC)
6
LSW ACMT
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
7
SDM LSW ACMT
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
User
8
Sharpshooter ACMT
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
User
9
LMG ACMT
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
User
10
Service Pistol ACMT
25m
B
User
11
Annual CBRN Instruction and Assessment
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
Annual CBRN
IBSR Fixed Firing Points Only
IBSR
B
IBS
IBS
12
4 TLFTT
Remarks
Minimum standard for individual deployment.
User
1. TLFTT activities provide the link to LFTT but are unconnected to each other and do not have to be completed in a particular sequence.
13
Automatic Fire
B
Auto Fire
Auto Fire
14
Moving Targets
DCCT/ MMTTR
B
Moving Target
Moving Target
15
LNV
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
LNV
LNV
2. Operational Shooting Skills are only mandatory if employed during LFTT
16
Firing with NVD and TI Sights
25m/ ETR/GR/ CGR
B
NVD
NVD
3. FMT is the minimum standard for deployment in the BCC role.
17
Firing with HMNVS & LA
25m/ ETR/GR/ CGR
LA
LA
18
Fire and Movement Test (FMT)
ETR
B
19
Adv Application 700-800m (Sharpshooter)
LFTTA
A
Flank Contact Static Vehicle
LFTTA
A
S/Veh
S/Veh
Flank Contact Moving Vehicle
LFTTA
A
M/Veh
M/Veh
22
Moving Targets at Longer Ranges
DCCT
A
MTLR
MTLR
23
Long Range Suppression
DCCT
A
LRS
LRS
20 21
4 TLFTT (Spec to Role)
FMT Adv As per Operational Mounting Instruction.
1-17
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Identifying the POA
25m
B
CQM
LMG Only
25
Accelerated Fire
25m
B
CQM
LMG Only
26
Failure to Stop
25m
B
CQM
LMG Only
27
Multiple Tgts
25m
B
CQM
LMG Only
28
The Transition
25m
B
CQM
CQM
29
Turning and Pivoting
25m
B
CQM
CQM
30
Firing whilst Closing
25m
B
CQM
CQM
Rifle CQM LF lessons 6-9 must be completed once either during initial training or before these LF lessons can be conducted.
31
Moving Target
DCCT
B
CQM
CQM
Sect Def (Day)
LFTTA
A
Sect Def (Day)
Sect Def (Day)
Sect Def (Night)
LFTTA
A
Sect Def (Night)
Sect Def (Night)
1. Defensive exercises require separate skills to offensive exercises. There is no requirement to do a defensive exercise before doing offensive exercises.
34
Pl Def (Day)
LFTTA
A
Pl Def (Day)
Pl Def (Day)
2. Night exercises must be conducted at the day level first.
35
Pl Def (Night)
LFTTA
A
Pl Def (Night)
Pl Def (Night)
Ind Battle Shooting or Ind CQB
IBSR/ LFTTA
A
IBS/Ind CQB
IBS/Ind CQB
Ind F&M (Day)
LFTTA
A
Ind F&M (Day)
Ind F&M (Day)
38
Fire Team Attack (FTA) (Day).
LFTTA
A
FTA (Day)
FTA (Day)
39
Sect Attack (Day)
LFTTA
A
Sect Attack (Day)
Sect Attack (Day)
40
Pl Attack (Day)
LFTTA
A
Pl Attack (Day)
41
Coy Attack (Day)
LFTTA
A
Coy Attack (Day)
42
BG Attack (Day)
LFTTA
A
BG Attack (Day)
FTA (Night)
LFTTA
A
FTA (Night)
FTA (Night)
Sect Attack (Night)
LFTTA
A
Sect Attack (Night)
Sect Attack (Night)
45
Pl Attack (Night)
LFTTA
A
Pl Attack (Night)
46
Coy Attack (Night)
LFTTA
A
Coy Attack (Night)
47
BG Attack (Night)
LFTTA
A
BG Attack (Night)
24
32 33
36
37
43
44
CQM
5 LFTT Defence Exercises
5 LFTT Offensive Exercises (Day)
5 LFTT Offensive Exercises (NIGHT)
Participation in IBS/Ind CQB and Ind F&M during initial training or in Unit Fire Team or greater level Attack within 24 months permits exercising troops to start the progression of training at Fire Team level. 1. FTA (Day) is the minimum standard for individuals deploying in the DCC role. 2. Participation in Fire Team, Sect, Pl or Coy level attacks within 12 months permits exercising troops to start the progression of training at the day level previously participated in. 3. Offensive exercises are to be completed in sequence. Though there is no requirement to complete a night exercise before the next level of day exercise. 1. Night exercises must be conducted at the day level first. 2. Night exercises without illumination (including IR Light) are complex and a separate progression of training from Fire Team is required 3. There is no need to complete night exercises with illumination before exercise without illumination. 4. Switching from a night exercise without illumination to using illumination is acceptable providing the exercising troops have previously participated in a night exercise with illumination. 5. Participation in Fire Team, Sect or Multiple Pl level night attacks within 12 months permits exercising troops to start the progression of training at that level.
1-18
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
GUIDE TO COMMANDERS – ARMY CONTINGENCY/COMMITTED YEAR Mandatory
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory = The mandated minimum standard to meet generic operational training requirements, fully re sourced. Objective = The objective standard to meet generic operational training requirements, conducted as resources allow. Discretionary = Conducted to support a specific training requirement, as resources allow. Ser
Stage
1
–
2
1 and 2 Zeroing/ Application of Fire
3
3 ACMT
4
Practice WHT
Range
RCO Qual
BCC
DCC
WHT
WHT
Nil
SAA Instr
ACMT Preparation
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
Rifle ACMT (100m)
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
Base Location
Rifle ACMT
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
ACMT (BCC)
5
ACMT Prep
LF5 to be completed as the progression to this ACMT.
ACMT (DCC)
6
LSW ACMT
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
7
SDM LSW ACMT
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
User
8
Sharpshooter ACMT
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
User
9
LMG ACMT
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
User
10
Service Pistol ACMT
25m
B
User
11
Annual CBRN Instruction and Assessment
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
Annual CBRN
IBSR Fixed Firing Points Only
IBSR
B
IBS
IBS
12
4 TLFTT
Remarks
Minimum standard for individual deployment.
User
1. TLFTT activities provide the link to LFTT but are unconnected to each other and do not have to be completed in a particular sequence.
13
Automatic Fire
B
Auto Fire
Auto Fire
14
Moving Targets
DCCT/ MMTTR
B
Moving Target
Moving Target
15
LNV
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
LNV
LNV
2. Operational Shooting Skills are only mandatory if employed during LFTT
16
Firing with NVD and TI Sights
25m/ ETR/GR/ CGR
B
NVD
NVD
3. FMT is the minimum standard for deployment in the BCC role.
17
Firing with HMNVS & LA
25m/ ETR/GR/ CGR
LA
LA
18
Fire and Movement Test (FMT)
ETR
B
19
Adv Application 700-800m (Sharpshooter)
LFTTA
A
Flank Contact Static Vehicle
LFTTA
A
S/Veh
S/Veh
Flank Contact Moving Vehicle
LFTTA
A
M/Veh
M/Veh
22
Moving Targets at Longer Ranges
DCCT
A
MTLR
MTLR
23
Long Range Suppression
DCCT
A
LRS
LRS
20 21
4 TLFTT (Spec to Role)
FMT Adv As per Operational Mounting Instruction.
1-19
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Identifying the POA
25m
B
CQM
LMG Only
25
Accelerated Fire
25m
B
CQM
LMG Only
26
Failure to Stop
25m
B
CQM
LMG Only
27
Multiple Tgts
25m
B
CQM
LMG Only
28
The Transition
25m
B
CQM
CQM
29
Turning and Pivoting
25m
B
CQM
CQM
30
Firing whilst Closing
25m
B
CQM
CQM
Rifle CQM LF lessons 6-9 must be completed once either during initial training or before these LF lessons can be conducted.
31
Moving Target
DCCT
B
CQM
CQM
Sect Def (Day)
LFTTA
A
Sect Def (Day)
Sect Def (Day)
Sect Def (Night)
LFTTA
A
Sect Def (Night)
Sect Def (Night)
34
Pl Def (Day)
LFTTA
A
Pl Def (Day)
35
Pl Def (Night)
LFTTA
A
Pl Def (Night)
Ind Battle Shooting or Ind CQB
IBSR/ LFTTA
A
IBS/Ind CQB
IBS/Ind CQB
Ind F&M (Day)
LFTTA
A
Ind F&M (Day)
Ind F&M (Day)
38
Fire Team Attack (FTA) (Day).
LFTTA
A
FTA (Day)
FTA (Day)
1. FTA (Day) is the minimum standard for individuals deploying in the DCC role.
39
Sect Attack (Day)
LFTTA
A
Sect Attack (Day)
Sect Attack (Day)
40
Pl Attack (Day)
LFTTA
A
Pl Attack (Day)
2. Participation in Fire Team, Sect, Pl or Coy level attacks within 12 months permits exercising troops to start the progression of training at the day level previously participated in.
41
Coy Attack (Day)
LFTTA
A
Coy Attack (Day)
3. Offensive exercises are to be completed in sequence. Though there is no requirement to complete a night exercise before the next level of day exercise.
FTA (Night)
LFTTA
A
FTA (Night)
FTA (Night)
1. Night exercises must be conducted at the day level first.
Sect Attack (Night)
LFTTA
A
Sect Attack (Night)
Sect Attack (Night)
2. There is no need to complete night exercises with illumination before exercise without illumination.
44
Pl Attack (Night)
LFTTA
A
Pl Attack (Night)
3. Night exercises without illumination (including IR Light) are complex and a separate progression of training from Fire Team is required
45
Coy Attack (Night)
LFTTA
A
Coy Attack (Night)
4. Switching from a night exercise without illumination to using illumination is acceptable if the exercising troops have previously participated in a night exercise with illumination.
24
32
33
36
37
42
43
CQM
5 LFTT Defence Exercises
5 LFTT Offensive Exercises (Day)
5 LFTT Offensive Exercises (NIGHT)
1. Defensive exercises require separate skills to offensive exercises. There is no requirement to do a defensive exercise before doing offensive exercises. 2. Night exercises must be conducted at the day level first.
Participation in IBS/Ind CQB and Ind F&M during initial training or in Unit Fire Team or greater level Attack within 24 months permits exercising troops to start the progression of training at Fire Team level.
5. Participation in Fire Team, Sect or Multiple Pl level night attacks within 12 months permits exercising troops to start the progression of training at that level.
1-20
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
GUIDE TO COMMANDERS – RN/RM RIFLE INITIAL TRAINING Mandatory
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory = The mandated minimum standard to meet generic operational training requirements, fully re sourced. Objective = The objective standard to meet generic operational training requirements, conducted as resources allow. Discretionary = Conducted to support a specific training requirement, as resources allow.
Ser
Practice
Range
RCO Qual
RN BCC
RM DCC
Nil
-
WHT
WHT
Remarks
1
WHT
2
LF1 Grouping Prone 4 x 5 rd Groups Supported 4 x 5 rd Groups Unsupported
DCCT
B
LF1
LF1
3
LF2 Grouping Prone 4 x 5 rd Groups Supported 4 x 5 rd Groups Unsupported
25m
B
LF2
LF2
4
LF3 Grouping Other Positions 2 x 5 rd Groups Sitting,Kneeling/Squatting, Standing Unsupported, Kneeling/Squatting, Standing Supported
DCCT
B
LF3
LF3
5
LF4 Grouping Other Positions 2 x 5 rd Groups Sitting,Kneeling/Squatting, Standing Unsupported, Kneeling/Squatting, Standing Supported
25m
B
LF4
LF4
6
WHT Zeroing
Nil
-
WHT
WHT
7
LF5 Zeroing 25m Zeroing Procedure with Retests as required
25m
B
LF5
LF5
8
PRAC 1 Stage 1 Consolidation Repeat of practices from LF 2 and 4 for those yet to achieve the guide standards
DCCT
B
PRAC 1
PRAC 1
9
LF 6 CQM Identifying POA
15 to 3m
A or B
LF6
LF6
1. RCO requires the SA (A) (90) qual if conducted on a LFTTA.
10
LF 7 CQM Accelerated Fire
15 to 3m
A or B
LF7
LF7
11
LF 8 CQM Failure to Stop
15 to 3m
A or B
LF8
LF8
2. CTCRM only – These shoots are conducted as part of a CQM/CQB package along with serials 30 – 32.
12
LF9 CQM Multiple Targets
15 to 3m
A or B
LF9
LF9
13
WHT Wind Allowance, Miss Drill and Application of fire.
Nil
-
WHT
WHT
14
LF10 Establish POA and Apply Fire Apply fire from all positions at ranges up to 300m
DCCT
B
LF10
LF10
15
LF11 Establish POA and Apply Fire Apply fire from all positions at 100m
100m
B
LF11
LF11
16
LF12 Establish POA and Apply Fire Apply fire from all positions at ranges from 200m to 300m
200m
B
LF12
LF12
B
LF13
LF13
STAGE 1 GROUPING AND ZEROING
STAGE 2 APPLICATION OF FIRE
17
LF13 Advanced Application of Fire Apply fire from all positions at ranges up to 300m
DCC Only 300m DCCT
1-21
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
18
LF 14 Advanced Application of Fire Apply fire from all positions at 100m
100m
B
LF14
LF14
19
LF15 Advanced Application of Fire Apply fire from all positions at ranges up to 300m
200m DCC Only 300m
B
LF15
LF15
20
PRAC 2 Stage 2 Consolidation
DCCT
B
PRAC 2
PRAC 2
21
LF16 Advanced Application of Fire Apply fire from all positions at ranges up to 100m
100m
B
LF16
LF16
22
LF17 Advanced Application of Fire Apply fire from all positions at ranges up to 200m
200m
B
LF17
LF17
23
LF18 Advanced Application of Fire Apply fire from all positions at ranges up to 300m
300m
B
LF18
LF18
24
Prac 3 Stage 2 DCC Consolidation
DCCT
B
PRAC 3
PRAC 3
25
ACMT
200m
B
ACMT (BCC)
300m
B
200m
B
Annual CBRN
Annual CBRN
IBSR
B
IBS
IBS
26 27
Annual CBRN Instruction and Assessment
1. CTCRM only - Prac 1 is fired as part of the CQM/CQB package ACMT (DCC)
STAGE 4 TLFTT 28
IBSR (Fixed Firing Points Only)
29
Automatic Fire
DCCT/ ETR/ LFTTA
B
Auto Fire
Auto Fire
30
The Transition
15 to 3m
A,B or CQBI
CQM
CQM
31
Turning and Pivoting
15 to 3m
A,B or CQBI
CQM
CQM
32
Firing Whilst Closing
15 to 3m
A,B or CQBI
CQM
CQM
33
Moving Targets
DCCT/ MMTTR
B
Moving Target
Moving Target
34
LNV
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
LNV
LNV
35
Firing with NVD and TI Sights
25m/ ETR/ GR/ CGR
B
NVD
NVD
36
Fire with HMNVS and LA
25m/ ETR/ GR/ CGR
B
LA
LA
STAGE 5 LFTT 37
Sect Def (Day)
LFTTA
A
Sect Def (Day)
Sect Def (Day)
38
Sect Def (Night)
LFTTA
A
Sect Def (Night)
Sect Def (Night)
39
Individual (Ind) Battle Shooting or Ind CQB
IBSR/ LFTTA
A
IBS/Ind CQB
IBS/Ind CQB
40
Ind F&M (Day)
LFTTA
A
Ind F&M (Day)
Ind F&M (Day)
41
Fire Team Attack (FTA) (Day)
LFTTA
A
(FTA) (Day)
(FTA) (Day)
42
FTA (Night)
LFTTA
A
FTA (Night)
FTA (Night)
1-22
Acceptable on DCCT with firing point furniture. LF is mandatory if auto fire is used on LFTT. If not DCCT maybe used 1. CTCRM only – Conducted with LF6-9 as part of a CQM/CQB package.
Desirable LF, DCCT is acceptable.
Range as per LF Lesson See note 1
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
43
Sect Attack (Day)
LFTTA
A
Sect Attack (Day)
44
Sect Attack (Night)
LFTTA
A
Sect Attack (Night)
45
Pl Attack (Day)
LFTTA
A
Pl Attack (Day)
See note 1
46
Pl Attack (Night)
LFTTA
A
Pl Attack (Night)
See note 1
Note 1: Theses additional shoots are conducted by CTCRM to allow all Mne/YOs to leave CTCRM at Operation performance Standard (OPS) so they can join a Cdo unit anywhere in the CORM Cycle.
1-23
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
GUIDE TO COMMANDERS – RM STANDING TASK YEAR Mandatory
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory = The mandated minimum standard to meet generic operational training requirements, fully re sourced. Objective = The objective standard to meet generic operational training requirements, conducted as resources allow. Discretionary = Conducted to support a specific training requirement, as resources allow.
Range
RCO Qual
RM DCC
Nil
SAA Instr
WHT
ACMT Preparation
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
ACMT (Prep)
Rifle ACMT
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
ACMT (DCC)
4
LSW ACMT
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
User
5
SDM LSW ACMT
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
User
6
Sharpshooter ACMT
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
User
7
LMG ACMT
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
User
8
Service Pistol ACMT
25m
B
User
9
Annual CBRN Instruction and Assessment
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
Annual CBRN
IBSR Fixed Firing Points Only
IBSR
B
IBS
Ser
Stage
1
–
2
1 and 2 Zeroing/ Application of Fire
3
3 ACMT
10
4 TLFTT
Practice WHT
11
Automatic Fire
B
Auto Fire
12
Moving Targets
DCCT/ MMTTR
B
Moving Target
13
LNV
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
LNV
14
Firing with NVD and TI Sights
25m/ ETR/GR/ CGR
B
NVD
15
Firing with HMNVS & LA
25m/ ETR/GR/ CGR
16
Adv Application 700-800m (Sharpshooter)
LFTTA
A
Flank Contact Static Vehicle
LFTTA
A
S/Veh
Flank Contact Moving Vehicle
LFTTA
A
M/Veh
19
Moving Targets at Longer Ranges
DCCT
A
MTLR
20
Long Range Suppression
DCCT
A
LRS
17 18
1-24
4 TLFTT (Spec to Role)
Remarks
Minimum standard for individual deployment.
1. TLFTT activities provide the link to LFTT but are unconnected from each other and do not have to be completed in any particular sequence. 2. Operational Shooting skills are only mandatory if employed during LFTT.
LA
Adv As per Operational Mounting Instruction.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Identifying the POA
25m
B
CQM
22
Accelerated Fire
25m
B
CQM
23
Failure to Stop
25m
B
CQM
24
Multiple Tgts
25m
B
CQM
25
The Transition
25m
B
CQM
26
Turning and Pivoting
25m
B
CQM
27
Firing whilst Closing
25m
B
CQM
28
Moving Target
DCCT
B
CQM
Sect Def (Day)
LFTTA
A
Sect Def (Day)
Sect Def (Night)
LFTTA
A
Sect Def (Night)
1. Defensive exercises require separate skills to offensive exercises. There is no requirement to do a defensive exercise before doing offensive exercises.
31
Pl Def (Day)
LFTTA
A
Pl Def (Day)
2. Night exercises must be conducted at the day level first
32
Pl Def (Night)
LFTTA
A
Pl Def (Night)
Ind Battle Shooting or Ind CQB
IBSR/ LFTTA
A
IBS/Ind CQB
Ind F&M (Day)
LFTTA
A
Ind F&M (Day)
35
Fire Team Attack (FTA) (Day).
LFTTA
A
(FTA) (Day)
36
Sect Attack (Day)
LFTTA
A
Sect Attack (Day)
37
Pl Attack (Day)
LFTTA
A
Pl Attack (Day)
21
29 30
33
34
CQM
5 LFTT Defence Exercises
5 LFTT Offensive Exercises (Day)
1. LMG must only complete serials 21–24, 26, 27. 2. Rifle must only complete serials 25 - 28 3. Rifle CQM LF Lesson 6-9 must be completed once either during initial training or before these LF lessons can be conducted
Participation in IBS/Ind CQB and Ind F&M during initial training or Fire Team or greater level Attack within 24 months permits exercising troops to start the progression of training at Fire Team level.
1. FTA (Day) is the minimum standard for individuals deploying in the DCC role. 2. Participation in Fire Team, Sect, Pl or Coy level attacks within 12 months permits exercising troops to start the progression of training at the day level previously participated in. 3. Offensive exercises are to be completed in sequence. Though there is no requirement to complete a night exercise before the next level of day exercise.
38
39 40
5 LFTT Offensive Exercises (NIGHT)
FTA (Night)
LFTTA
A
FTA (Night)
Sect Attack (Night)
LFTTA
A
Sect Attack (Night)
Pl Attack (Night)
LFTTA
A
Pl Attack (Night)
1. Night exercises must be conducted at the day level first. 2. Night exercises without illumination (including IR Light) are complex and a separate progression of training from Fire Team is required 3. There is no need to complete night exercises with illumination before exercise without illumination. 4. Switching from a night exercise without illumination to using illumination is acceptable providing the exercising troops have previously participated in a night exercise with illumination. 5. Participation in Fire Team, Sect or Multiple Pl level night attacks within 12 months permits exercising troops to start the progression of training at that level.
1-25
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
GUIDE TO COMMANDERS – RN/RM FORCE GENERATION YEAR Mandatory
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory = The mandated minimum standard to meet generic operational training requirements, fully re sourced. Objective = The objective standard to meet generic operational training requirements, conducted as resources allow. Discretionary = Conducted to support a specific training requirement, as resources allow. Ser
Stage
1
–
2
1 and 2 Zeroing/ Application of Fire
3
3 ACMT
Practice WHT
Range
RCO Qual
RN BCC
RM DCC
Nil
SAA Instr
WHT
ACMT Preparation
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
ACMT Prep
Rifle ACMT
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
ACMT (BCC)
ACMT (DCC)
4
LSW ACMT
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
User
User
5
SDM LSW ACMT
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
User
User
6
Sharpshooter ACMT
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
User
User
7
LMG ACMT
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
User
User
8
Service Pistol ACMT
25m
B
User
9
Annual CBRN Instruction and Assessment
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
Annual CBRN
IBSR Fixed Firing Points Only
IBSR
B
IBS
IBS
10
4 TLFTT
11
Automatic Fire
B
Auto Fire
Auto Fire
12
Moving Targets
DCCT/ MMTTR
B
Moving Target
Moving Target
13
LNV
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
LNV
LNV
14
Firing with NVD and TI Sights
25m/ ETR/GR/ CGR
B
15
Firing with HMNVS & LA
25m/ ETR/GR/ CGR
16
Adv Application 700-800m (Sharpshooter)
LFTTA
A
Adv
Flank Contact Static Vehicle
LFTTA
A
S/Veh
Flank Contact Moving Vehicle
LFTTA
A
M/Veh
19
Moving Targets at Longer Ranges
DCCT
A
MTLR
20
Long Range Suppression
DCCT
A
LRS
17 18
1-26
4 TLFTT (Spec to Role)
NVD
Remarks
Minimum standard for individual deployment.
1. TLFTT activities provide the link to LFTT but are unconnected from each other and do not have to be completed in any particular sequence. 2. Operational Shooting skills are only mandatory if employed during LFTT. 3. RN personnel only may complete the LNV serial via LF, DCCT or BDFL Night Vision DVD
LA
As per Operational Mounting Instruction.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Identifying the POA
25m
B
CQM
CQM
22
Accelerated Fire
25m
B
CQM
CQM
23
Failure to Stop
25m
B
CQM
CQM
24
Multiple Tgts
25m
B
CQM
CQM
25
The Transition
25m
B
CQM
CQM
26
Turning and Pivoting
25m
B
CQM
CQM
27
Firing whilst Closing
25m
B
CQM
CQM
28
Moving Target
DCCT
B
CQM
CQM
Sect Def (Day)
LFTTA
A
Sect Def (Day)
Sect Def (Night)
LFTTA
A
Sect Def (Night)
1. Defensive exercises require separate skills to offensive exercises. There is no requirement to do a defensive exercise before doing offensive exercises.
31
Pl Def (Day)
LFTTA
A
Pl Def (Day)
2. Night exercises must be conducted at the day level first
32
Pl Def (Night)
LFTTA
A
Pl Def (Night)
Ind Battle Shooting or Ind CQB
IBSR/ LFTTA
A
IBS/Ind CQB
Ind F&M (Day)
LFTTA
A
Ind F&M (Day)
35
Fire Team Attack (FTA) (Day).
LFTTA
A
FTA (Day)
36
Sect Attack (Day)
LFTTA
A
Sect Attack (Day)
37
Pl Attack (Day)
LFTTA
A
Sect Attack (Day)
38
Coy Attack (Day)
LFTTA
A
Coy Attack (Day)
39
BG Attack (Day)
LFTTA
A
BG Attack (Day)
FTA (Night)
LFTTA
A
FTA (Night)
Sect Attack (Night)
LFTTA
A
Sect Attack (Night)
42
Pl Attack (Night)
LFTTA
A
Pl Attack (Night)
43
Coy Attack (Night)
LFTTA
A
Coy Attack (Night)
44
BG Attack (Night)
LFTTA
A
BG Attack (Night)
21
29 30
33
34
40
41
CQM
5 LFTT Defence Exercises
5 LFTT Offensive Exercises (Day)
5 LFTT Offensive Exercises (NIGHT)
1. LMG must only complete serials 21–24, 26, 27. 2. Rifle must only complete serials 25 - 28 3. Rifle CQM LF Lesson 6-9 must be completed once either during initial training or before these LF lessons can be conducted.
Participation in IBS/Ind CQB and Ind F&M during initial training or Fire Team or greater level Attack within 24 months permits exercising troops to start the progression of training at Fire Team level. 1. FTA (Day) is the minimum standard for individuals deploying in the DCC role. 2. Participation in Fire Team, Sect, Pl or Coy level attacks within 12 months permits exercising troops to start the progression of training at the day level previously participated in. 3. Offensive exercises are to be completed in sequence. Though there is no requirement to complete a night exercise before the next level of day exercise. 1. Night exercises must be conducted at the day level first. 2. Night exercises without illumination (including IR Light) are complex and a separate progression of training from Fire Team is required 3. There is no need to complete night exercises with illumination before exercise without illumination. 4. Switching from a night exercise without illumination to using illumination is acceptable providing the exercising troops have previously participated in a night exercise with illumination. 5. Participation in Fire Team, Sect or Pl level night attacks within 12 months permits exercising troops to start the progression of training at that level.
1-27
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
GUIDE TO COMMANDERS – RN/RM COMMITTED YEAR Mandatory
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory = The mandated minimum standard to meet generic operational training requirements, fully re sourced. Objective = The objective standard to meet generic operational training requirements, conducted as resources allow. Discretionary = Conducted to support a specific training requirement, as resources allow. Ser
Stage
1
–
2
1 and 2 Zeroing/ Application of Fire
Practice WHT
Range
RCO Qual
RN BCC
RM DCC
Nil
SAA Instr
WHT
ACMT Preparation
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
ACMT Prep
3
Rifle ACMT
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
4
LSW ACMT
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
User
5
SDM LSW ACMT
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
User
6
Sharpshooter ACMT
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
User
7
LMG ACMT
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
User
8
Service Pistol ACMT
25m
B
User
9
Annual CBRN Instruction and Assessment
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
Annual CBRN
IBSR Fixed Firing Points Only
IBSR
B
10
4 TLFTT
ACMT (BCC)
LF 5 must be completed as the progression to this ACMT
ACMT (DCC)
IBS
11
Automatic Fire
B
Auto Fire
Auto Fire
12
Moving Targets
DCCT/ MMTTR
B
Moving Target
Moving Target
13
LNV
ETR/GR/ CGR
B
LNV
LNV
14
Firing with NVD and TI Sights
25m/ ETR/GR/ CGR
B
15
Firing with HMNVS & LA
25m/ ETR/GR/ CGR
16
Adv Application 700-800m (Sharpshooter)
LFTTA
A
Adv
Flank Contact Static Vehicle
LFTTA
A
S/Veh
Flank Contact Moving Vehicle
LFTTA
A
M/Veh
19
Moving Targets at Longer Ranges
DCCT
A
MTLR
20
Long Range Suppression
DCCT
A
LRS
17 18
1-28
4 TLFTT (Spec to Role)
Remarks
Minimum standard for individual deployment.
1. TLFTT activities provide the link to LFTT but are unconnected from each other and do not have to be completed in any particular sequence. 2. Operational Shooting skills are only mandatory if employed during LFTT.
NVD
LA
As per Operational Mounting Instruction.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Identifying the POA
25m
B
CQM
CQM
22
Accelerated Fire
25m
B
CQM
CQM
23
Failure to Stop
25m
B
CQM
CQM
24
Multiple Tgts
25m
B
CQM
CQM
25
The Transition
25m
B
CQM
CQM
26
Turning and Pivoting
25m
B
CQM
CQM
27
Firing whilst Closing
25m
B
CQM
CQM
28
Moving Target
DCCT
B
CQM
CQM
Sect Def (Day)
LFTTA
A
Sect Def (Day)
Sect Def (Night)
LFTTA
A
Sect Def (Night)
31
Pl Def (Day)
LFTTA
A
Pl Def (Day)
32
Pl Def (Night)
LFTTA
A
Pl Def (Night)
Ind Battle Shooting or Ind CQB
IBSR/ LFTTA
A
IBS/Ind CQB
Ind F&M (Day)
LFTTA
A
Ind F&M (Day)
35
Fire Team Attack (FTA) (Day).
LFTTA
A
FTA (Day)
36
Sect Attack (Day)
LFTTA
A
Sect Attack (Day)
37
Pl Attack (Day)
LFTTA
A
Pl Attack (Day)
38
Coy Attack (Day)
LFTTA
A
Coy Attack (Day)
39
BG Attack (Day)
LFTTA
A
BG Attack (Day)
FTA (Night)
LFTTA
A
FTA (Night)
Sect Attack (Night)
LFTTA
A
Sect Attack (Night)
42
Pl Attack (Night)
LFTTA
A
Pl Attack (Night)
43
Coy Attack (Night)
LFTTA
A
Coy Attack (Night)
21
29
30
33
34
40
41
CQM
5 LFTT Defence Exercises
5 LFTT Offensive Exercises (Day)
5 LFTT Offensive Exercises (NIGHT)
1. LMG must only complete serials 21–24, 26, 27. 2. Rifle must only complete serials 25 - 28 3. Rifle CQM LF Lesson 6-9 must be completed once either during initial training or before these LF lessons can be conducted.
1. Defensive exercises require separate skills to offensive exercises. There is no requirement to do a defensive exercise before doing offensive exercises. 2. Night exercises must be conducted at the day level first.
Participation in IBS/Ind CQB and Ind F&M during initial training or in Unit Fire Team or greater level Attack within 24 months permits exercising troops to start the progression of training at Fire Team level. 1. FTA (Day) is the minimum standard for individuals deploying in the DCC role. 2. Participation in Fire Team, Sect, Pl or Coy level attacks within 12 months permits exercising troops to start the progression of training at the day level previously participated in. 3. Offensive exercises are to be completed in sequence. Though there is no requirement to complete a night exercise before the next level of day exercise. 1. Night exercises must be conducted at the day level first. 2. Night exercises without illumination (including IR Light) are complex and a separate progression of training from Fire Team is required 3. There is no need to complete night exercises with illumination before exercise without illumination. 4. Switching from a night exercise without illumination to using illumination is acceptable providing the exercising troops have previously participated in a night exercise with illumination. 5. Participation in Fire Team, Sect or Pl level night attacks within 12 months permits exercising troops to start the progression of training at that level.
1-29
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
GUIDE TO COMMANDERS – RAF REGT ENDURING COMMITTED PERIOD (Reserved)
1-30
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
GUIDE TO COMMANDERS – RAF REGIMENT CONTINGENT OPERATIONAL TRAINING YEAR (COT 1/COT 2) (Reserved)
1-31
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
GUIDE TO COMMANDERS – CONTINGENCY/COMMITTED YEAR (JEF1/JEF2) (Reserved)
1-32
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
CHAPTER 2 MANAGEMENT OF SHOOTING TRAINING (PERSONAL WEAPONS) Personal Weapon Concept 0201. Personal Weapon. All service personnel, on joining a unit, are issued with a personal weapon. The individual’s appointment and the unit establishment will determine whether their personal weapon is to be a Rifle, LSW, LMG or Pistol. The individual is to retain that weapon as their personal weapon when practicable except: a. On posting and attendance on courses.
CONTENTS PERSONAL WEAPON CONCEPT
2-1
SAFETY 2-2 QUALIFICATION AND AUTHORISATION
2-2
NIGHT SHOOTING
2-2
CBRN CONDITIONS
2-3
AIDS TO TRAINING AND FIRING
2-3
PHYSICAL FITNESS
2-3
COMBAT SHOOTING COACHING
2-4
SHOOTING RECORDS
2-4
COMBAT SHOOTING COMPETITIONS
2-5
PURPOSE BUILT RANGES AND THEIR USES 2-6
b.
When the weapon requires repair or replacement.
c.
On change of appointment within a unit.
d. In accordance with the rules contained in Reference A if personnel change their type of personal weapon during the year, having passed their Annual Combat Marksmanship Tests (ACMT), they are required to pass the Weapon Handling Tests (WHT) and ACMT on the new personal weapon to ensure safe handling and effective operational use. 0202. Test Requirements. Details of WHTs and ACMTs, with respective Training Performance Standards and Pass/Marksmanship Standards are in the specific personal weapon chapter. 0203. Change of Weapon Sight. Where a personal weapon remains the same, but the type of sight changes i.e. SUSAT to LDS, individuals need not repeat the ACMT and other progressive shoots. In such circumstances the individual is to be formally trained on the sight, and must then conduct the relevant zeroing practice. 0204. Change of Pistol. Where an individual has completed the requisite progression of training with a Pistol and is then issued with another Pistol i.e. on arrival in-Theatre, a POA confirmation shoot is to be conducted. This does not apply when a different type of Pistol is issued, in which case the entire progression is to be completed
2-1
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Safety 0205. It is mandatory for all firers to have passed WHTs prior to live firing of a weapon, in order to ensure a minimum standard of safety. Conducting officers must confirm that all personnel firing any weapon have passed the relevant WHTs within the previous six months of firing Qualification and Authorisation 0206. SAA Instructor Qualification. It is mandatory that in all units the basic weapon handling lessons, laid down in the relevant weapon General Staff Publications (GSP), are given by a qualified Skill At Arms (SAA) Instructor; who themselves are proven competent to handle the weapons being taught by passing the relevant WHTs within the last six months. 0207. Course Qualification. The qualification needed by an Officer, WO or NCO to plan, conduct and supervise live firing, is to have attended and qualified on an appropriate course listed in Reference A. 0208. Pamphlet No 21. Reference A also lays down the powers of COs and the rules to be followed if they wish to authorise non-qualified personnel to be employed as Safety Supervisors Night Shooting 0209. Importance. Night shooting is a key element of meeting the OSR and cannot be over emphasised. Night shooting, at the Limit of Night Visibility (LNV), with CWS and with HMNVS and LA live firing (LF) lessons and assessments are included as operational shooting skills covered in Stage 4 TLFTT. Night shooting exercises are included in the suggested shooting progression in LFTT. 0210. Limit of Night Visibility (LNV). The night shooting requirement for all Services is to fire at the LNV using the optic sight or by instinctive pointing of the iron sight. 0211. Firing with NVD and TI. To gain maximum benefit from NVD and TI sights they are to be issued as a personal equipment item to selected users. 0212. Firing with HMNVS and LA. Where issued all members of the section will be equipped with HMNVS and LA, providing the capability for snap shooting from the patrol position and accurate fire from other combat fire positions out to 200 metres.
2-2
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
0213. Night Firing with Illumination. It is anticipated that the majority of night firing with illumination will take place during LFTT. However, if either ground or airborne illuminances are available, units are encouraged to include night shooting with illumination practices during their standard range firing periods. There is sufficient scope within the LF lessons in LFMT, for units to select appropriate night shooting with illumination practices to match the standard of their soldiers’ training. In doing so, however, the appropriate parts of Reference A and range orders should be read to determine the safety constraints for ranges. CBRN Conditions 0214. To prepare personnel for the CBRN threat, it is necessary that Skill at Arms training, both weapon handling and marksmanship, be carried out wearing protective clothing. An annual CBRN Instructional Shoot and Assessment for all personal weapons has been included at the end of each weapon chapter. Where possible CBRN LF should be conducted in full IPE. The minimum level of CBRN protection that should be worn is respirator and CBRN gloves. Units are also to carry out LFTT wearing CBRN protection. Units who have a specialist CBRN role may wish to conduct all LF lessons in CBRN conditions. Aids to Training and Firing 0215. Small Arms Collimator (SAC). To avoid wasting time and ammunition the SAC is to be used to bore sight weapons before zeroing. When weapons have been zeroed, the SAC is to be used to record the Personal Zero Position (PZP) readings. Thereafter, SAC is to be used before any LF lesson to ensure that readings have not changed. To save range time it is recommended that bore sighting is conducted on the day prior to the lesson. 0216. Tracer. Tracer ammunition may be used to assist in the observation of strike when firing Advanced Application of Fire shoots. There are strict limitations on the use of tracer on some types of range and under certain climatic conditions. Range orders will specify any limitations that are in force. 0217. Sandbags. The use of the sandbag for support while shooting is not permitted during any lessons or tests in LFMT or TLFTT. Physical Fitness 0218. Requirement. Unless personnel are fully fit they are unlikely to be able to shoot to the best of their ability under operational conditions. Physical fitness and coordination are essential for accurate shooting and are to be fully integrated into the training sequence. Service personnel must be fit enough to: a. Handle their personal weapon without unnecessary strain in all firing positions. b.
Control their breathing, particularly after physical exertion. 2-3
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
0219. Physical Fitness in Training the Battle Shot. Although general physical fitness is necessary, particular emphasis is to be given to strengthening the muscles in the upper body that are required for shooting, particularly in the unsupported firing positions. In LFMT personnel are not expected to fire under physically strenuous conditions but rather concentrate on improving their basic marksmanship skills. Short dashes are incorporated into the practices to simulate the rapid move to a firing position before firing. Endurance fitness becomes a factor in TLFTT where the Fire and Movement Test for personnel employed in the Basic Close Combat Role is proceeded by a 300 metre march and the Fire Team Attack where the shoot is preceded by a 1.2 km march. Combat Shooting Coaching 0220. Importance. The importance of combat shooting coaching cannot be overemphasised. Comparisons can be made to any other skill or sport — expert tuition and practice are essential. During All Arms Phase 1 Training or during Infantry Phase 2 Training, instructors will invariably be qualified and trained on coaching techniques and procedures. If standards are to be maintained and improved on, and backward shots developed, combat shooting coaching is equally important in units. 0221. Role of the Unit Training Officer (UTO). The UTO is responsible to the CO for the planning of unit shooting activity to meet operational requirements and the coordination of unit shooting performance. A major task of the UTO, therefore, is to train sub-unit combat shooting coaches and monitor their performance. After learning the techniques and procedures, a combat shooting coach can only become effective by practising, and COs must encourage this. Additional support,guidance and training is available from Bde Training Teams and the Divisional Operational Shooting Training Teams (OSTTs). 0222. Qualities of the Combat Shooting Coach. Combat shooting coaches need the following key qualities: a.
To be a good instructor — to be enthusiastic, convincing and patient.
b. To be a good shot — with a sound understanding of this volume and the combat shooting coaching techniques and procedures. 0223. Related Information. Information on combat shooting coaching and how to train the sub-unit combat shooting coach is contained in DCC Training Volume 4, Marksmanship Coaching. DCC Training Volume II, The SA80 A2 (5.56 mm) System (Rifle, LSW and Carbine) and Associated Equipment contains information on Zeroing, Bore sighting and the Small Arms Collimator (SAC). Shooting Records 0224. The following shooting records should be maintained for all soldiers: a. 2-4
AB 608 — Personal Weapon Record Book (Recruit training only).
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
b.
AFB 6994 — Personal Weapon Record Book (Trained Soldier).
c. Sub-Unit Shooting Record, to be held and maintained in the sub-unit office to enable the sub-unit commander to monitor the shooting ability of his soldiers (All Units). d.
Results of mandatory tests on unit computer systems (All Units).
Combat Shooting Competitions 0225. Purpose and Value of Combat Shooting Competitions. The value of combat shooting competitions is too often underestimated. Service combat shooting competition is an integral and important part of personnel’s shooting training. Matches exist for Rifle, LSW, Pistol and LMG. Its value in meeting the requirements of operational shooting can be highlighted in the following areas: a. Incentive. Competition is a powerful incentive to units and individuals to aspire to high standards of marksmanship. b. Interest. Competition matches maintain interest. They are framed to provide a real challenge and will usually be more difficult than the ACMT. Interest will be maintained if units enter competitions regularly. c. Battle Training. Competition stress has a similar effect to battle stress. The keener the competition, the greater the pressure. Simultaneous firing of team combat shooting matches are a particularly good way of creating pressure. Qualities which competition shooting develops include determination, esprit de corps, concentration, self confidence and confidence in weapons and equipment. 0226. Operational Shooting Competitions. Details of Operational Shooting Competitions are given in Chapter 13 & 14 of this pamphlet. In summary matches are organised as follows: a. Central Matches. Central matches are those organised and fired by units, corps and District/Division at Operational Shooting Competitions (OSCs). They should be organised on the broadest possible basis with teams made up of all classes of shots. A good shooting team is an invaluable asset as it is a source of shooting ‘know how’ and the team members should be used as coaches to assist the unit training staff. District/Division and Command Competitions are also the vehicle for selecting unit teams to compete annually in Army Operational Shooting Competition (AOSC), which includes the Queen’s Medal Competition for Shooting Excellence. b. Non-Central Matches. Non-central matches are those fired on unit ranges or at specific weapons concentrations, such as for GPMG(SF) or Sniper. They are of particular value in maintaining interest and ensuring shooting is practised throughout the year. 2-5
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
0227. Army Rifle Association (ARA). The ARA is part of CD Combat, under the authority of AD DCC and is located at the National Shooting Centre at Bisley, Surrey. The ARA is responsible for all Target Shooting matters. Purpose Built Ranges and Their Use 0228. The following purpose built ranges are available for Training the Battle Shot: Serial
2-6
Type of Range
Type of Training
1
Dismounted Close Combat Trainer (DCCT)
1. Simulated firing of LFMT and some TLFTT of Training the Battle Shot. 2. Individual and team advanced marksman- ship shoots using authored practices or video. 3. Remedial training for backward shots. 4. Training of sub unit shooting coaches.
2
Tube/Pipe Range
1. Confirmation of zeroing. 2. Predominantly in operational bases.
3
25 Metre Range
1. Introduction to full bore shooting. 2. Practice at grouping shoots and remedial training. 3. Zeroing. 4. Training of sub unit shooting coaches. 5. TLFTT.
4
25 Metre Barrack Range
1. These ranges will gradually supersede the existing 25 m Range. Their function is identical to the 25 m Range but they have 6 lanes. 2. TLFTT – CQM.
5
Gallery Range/Converted Gallery Range (CGR)
1. LFMT Stage 1 (Grouping and Zeroing). 2. LFMT Stage 2 (Application of Fire). 3. LFMT Stage 3 (Annual Combat Marksmanship Test). 4. TLFTT – Operational Shooting Skills. 5. Training of sub unit shooting coaches.
6
Electric Target Range (ETR)
1. LFMT Stage 1 (Grouping and Zeroing). 2. LFMT Stage 2 (Application of Fire). 3. LFMT Stage 3 (Annual Combat Marksmanship Tests). 4. TLFTT. a. Operational Shooting Skills. b. Fire and Movement Test. 5. Training of sub unit shooting coaches.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
7
Mechanical Moving Target Trainer Range (MMTTR)
1. LFMT Stage 1 (Grouping and Zeroing). 2. TLFTT. 3. Firing at Moving Targets (6 lanes).
8
100 Metre Baffle Range
A study is currently in progress to approve a new design for the 100 m Baffle Range.
9
300 Metre Baffle Range German Type B/Type C
10
Individual Battle Shooting Range (IBSR)
1. Type B (Rifle Practices Only). 2. Type C (Rifle and Machine Gun Practices). Note: No firing between firing points. 1. TLFTT Firing From Other Positions. 2. LFTT. a. Close Quarter Battle (CQB). b. Attack (up to pairs only). c. Defence. 3. These ranges are purpose built.
2-7
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
2-8
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
CHAPTER 3 THE RIFLE Scope 0301. Chapter 3 sets out all Rifle live firing (LF) lessons to be completed in LFMT Stages 1, 2 and 3 of Training the Battle Shot. It includes the application of LF lessons to all Arms and Services and the progression and frequency with which they are to be fired. 0302. This progression and frequency of firing is essential for preparing firers for the Rifle Annual Combat Marksmanship Test (ACMT) in LFMT Stage 3. It is also essential in preparing the firer for mandatory TLFTT and LFTT. The detail of TLFTT and LFTT are in Chapters 10 and 11 respectively.
CONTENTS SCOPE 3-1 TRAINING AND FIRING SEQUENCE
3-1
SAFETY 3-2 CONDUCT OF LF LESSONS
3-2
WEAPON HANDLING TESTS GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
3-4
DEFINITION OF STANDARDS
3-5
WHT 3-6 LF LESSONS
3-13
RIFLE ACMT PREPARATION
3-65
RIFLE ACMT
3-69
RIFLE ACMT BASE LOCATION
3-75
CBRN INSTRUCTION/ ASSESSMENT
3-81
0303. The L22A1 Carbine is categorised as a Rifle. The OMS requirement for the Carbine is the same as for the Rifle ACMT (Basic Close Combat Role). 0304. The OMS requirement for the Rifle when fitted with UGL is Rifle ACMT (Dismounted Close Combat Role). Training and Firing Sequence 0305. Phase 1 Initial Training. The LF lessons contained within the Commanders Guide are to be fired by all recruits during Services Phase 1 Training. Reserve recruits are to achieve the same standards as regular recruits: 0306. DCC Role — Regular and Reserve Units. The ACMT Preparation is to be fired in accordance with MATTs by all DCC Role Firers in Regular and Reserve units whose personal weapon is the Rifle. 0307. BCC Role— Regular and Reserve Units. The ACMT Preparation is to be fired in accordance with MATTs by all BCC Role Firers in Regular and Reserve units whose personal weapon is the Rifle or Carbine. 0308. ACMT Familiarisation with DCCT. After the ACMT Preparation and before the ACMT is fired on the range, use of DCCT to familiarise firers with the ACMT practices will improve first time pass rates and the overall standard of shooting.
3-1
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
0309. Remedial Training. DCCT provides an invaluable aid to the remedial training of the poor shot. COs are encouraged to make full use of the facilities wherever they are available. However, final confirmation must be by the use of live firing. All Rifle LF lessons can be fired on DCCT and may be used as a remedial aid or as a rehearsal prior to firing on the range. Safety 0310. It is mandatory for all firers to have completed WHTs prior to live firing of a weapon, in order to ensure a minimum standard of safety. Conducting officers must confirm that all firers firing any weapon have completed the relevant WHTs within the previous six months of firing. Conduct of LF Lessons 0311. General Requirements. The general requirements of equipment and outline range procedures which apply to all ranges are shown below. Any requirements specific to a particular LF lesson are contained at the start of each lesson. 0312. Stores. The following stores are required: Rifles complete to CES Cleaning material Issued, serviceable hearing protection Combat helmets Issued Body Armour Personal Shooting Record Book Coaching Aide Memoire (AC 71158) Binoculars First aid kit SAC Complete Stop watch
1 per firer As required 1 per firer 1 per firer 1 per firer 1 per firer 1 per coach 1 per coach As required As required
0313. Dress. The dress for Rifle LF lessons should include belt order webbing, combat helmets and body armour. Additionally, when OSPREY, Mark 7 helmets, ballistic eye protection and rifle ancillaries are issued, the firer should be given the opportunity to practice with them. The dress rules for Phase One Recruits and Trainee Combat Infantrymen should be applied sensibly with a gradual increase in the amount of additional equipment. However, the conditions for the ACMT are to be rigorously applied. 0314. DCCT. Firers are to fire the bore sighting practice before firing any other shoots using DCCT. Firers can be given a preview of all the practices on DCCT in order to familiarise themselves with the conditions. 0315. SAC. The SAC is to be used to bore sight the rifle prior to firing a grouping practice. Once zeroed, the Personal Zeroing Position (PZP) is to be noted in the firers’ shooting record card and the reading is to be checked prior to any future live firing lesson. The SAC cannot be used for lessons fired on DCCT. 3-2
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
0316. Weapon and Firing Preparation. a. Where possible, rifles should be prepared for firing prior to moving to the range, to ensure they are prepared under ‘ideal’ conditions and not those that may be experienced on the range. b. Each firer is to have the issued, serviceable hearing protection and their shooting record card in their possession. c. Observation of fall of shot is obvious using Optic Sights at 25 metres. During grouping practices it must be emphasised to firers that they are to take the correct Point of Aim (POA) for each shot and avoid aiming off. d.
If fire trenches are not available the prone position is to be used.
0317. Aiming Marks. The POA is to be the bottom centre of the white patch. 0318. Coaching. DCC Training Volume IV, Marksmanship Coaching and the Coaching Aide Memoire contain details of the coaching requirements. Some essential points to ensure are: a. The RCO and all coaches on the range must have prior knowledge of coaching techniques. b. Where possible a coach should be with each firer. If there are insufficient coaches the Master Coach system should be used. c. For ranges up to and including 300 metres, sights are to be set at 300. Firers are to be reminded to alter their sights (SUSAT) prior to firing shoots at 400 metres. d. All group sizes, MPIs, POAs for other positions, and scores are to be recorded on the firers’ personal shooting record card. e. Coaches are to be in possession of binoculars during all elementary and advanced application of fire practices. 0319. CQM Coaching. DCC Training Volume IV, Marksmanship Coaching and the Coaching Aide Memoire contain details of the coaching requirements. Some essential points to ensure are: a. The Conducting Officer and all the coaches on the range must have prior knowledge of CQM coaching and firing techniques. b. Where possible, a coach should be with each firer. If there are insufficient coaches all POAs should be recorded on the firers’ personal shooting record card. c. Coaches are to be in possession of binoculars during practices to avoid the need for dressing forward when possible. 3-3
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
d. Shot cadence or tempo can be judged in the following manner, for half second cadence say “and” between shots “(1 and 2 and 3)” and for quarter second cadence, the sights should just have time to bounce onto the target prior to pulling the trigger again (1, 2, 3, 4). e. CQM LFMT 5 Pistol can be carried out as a single action, double action or press drill practice to cover all the nuances of the weapon. f. From CQM LFMT 6 onwards the firer should be encouraged to wear their primary weapon and carry out a dry transition. This will not only practice the firer in a realistic situation but reinforce the fact that the pistol is a secondary weapon system and only used in an emergency. g. The accuracy of the rifle and pistol differs and the scoring areas on the target reflect this(see Fig 3-1a).Spotters. When grouping at 25 metres, to enable firers and coaches to gain the maximum information from the shots fired, members of the waiting detail should be employed as spotters, using binoculars, to plot the arrival of each shot. To achieve maximum value from this type of live firing, it is essential that firers are given every opportunity to discuss the results of their shooting with their coach. 0320. Spotters. Where possible, to enable the firers and coaches to gain the maximum benefit from the shots being fired, members of the waiting detail should be employed as spotters, using binoculars to plot the arrival of each shot. To achieve maximum training value from this type of firing, it is essential that firers are given every opportunity to discuss the results of their shooting with their coach. 0321. Guide to Progress. Firers who do not attain the suggested measure of progress should be given further coaching or firing practice before progressing. 0322. Scoring. Scores are to be recorded and announced to the firers at the end of each practice. Details of the scoring system are shown in each individual lesson. 0323. End of Lesson Procedure. At the end of each LF lesson the following drills are to be completed once the range is cleared: a.
Questions from the firers on the range period.
b.
Normal safety precautions/declaration.
c.
Pack kit.
d. Summary of standard achieved, specific points relevant to lesson, forecast of next LF lesson. WHTs General Instructions 0324. Purpose. The purpose of WHTs is to provide a measure of personal weapon handling skill throughout the Services in line with operational safety and handling requirements. Mandatory testing ensures that handling skills of all personnel are monitored accurately and rectified if necessary. 3-4
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
0325. Testing and Results. a. All tests are to be carried out in daylight and conducted by a qualified, competent instructor. Standards are to be measured: (1)
At an appropriate stage during Phase 1 Recruit Training.
(2) At intervals in accordance with MATTs for regular and reserve units. b. Results. All results must be recorded in accordance with unit and chain of command procedures. 0326. Conduct. NSPs are to be carried out by the instructor on all weapons and drill ammunition prior to any WHT taking place. Tests are as per the tables in this section and are to be completed consecutively using drill ammunition. a. Initial Training. Tests 1-10 are to be completed prior to initial live firing. Tests 11-14 are to be conducted before LF Lesson 5. Test 15-17 are to be conducted before LF Lesson 10. b. Regular & Reserve Units. All tests (1-17) are to be conducted as part of MATTs. 0327. Dress. Tests are to be carried out wearing belt order webbing with combat helmet. Definition of Standards 0328. Handling, Gunners Goals and Progress . Handling Gunners Goals and Progress achieved in WHTs are defined as:: Pass — Pass in all tests. Fail —
Fail in any test.
0329. Training Performance Standards. A firer is considered competent on achieving the pass standard. Failure to meet the pass standard indicates that the firer is not competent in the use of the Rifle. Retesting is to be carried out on completion of remedial training on the individual test(s) that were failed.
3-5
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
WHTs Rifle - Safe Handling Subject Stores Conditions Marking
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
Subject Stores
Conditions Marking
3-6
Test No. 1 Safety Rifle, unloaded. Safety Catch at ‘F’, change lever at ‘R’. Weapon lying on the ground. 1. Order the firer to “Take control of the weapon”. The firer, without further direction, is to pick up the weapon and carry out normal safety precautions. 1. Standard: Pass: Fail: Test No. 2 Stripping, Cleaning and Assembling Rifle with sling fitted, unloaded, cleaning roll (with combination tool out), flannelette and oil. 1. Order the firer to “Strip the rifle as for daily cleaning”. Ask the following questions: a. What size flannelette is used to clean the barrel? b. What size flannelette is used to oil the barrel? c. What are the differences to normal daily cleaning in the following conditions (choose any 2 conditions) (1) Heavy rain and damp conditions. (2) Dry, sandy or dusty conditions. (3) Cold and extreme cold conditions. (4) Hot, wet conditions. 2. Order the firer to indicate the parts of the combination tool that are used to clean the gas plug. 3. Order the firer to “Assemble the Rifle and carry out the function test”. 4. Ask the following question: a. If during the function test, or at any time you notice the change lever over-rotates beyond its stops, what action is to be taken. 1. Standard: Pass — 1 or 2 mistakes. Fail — More than 2 mistakes. 2. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety. Test No. 3 Magazine Filling 30 Rounds, magazine. Instructor’s Note: All ammunition is to be removed from the magazine. Fit depressor. 1. On the command “Go” the firer fills their magazine with 30 Rounds by hand. No time limit
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Subject Stores Conditions Marking
Subject Stores Conditions Marking
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
Test No. 4 Loading – Standing Position Rifle, one magazine in fastened pouch. Instructor’s Note: Load with a magazine fitted with a depressor. Give the command “Load”. Pouches must be refastened. Instructor’s Note: Leave rifle loaded for Test No 5. 1. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 2. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 3. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety. Test No. 5 Ready Drill Prone Position Rifle loaded (from Test No. 4), representative targets 1. Order “Prone Position Down”. 2. Once the firer has aligned himself, on to the target order “Ready” or issue a range. 1. The actions tested are those relating to the Ready Drill only. 2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 3. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety. Test No. 6 Immediate Action (IA) Forward Assist Rifle loaded (from Test No. 4), representative targets 1. Order “Fire”. 2. Order “Rifle firing alright – rifle stops”. Firer to carry out the IA...”Cocking handle fully forward”. Firer is to tap for- ward on the cocking handle and continue firing. 3. Order “Rifle fires alright” “Stop”. 1. The actions tested are those relating to the (IA) and Forward Assist Drills only. 2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 3. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
3-7
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
3-8
Test No. 7 IA and Loose Magazine Drill Rifle loaded, representative targets. 1. Order “Fire” “Rifle firing alright – rifle stops”. Firer to carry out the IA...”Cocking handle fully forward”. Firer is to tap forward on the cocking handle and continue firing. 2. Order “Rifle still fails to fire”. 3. On examination of body and chamber order “Rounds in magazine – chamber clear”. Allow the firer to complete the drill. 4. Order “Rifle fires alright” “Stop”.. 1. The actions tested are those relating to the Loose Magazine Drill only. 2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 3. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety. Test No. 8 IA and Obstruction Drill Rifle loaded, representative targets 1. Order “Fire” “Rifle firing alright – rifle stops”. Firer to carry out the IA...“Cocking Handle not fully forward”. 2. On examination of body and chamber, order “Obstruction”. 3. When the firer has removed the magazine and attempted to clear the obstruction by hand or using a tool from the maintenance kit, order “Obstruction Clear”. 4. When the firer has visually inspected the chamber, order “Chamber Clear”. 5. Firer is to complete the obstruction drill. 6. Order “Rifle fires alright” “Stop”. 1. The actions tested are those relating to the Obstruction Drill only. 2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 3. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
Subject Stores Conditions Marking
Test No. 9 IA and Empty Magazine Drill Rifle loaded, representative targets. 1. Instruct the firer to cock the weapon and apply the Holding Open Catch, with the working parts held to the rear, order “Test and adjust – fire” “Rifle firing alright – rifle stops”. 2. Firer is to carry out the IA...”Empty Magazine”. Firer is to carry out the drill for an empty magazine. 3. When the firer has completed the drill and continued firing, order “Rifle fires alright” “Stop”. 1. The actions tested are those relating to the Empty Magazine Drill only. 2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 3. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety. Test No. 10 Unloading Rifle loaded and ready (from Test No. 9) The test follows on from Test No.9. Give the command “Unload”. The test is not complete until the firer has recovered the ejected round, replaced it in the magazine and fastened the pouch. 1. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 2. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 3. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
3-9
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
WHTs Rifle - Zeroing 0330. The zeroing test is to be completed prior to attempting LF 5 and is designed to ensure the firer is competent in zeroing his own rifle. If the firer fails the test they are to be given remedial training on Rifle lesson prior to attempting the test again. Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
3-10
Test No. 11 Group size and Correct Zeroing Position (CZP) Coaching Aide Memoire for soldier. Ask the soldier the following questions based on the sight fitted to the rifle and the distance fired: Q - What is the maximum permissible extreme spread prior to zeroing the rifle? A - 25m optic - 38 mm 25m iron - 50 mm Q – What is the CZP for your rifle? A – 100 m optic – 90 mm above the POA 25 m optic - 22 mm below the POA A – 100 m iron – 100 mm above the POA 25 m iron – 25 mm below the POA Standard: Pass: Correct answers. Fail: Incorrect answer. Test No. 12 Alterations Coaching Aide Memoire for soldier. Ask the soldier one of the following three questions with answers dependant on the sight fitted to the rifle and the distance fired: Q 1 - If the MPI is 250 mm high and 100 mm left what alterations would be made? Q 2 - If the MPI is 200 mm low and 350 mm right what alterations would be made? Q 3 - If the MPI is 100 mm low and 50 mm left what alterations would be made? Standard: Pass: Correct answer. Fail: Incorrect answer. Note: The soldier is to accurately estimate the adjustments required.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Subject Stores Conditions Marking
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
Test No. 13 Sight Adjustment Rifle with sighting system Comb tool Using the answers gained from Test No 2, the soldier is to demonstrate how the adjustments are to be made to the sight. Standard: Pass: All corrections need to be correctly applied. Note: The solider is to indicate the adjustments using the sight and combination tool to aid his explanation. No adjustments are to be made to the sight. Test No. 14 Permissible Variation Nil Ask the soldier the following questions based on the sight fitted to the rifle and the distance fired: Q 1 – On completion of the 5 round check group, how do you know that the rifle is zeroed? A - PV at 100 m: SUSAT & iron sight is 50 mm. LDS is 30 mm A - PV at 25 m: SUSAT & iron sight is 13 mm LDS is 10 mm Q 2 – If the PV is greater than the distance allowed what procedure is to be followed? A - Leave the 5 round check group on the target and fire another 15 Rounds in order to repeat the zeroing procedure. Standard: Pass: Each question correctly answered. Fail: Incorrect answer.
WHTs Rifle - Application of Fire 0331. The Application of Fire test is to be completed prior to attempting LF 10 and is designed to ensure the firer is competent in applying his fire correctly. If the firer fails the test they are to be given remedial training prior to attempting the test again. Subject Stores
Test No. 15 Wind Allowance Representative Fig 11 target. Representative aiming aid.
3-11
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Conditions
Marking
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
3-12
Ask the firer 2 of the questions below, including one from questions 3 and 4: Q 1 – Where would you aim at 100 m with a strong wing L – R? Q 2 – Where would you aim at 200 m with a fresh wind R – L? Q 3 – Where would you aim at 300 m with a fresh wind L – R? Q 4 – Where would you aim at 300 m with a strong wind R – L? Standard: Pass: 2 correct answers. Fail: Incorrect answer. Test No. 16 Miss Drill As for Test 15. Ask the firer the following question: Q – After firing 2 Rounds you identify that you are missing the target. What action would you take, and why? A – Aim at the base centre of the target in order to observe strike and then aim off accordingly. Standard: Pass: Correct answer. Fail: Incorrect answer. Test No. 17 Application of Fire As for Test 15. Ask the firer 2 questions from the list below: Q 1 – You identify that after firing your group the MPI is forming in the area of the helmet. Where would you aim so that the MPI lands centrally on the target? Q 2 – You identify that after firing your group the MPI is forming in the area of the left edge of the target. Where would you aim so that the MPI lands centrally on the target? Q 3 – You identify that after firing your group the MPI is forming in the area his right shoulder. Where would you aim so that the MPI lands centrally on the target? Q 4 –You identify that after firing your group the MPI that one round is on the left edge of the target and the other round is on the right edge of the target. What action would you take, and why? Standard: Pass: 2 correct answers. Fail: Incorrect answer.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle LF 1. — DCCT – Grouping at 25 Metres (Prone) A. RCO Notes 0332. Aim. To confirm that the firer can hold, aim and fire the rifle correctly in the prone position. 0333. Conduct. The lesson is to be conducted using DCCT. 0334. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. 0335. Stores. Complete DCCT equipment 0336. Miscellaneous. Instructors should be aware that additional time may be required in this lesson for the adjustment of sights to obtain correct eye relief.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0337. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0338. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate where necessary the range safety rules applicable to DCCT. Practice Details 0339. Practice details are as follows Practice 1. Grouping Range/Positioning
25 m Prone (Unsupported)
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
4 x 25 mm square aiming marks
Instructions
1. Fire a 5 round group at each aiming mark. 2. The firer is to apply their safety catch and stand up after each group. 3. Discuss the groups and record the group sizes.
3-13
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Grouping Range/Positioning
25 m Prone (Supported,bipod or magazine rested)
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
4 x 25 mm square aiming marks
Instructions
1. Fire a 5 round group at each aiming mark. 2. The firer is to apply their safety catch and stand up after each group. 3. Discuss the groups and record the group sizes.
Firers Goals and Progress 0340. The following group sizes should be used as a guide to progress: a.
Basic Close Combat Role
–
61-85mm
b.
Dismounted Close Combat Role –
46-65mm
End of Lesson Procedure
3-14
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle LF 2. — Introductory Shoot at 25 Metres (Prone) A. RCO Notes 0341. Aim. To confirm that the firer knows how to prepare the rifle for firing. To confirm that they can aim, hold and fire the rifle in the prone position and confirm that they know how to clean the rifle after firing. 0342. Conduct. This lesson is to be conducted on a 25 metre range or ETR with screens placed 25 metres from firers. 0343. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. 0344. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x witness screen with 4 x 25 mm square aiming marks per firer 40 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer 0345. Miscellaneous. If the MPI of the groups in the prone position are badly misplaced from the CZP, the sights should be adjusted by the coach (These adjustments should not be discussed with the firer.)
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0346. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0347. Preparing the Rifle for Firing. Remind the squad of the procedures for cleaning the rifle before firing. Weapons must be bore sighted before live firing commences. 0348. Confirm by practice. Prepare the rifles for firing. 0349. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) 0350. Firing Practice. Explain that a firer who can fire their shots into a small group can become a good shot. The firer will not group well unless they are: a.
Determined that each shot will be a good one.
b.
Applies the marksmanship principles.
c.
Always aims in the same place.
d.
Tells the coach what the aim picture was like at the moment of firing.
0351. Confirm by questions.
3-15
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice Details 0352. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Grouping Range/Positioning
25 m Prone (Unsupported)
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
4 x 25 mm square aiming marks
Instructions
1. Fire a 5 round group at each aiming mark. 2. The firer is to apply their safety catch and stand up after each group. 3. Discuss the groups and record the group sizes.
Practice 2. Grouping Range/Positioning
25 m Prone (Supported,bipod or magazine rested)
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
4 x 25 mm square aiming marks
Instructions
1. Fire a 5 round group at each aiming mark. 2. The firer is to apply their safety catch and stand up after each group. 3. Discuss the groups and record the group sizes.
Firers Goals and Progress 0353. The following group sizes should be used as a guide to progress: a.
Basic Close Combat Role
–
61-85mm
b.
Dismounted Close Combat Role –
46-65mm
After Firing Procedure 0354. Cleaning after Firing. Confirm Stripping, Cleaning and Assembling. 0355. Confirm by practice. Rifles are to be inspected and left lightly oiled. 0356. Care after Cleaning. Remind: Under normal circumstances the bore, chamber and other gas affected parts must be thoroughly cleaned, inspected and reoiled daily for a minimum period of five days after the rifle has been fired. End of Lesson Procedure
3-16
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle LF 3. — DCCT – Grouping at 25 Metres (Other Positions) A. RCO Notes 0357. Aim. To practise the firer in holding, aiming and firing the rifle correctly in the sitting, kneeling, squatting, standing positions. 0358. Conduct. This practice is to be conducted using DCCT. 0359. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 60 minutes to complete all practices. 0360. Stores Complete DCCT equipment 0361. Miscellaneous. The Coach is to explain to the firer that the position of the group is not relevant at this stage and that the MPI will be adjusted during later shoots. However, the firer should note that the MPI is likely to change depending on the position being used.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0362. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0363. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate where necessary the range safety rules applicable to DCCT. Practice Details 0364. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Grouping (Fired Twice) Range/Positioning
25 m Sitting, Kneeling or Squatting, Standing Unsupported, Kneeling and Standing Supported
Ammunition
50 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
4 x 25 mm square aiming marks
Instructions
1. Fire a 5 round group from two of the nominated positions. 2. Discuss the groups and record the group sizes. 3. Repeat the practice until all positions have been fired.
3-17
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Firers Goals and Progress 0365. The following group sizes should be used as a guide to progress: Position
BCC
DCC
Sitting
61-75mm
56-65mm
Kneeling Supported or Squatting
61-75mm
56-65mm
Standing Supported
61-75mm
56-65mm
Kneeling Unsupported or Squatting
106-150mm
86-120mm
Standing Unsupported
106-150mm
86-120mm
End of Lesson Procedure
3-18
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle LF 4. — Grouping at 25 Metres (Other Positions) A. RCO Notes 0366. Aim. To practise the firer in holding, aiming and firing their rifle correctly in the sitting, kneeling, squatting and standing positions. 0367. Conduct. This lesson is to be conducted on a 25 metre range or ETR with screens placed 25 metres from firers. 0368. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 60 minutes to complete all practices. 0369. Stores Normal range stores (25 m range) 1 x witness screen target with 4 x 25 mm square aiming marks per firer 50 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer 0370. Miscellaneous. a. The Coach is to explain to the firer that the position of the group is not relevant at this stage and that the MPI will be adjusted during later shoots. However, the firer should note that the MPI is likely to change depending on the position being used.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0371. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0372. Preparing the Rifle for Firing. Remind the squad of the procedures for cleaning the rifle before firing. 0373. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 0374. Practice details are as follows:
3-19
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 1. Grouping (Fired Twice) Range/Positioning
25 m Sitting, Kneeling or Squatting, Standing Unsupported, Kneeling,Standing Supported
Ammunition
50 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
4 x 25 mm square aiming marks
Instructions
1. Fire a 5 round group from two of the nominated positions. 2. Discuss the groups and record the group sizes. 3. Repeat the practice until all positions have been fired.
Firers Goals and Progress 0375. The following group sizes should be used as a guide to progress: Position
BCC
DCC
Sitting
61-75mm
56-65mm
Kneeling Supported or Squatting
61-75mm
56-65mm
Standing Supported
61-75mm
56-65mm
Kneeling Unsupported or Squatting
106-150mm
86-120mm
Standing Unsupported
106-150mm
86-120mm
End of Lesson Procedure
3-20
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle LF 5. — Zeroing at 25 Metres A. RCO Notes 0376. Aim. To zero the weapon by superimposing the firers’ MPI onto the CZP, 0377. Conduct. This lesson is to be conducted on a 25 metre range or ETR with screens placed 25 metres from firers. 0378. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 15 minutes to complete all practices. 0379. Stores. Normal range stores (25 m range) 1 x witness screen target 2 x 25 m zeroing chart for each firer 12 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer 0380. Miscellaneous a. Conducting officers, NCO coaches and firers (when applicable) are to be fully conversant with the details in Ref B relating to Zeroing. b.
Weapons must be bore sighted before live firing commences.
Preliminaries
B. Conduct of the Lesson
0381. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0382. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 0383. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Grouping Range/Positioning
25m Prone
Ammunition
9 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1 x 25 m zeroing chart for each firer
Instructions
1. Fire 3 x 3 round groups at the same aiming mark. 2. The firer is to apply their safety catch, stand up, then re-adopt their position between each group. 3. Discuss the group and measure the group size. 4. Identify the MPI and adjust for zero if necessary.
3-21
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Check Group Range/Positioning
25 m Prone
Ammunition
3 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1 x 25 m zeroing chart for each firer
Instructions
1. Fire a 3 round check group to confirm zero. 2. If the correct zero is not achieved (see Rifle Lesson 17), repeat Practice 1 using the group plus a further 6 Rounds. 3. Once zero is confirmed record settings using the SAC.
Firers Goals and Progress 0384. The following 3 round group sizes are necessary to be considered zeroed: a.
Basic Close Combat Role
b.
Dismounted Close Combat Role – 38mm
– 50mm
End of Lesson Procedure 0385. Personal Zeroing Positions (PZPs) are to be recorded once correctly zeroed.
3-22
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle Practice 1. — DCCT – Stage 1 Confirmation A. RCO Notes 0386. Aim. To confirm that the firer can hold, aim and fire their rifle correctly in all combat positions 0387. Conduct. The lesson is to be conducted using DCCT. 0388. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to complete all practices. 0389. Stores. Complete DCCT equipment 0390. Miscellaneous. Instructors should be aware that additional time may be required in this lesson for the adjustment of sights to obtain correct eye relief. Preliminaries
B. Conduct of the Lesson
0391. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0392. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate where necessary the range safety rules applicable to DCCT. Practice Details 0393. Repeat practices from Rifle LF 1 and 3 as required. Firers Goals and Progress 0394. The following group sizes are be achieved as confirmation of stages: Position
BCC
DCC
Prone
50mm
38mm
Sitting
65mm
55mm
Kneeling Supported or Squatting
65mm
55mm
Standing Supported
65mm
55mm
Kneeling Unsupported or Squatting
130mm
110mm
Standing Unsupported
130mm
110mm
End of Lesson Procedure
3-23
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle LF 6. — Close Quarter Marksmanship CQM Identifying Points Of Aim (POA) A. RCO Notes 0395. Aim. To identify the firers Point of Impact and POA at 3m to 15m. 0396. Conduct. Planning Officers are to check Range Orders and/or confirm with the RAU that CQM practices are permitted. CQM practices may be conducted on LFTTA providing the RCO is suitably qualified. CQM is not to be conducted on 1908 Design Barrack Ranges. 0397. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to complete all practices. 0398. Stores Normal range stores 2 x Figure Targets with 2 x 25mm square aiming marks per target 24 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer Preliminaries
B. Conduct of the Lesson
0399. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 03100. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 03101. Practice details are as follows. Practice 1. Identify and Apply the POA Range/Positioning
3, 5, 10 and 15m Standing CQB Position
Ammunition
24 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
2x Figure Target with 2 x 25mm aiming marks
Instructions
1. Fire 3 well aimed shots at the nominated aiming mark 2. Discuss the fall of shot and subsequent aim off. 3. Repeat the practice at the different ranges to confirm the POA. 4. Record the POA.
Firers Goals and Progress 03102. Record all Points of Aim. End of Lesson Procedure 3-24
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle LF 7. — Close Quarter Marksmanship CQM Accelerated Fire Training A. RCO Notes 03103. Aim. To practice and confirm the ability of a firer to apply accelerated firing techniques in order to achieve multiple, rapid and accurate hits on target. 03104. Conduct. Planning Officers are to check Range Orders and/or confirm with the RAU that CQM practices are permitted. CQM practices may be conducted on LFTTA providing the RCO is suitably qualified. CQM is not to be conducted on 1908 Design Barrack Ranges. 03105. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. 03106. Stores Normal range stores 2 x Fig 11/21 CQM Target per firer (see Fig 3-1) 80 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 03107. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 03108. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) 03109. Firing Practice. Explain that learning to quickly adopt the correct position and hold of a weapon will allow a firer to engage a target with increasing speed and accuracy at close quarters.
3-25
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice Details 03110. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Accelerated Fire. Range/Positioning
15m Standing
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 11/21. 2. 5 x 3 second exposure. 1. Fire 2 shots per exposure with 1 second shot cadence at the left target. 2. Dress forward and discuss the results. 3. Repeat the practice on the right target. 4. Dress forward and discuss the results, record the scores on the right target only.
Practice 2. Accelerated Fire Range/Positioning
10m Standing
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21. 2. 5 x 3 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
Practice 3. Accelerated Fire Range/Positioning
5m Standing
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21. 2. 5 x 2 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1 but with a half second shot cadence.
Practice 4. Accelerated Fire Range/Positioning
3m Standing
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21. 2. 5 x 2 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1 but with a quarter second shot cadence.
3-26
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Scoring 03111. Two points per hit within the inner scoring area. One point within the outer scoring area. No points anywhere else on the target. Firers Goals and Progress HPS – 80 Pass – 56 End of Lesson Procedure
3-27
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Fig 3-1a Figure 21 CQM Target
Fig 3-1b Figure 11 CQM Target
Fig 3-1c Figure 22 CQM Target
3-28
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle LF 8. — Close Quarter Marksmanship CQM Failure to Stop A. RCO Notes 03112. Aim. To confirm the firer’s ability to rapidly engage a target using two POA. 03113. Conduct. Planning Officers are to check Range Orders and/or confirm with the RAU that CQM practices are permitted. CQM practices may be conducted on LFTTA providing the RCO is suitably qualified. CQM is not to be conducted on 1908 Design Barrack Ranges. 03114. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. 03115. Stores Normal range stores 2 x Fig 11/21 CQM Target per firer (see Fig 3-1) 64 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer
B. Conduct of the Lesson
Preliminaries
03116. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 03117. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) 03118. Firing Practice. Explain that the firer may be required to engage the body and subsequently the head with well aimed rapid shots in order to defeat the enemy at close quarters. Practice Details 03119. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Failure to Stop Range/Positioning
15m Standing
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 11/21. 2. 4 x 4 second exposure. 1. Firer in the CQB stance. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire two shots at the body and two to the head within each engagement. 4. Discuss the fall of shot, record scores.
3-29
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Failure to Stop Range/Positioning
10m Standing
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21. 2. 4 x 4 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
Practice 3. Failure to Stop Range/Positioning
5m Standing
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21. 2. 4 x 3 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
Practice 4. Failure to Stop Range/Positioning
3m Standing
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21. 2. 4 x 3 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
Scoring 03120. Two points per hit within the inner scoring area. One point within the outer scoring area. No points anywhere else on the target. Firers Goals and Progress HPS – 128 Pass – 90 End of Lesson Procedure
3-30
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle LF 9. — Close Quarter Marksmanship CQM Multiple Targets – 15-3 Metres A. RCO Notes 03121. Aim. To practice the firer in engaging multiple targets by rapid shooting at close range whilst firing from the right and left sides of the body.. 03122. Conduct. Planning Officers are to check Range Orders and/or confirm with the RAU that CQM practices are permitted. CQM practices may be conducted on LFTTA providing the RCO is suitably qualified. CQM is not to be conducted on 1908 Design Barrack Ranges. 03123. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. 03124. Stores Normal range stores 2 x Fig 11/21 CQM Target (see Fig 3-1) 64 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer Preliminaries
B. Conduct of the Lesson
03125. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 03126. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) a. Firers must have been formally taught, practiced and deemed competent in the technique of engaging from the left side of the body. The RCO is to confirm this before firing from the left side of the body is permitted. b. Firing from the left side must only be conducted using the CQB red dot sight. Under no circumstances should left sided firing be attempted using any other sight. c. Firers are to be reminded to take great care when firing from the left side of the body and to keep the head away from the movement of the cocking handle in order to prevent serious injury. d. When firing from the left hand side of the body the firers must keep their hands in the conventional position and the weapon should be tilted to the right to reduce the risk of the firer being struck by ejected cases.
3-31
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
03127. Firing Practice. Explain that when confronted with multiple targets at close range, a firer must quickly decide the priority of engagement before engaging rapidly and accurately. Practice Details 03128. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Pairs Range/Positioning
15m Standing
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2x Fig 11/21. 2. 4 x 4 second exposure. 1. On command or appearance of the targets, fire two Rounds at each target. 2. After the second engagement, dress forward and discuss the results. 3. Record the scores 4. Repeat the practice firing from the left side of the body. 5. Record the scores.
Practice 2. Pairs Range/Positioning
10m Standing
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. 2x Fig 11/21. 2. 4 x 4 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
Practice 3. Pairs Range/Positioning
5m Standing
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. 2x Fig 11/21. 2. 4 x 3 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
3-32
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 4. Pairs Range/Positioning
3m Standing
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. 2x Fig 11/21. 2. 4 x 3 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
Scoring 03129. Two points per hit within the inner scoring area. One point within the outer scoring area. No points anywhere else on the target. Firers Goals and Progress HPS – 128 Pass
–
90
End of Lesson Procedure
3-33
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle LF 10. — DCCT - Establishing the Point of Aim and Apply Fire (All Positions) A. RCO Notes 03130. Aim. To confirm that the firer can hold, aim and fire their rifle in the prone, sitting, kneeling or squatting and standing position from 100m to 300m and apply fire to the centre of the target. 03131. Conduct. This practice is to be conducted using DCCT. 03132. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 90 minutes to complete all practices. 03133. Stores. Complete DCCT equipment
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 03134. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 03135. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate where necessary the range safety rules applicable to DCCT. Practice Details 03136. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Deliberate Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 12 on a screen
Instructions
1. Use 5 Rounds to identify the MPI. 2. Apply fire with the next 5 Rounds 3. Record the group size and note the appropriate POA.
3-34
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Deliberate Range/Positioning
100 m Sitting Unsupported
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 1.
Instructions
1. Use 5 Rounds to identify the MPI. 2. Apply fire with the next 5 Rounds 3. Record the group size and note the POA.
Practice 3. Deliberate Range/Positioning
100 m Kneeling Unsupported/ Squatting
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 1.
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
Practice 4. Deliberate Range/Positioning
100 m Standing Unsupported
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 1
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
Practice 5. Deliberate Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a screen
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
Practice 6. Deliberate Range/Positioning
200 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 5.
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
3-35
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 7. Deliberate Range/Positioning
200 m Kneeling Supported/ Squatting
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 5.
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
Practice 8. Deliberate Range/Positioning
200 m Standing Supported
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 5.
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
Practice 9. Deliberate Range/Positioning
200 m Sitting
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 5.
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
Practice 10. Deliberate Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 5
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
Scoring 03137. The firer/coach will identify the MPI and establish the new POA. Fire a further 5 Rounds. Firers Goals and Progress 03138. Achieving group sizes in relation to the ESA and applying fire successfully. End of Lesson Procedure
3-36
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle LF 11. — Establish the Point of Aim and Apply Fire at 100m (All Positions) A. RCO Notes 03139. Aim. To confirm that the firer can hold, aim and fire their rifle in the prone, sitting, kneeling or squatting and standing position at 100m and apply fire to the centre of the target. 03140. Conduct. This lesson may be conducted on either a CGR (with or without SARTS), an ETR if converted to SARTS, or a GR. 03141. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. 03142. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x 1.220 m screen with Figure 11 per firer 1 x 1.220 m screen with Figure 12 per firer or 1 x Figure 12d per firer (on SARTS converted range) 45 x Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 03143. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 03144. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 03145. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Grouping Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d
Instructions
1. Check Zero
3-37
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Deliberate Range/Positioning
100m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 12 on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d
Instructions
1. Use 5 Rounds to identify the MPI. 2. Apply fire with the next 5 Rounds 3. Record the group size and note the appropriate POA on the shooting record card.
Practice 3. Deliberate Range/Positioning
100 m Sitting Unsupported
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 2.
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
Practice 4. Deliberate Range/Positioning
100 m Kneeling Unsupported/ Squatting
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 2.
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
Practice 5. Deliberate Range/Positioning
100 m Standing Unsupported
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 2.
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
Scoring 03146. After the 5 shots the target is lowered and all shot holes are indicated with spotting discs. 03147. The firer/coach will identify the MPI and establish the new POA. Fire a further 5 Rounds. After the 5th shot the target is lowered and all shots are indicated with spotting discs. Firers Goals and Progress 03148. Achieving group sizes in relation to the ESA and applying fire successfully. End of Lesson Procedure 3-38
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle LF 12. — Establishing the Point of Aim and Apply Fire at 200-300m (All Positions) A. RCO Notes 03149. Aim. To confirm that the firer can hold, aim and fire their rifle in the prone, sitting, kneeling or squatting and standing position at 200 to 300m and apply fire to the centre of the target. 03150. Conduct. This lesson may be conducted on either a CGR (with or without SARTS), an ETR if converted to SARTS, or a GR. 03151. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 50 minutes to complete all practices. 03152. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x 1.220 m screen with Figure 11 per firer or 1 x Figure 11 per firer (on SARTS converted range) 50/60 x Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 03153. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 03154. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 03155. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Deliberate Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 11
Instructions
1. Use 5 Rounds to identify the MPI. 2. Apply fire with the next 5 Rounds 3. Record the group size and note the appropriate POA on the shooting record card.
3-39
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Deliberate Range/Positioning 200 m Kneeling Supported/ Squatting Ammunition 10 Rounds Target/ Exposure As per Practice 1. Instructions As per Practice 1. Practice 3. Deliberate Range/Positioning 200 m Standing Supported Ammunition 10 Rounds Target/ Exposure As per Practice 1. Instructions As per Practice 1. Practice 4. Deliberate Range/Positioning 200 m Sitting Ammunition 10 Rounds Target/ Exposure As per Practice 1. Instructions As per Practice 1. Practice 5. Deliberate Range/Positioning 200 m Fire Trench Ammunition 10 Rounds Target/ Exposure As per Practice 1. Instructions As per Practice 1. Practice 6. Deliberate (DCC Only) Range/Positioning 300 m Prone Ammunition 10 Rounds Target/ Exposure As per Practice 1. Instructions As per Practice 1.
Scoring 03156. After the 5 shots the target is lowered and all shot holes are indicated with spotting discs. 03157. The firer/coach will identify the MPI and establish the new POA. Fire a further 5 Rounds. After the 5th shot the target is lowered and all shots are indicated with spotting discs. Firers Goals and Progress 03158. Achieving group sizes in relation to the ESA and applying fire successfully. End of Lesson Procedure 3-40
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle LF 13. — Dcct – Advanced Application of Fire up to 300 Metres (All Positions) A. RCO Notes 03159. Aim. To practise the firer in engaging targets by snap and rapid shooting from the prone, sitting, standing, kneeling and standing positions. 03160. Conduct. This practice is to be conducted using DCCT. 03161. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. 03162. Stores. Complete DCCT equipment
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 03163. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 03164. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules applicable to DCCT. Practice Details 03165. As time permits additional selected practices to provide familiarisation can be conducted in CBRN conditions. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100 m Prone 8 Rounds 1. Figure 12. 2. 3 x Sighters 3. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firers in the prone position. 2. Fire 3 x sighters one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 3. Identify the corrected POA. 4. Fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 4. Order “Watch and Shoot”
3-41
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100 m Sitting 8 Rounds 1. Figure 12. 2. 3 x Sighters 3. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firers in the sitting position. 2. Fire 3 x sighters one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 3. Fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 4. Order “Watch and Shoot”
Practice 3. Snap/Rapid Range/Positioning 100 m Standing and Kneeling Unsupported Squatted/prone Ammunition 16 Rounds 1. Figure 12. 2. 3 x Sighters Target/ Exposure 3. 2 x 12 second exposures with an interval to allow all firers to adopt the standing alert position. 1. Fire 3 x sighters from both positions one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 2. Firer in the standing alert position. 3. On the appearance of the target, the firer is to fire one round Instructions standing then adopt either the kneeling unsupported/squatting or prone position and fire a further 4 Rounds at the exposure. 4. Firers must adopt the standing alert position between exposures. 5. Targets up and hold. 6. Order “Watch and Shoot”. Practice 4. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3-42
200 m Prone 8 Rounds 1. Figure 11. 2. 3 x Sighters 3. 5 x 5 second exposure with irregular intervals. 1. Firers in the prone position. 2. Fire 3 x sighters one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 3. Fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 4. Order “Watch and Shoot”.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 5. Rapid Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 6. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 7. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
200 m Fire Trench 8 Rounds 1. Figure 11. 2. 3 x Sighters 3. 1 x 10 second exposure 1. Firers in the fire trench. 2. Fire 3 x sighters one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 3. Fire 5 Rounds at the exposure, targets up and hold. 4. Order “Watch and Shoot”.
200 m Kneeling Supported 8 Rounds 1. Figure 11. 2. 3 x Sighters 3. 1 x 8 second exposure followed by 4 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals 1. Firers in the kneeling supported position. 2. Fire 3 x sighters one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 3. Firer in the standing alert position, 5 m behind the firing point, ready. 4. On appearance of the target run onto the firing point, adopt the kneeling supported position and fire one round at each exposure. 5. Order “Watch out”.
200 m Standing Supported 8 Rounds 1. Figure 11. 2. 3 x Sighters 3. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals . 1. Firers in the standing supported position. 2. Fire 3 x sighters one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 3. Fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 4. Order “Watch and Shoot”.
3-43
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 8. Snap/Rapid DCC ONLY Range/Positioning 300 m Prone Ammunition 13 Rounds 1. Figure 11. 2. 3 x Sighters. Target/ Exposure 3. 1 x 8 second exposure followed by 4 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals, followed by 1 x 10 second exposure. 1. Firers in the prone position. 2. Fire 3 x sighters one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 3. Firer in the standing alert position, 5 m behind the firing point, ready. 4. On appearance of the target move onto the firing point, adopt the Instructions prone position and fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 5. Order “Watch out”. 6. After the fifth exposure, target is up and hold, order “Stop, five Rounds rapid, Watch and Shoot”.
Scoring 03166. One point per hit. Sighters are not scored. Firers Goals and Progress 03167. The OMS for each practice or group of practices shown in the table below is a guide to progress. OMS Requirement
Prac
Range
Total Rounds
BCC
DCC
Mksmn
1&2
100 m
10
7
8
9
10
3
100 m
10
7
8
9
10
4&5
200 m
10
6
7
8
10
6&7
200 m
10
6
7
8
10
8
300 m
10
-
6
8
10
End of Lesson Procedure
3-44
HPS
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle LF 14. — Advanced Application of Fire at 100 Metres(All Positions) A. RCO Notes 03168. Aim. To practise the firer in engaging targets by deliberate, snap and rapid shooting from the prone, sitting, kneeling/squatting positions and standing positions. 03169. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on an ETR or CGR, ideally fitted with SARTS. Where these ranges are not available it may be fired on a GR. 03170. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the practice details. 03171. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to complete all practices. 03172. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x Figure 12 at 100 metres per firer SARTS converted range 1 x Figure 12 at 100 metres per firer 32 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 03173. Safety. Normal safety precautions 03174. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 03175. The practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100 m Prone 8 Rounds 1. Figure 12. 2. 3 x Sighters. 3. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firers in the prone position. 2. Fire 3 x sighters one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 3. Fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 4. Order “Watch and Shoot”
3-45
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100 m Sitting 8 Rounds 1. Figure 12. 2. 3 x Sighters 3. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firers in the sitting position. 2. Fire 3 x sighters one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 3. Fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 4. Order “Watch and Shoot”
Practice 3. Snap/Rapid Range/Positioning 100 m Standing and Kneeling Unsupported/ Squatting/Prone Ammunition 16 Rounds 1. Figure 12. 2. 3 x Sighters. Target/ Exposure 3. 2 x 12 second exposures with an interval to allow all firers to adopt the standing alert position. 1. Fire 3 x sighters from both positions one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 2. Firer in the standing alert position. 3. On the appearance of the target, the firer is to fire one round Instructions standing then adopt either the kneeling unsupported/squatting or prone position and fire a further 4 Rounds at the exposure. 4. Firers must adopt the standing alert position between exposures. 5. Targets up and hold. 6. Order “Watch and Shoot”.
Scoring 03176. One point per hit. Sighters are not scored. Firers Goals and Progress 03177. The OMS for each practice or group of practices shown in the table below is a guide to progress. OMS Requirement
Prac
Range
Total Rounds
BCC
DCC
Mksmn
1&2
100 m
10
7
8
9
10
3
100 m
10
7
8
9
10
End of Lesson Procedure
3-46
HPS
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle LF14 — Time Chart 03178. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed. Practice
Range/Target
1
100 m Figure 12
UP 05 17 26 37 47
Timings DOWN 10 22 31 42 52
1. Fall when hit.
Remarks
2
100 m Figure 12
UP 05 17 26 37 47
DOWN 10 22 31 42 52
1. Fall when hit.
3
100 m Figure 12
UP 05
DOWN 18
1. Reset watch and repeat once. 2. Up and hold
3-47
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle LF 15. — Advanced Application of Fire up to 300 Metres (All Positions) A. RCO NOTES 03179. Aim. To practise the firer in engaging targets by snap and rapid fire at longer ranges out to 300m. 03180. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on an ETR or CGR, ideally converted for SARTS. Where these ranges are not available it may be fired on a GR. 03181. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the Practice Details. 03182. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. If SARTS is being used it may be possible to reduce the timings of the shoot. 03183. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x Figure 11 at 200–300 metres per firer SARTS converted range 1 x Figure 11 at 200-300 metres per firer 32/45 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 03184. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 03185. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 03186. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3-48
200 m Prone 8 Rounds 1. Figure 11. 2. 3 x Sighters 3. 5 x 5 second exposure with irregular intervals 1. Firers in the prone position. 2. Fire 3 x sighters one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 3. Fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 4. Order “Watch and Shoot”.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Rapid Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
200 m Fire Trench 8 Rounds 1. Figure 11. 2. 3 x Sighters 3. 1 x 10 second exposure 1. Firers in the fire trench. 2. Fire 3 x sighters one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 3. Fire 5 Rounds at the exposure, targets up and hold. 4. Order “Watch and Shoot”.
200 m Kneeling Supported 8 Rounds 1. Figure 11. 2. 3 x Sighters 3. 1 x 8 second exposure followed by 4 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firers in the kneeling supported position. 2. Fire 3 x sighters one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 3. Firer in the standing alert position, 5 m behind the firing point, ready. 4. On appearance of the target run onto the firing point, adopt the kneeling supported position and fire one round at each exposure. 5. Order “Watch out”.
200 m Standing Supported 8 Rounds 1. Figure 11. 2. 3 x Sighters 3. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals 1. Firers in the standing supported position. 2. Fire 3 x sighters one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 3. Fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 4. Order “Watch and Shoot”.
3-49
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 5. Snap/Rapid DCC ONLY Range/Positioning 300 m Prone Ammunition 13 Rounds 1. Figure 11. 2. 3 x Sighters Target/ Exposure 3. 1 x 8 second exposure followed by 4 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals, followed by 1 x 10 second exposure. 1. Firers in the prone position. 2. Fire 3 x sighters one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 3. Firer in the standing alert position, 5 m behind the firing point, ready. 4. On appearance of the target move onto the firing point, adopt the Instructions prone position and fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 5. Order “Watch out”. 6. After the fifth exposure, target is up and hold, order “Stop, five Rounds rapid, Watch and Shoot”.
Scoring. 03187. One point per hit. Sighters are not scored. Firers Goals and Progress 03188. The OMS for each practice or group of practices shown in the table below is a guide to progress. OMS Requirement
Prac
Range
Total Rounds
BCC
DCC
Mksmn
1&2
200 m
10
6
7
8
10
3&4
200 m
10
6
7
8
10
5
300 m
10
-
6
8
10
End of Lesson Procedure
3-50
HPS
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle LF 15 — Time Chart 03189. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed. Practice
Range/Target
1
200 m Figure 11
UP 05 19 33 45 58
Timings DOWN 11 25 39 51 1:04
1. Fall when hit.
Remarks
2
200 m Figure 11
UP 05
DOWN 16
1. Up and Hold
3
200 m Figure 11
UP 05 21 35 47 1:00
DOWN 14 26 40 52 1:05
1. Fall when hit.
4
200 m Figure 11
UP 05 17 26 37 47
DOWN 10 22 31 42 52
1. Fall when hit.
5
300 m Figure 11
UP 05 21 35 47 1:00 1:15
DOWN 14 26 40 52 1:05 1:26
1. Fall when hit. 2. Final exposure up and hold.
3-51
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle Practice 2. — DCCT – Stage 2 Confirmation A. RCO Notes 03190. Aim. To practise the firer in engaging targets by snap and rapid shooting from the prone, sitting, standing, kneeling/squatting positions. 03191. Conduct. This practice is to be conducted using DCCT. 03192. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. 03193. Stores. Complete DCCT equipment
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 03194. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 03195. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules applicable to DCCT. Practice Details 03196. As time permits additional selected practices to provide familiarisation can be conducted in CBRN conditions. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3-52
100 m Prone and Sitting 10 Rounds 1. Figure 12. 2. 10 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firers in the prone position. 2. Fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 3. Order “Watch and Shoot” 4. Apply “Safety” move into the sitting position. 5. Fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 6. Order “Watch and Shoot”.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Snap/Rapid Range/Positioning 100 m Standing and Kneeling Unsupported/ Squatting/Prone Ammunition 10 Rounds 1. Figure 12. Target/ Exposure 2. 2 x 12 second exposures with an interval to allow all firers to adopt the standing alert position. 1. Firer in the standing alert position. 2. On the appearance of the target, the firer is to fire one round standing then adopt either the kneeling unsupported/squatting or prone Instructions position and fire a further 4 Rounds at the exposure. 3. Firers must adopt the standing alert position between exposures. 4. Targets up and hold. 5. Order “Watch and Shoot”. Practice 3. Snap/Rapid Range/Positioning 200 m Prone and Fire Trench Ammunition 10 Rounds 1. Figure 11. Target/ Exposure 2. 5 x 5 second exposure with irregular intervals, followed by 1 x 10 second exposure 1. Firer in the prone position. 2. Fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 3. Order “Watch and Shoot”. Instructions 4. Apply “Safety” move into the Fire Trench. 5. Fire 5 Rounds at the exposure, targets up and hold. 6. Order “Five Rounds rapid, Watch and Shoot”. Practice 4. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
200 m Kneeling Supported and Standing Supported 10 Rounds 1. Figure 11. 2. 1 x 8 second exposure followed by 4 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals, followed by 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals . 1. Firer in the standing alert position, 5 m behind the firing point, ready. 2. On appearance of the target move onto the firing point, adopt the kneeling supported position and fire one round at each exposure. 3. Order “Watch out”. 4. After the fifth exposure order “adopt the Standing Supported position”. 5. There will be five more exposures, fire one round at each, targets fall when hit. 6. Order “Watch and Shoot”.
3-53
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 5. Snap/Rapid DCC ONLY Range/Positioning 300 m Prone Ammunition 10 Rounds 1. Figure 11. Target/ Exposure 2. 1 x 8 second exposure followed by 4 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals, followed by 1 x 10 second exposure. 1. Firer in the standing alert position, 5 m behind the firing point, ready. 2. On appearance of the target move onto the firing point, adopt the prone position and fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when Instructions hit. 3. Order “Watch out”. 4. After the fifth exposure, target is up and hold, order “Stop, five Rounds rapid, Watch and Shoot”.
Scoring. 03197. One point per hit. Sighters are not scored. Firers Goals and Progress 03198. The OMS for each practice or group of practices shown in the table below are to be achieved as confirmation of stages OMS Requirement
Prac
Range
Total Rounds
BCC
DCC
Mksmn
1
100 m
10
7
8
9
10
2
100 m
10
7
8
9
10
3
200 m
10
6
7
8
10
4
200 m
10
6
7
8
10
5
300 m
10
-
6
8
10
End of Lesson Procedure
3-54
HPS
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle LF 16. — Advanced Application of Fire at 100 Metres (All Positions) A. RCO Notes 03199. Aim. To practise the firer in engaging targets by snap and rapid shooting from the prone, sitting, standing, kneeling and standing positions. 03200. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on an ETR or CGR, ideally fitted with SARTS. Where these ranges are not available it may be fired on a GR. 03201. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the Practice Details. 03202. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 20 minutes to complete all practices. 03203. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x Figure 12 at 100 metres per firer SARTS converted range 1 x Figure 12d at 100 metres per firer 20 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 03204. Safety. Normal safety precautions 03205. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 03206. The practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100 m Prone and Sitting 10 Rounds 1. Figure 12. 2. 10 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firers in the prone position. 2. Fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 3. Order “Watch and Shoot” 4. Apply “Safety” move into the sitting position. 5. Fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 6. Order “Watch and Shoot”.
3-55
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Snap/ Rapid Range/Positioning 100 m Standing and Kneeling Unsupported/ Squatting/Prone Ammunition 10 Rounds 1. Figure 12. Target/ Exposure 2. 2 x 12 second exposures with an interval to allow all firers to adopt the standing alert position. 1. Firer in the standing alert position. 2. On the appearance of the target, the firer is to fire one round standing then adopt either the kneeling unsupported/squatting or prone Instructions position and fire a further 4 Rounds at the exposure. 3. Firers must adopt the standing alert position between exposures. 4. Targets up and hold. 5. Order “Watch and Shoot”.
Scoring 03207. One point per hit. Firers Goals and Progress 03208. The OMS for each practice or group of practices shown in the table below is a guide to progress. OMS Requirement
Prac
Range
Total Rounds
BCC
DCC
Mksmn
1
100 m
10
-
8
9
10
2
100 m
10
-
8
9
10
HPS
End of Lesson Procedure
Rifle LF16 — Time Chart 03209. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed. Practice
Range/Target
1
100 m Figure 12
UP 05 17 26 37 47
DOWN 10 22 31 42 52
1. Fall when hit. 2. Reset watch and repeat once.
2
100 m Figure 12
UP 05
DOWN 18
1. Reset watch and repeat once. 2. Up and hold.
3-56
Timings
Remarks
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle LF 17. — Advanced Application of Fire at 200 Metres (All Positions) A. RCO Notes 03210. Aim. To practise the firer in engaging targets by snap and rapid fire from the prone, fire trench kneeling and standing supported positions at longer ranges out to 200. 03211. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on an ETR or CGR, ideally converted for SARTS. Where these ranges are not available it may be fired on a GR. 03212. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the Practice Details. 03213. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 20 minutes to complete all practices. If SARTS is being used it may be possible to reduce the timings of the shoot. 03214. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x Figure 11 at 200 metres per firer 20 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 03215. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 03216. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 03217. Practice details are as follows:
3-57
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 1. Snap/Rapid Range/Positioning 200 m Prone and Fire Trench Ammunition 10 Rounds 1. Figure 11. Target/ Exposure 2. 5 x 5 second exposure with irregular intervals, followed by 1 x 10 second exposure 1. Firer in the prone position. 2. Fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 3. Order “Watch and Shoot”. Instructions 4. Apply “Safety” move into the Fire Trench. 5. Fire 5 Rounds at the exposure, targets up and hold. 6. Order “Five Rounds rapid, Watch and Shoot”. Practice 2. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
200 m Kneeling Supported and Standing Supported 10 Rounds 1. Figure 11. 2. 1 x 8 second exposure followed by 4 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals, followed by 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals . 1. Firer in the standing alert position, 5 m behind the firing point, ready. 2. On appearance of the target move onto the firing point, adopt the kneeling supported position and fire one round at each exposure. 3. Order “Watch out”. 4. After the fifth exposure order “adopt the Standing Supported position”. 5. There will be five more exposures, fire one round at each, targets fall when hit. 6. Order “Watch and Shoot”.
Scoring 03218. One point per hit. Firers Goals and Progress 03219. The OMS for each practice or group of practices shown in the table below is a guide to progress. OMS Requirement
Prac
Range
Total Rounds
BCC
DCC
Mksmn
1
200 m
10
-
7
8
10
2
200 m
10
-
7
8
10
End of Lesson Procedure
3-58
HPS
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle LF 17 — Time Chart 03220. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed. Practice
Range/Target
1
200 m Figure 11
UP 05 19 33 45 58 UP 16
Timings DOWN 11 25 39 51 1:04 DOWN 27
1. Fall when hit. 2. Reset watch and move into fire trench 3. Final exposure up and hold
Remarks
2
200 m Figure 11
UP 05 21 35 47 1:00
DOWN 14 26 40 52 1:05
1. Fall when hit. 2. Reset watch, adopt standing supported. 3. Fall when hit.
UP 05 17 26 37 47
DOWN 10 22 31 42 52
3-59
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle LF 18. — Advanced Application of Fire at 300 Metres (All Positions) A. RCO Notes 03221. Aim. To practise the firer in engaging targets by snap and rapid fire from the prone at longer ranges out to 300m. 03222. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on an ETR or CGR, ideally converted for SARTS. Where these ranges are not available it may be fired on a GR. 03223. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the Practice Details. 03224. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 10 minutes to complete all practices. If SARTS is being used it may be possible to reduce the timings of the shoot. 03225. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x Figure 11 at 300 metres per firer 10 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 03226. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 03227. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 03228. Practice details are as follows:
3-60
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 1. Snap/Rapid Range/Positioning 300 m Prone Ammunition 10 Rounds 1. Figure 11. Target/ Exposure 2. 1 x 8 second exposure followed by 4 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals, followed by 1 x 10 second exposure. 1. Firer in the standing alert position, 5 m behind the firing point, ready. 2. On appearance of the target move onto the firing point, adopt the prone position and fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when Instructions hit. 3. Order “Watch out”. 4. After the fifth exposure, target is up and hold, order “Stop, five Rounds rapid, Watch and Shoot”.
Scoring 03229. One point per hit. Firers Goals and Progress 03230. The OMS for each practice or group of practices shown in the table below is a guide to progress. OMS Requirement
Prac
Range
Total Rounds
BCC
DCC
Mksmn
1
300 m
10
-
7
8
HPS 10
End of Lesson Procedure
Rifle LF 18 — Time Chart 03231. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed. Practice
Range/Target
1
300 m Figure 11
Timings UP 05 21 35 47 1:00 1:15
DOWN 14 26 40 52 1:05 1:26
Remarks 1. Fall when hit. 2. Final exposure up and hold.
3-61
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle Practice 3. — DCCT – Stage 2 Confirmation A. RCO Notes 03232. Aim. To practise the firer in engaging targets by snap and rapid shooting from the prone, sitting, standing unsupported, kneeling supported and kneeling unsupported/squatting positions. 03233. Conduct. This practice is to be conducted using DCCT. 03234. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the Practice Details. 03235. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. 03236. Stores. Complete DCCT equipment
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 03237. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 03238. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules applicable to DCCT. Practice Details 03239. The practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3-62
100 m Prone and Sitting 10 Rounds 1. Figure 12. 2. 10 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firers in the prone position. 2. Fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 3. Order “Watch and Shoot” 4. Apply “Safety” move into the sitting position. 5. Fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 6. Order “Watch and Shoot”
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Snap/Rapid Range/Positioning 100 m Standing and Kneeling Unsupported/ Squatting/Prone Ammunition 10 Rounds 1. Figure 12. Target/ Exposure 2. 2 x 12 second exposures with an interval to allow all firers to adopt the standing alert position. 1. Firer in the standing alert position. 2. On the appearance of the target, the firer is to fire one round standing then adopt either the kneeling unsupported/squatting or prone Instructions position and fire a further 4 Rounds at the exposure. 3. Firers must adopt the standing alert position between exposures. 4. Targets up and hold. 5. Order “Watch and Shoot”. Practice 3. Snap/Rapid Range/Positioning 200 m Prone and Fire Trench Ammunition 10 Rounds 1. Figure 11. Target/ Exposure 2. 5 x 5 second exposure with irregular intervals, followed by 1 x 10 second exposure 1. Firer in the prone position. 2. Fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 3. Order “Watch and Shoot”. Instructions 4. Apply “Safety” move into the Fire Trench. 5. Fire 5 Rounds at the exposure, targets up and hold. 6. Order “Five Rounds rapid, Watch and Shoot”. Practice 4. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
200 m Kneeling Supported and Standing Supported 10 Rounds 1. Figure 11. 2. 1 x 8 second exposure followed by 4 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals, followed by 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals . 1. Firer in the standing alert position, 5 m behind the firing point, ready. 2. On appearance of the target move onto the firing point, adopt the kneeling supported position and fire one round at each exposure. 3. Order “Watch out”. 4. After the fifth exposure order “adopt the Standing Supported position”. 5. There will be five more exposures, fire one round at each, targets fall when hit. 6. Order “Watch and Shoot”.
3-63
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 5. Snap/Rapid Range/Positioning 300 m Prone Ammunition 10 Rounds 1. Figure 11. Target/ Exposure 2. 1 x 8 second exposure followed by 4 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals, followed by 1 x 10 second exposure. 1. Firer in the standing alert position, 5 m behind the firing point, ready. 2. On appearance of the target move onto the firing point, adopt the prone position and fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when Instructions hit. 3. Order “Watch out”. 4. After the fifth exposure, target is up and hold, order “Stop, five Rounds rapid, Watch and Shoot”.
Scoring 03240. One point per hit. Firers Goals and Progress 03241. The OMS for each practice or group of practices shown in the table below are to be achieved as confirmation of stages OMS Requirement
Prac
Range
Total Rounds
BCC
DCC
Mksmn
1
100 m
10
-
8
9
10
2
100 m
10
-
8
9
10
3
200 m
10
-
7
8
10
4
200 m
10
-
7
8
10
5
300 m
10
-
6
8
10
End of Lesson Procedure
3-64
HPS
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle ACMT Preparation A. RCO Notes 03242. Aim. To prepare the firer for the ACMT; by zeroing the weapon and identifying the MPI of groups fired from all of the ranges and firing positions used during the ACMT in order to establish the correct Points of Aim (POA). 03243. Firing Requirement. This shoot must be fired annually by all personnel employed in the DCC and BCC Role whose personal weapon is the Rifle/Carbine, immediately prior to the ACMT It is not fired during Phase 1 Other Arms Recruit Training or during Infantry Phase 2 Training because the LF lessons are fired instead. 03244. Ranges. This ACMT Preparation can be conducted on the same range as the ACMT, ETR, GR, CGR. 03245. Timing. Each practices 1 to 7.
detail will take approximately 120 minutes to complete
03246. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x Figure 11 on a screen with a 75 mm x 100 mm white patch (on the centre of the figure) per firer. 1 x Figure 11/21 Stick In at 50m per firer 1 x Figure 12 at 100 metres per firer 1 x Figure 12 on a screen (GR) at 100 metres per firer 1 x Figure 11 at 200 and 300 metres per firer 1 x Figure 11 on a screen (GR) at 200 and 300 metres per firer or SARTS converted range 1 x Figure 12 at 100 metres per firer 1 x Figure 11 at 200 and 300 metres per firer 91 DCC 85 BCC x Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer 03247. Miscellaneous. a. The dress and equipment for the ACMT Preparation is to be the same as the ACMT. b. Weapons must be collimated or bore sighted before live firing commences. c. Firers must achieve a 300 mm group with 20 Rounds from the prone position at 100 metres with Iron Sight or 225 mm group with Optic Sight during Practice 1 before adjusting their sights.
3-65
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
d. Coaching is permitted during the ACMT Preparation. However, as the LF is for trained soldiers they must be encouraged to make their own decisions when zeroing, establishing MPI and recording their POA for all ranges and firing positions used in the ACMT. e. Conducting officers, NCO coaches and soldiers are to be fully conversant with the details in Ref B relating to zeroing and application of fire. f. To maximise First Time Pass Rates (FTPR), after this ACMT Preparation and before the ACMT is fired on a range, the ACMT should be conducted on the DCCT to familiarise firers with the practices
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 03248. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 03249. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) 03250. Preparation. Practice 1. Zeroing Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100 m Prone 20 Rounds Figure 11 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d 1. Fire 4 x 5 round groups at the same aiming mark. 2. The firer is to apply his safety catch, stand up, then re-adopt his position between groups. 3. Discuss the group and measure the group size. 4. Identify the MPI and adjust for zero if necessary.
Practice 2. Check Group Range/Positioning 100 m Prone Ammunition 5 Rounds Figure 11 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Target/ Exposure Figure 12d 1. Fire a 5 round check group to confirm zero. 2. If the correct zero is not achieved repeat Practice 1 using the group Instructions plus a further 15 Rounds. 3. Once zero is con- firmed record settings using the SAC.
3-66
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice Details 03251. Practice details are as follows: Practice 3. Establish POA 3-15 m Range/Positioning 3-15 m Standing CQB Position Ammunition 12 Rounds (max) Target/ Exposure Figure 11/21 Stick in 1. At each range fire two well aimed shots at the nominated aiming mark. Instructions 2. Estb the POA. 3. Fire a shot to confirm the POA. Practice 4. Establish POA 100 m 100 m Prone,Sitting, Standing unsupported, Kneeling or Squatting Range/Positioning unsupported Ammunition 24 Rounds (max) Target/ Exposure Figure 12 or Figure 12 (on a screen) or SARTS Figure 12 1. Fire 3 Rounds application to confirm the MPI. 2. If possible all shots are to be signalled or viewed Instructions 3. Firers are to record their POA on the shooting record. 4. Fire further Rounds (3 maximum) to confirm the POA. 5. Repeat the practice for each firing position. Practice 5. Establish POA 200 m Range/Positioning 200 m Prone, Kneeling Supported Fire Trench, Standing Supported Ammunition 24 Rounds (max) Target/ Exposure Figure 11 or Figure 11 (on a screen) or SARTS Figure 11 1. Fire 3 Rounds application to confirm the MPI. 2. If possible all shots are to be signalled or viewed. Instructions 3. Firers are to record their POA on the shooting record. 4. Fire further Rounds (3 maximum) to confirm the POA. 5. Repeat the practice for each firing position. Practice 6. Establish POA 300 m (DCC only) Range/Positioning 300m Prone Ammunition 6 Rounds (max) Target/ Exposure Figure 11 or Figure 11 (on a screen) or SARTS Figure 11 1. Fire 3 Rounds application to confirm the MPI. 2. If possible all shots are to be signalled or viewed. 3. Firers are to record their POA on the shooting record. Instructions 4. Fire further Rounds (3 maximum) to confirm the POA. 5. Repeat the practice for each firing position.
3-67
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Additional Practices Range/Positioning 100 – 300 m Ammunition Remaining Rounds Target/ Exposure As Per ACMT Concentrating on known or likely weaknesses conduct selected ACMT Instructions practices
End of Lesson Procedure
3-68
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle/Carbine ACMT A. RCO Notes 03252. Firing Requirement. a. ACMT (DCC Role) is to be fired by all Infantry firers during Infantry Phase 2 Training, annually by all combat infantrymen, RLC Firer Pioneer Support personnel and personnel employed in the DCC Role whose personal weapon is the Rifle. b. ACMT (BCC Role) is to be fired by all firers during Phase 1 Other Arms Recruit Training and annually by all Other Arms and Service personnel employed in the Basic Close Combat Role whose personal weapon is the Rifle/Carbine. 03253. Ranges. Rifle/Carbine ACMT can be fired on an ETR, GR or CGR. 03254. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete. 03255. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x Figure 11 on a screen with a 1 x 75 x 100 mm white patch 1 x Figure 12 at 100 metres per firer 1 x Figure 11 at 200/300 metres per firer 2 x Figure 11/21 Stick In, with 2 x 25 mm aiming marks per target SARTS 1 x Figure 12 at 100 metres per firer 1 x Figure 11 at 200/300 metres per firer 2 x Figure 11/21 Stick In, with 2 x 25 mm aiming marks per target 03256. Rules. a. BCC firers who have not fired LF6 to 9 (CQM) are not to fire practice 1 (only applicable to Phase 1 Other Arms Training). b. The dress and equipment for the test is to be combat dress, combat helmet, hearing protection and belt order webbing, body armour (as issued). c.
No extra time will be given for stoppages.
d.
Coaching and signalling are not permitted.
e.
If fire trenches are not available, the prone position is to be used.
03257. Time Charts. A time chart is included after the Practice Details. 03258. Ammo. DCC - 79 Rounds, BCC 69 Rounds, this includes 5 Rounds for check zeroing and 8 Rounds to confirm CQB POA. 3-69
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 03259. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 03260. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) 03261. Preparation. Practice. Check Zero Range/Positioning 100 m Prone Ammunition 5 Rounds Figure 11 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Target/ Exposure Figure 12 1. Fire 1 x 5 round group at the aiming mark. Instructions 2. Confirm the Zero and record the group size. Practice. Confirm CQB POA Range/Positioning 3, 5, 10 and 15m Standing CQB Position Ammunition 8 Rounds Target/ Exposure 2 x Figure 11/21 with 2 x 25 mm aiming mark 1. At each range, fire 1 well aimed shot at the nominated aiming mark. Instructions 2. Establish the POA. 3. Fire a second shot to confirm the POA..
Practice Details 03262. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. CQM Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3-70
3, 5, 10 and 15m Standing CQB Position 16 Rounds 1. 2 x Figure 11/21 2. 1 x 4 second exposure at each range 1. Firer in the CQB stance at 15m. 2. Multiple Targets, fire two shots at each target. 3. Order “Watch and shoot”. 4. Apply “Safety” move to 10m and repeat 15m practice. 5. Apply “Safety” move to 5m. 6. Failure to Stop, fire two shots at the body and two to the head of the left target. 7. Order “Watch and shoot”. 8. Apply “Safety” move to 3m and repeat 5m practice.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100 m Prone and Sitting 10 Rounds 1. Figure 12. 2. 10 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firers in the prone position. 2. Fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 3. Order “Watch and Shoot” 4. Apply “Safety” move into the sitting position. 5. Fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 6. Order “Watch and Shoot”.
Practice 3. Snap/Rapid Range/Positioning 100 m Standing and Kneeling Unsupported/ Squatting/Prone Ammunition 10 Rounds 1. Figure 12. Target/ Exposure 2. 2 x 12 second exposures with an interval to allow all firers to adopt the standing alert position. 1. Firer in the standing alert position. 2. On the appearance of the target, the firer is to fire one round standing then adopt either the kneeling unsupported/squatting or prone Instructions position and fire a further 4 Rounds at the exposure. 3. Firers must adopt the standing alert position between exposures. 4. Targets up and hold. 5. Order “Watch and Shoot”. Practice 4. Snap/Rapid Range/Positioning 200 m Prone and Fire Trench Ammunition 10 Rounds 1. Figure 11. Target/ Exposure 2. 5 x 5 second exposure with irregular intervals, followed by 1 x 10 second exposure 1. Firer in the prone position. 2. Fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit. 3. Order “Watch and Shoot”. Instructions 4. Apply “Safety” move into the Fire Trench. 5. Fire 5 Rounds at the exposure, targets up and hold. 6. Order “Five Rounds rapid, Watch and Shoot”.
3-71
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 5. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
200 m Kneeling Supported and Standing Supported 10 Rounds 1. Figure 11. 2. 1 x 8 second exposure followed by 4 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals, followed by 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals . 1. Firer in the standing alert position, 5 m behind the firing point, ready. 2. On appearance of the target move onto the firing point, adopt the kneeling supported position and fire one round at each exposure. 3. Order “Watch out”. 4. After the fifth exposure order “adopt the Standing Supported position”. 5. There will be five more exposures, fire one round at each, targets fall when hit. 6. Order “Watch and Shoot”.
Practice 6. Snap/Rapid DCC ONLY Range/Positioning 300 m Prone Ammunition 10 Rounds 1. Figure 11. Target/ Exposure 2. 1 x 8 second exposure followed by 4 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals, followed by 1 x 10 second exposure. 1. Firer in the standing alert position, 5 m behind the firing point, ready. 2. On appearance of the target move onto the firing point, adopt the prone position and fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when Instructions hit. 3. Order “Watch out”. 4. After the fifth exposure, target is up and hold, order “Stop, five Rounds rapid, Watch and Shoot”.
Scoring 03263. Practice 1 - Two points per hit, inner scoring area. One point per hit, outer scoring area. No points anywhere else on the target. 03264. Practices 2 to 6 - One point per hit. Standards 03265. The OMS for each practice is shown in the table below. If a firer fails a practice they must reshoot that practice only to achieve the OMS. Firers who fail are to have coaching before re-testing.
3-72
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Prac
Range
Rounds
1
15 - 3m
2 3
OMS Requirement
HPS
BCC
DCC
Mksmn
16
22
22
26
32
100 m
10
7
8
9
10
100 m
10
7
8
9
10
4
200 m
10
6
7
8
10
5
200 m
10
6
7
8
10
6
300 m
10
NA
6
8
10
DCC
66
-
58
68
82
BCC
56
48
-
60
72
Less Prac 1
40
26
-
34
40
Totals
03266. Marksman. To qualify as a Marksman a firer must achieve the Marksman score or more for all practices at the first attempt. Firers are NOT permitted to re-shoot practices or the whole ACMT in order to qualify as a Marksman. Marksmen are entitled to wear the badge for one year before they must re-qualify.
3-73
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle/Carbine ACMT — Time Chart 03267. With the exception of Practice 1, one extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges additional time maybe required. Practice
Range/Target
1
15 – 3m Figure 11/21 Stick in
UP 05
DOWN 09
1. Up and hold. 2. Exposures controlled by whistle or commands. 3. Repeat 3 times.
2
100 m Figure 12
UP 05 17 26 37 47
DOWN 10 22 31 42 52
1. Fall when hit. 2. Reset watch and repeat once.
3
100 m Figure 12
UP 05
DOWN 18
1. Reset watch and repeat once. 2. Up and hold.
4
200 m Figure 11
200 m Figure 11
6
300 m Figure 11
DOWN 11 25 39 51 1:04 DOWN 16 DOWN 14 26 40 52 1:05 DOWN 10 22 31 42 52 DOWN 14 26 40 52 1:05 1:26
1. Fall when hit. 2. Reset watch and move into fire trench 3. Final exposure up and hold
5
UP 05 19 33 45 58 UP 05 UP 05 21 35 47 1:00 UP 05 17 26 37 47 UP 05 21 35 47 1:00 1:15
3-74
Timings
Remarks
1. Fall when hit. 2. Reset watch, adopt standing supported. 3. Fall when hit.
1. Fall when hit. 2. Final exposure up and hold.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle ACMT (Base Location) A. Instructor’s Notes 03268. Firing Requirement. ACMT (Base Location). Rifle/Carbine ACMT (Base Location) is to be fired annually by all personnel employed in the Base Location whose personal weapon is the Rifle/Carbine. 03269. Ranges. Rifle/Carbine ACMT (Base Location) can be fired on an ETR, GR, CGR Note: ETR can only be used where the facility exists for the Fig 12 to be presented during practice 8. 03270. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to complete all practices. 03271. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x Figure 11 at 100 metres per firer 1 x Figure 12 at 50 metres per firer SARTS converted range 1 x Figure 11 at 100 metres per firer 1 x Figure 12 at 50 metres per firer CGR range 1 x Figure 11 -Left Coffin 1 x Figure 12 -Right Coffin 03272. Rules. a. The dress and equipment for this test is to be combat dress, belt order webbing, combat helmet, combat body armour (as issued) and issued, serviceable hearing protection. b.
No extra time will be given for stoppages.
c.
Coaching and signalling are not permitted.
d.
Iron or Optic Sight may be used.
e. The ammunition allocated for the ACMT includes 5 Rounds for check zeroing. 03273. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the Practice Details. 03274. Ammunition. ACMT (Base Location) 82 Rounds.
3-75
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
B. Conduct of the Lesson 03275. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 03276. Range Safety. Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) 03277. Preparation. Practice. Check Zero Range/Positioning 100 m Prone Ammunition 5 Rounds Figure 11 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Target/ Exposure Figure 11 1. Fire 1 x 5 round group at the aiming mark. Instructions 2. Confirm the Zero and record the group size.
Practice Details 03278. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Deliberate Range/Positioning 100 m Standing Supported Ammunition 5 Rounds 1. Figure 11. Target/ Exposure 2. 5 x 6 second exposures with intervals of 5 seconds. 1. Firers in the standing supported position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Firers are to fire one round at each exposure, from the standing Instructions supported position. 4. Targets are fall when hit. Firers are to adopt the standing alert position between exposures. Practice 2. Rapid Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
3-76
100 m Kneeling Supported 10 Rounds 1. Figure 11. 2. One exposure of 35 seconds. 1. Firers in the kneeling supported position. 2. Order “10 Rounds rapid, Watch and Shoot”. 3. Firers are to fire 10 Rounds rapid at this exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 3. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 5. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100 m Standing/ Kneeling Supported 10 Rounds 1. Figure 11. 2. 5 double exposures of 6 seconds (down for 5 seconds and up for 6 seconds) with irregular intervals of 5 to 10 seconds between double exposures. 1. Firers in Standing Alert position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. On appearance of the first exposure firers are to fire one round, then adopt the kneeling supported position and fire a further round at this exposure. 4. Targets are fall when hit. 5. Firers are to adopt the standing alert position between double exposures.
100 m Kneeling / Squatting Unsupported 10 Rounds 1. Figure 11. 2. 5 x 10 second exposures with irregular intervals of 5 to 10 seconds between exposures. 1. Firers in the standing alert position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. On the appearance of the tar- get firers are to adopt the kneeling/ squatting position and fire two Rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets are up and hold 5. Firers are to adopt the standing alert position between exposures.
100 m Kneeling Supported 10 Rounds 1. Figure 11. 2. 5 x double exposures. 3. At each double expo- sure the tar- gets are up for 10 seconds, down for 4 seconds, up for 6 seconds. 1. Firers in the standing alert position 5m behind the FP. 2. Order “Watch Out”. 3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to move onto the firing point, adopt the kneeling supported position and fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets are fall when hit. 5. Between double exposures firers will be ordered “Apply your Safety Catches, Stand up, dress back 5m then adopt the standing alert position”.
3-77
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 6. Snap/Rapid Range/Positioning 100 m Prone Ammunition 10 Rounds 1. Figure 11. 2. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals, followed by a 15 Target/ Exposure second intervals and 1 x 15 second exposure. 1. Firers in prone position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Firers are to fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets are fall when hit. Instructions 5. After fifth exposure order “Stop, 5 Rounds Rapid, Watch and Shoot”. 6. Firers are to fire 5 Rounds at this exposure. 7. Targets up and hold. Practice 7. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 8. Rapid Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
3-78
100 m Standing and Kneeling Supported 10 Rounds 1. Figure 11. 2. 5 x double exposures. 3. At each double exposure the targets are up for 8 seconds, down for 5 seconds, up for 6 seconds. 1. Firers in the standing supported position 5m to the rear of the firing point. 2. Order ”Watch Out”. 3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to move to the firing point, adopt the standing supported position and fire one round at that exposure, firers are then to adopt the kneeling supported position and fire a further round at the next exposure. 4. Targets are fall when hit. 5. Between double exposures firers will be ordered “Apply your safety catches, stand up and dress back five metres, adopt the standing alert position”.
50 m Standing Unsupported 5 Rounds 1. Figure 12 at foot of Mantlet (see note). 2. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firers in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Note: Figure 12 stick-in targets are to be positioned in front of the mantlet. Firers are to move forward of the 100m firing point until 50m in front of the target. Targets positioned in the Hythe frames or SARTS on top of the Mantlet may only be engaged where Range Standing Orders permit their use. Scoring 03279. One point per hit. Standards 03280. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at each firing distance (see relevant table below). Failure to achieve the OMS at any firing distance will constitute a failure of the LF lesson, however, only the practices at the firing distances where the OMS was not met need to be fired again. Firers who fail are to undergo further practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness, before retesting. Prac 1-7
Range 100 m
Total Rounds 65
OMS Requirement 45
HPS 65
8
50 m
5
4
5
49
70
Totals
3-79
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice
Range/Target
1
100m Figure 11
2
100m Figure 11
3
Timings
Fall when hit.
Figure 11 100m
UP DOWN 05 12 17 24 29 36 41 48 56 1:03 1:09 1:16 1:26 1:33 1:38 1:45 1:54 2:01 2:06 2:13
Targets fall when hit.
4
Figure 11 100m
Targets up and hold.
5
Figure 11 100m
UP DOWN 05 16 31 42 50 1:01 1:11 1:22 1:31 1:42 UP DOWN 05 16 20 27
6
Figure 11 100m
UP 05 15 23 32 40
Targets fall when hit.
7
Figure 11 100m
UP 05 19
DOWN 14 26
Targets fall when hit. Reset stopwatch and repeat.
8
50 m Figure 12
UP 05 13 25 34 44
DOWN 10 18 30 39 49
Up and hold (stick-in)
3-80
Remarks
UP DOWN 05 12 17 24 29 36 41 48 53 1.00 UP DOWN 05 41
DOWN 10 20 28 37 45
1:00 1:16
Targets up and hold.
Targets fall when hit. Reset stopwatch and repeat 4 times.
Targets up and hold.
Fall when hit for SARTS & ETR
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Annual Firing in CBRN Conditions Instructional Shoot and Assessment A. Instructor’s Notes 03281. Aim. To practise and assess the firer in engaging targets in CBRN conditions by deliberate, snap and rapid shooting from the prone and kneeling unsupported and supported positions. 03282. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on either a CGR or ETR if converted to SARTS, or a GR. 03283. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 1 hour to complete all practices. If SARTS is being used it may be possible to reduce the timings. 03284. Time Chart. A time chart for Practices 5 to 8 is included after the practice details. 03285. Stores. Normal range stores Gallery Range (Practices 1 to 4) 1 x Figure 12 on a 1.220 m screen per firer inscribed with a 760 mm and a 1.220 m circle at 100 metres 1 x Figure 11 on a 1.220 m screen per firer inscribed with a 760 mm and a 1.220 m circle at 200 metres Gallery Range (Practices 5 to 8) 1 x Figure 12 at 100 metres per firer 1 x Figure 11 at 200 metres per firer or SARTS converted range 1 x Figure 12d per firer at 100 metres 1 x Figure 11 per firer at 200 metres 40 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer 03286. Miscellaneous. Full IPE should be worn. As a minimum firers are to wear respirator and CBRN gloves.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 03287. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 03288. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))
3-81
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice Details 03289. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Deliberate Range/Positioning 100 m Prone Ammunition 5 Rounds Target/ Exposure Figure 12 on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d 1. Fire 5 Rounds to identify the POA. Instructions 2. Record the score and note the appropriate POA on the shooting record card. Practice 2. Deliberate Range/Positioning 100 m Kneeling Unsupported Ammunition 5 Rounds Target/ Exposure Figure 12 on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d Instructions As per Prac 1 Practice 3. Deliberate Range/Positioning 200 m Prone Ammunition 5 Rounds Target/ Exposure Figure 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 11 Instructions As per Prac 1 Practice 4. Deliberate Range/Positioning 200 m Kneeling Supported Ammunition 5 Rounds Target/ Exposure Figure 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 11 Instructions As per Prac 1
Assessment Details 03290. Practice details are as follows: Practice 5. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
3-82
100 m Kneeling Unsupported 5 Rounds 1. Figure 12 or SARTS Figure 12d. 2. 5 x 6 second exposures with 5 second intervals. 1. Fire in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 6. Rapid Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
Practice 7. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
Practice 8. Rapid Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
100 m Prone 5 Rounds 1. Figure 12 or SARTS Figure 12d. 2. 1 x 12 second exposure 1. Fire in the nominated position. 2. Order “Five Rounds rapid, Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire five Rounds at the exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
200 m Kneeling Supported 5 Rounds 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 5 x 8 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Fire in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
200 m Prone 5 Rounds 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 1 x 12 second exposures. 1. Fire in the nominated position. 2. Order “Five Rounds Rapid, Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire five Rounds at the exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
Scoring 03291. One point per hit. Standards 03292. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at each firing distance in Practices 5 to 8. Failure to achieve the OMS at any firing distance will constitute a failure of the LF lesson, however, only the practices at the firing distances where the OMS was not met need to be fired again. Firers who fail are to undergo further practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness, before re-testing.
3-83
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice
Range
Total Rounds
5&6
100m
7&8
200m
OMS Requirement
HPS
DCC
BCC
10
7
6
10
10
6
5
10
13
11
20
Totals
TIME CHART 03293. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed.
3-84
Practice
Range/Target
5
100 m Figure 12
UP DOWN 05 12 17 24 29 36 41 48 53 1:00
Timings
Fall when hit.
6
100 m Figure 12
UP DOWN 05 18
Up and hold.
7
200 m Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 14 19 28 32 41 45 54 59 1:08
Fall when hit.
8
200 m Figure 11
As for Practice 6.
Remarks
Up and hold.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Royal Gibraltar Regiment Rifle ACMT (DCC Role) A. Instructors Notes 03294. Firing Requirement. The Royal Gibraltar Regiment (RG) Rifle ACMT (DCC Role) is only to be fired by RG firers during Infantry Phase 2 Training and is to be fired annually by all RG combat infantrymen whose personal weapon is the rifle. 03295. Ranges. Due to the limited ranges available in Gibraltar, RG Rifle ACMT (DCC Role) must be fired on two separate ranges to complete the test. These ranges consist of a 25 metre Barrack Range and 125 metre ETR. Practices to be conducted on each are as follows: a.
25 metre Barrack Range
–
Practices 1 to 3.
b.
125 metre ETR
–
Practices 4 to 10.
03296. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. These timings do not include movement between ranges. 03297. Rules. a. The dress and equipment for this test is to be combat dress, belt order webbing, combat helmet, combat body armour (as issued) and issued, serviceable hearing protection. b.
No extra time will be given for stoppages.
c.
Coaching and signalling are not permitted.
d.
SUSAT only is to be used.
e.
If fire trenches are not available, the prone position is to be used.
f.
Whistle to control 25m practices.
03298. Time Charts. A time chart is included after the Practice Details. 03299. Ammunition. 60 rounds.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 03300. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 03301. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)). 3-85
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice Details 03302. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Rapid Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
25 m Prone 5 Rounds 1. Figure 12 (100m representative target). 2. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Fire one round at each exposure. 3. Order “Watch and Shoot”.
Practice 2. Snap/Rapid Range/Positioning 25 m Standing and Kneeling Unsupported/ Squatting/Prone Ammunition 10 Rounds 1. Figure 12 (100m representative target). Target/ Exposure 2. 2 x 12 second exposures with an interval to allow all firers to adopt the standing alert position. 1. Firer in the standing alert position. 2. On the appearance of the target, the firer is to fire one round standing then adopt either the Instructions kneeling unsupported/ squatting or prone position and fire a further 4 rounds at the exposure. 3. Firers must adopt the standing alert position between exposures. 4. Order “Watch and Shoot”. Practice 3. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
3-86
25 m Kneeling Unsupported 5 Rounds 1. Figure 12 (100m representative target). 2. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Fire one round at each exposure. 3. Order “Watch and Shoot”.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 4. Snap/Rapid Range/Positioning 125 m Prone Ammunition 10 Rounds 1. Figure 11 (200m representative target). Target/ Exposure 2. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals, followed by 15 seconds later by 1 x 10 second exposure. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Fire one round at each exposure. 3. Targets fall when hit. 4. After the fifth exposure order “Stop, 5 rounds rapid, Watch and Instructions Shoot.”. 5. Fire 5 rounds at the exposure. 6. Targets up and hold. 7. Order “Watch and Shoot”. Practice 5. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 6. Rapid Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
125 m Fire Trench 5 Rounds 1. Figure 11 (200m representative target). 2. 5 x 8 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firer in the standing alert position inside the fire trench, loaded, ready. 2. The appearance of the target is the signal to adopt the nominated position and fire one round at each exposure. 3. Between exposures order “Apply safety catches, adopt the standing alert position”. 4. Targets fall when hit. 5. Order “Watch Out”.
125 m Fire Trench 5 Rounds 1. Figure 11 (200m representative target). 2. 1 x 10 second exposure. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Fire 5 rounds at each exposure. 3. Up and hold. 4. Order “Five rounds, rapid, Watch and Shoot”.
3-87
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 7. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
Practice 8. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
125 m Fire Trench 5 Rounds 1. Figure 11 (300m representative target). 2. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Fire one round at each exposure. 3. Targets fall when hit. 4. Order “Watch and Shoot”.
125 m Prone 5 Rounds 1. Figure 11 (300m representative target). 2. 1 x 8 second exposure followed 5 seconds later by 4 x 4 second exposures with intervals of 5 – 10 seconds between intervals. 1. Firer in the standing alert position. 2. The appearance of the target is the signal to adopt the nominated position and fire one round at each exposure. 3. Targets fall when hit. 4. Order “Watch Out”
Practice 9. Rapid/Snap Range/Positioning 125 m Prone Ammunition 10 Rounds 1. Figure 11 (300m representative target). Target/ Exposure 2. 1 x 15 second exposure followed 10 seconds later by 5 x 4 second exposures with intervals of 5 – 12 seconds between intervals. 1. Firer in the standing alert position, loaded, ready. 2. The appearance of the target is the signal to adopt the nominated position and fire 5 rounds at each exposure. 3. Targets up and hold. Instructions 4. After the first exposure order “Stop, Watch and Shoot”. 5. Fire one round at each of the remaining exposures. 6. Targets fall when hit. 7. Order “Five rounds, rapid, Watch Out”.
3-88
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Scoring 03303. Practice 1 - Two points per hit, inner scoring area. One point per hit, outer scoring area. No points anywhere else on the target. Practices 2 to 6 - One point per hit. Standards 03304. The OMS for each practice is shown in the table below. If a firer fails a practice they must reshoot that practice only to achieve the OMS. Firers who fail are to have coaching before re-testing Prac
Representative Range
Rounds
1&3
100m
2
OMS Requirement
HPS
Score
Mksm
10
8
9
10
100m
10
8
9
10
4
200m
10
7
8
10
5&6
200m
10
7
8
10
7&8
300m
10
6
8
10
9
300m
10
6
8
10
03305. Marksman. To qualify as a Marksman a firer must achieve the Marksman score or more for all practices at the first attempt. Firers are NOT permitted to reshoot practices or the whole ACMT in order to qualify as a Marksman. Marksmen are entitled to wear the badge for one year before they must re-qualify.
3-89
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
ROYAL GIBRALTAR REGIMENT RIFLE ACMT (DCC ROLE) TIME CHART 03306. One extra second has been included for manual target movement on 25 metre Barrack Range and mechanical target movement on ETR. Practice
3-90
Range/Target
Timings
Remarks
1
25 m UP Figure 12 (100 m 05 representative target.) 17 26 37 47
DOWN 10 22 31 42 52
2
25 m UP Figure 12 (100 m 05 representative target.)
DOWN 18
3
25 m Figure 12 (100 m representative target.)
4
125 m UP Figure 11 (200 m 05 representative target.) 17 26 37 47 1:07
DOWN 10 22 31 42 52 1:18
1. Fall when hit.
5
125 m UP Figure 11 (200 m 05 representative target.)
DOWN 14
1. Reset watch and repeat 4 times. 2. Fall when hit.
6
125 m UP Figure 11 (200 m 05 representative target.)
DOWN 16
Up and hold.
7
125 m Figure 11 (300 m representative target.)
As for Practice 1.
Fall when hit.
8
125 m UP Figure 11 (300 m 05 representative target.) 19 33 45 58
Reset watch and repeat once.
As for Practice 1.
DOWN 14 24 38 50 1:03
2. Up and hold.
Fall when hit.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
9
125 m UP Figure 11 (300 m 05 representative target.) 31 43 60 1:15 1:25
DOWN 21 36 48 1:05 1:20 1:30
1. Up and hold 2. Fall when hit
3-91
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
3-92
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
CHAPTER 4 Scope
THE LIGHT SUPPORT WEAPON (LSW)
0401. Chapter 4 sets out all LSW live firing (LF) lessons to be completed in LFMT Stages 1, 2 and 3 of Training the Battle Shot. It includes the application of lessons to the Arms and Services and the progression and frequency with which they are to be fired. 0402. This progression and frequency of firing is essential for preparing personnel for LSW Annual Combat Marksmanship Tests (ACMT) in LFMT Stage 3. It is also essential in preparing the firer for mandatory TLFTT and LFTT. The actual detail of TLFTT and LFTT is in Chapters 10 and 11 respectively
Contents SCOPE 4-1 TRAINING AND FIRING SEQUENCE 4-1 SAFETY 4-1 CONDUCT OF LF LESSONS 4-2 WEAPON HANDLING TESTS GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 4-4 DEFINITION OF STANDARDS 4-4 WHTs 4-5 LF LESSON 1 4-9 LF LESSON 2 4-11 LF LESSON 3 4-13 LF LESSON 4 4-15 LF LESSON 5 4-19 LSW ACMT PREPARATION 4-25 ACMT 4-29 CBRN INSTRUCTION/ASSESSMENT 4-35
Training and Firing Sequence 0403. Other Arms and Services Phase 1 Training. The LF lessons contained within the Commanders Guide are to be fired by all recruits during Other Arms and Services Phase 1 Training. Reserve recruits are to achieve the same standards as regular recruits. 0404. Regular and Reserve Units. The ACMT Preparation is to be fired annually by all BCC Role Firers in Regular and Reserve units whose personal weapon is the LSW. 0405. ACMT Familiarisation with DCCT. After the ACMT Preparation and before the ACMT is fired on the range, use of DCCT to familiarise firers with the ACMT Prac tices will improve First Time Pass rates and the overall standard of shooting. 0406. Remedial Training. DCCT provides an invaluable aid to the remedial train ing of the poor shot. COs are encouraged to make full use of the facilities wherever they are available. However, final confirmation must be by the use of live firing. All LSW LF lessons can be fired on DCCT and may be used as a remedial aid or as a rehearsal prior to firing on the range. Safety 0407. It is mandatory for all firers to have completed WHTs prior to live firing of a weapon, in order to ensure a minimum standard of safety. Conducting officers must confirm that all personnel firing any weapon have completed the relevant WHTs prior to firing. 4-1
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Conduct of LF Lessons 0408. General Requirements. The general requirements of equipment and outline range procedures which apply to all ranges are shown below. Any requirements specific to a particular LF lesson are contained at the start of each lesson. 0409. Stores. The following stores are required: LSW complete to CES Cleaning material Issued, serviceable hearing protection Combat Helmets Body Armour Personal Shooting Record Book Coach’s Aide Memoire (AF B71158) Binoculars First aid kit SAC Stop watches
1 per firer As required 1 per firer 1 per firer 1 per firer 1 per firer 1 per coach 1 per coach Complete As required As required
0410. Dress. The dress for LSW LF lessons should include belt order webbing, Combat Helmets and body armour. Additionally, when OSPREY, Mark 7 helmets, ballistic eye protection and LSW ancillaries are issued, the firer should be given the opportunity to practice with them. The dress rules for Phase One Recruits and Trainee Combat Infantrymen should be applied sensibly with a gradual increase in the amount of additional equipment. However, the conditions for the ACMT are to be rigorously applied. 0411. DCCT. Personnel are to fire the bore sighting practice before firing any other shoots using DCCT. Firers can be given a preview of all the practices on DCCT in order to familiarise themselves with the conditions. 0412. SAC. The SAC is to be used to bore sight the rifle prior to firing a grouping practice. Once zeroed, the Personal Zeroing Position (PZP) is to be noted in the firers’ shooting record card and the reading is to be checked prior to any future live firing lesson. The SAC cannot be used for lessons fired on DCCT. 0413. Weapon and Firing Preparation. a. Where possible, LSWs are to be prepared for firing prior to moving to the range, to ensure they are prepared under ‘ideal’ conditions and not those that may be experienced on the range. b. Check each firer has the issued, serviceable hearing protection and his shooting record card in his possession. c. Observation of fall of shot is obvious using SUSAT at 25 metres. During grouping practices it must be emphasized to firers that they are to take the correct point of aim for each shot and avoid aiming off. 4-2
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
d.
If fire trenches are not available the prone position is to be used.
0414. Aiming Marks. The POA is to be the bottom centre of the patch for Iron sights and at the bottom right or left corner when optic sights are used. 0415. Coaching. DCC Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms, The SA80 A2 (5.56 mm) System (Rifle, LSW and Carbine) and Associated Equipment contains full details of coaching requirements. Some essential points to ensure are: a. The conducting officer and all coaches on the range must have prior knowledge of coaching techniques. b. Where possible a coach should be with each firer. If there are insufficient coaches the Master Coach system should be used. c. For ranges up to and including 300 metres, sights are to be set at 300. Personnel are to be reminded to alter their sights prior to firing at ranges beyond 300 metres. d. All group sizes, MPIs, POAs for other positions, and scores are to be recorded on the firers’ personal shooting record card. e. Coaches are to be in possession of binoculars during all elementary and advanced application of fire lessons. 0416. Spotters. When grouping at 25 metres, to enable firers and coaches to gain the maximum information from the shots fired, members of the waiting detail should be employed as spotters, using binoculars, to plot the arrival of each shot or burst. To achieve maximum value from this type of live firing, it is essential that firers are given every opportunity to discuss the results of their shooting with their coach. 0417. Guide to Progress. Firers who do not attain the suggested measure of pro gress should be given further coaching or firing practice before progressing. 0418. Scoring. Scores are to be recorded and announced to the firers at the end of each practice. Details of the scoring system are shown in each individual lesson. 0419. End of Lesson Procedure. At the end of each LF lesson the following drills are to be completed once the range has been cleared: a.
Questions from the firers on the range period.
b.
Normal safety precautions/declaration.
c.
Pack kit.
d. Summary of standard achieved, specific points relevant to lesson, forecast of the next LSW LF lesson.
4-3
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
WHTs General Instructions 0420. Purpose. The purpose of WHTs is to provide a measure of personal weapon handling skill throughout the Services in line with operational safety and handling requirements. Mandatory testing ensures that handling skills of all personnel are monitored accurately and rectified if necessary. 0421. Testing and Results. a. All tests are to be carried out in daylight and conducted by a qualified, competent instructor. Standards are to be measured: (1)
At an appropriate stage during Phase 1 Recruit Training.
(2) At intervals in accordance with MATTs for regular and reserve units. b. Results. All results must be recorded in accordance with unit and chain of command procedures. 0422. Conduct. NSPs are to be carried out by the instructor on all weapons and drill ammunition prior to any WHT taking place. Tests are to be completed consecutively and are to be carried out in barracks using drill ammunition. 0423. Dress. Tests are to be carried out wearing belt order webbing with combat helmet and Issued Body Armour. Definition of Standards 0424. Handling Standards. Handling Standards achieved in WHTs are defined as: Pass — Pass in all tests. Fail
— Fail in any test.
0425. Training Performance Standards. A firer is considered competent on achieving the pass standard. Failure to meet the pass standard indicates that the firer is not competent in the use of the LSW. Retesting is to be carried out on completion of remedial training on the individual test(s) that were failed.
4-4
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
WHTs LSW Subject Stores Conditions Marking
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
Test No. 1 Safety LSW unloaded. Safety Catch at ‘F’, change lever at ‘R’. Weapon lying on the ground. 1. Order the firer to “Take control of the weapon”. The firer, without further direction, is to pick up the weapon and carry out full normal safety precautions. 1. Standard: Pass Fail Test No. 2 Stripping, Cleaning and Assembling LSW with sling fitted, unloaded, cleaning roll (with combination tool out), flannelette and oil. 1. Order the firer to “Strip the LSW as for daily cleaning”. Ask the following questions: a. What size flannelette is used to clean the barrel? b. What size flannelette is used to oil the barrel? c. What are the differences to normal daily cleaning when in the following conditions? (choose any 2 conditions) (1) Heavy rain and damp conditions. (2) Dry, sandy or dusty conditions. (3) Cold and extreme cold conditions. (4) Hot, wet conditions. 2. Order the firer to indicate the parts of the combination tool that are used to clean the gas plug. 3. Order the firer to “Assemble the LSW and carry out the function test” 4. Ask the following question: a. If during the function test, or at any time you notice the change lever overrotates beyond its stops, what action is to be taken.. 1. Standard: Pass — 1 to 2 mistakes. Fail — More than 2 mistakes. 2. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety. Test No. 3 Magazine Filling 30 rounds, magazine. On the command “Go” the firer fills his magazine with 30 rounds by hand. Instructor’s Note: All ammunition is to be removed from the magazine, fit depressor. Standard: No time Limit
4-5
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
Subject Stores Conditions Marking
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
4-6
Test No. 4 Loading – Prone Bipod Supported Position LSW, magazine in fastened pouch. 1. Order “Bipod Supported Position – down”. 2. Give the command “Load”. Pouches must be refastened. Instructor’s Note: Load with the magazine fitted with the depressor. Leave weapon loaded for Test No 5. 1. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 2. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 3. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety. Test No. 5 Ready Drill Prone Position LSW loaded (from Test No. 4), representative targets Once the firer has aligned himself, on to the target order “Ready” or issue a range. 1. The actions tested are those relating to the Ready Drill only. 2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 3. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety. Test No. 6 Immediate Action (IA) and Forward Assist LSW loaded representative targets 1. Order “Fire”. 2. Order “LSW firing alright – LSW stops”. Firer to carry out the IA...”Cocking handle fully forward”. Firer is to tap forward on the cocking handle and continue firing. 3. Order “LSW fires alright” “Stop”. 1. The actions tested are those relating to the (IA) and Forward Assist Drills only. 2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 3. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
Test No. 7 IA and Loose Magazine Drill LSW loaded, rep- representative targets. 1. Order “Fire” “LSW firing alright – LSW stops”. Firer to carry out the IA...”Cocking handle fully forward”. Firer is to tap forward on the cocking handle and continue firing. 2. Order “LSW still fails to fire”. 3. On examination of body and chamber order “Rounds in magazine – Chamber clear”. Alloy the firer to complete the drill. 4. Order “LSW fires alright” “Stop”. 1. The actions tested are those relating to the Loose Magazine Drill only. 2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 3. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety. Test No. 8 IA and Obstruction Drill LSW loaded, rep- representative targets. 1. Order “Fire” “LSW firing alright – LSW stops”. Firer to carry out the IA...“Cocking handle NOT fully forward”. 2. On examination of the body and chamber, order “Obstruction”. 3. When the firer has removed the magazine and attempted to clear the obstruction by hand or using a tool from the maintenance kit, order “Obstruction Clear”. 4. When the firer has visually inspected the chamber order “Chamber Clear”. 5. Firer is to complete the Obstruction Drill. 6. Order “LSW fires alright” “Stop”. 1. The actions tested are those relating to the Obstruction Drill only. 2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 3. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
4-7
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
Subject Stores Conditions Marking
4-8
Test No. 9 IA and Empty Magazine Drill LSW loaded, rep- representative targets. 1. Instruct the firer to cock the weapon and apply the Holding Open Catch, with the working parts held to the rear, order “Test and adjust – fire” “LSW firing alright – LSW stops”. 2. Firer is to carry out the IA...”Empty Magazine”. Firer is to carry out the drill for an empty magazine. 3. When the firer has completed the drill and continued firing, order “Stop”. 1. The actions tested are those relating to the Empty Magazine Drill only. 2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 3. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety. Test No. 10 Unloading LSW loaded and ready (from Test No. 9) The test follows on from Test No. 9. Give the command “Unload”. The test is not complete until the firer has recovered the ejected round, replaced it in the magazine and fastened the pouch. 1. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 2. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 3. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
LSW LF 1. — Introductory Shoot At 25 Metres (Prone) A. RCO Notes 0426. Aim. To confirm that the firer knows how to prepare the LSW for firing. Then by firing single shots and controlled bursts, confirm that the firer can aim, hold and fire the weapon. Finally, to confirm that he knows how to clean the LSW after firing. 0427. Conduct. This lesson is to be conducted on a 25 metre range or ETR with screens placed 25 metres from the firers. 0428. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to complete all practices. 0429. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x sheet of talc per coach 1 x Non-permanent marker pen per coach 1 x witness screen per firer each with 4 x 25 mm square aiming marks 34 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0430. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0431. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate where necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Preparation for Firing 0432. Explain that the procedures for preparing the LSW for firing and cleaning after firing are the same as for the rifle. Practice Details 0433. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Familiarisation Single Rounds Range/Positioning
25 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
2 x 25 mm aiming marks on a screen
Instructions
1. Fire a 5 round group at each aiming mark. 2. Discuss the groups and record the group sizes.
4-9
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Familiarisation Bursts on Screen Range/Positioning
25 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds (4 mags of 3 rounds)
Target/ Exposure
4 x 25 mm aiming marks on a screen
Instructions
1. Fire one burst of 3 rounds at each aiming mark. 2. Discuss the groups, record the group sizes.
Practice 3. Confirmation Bursts Range/Positioning
25 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
4 x 25 mm aiming marks on a screen
Instructions
1. Fire one burst of 2-3 rounds at each aiming mark. 2. Discuss the groups and record the first round and burst group sizes.
Firers Goals and Progress 0434. The following group sizes should be used as a guide to progress during practice 1: a.
Basic Close Combat Role – 61-85mm
After Firing Procedure 0435. Cleaning after Firing. Confirm Stripping, Cleaning and Assembling. 0436. Confirm by practice. LSWs are to be inspected and left lightly oiled. 0437. Care after Cleaning. Remind: Under normal circumstances the bore, chamber and other gas affected parts must be thoroughly cleaned, inspected and reoiled daily for a minimum period of five days after the LSW has been fired. End of Lesson Procedure
4-10
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
LSW LF 2. — Zeroing at 25 Metres A. RCO Notes 0438. Aim. To zero the weapon by superimposing the firers’ MPI onto the CZP, 0439. Conduct. This lesson is to be conducted on a 25 metre range or ETR with screens placed 25 metres from firers. 0440. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 15 minutes to complete all practices. 0441. Stores. Normal range stores (25 m range) 1 x witness screen target 1 x 25 m zeroing chart for each firer 12 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer 0442. Miscellaneous a. Conducting officers, NCO coaches and firers (when applicable) are to be fully conversant with the details in Ref B relating to Zeroing. b.
Weapons must be bore sighted before live firing commences.
c. Firers are to record in their Shooting Record Card any displacement of the MPI from the CZP when firing from positions other than prone. Coaches are to emphasise the importance of this to their firers.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0443. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0444. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 0445. Practice details are as follows
4-11
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 1. Grouping Range/Positioning
25m Prone
Ammunition
9 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1 x 25 m zeroing chart for each firer
Instructions
1. Fire 3 x 3 round groups at the same aiming mark. 2. The firer is to apply their safety catch, stand up, then re-adopt their position between each group. 3. Discuss the group and measure the group size. 4. Identify the MPI and adjust for zero if necessary.
Practice 2. Check Group Range/Positioning
25 m Prone
Ammunition
3 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1 x 25 m zeroing chart for each firer
Instructions
1. Fire a 3 round check group to confirm zero. 2. If the correct zero is not achieved (see Rifle Lesson 17), repeat Practice 1 using the group plus a further 6 rounds. 3. Once zero is con- firmed record settings using the SAC.
Firers Goals and Progress 0446. The following 3 round group sizes are necessary to accurately zero: a.
Basic Close Combat Role
– 50mm
End of Lesson Procedure 0447. Personal Zeroing Positions (PZPs) are to be recorded once correctly zeroed.
4-12
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
LSW LF 3. — Application of the Group at 100 Metres A. RCO Notes 0448. Aim. To confirm that the firer can apply his group to the centre of the target from the prone and fire trench positions. 0449. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on either a CGR (with or with- out SARTS), an ETR if converted to SARTS, or a GR. 0450. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to complete all practices. If SARTS is used it may be possible to reduce the timings. 0451. Stores Normal range stores 2 x 1.220 m screens with Figure 11 per firer or 1 x Figure 12d per firer (on SARTS converted range) 33 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0452. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0453. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 0454. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Grouping Single Rounds Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d
Instructions
1. Fire a 5 round group. 2. Discuss the group, position of the MPI and note any adjustments needed to the POA. 3. Repeat the practice.
4-13
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Grouping Bursts Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
9 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d
Instructions
1. Fire 9 rounds in bursts of 2-3 rounds at the same aiming mark. 2. Discuss the group, position of the MPI and note any adjustments needed to the POA. 3. Record the group size.
Practice 3. Grouping Single Rounds Range/Positioning
100 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d
Instructions
1. Fire a 5 round group. 2. Discuss the group, position of the MPI and note any adjustments needed to the POA. 3. Record the group size
Practice 4. Grouping Bursts Range/Positioning
100 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
9 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d
Instructions
1. Fire 9 rounds in bursts of 2-3 rounds at the same aiming mark. 2. Discuss the group, position of the MPI and note any adjustments needed to the POA. 3. Record the group size.
Scoring 0455. After the 5 shots the target is lowered and all shot holes are indicated with spotting discs. 0456. The firer/coach will identify the MPI and establish the new POA. Firers Goals and Progress 0457. Achieving group sizes in relation to the ESA and applying fire successfully. End of Lesson Procedure
4-14
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
LSW LF 4. — Elementary Application of Fire 200–400 METRES A. RCO Notes 0458. Aim. To practise the firer in engaging targets by deliberate fire, using single shots and controlled bursts, from the prone and fire trench positions. 0459. Conduct. The lesson should ideally be conducted on either a CGR (with or without SARTS), or a GR. It may also be conducted on an ETR if converted to SARTS. 0460. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 55 minutes to complete all practices. If SARTS is being used it may be possible to reduce the timings. 0461. Stores. Normal range stores Gallery Range or CGR without SARTS 100–300 m — 1 x Figure 11 on a 1.220 m screen per firer inscribed with a 760 mm and a 1.220 m circle 400 m — 1 x Triple Figure 11 per firer SARTS Figure 11 with scoring area image on monitor (100-200 metres) Figure 11 with triple Figure 11 image on monitor (300-400 metres) 54 rounds 5.56 mm 4B1T ammunition per firer (Ball ammunition if tracer ban is in force) 0462. Miscellaneous. a. Range Conducting Officers are to note that when the lesson is fired on an ETR without SARTS, Practices 4, 5 and 6 are to be fired from the 400 m firing point at a single Figure 11 on the 200 m bank of targets. This will restrict the number of firers to 8 (Targets 1 to 4 and 9 to 12). b. Sufficient ammunition has been allocated to fire bursts of 3 rounds. Firers are only to fire the number of bursts indicated in the instructions column of the practice details, regardless of whether all allocated rounds are used. c. Firers are to be reminded of the need to count rounds fired and to regulate the length of bursts to 2–3 rounds.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0463. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0464. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) 4-15
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice Details 0465. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Deliberate Single Rounds Range/Positioning
200 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a 1.220 m screen or SARTS Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 5 rounds application. 2. All shots are to be signalled. 3. Record the score and note the appropriate POA on the shooting record card.
Practice 2. Deliberate Single Rounds Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a 1.220 m screen or SARTS Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 5 rounds application. 2. All shots are to be signalled. 3. Record the score and note the appropriate POA on the shooting record card.
Practice 3. Deliberate Bursts Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a 1.220 m screen or SARTS Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 4 bursts of 2-3 rounds. 2. Fire is judged to be effective if the figure target is hit once in each burst. 3. Score 4 points for each effective engagement. 4. MPI is to be indicated after each burst.
Practice 4. Deliberate Single Rounds Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a 1.220 m screen or SARTS Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 5 rounds application. 2. All shots are to be signalled. 3. Record the score and note the appropriate POA on the shooting record card.
4-16
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 5. Deliberate Single Rounds Range/Positioning
300 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a 1.220 m screen or SARTS Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 5 rounds application. 2. All shots are to be signalled. 3. Discuss and record results, noting the appropriate POA on the shooting record card.
Practice 6. Deliberate Bursts Range/Positioning
300 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a 1.220 m screen or SARTS Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 4 bursts of 2–3 rounds. 2. Fire is judged to be effective if the figure target is hit once in each burst. 3. MPI is to be indicated after each burst.
Practice 7. Deliberate Single Rounds Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11 or SARTS Triple Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 5 rounds application. 2. All shots are to be signalled. 3. Discuss and record results, noting the appropriate POA on the shooting record card.
Practice 8. Deliberate Single Rounds Range/Positioning
400 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11 or SARTS Triple Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 5 rounds application. 2. All shots are to be signalled. 3. Discuss and record results, noting the appropriate POA on the shooting record card.
4-17
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Scoring 0466. After the 5 shots the target is lowered and all shot holes are indicated with spotting discs. 0467. The firer/coach will identify the MPI and establish the new POA. Fire a further 5 rounds. After the 5th shot the target is lowered and all shots are indicated with spotting discs. Firers Goals and Progress 0468. Achieving group sizes in relation to the ESA and applying fire successfully. End of Lesson Procedure
4-18
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
LSW LF 5. — Advanced Application of Fire 100–400 Metres A. RCO Notes 0469. Aim. To practise the firer in engaging targets by snap, rapid and burst fire from the prone and fire trench positions. 0470. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on an ETR or CGR (with or without SARTS), where these ranges are not available it may be fired on a GR. 0471. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the Practice Details. 0472. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. 0473. Stores. Normal range stores ETR 1 x Figure 11 at 100/200 metres 1 x Triple Figure 11 at 300 metres CGR Left Coffin — Triple Figure 11 } In each Right Coffin — Single Figure 11 } lane Gallery Range 1 x Figure 11 per firer at 100–300 metres 1 x Triple Figure 11 per firer at 400 metres or SARTS Figure 11 per firer at 100-300 metres Figure 11 with triple Figure 11 image on monitor per firer at 400 metres 93 rounds 5.56 mm 4B1T ammunition per firer (Ball ammunition if tracer ban is in force)
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0474. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0475. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) 0476. Miscellaneous. Range Conducting Officers are to note that when 400m practices are fired on an ETR with or without SARTS, the number of firers may be restricted to 8 (targets 1 to 4 and 9 to 12).
4-19
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice Details 0477. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Snap Single Rounds Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. 2. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals. Firer in the nominated position. Order “Watch and Shoot”. Fire one round at each exposure. Targets fall when hit.
Practice 2. Rapid Single Rounds Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 1 x 20 second exposure. 1. Firer in the standing alert position (bipod folded), 5 m to the rear of the firing point. 2. Order “Watch out”. 3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to run onto the firing point, adopt the nominated position (bipod down) and fire 10 rounds at the exposure. 4. Target up and hold.
Practice 3. Timed Bursts Range/Positioning
100 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4-20
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 4 x 5 second exposures with intervals of 10 seconds. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one burst of 2–3 rounds at each exposure. 4. Fire is judged to be effective if the target is hit once in each burst. 5. Score 2 points for each effective engagement. 6. Targets fall when hit.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 4. Snap Single Rounds Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. 2. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals. Firer in the nominated position. Order “Watch and Shoot”. Fire one round at each exposure. Targets fall when hit.
Practice 5. Timed Bursts Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 1 x 13 second exposure followed by 3 x 5 second exposures with intervals of 10 seconds. 1. Firer in the standing alert position (bipod folded), 5 m to the rear of the firing point. 2. Order “Watch out”. 3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to run onto the firing point, adopt the nominated position (bipod down) and fire one burst of 2-3 seconds at each exposure. 4. Score 2 points for each engagement. 5. Targets fall when hit.
Practice 6. Rapid Single Rounds Range/Positioning
200 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
10 Rounds 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 1 x 12 second exposure. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 10 rounds at the exposure. 4. Target up and hold.
Target/ Exposure Instructions
4-21
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 7. Rapid Single Rounds Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. 2. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals. Firer in the nominated position. Order “Watch and Shoot”. Fire one round at each exposure. Targets fall when hit.
Practice 8. Snap Single Rounds Range/Positioning
300 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 1 x 12 second exposure. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 10 rounds at the exposure. 4. Target up and hold.
Practice 9. Timed Bursts Range/Positioning
300 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 4 x 5 second exposures with intervals of 10 seconds. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one burst of 2–3 rounds at each exposure. 4. Fire is judged to be effective if the target is hit once in each burst.
Practice 10. Snap Single Round Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
4-22
1. Triple Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 4 x 6 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 3 rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Scoring 0478. Scores are to be recorded and announced on conclusion of each practice: Practices 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8 and 10 — One point per hit Practices 3, 5 and 9
— 2 points per successful engagement
Firers Goals and Progress 0479. The OMS for each practice or group of practices shown in the table below is a guide to progress. Prac
Range
Total Rounds
OMS Requirement
HPS
1-3
100m
27
16
23
4-6
200m
27
16
23
7-9
300m
27
16
23
10
400m
12
6
12
End of Lesson Procedure
4-23
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
LSW LF 5 — TIME CHART 0480. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed. Practice
Range/Target
1
100 m Figure 11
2
100 m Figure 11
3
100 m Figure 11
4
200 m Figure 11
5
4-24
Timings
Remarks
UP DOWN 05 10 16 21 25 30 35 40 43 48 UP DOWN 05 26
Fall when hit.
UP 05 21 37 53
DOWN 11 27 43 59
Fall when hit.
As for Practice 1.
Fall when hit.
200 m Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 19 29 35 45 51 1:01 1:07
Fall when hit.
6
200 m Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 18
Up and hold.
7
300 m Figure 11
As for Practice 1.
8
300 m Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 18
9
300 m Figure 11
As for Practice 3.
10
400 m Triple Figure 11
UP 05 17 28 40
DOWN 12 24 35 47
Up and hold.
1. Fall when hit. 2. Personnel fire from the 400 m firing point on an ETR. 1. Up and hold. 2. Personnel fire from the 400 m firing point on an ETR. 1. Fall when hit. 2. Personnel fire from the 400 m firing point on an ETR. Up and hold.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
LSW ACMT Preparation A. RCO Notes 0481. Aim. To prepare the firer for the ACMT; by zeroing the weapon and identifying the MPI of groups fired from all of the ranges and firing positions used during the ACMT in order to establish the correct Points of Aim (POA). 0482. Firing Requirement. This shoot must be fired annually by all personnel employed in the BCC Role whose personal or alternate weapon is the LSW, immediately prior to the ACMT . It is not fired during Phase 1 Other Arms Recruit Training or during Infantry Phase 2 Training because the LF lesson sequence is fired instead. 0483. Ranges. This ACMT Preparation can be conducted on the same range as the ACMT, ETR, GR, CGR. 0484. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 120 minutes to complete practices 1 to 8. 0485. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x Figure 11 on a screen with a 75 mm x 100 mm white patch (bottom centre of the patch on the centre of the figure) per firer. 1 x Figure 11 at 100,200, 300 metres per firer 1 x Triple Figure 11 at 400 metres per firer or SARTS converted range 1 x Figure 11 at 100,200, 300 metres per firer 1 x Triple Figure 11 at 400 metres per firer 25 x rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer (Zeroing) 80 x rounds 5.56 mm 4BiT ammunition per firer 0486. Miscellaneous. a. The dress and equipment for the ACMT Preparation is to be the same as the ACMT. b. Weapons must be collimated or bore sighted before live firing commences. c. Firers must achieve a 225 mm group with 20 rounds from the prone position at 100 metres with Optic Sight during Practice 1 before adjusting their sights. d. Coaching is permitted during the ACMT Preparation. However, as the LF is for trained personnel they must be encouraged to make their own decisions when zeroing, establishing MPI and recording their POA for all ranges and firing positions used in the ACMT. 4-25
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
e. Conducting officers, NCO coaches and personnel are to be fully conversant with the details in Ref B relating to Zeroing and Application of Fire. f. To maximise First Time Pass Rates (FTPR), after this ACMT Preparation and before the ACMT is fired on a range, the ACMT should be conducted on the DCCT to familiarise firers with the practices.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0487. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0488. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)). Practice Details 0489. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Zeroing Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Figure 11 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d 1. Fire 4 x 5 round groups at the same aiming mark. 2. The firer is to apply his safety catch, stand up, and then re-adopt his position between groups. 3. Discuss the group and measure the group size. 4. Identify the MPI and adjust for zero if necessary.
Practice 2. Check Group Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
4-26
Figure 11 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d 1. Fire a 5 round check group to confirm zero. 2. If the correct zero is not achieved repeat Practice 1 using the group plus a further 15 rounds. 3. Once zero is con- firmed record settings using the SAC.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 3. Establish POA 100 m Range/Positioning
100 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
15 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 2-3 rounds bursts application to confirm the MPI. 2. Firers are to record their POA on the shooting record. 3. Fire further bursts to confirm the POA.
Practice 4. Establish POA 200 m Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 5 rounds application to confirm the MPI. 2. If possible all shots are to be signalled or viewed 3. Firers are to record their POA on the shooting record. 4. Fire further rounds (5 maximum) to confirm the POA.
Practice 5. Establish POA 200 m Range/Positioning
200 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
15 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 2-3 rounds bursts application to confirm the MPI. 2. If possible all shots are to be signalled or viewed. 3. Firers are to record their POA on the shooting record. 4. Fire further bursts to confirm the POA.
Practice 6. Establish POA 300 m Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 5 rounds application to confirm the MPI. 2. If possible all shots are to be signalled or viewed 3. Firers are to record their POA on the shooting record. 4. Fire further rounds (5 maximum) to confirm the POA.
4-27
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 7. Establish POA 300 m Range/Positioning
300 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
15 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 2-3 rounds bursts application to confirm the MPI. 2. If possible all shots are to be signalled or viewed. 3. Firers are to record their POA on the shooting record. 4. Fire further bursts to confirm the POA.
Practice 8. Establish POA 400 m Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
15 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 5 rounds application to confirm the MPI. 2. If possible all shots are to be signalled or viewed 3. Firers are to record their POA on the shooting record. 4. Fire further rounds (5 maximum) to confirm the POA.
End of Lesson Procedure
4-28
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
LSW ACMT A. RCO Notes 0490. Firing Requirement. ACMT is to be fired annually by all personnel whose personal weapon is the LSW. 0491. Ranges. LSW ACMT can be fired on an ETR, Gallery Range or CGR. Where the test is fired on ranges converted to SARTS the firing point monitors are to be positioned where the firers cannot view them. 0492. Ranges. LSW ACMT can be fired on an ETR, GR or CGR. 0493. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to complete. 0494. Stores. CGR Left Coffin Right Coffin
— Triple Figure 11 } In each — Single Figure 11 } lane
ETR 100 m and 200 m 300 m
— Single Figure 11 — Triple Figure 11
SARTS 100-300 m 400 m
— Figure 11 — Figure 11 with triple Figure image on monitor
0495. Rules. a. The dress and equipment for this test is to be combat dress, belt order webbing, combat body armour (as issued), combat helmets and issued, serviceable hearing protection. b.
No extra time will be given for stoppages.
c.
Coaching and signalling are not permitted.
d.
Optic Sight only is to be used.
e.
If fire trenches are not available, the prone position is to be used.
f.
All positions are to be bipod supported.
0496. Time Charts. A time chart is included after the Practice Details. 0497. Ammunition. ACMT — 73 rounds. 0498. Magazines. Magazines are to be filled and used in the following order: 17, 17, 27 and 12 4-29
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
B. CONDUCT OF THE LESSON Preliminaries 0499. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 04100. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 04101. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Snap Single Rounds Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 5 x 3 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit
Practice 2. Timed Bursts Range/Positioning
100 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4-30
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 4 x 5 second exposures with intervals of 10 seconds. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one burst of 2-3 rounds at each exposure. 4. Fire is judged to be effective if the target is hit once in each burst. 5. Score 2 points for each effective engagement. 6. Targets fall when hit
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 3. Rapid Single Rounds Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 1 x 15 second exposure. 1. Firer in the standing alert position (bipod folded), 5 m to the rear of the firing point. 2. Order “Watch out”. 3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to run onto the firing point, adopt the nominated position (bipod down) and fire 5 rounds at the exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
Practice 4. Timed Bursts Range/Positioning
200 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 4 x 5 second exposures with intervals of 10 seconds. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one burst of 2-3 rounds at each exposure. 4. Fire is judged to be effective if the target is hit once in each burst. 5. Score 2 points for each effective engagement. 6. Targets fall when hit.
Practice 5. Snap Single Rounds Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 2 rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
4-31
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 6. Rapid Single Rounds Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 1 x 15 second exposure. 1. Firer in the standing alert position (bipod folded), 5 m to the rear of the firing point. 2. Order “Watch out”. 3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to run onto the firing point, adopt the nominated position (bipod down) and fire 5 rounds at the exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
Practice 7. Timed Bursts Range/Positioning
300 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 4 x 5 second exposures with intervals of 10 seconds. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one burst of 2-3 rounds at each exposure. 4. Fire is judged to be effective if the target is hit once in each burst. 5. Score 2 points for each effective engagement. 6. Targets fall when hit.
Practice 8. Snap Single Rounds Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Triple Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 4 x 6 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 3 rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
04102. Scoring. Practices 1, 3, 5, 6 and 8 — One point per hit. Practices 2, 4 and 7
4-32
— 2 points per effective engagement
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
04103. Standard. The OMS for each practice is shown in the table below. If a firer fails a practice they must reshoot that practice only to achieve the OMS. Firers who fail are to have coaching before re-testing.
Prac
Range
Total Rounds
OMS Requirement
HPS
BCC
1&2
100m
17
9
13
3&4
200m
17
9
13
5-7
300m
27
16
23
8
400m
12
6
12
4-33
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
LSW ACMT — Time Chart 04104. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed. Practice
Range/Target
1
100 m Figure 11
UP 05 15 23 32 39
DOWN 09 19 27 36 43
Fall when hit.
2
100 m Figure 11
UP 05 21 37 53
DOWN 11 27 43 59
Fall when hit.
3
200 m Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 21
Up and hold.
4
200 m Figure 11
As for Practice 2
Fall when hit.
5
300 m Figure 11
UP 05 17 27 38 47
DOWN 10 22 32 43 52
1. Up and hold. 2. Personnel fire from 400 m firing point on an ETR.
6
300 m Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 21
1. Up and hold. 2. Personnel fire from 400 m firing point on an ETR.
7
300 m Figure 11
As for Practice 2
1. Fall when hit. 2. Personnel fire from 400 m firing point on an ETR.
8
400 m Triple Figure 11
4-34
Timings
UP 05 18 30 41
DOWN 12 25 37 48
Remarks
Up and hold.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Annual Firing in CBRN Conditions Instructional Shoot And Assessment A. Instructor’s Notes 04105. Aim. To practise and assess the firer in engaging targets in CBRN conditions by deliberate, snap and rapid shooting from the prone and kneeling unsupported and supported positions. 04106. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on either a CGR or ETR if converted to SARTS, or a GR. 04107. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 1 hour to complete all practices. If SARTS is being used it may be possible to reduce the timings. 04108. Time Chart. A time chart for Practices 5 to 8 is included after the practice details. 04109. Stores. Normal range stores Gallery Range (Practices 1 to 4) 1 x Figure 12 on a 1.220 m screen per firer inscribed with a 760 mm and a 1.220 m circle at 100 metres 1 x Figure 11 on a 1.220 m screen per firer inscribed with a 760 mm and a 1.220 m circle at 200 metres Gallery Range (Practices 5 to 8) 1 x Figure 12 at 100 metres per firer 1 x Figure 11 at 200 metres per firer or SARTS converted range 1 x Figure 12 per firer at 100 metres 1 x Figure 11 per firer at 200 metres 40 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer 04110. Miscellaneous. Full IPE should be worn. As a minimum firers are to wear respirator and CBRN gloves.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 04111. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 04112. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))
4-35
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice Details 04113. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Deliberate Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 12 on a screen or SARTS Figure 12
Instructions
1. Fire 5 rounds to identify the POA. 2. Record the score and note the appropriate POA on the shooting record card.
Practice 2. Deliberate Range/Positioning
100 m Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 12 on a screen or SARTS Figure 12
Instructions
As per Prac 1
Practice 3. Deliberate Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 11
Instructions
As per Prac 1
Practice 4. Deliberate Range/Positioning
200 m Kneeling Supported
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 11
Instructions
As per Prac 1
4-36
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Assessment Details 04114. Practice details are as follows: Practice 5. Snap Range/Positioning
100 m Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Figure 12 or SARTS Figure 12d. 2. 5 x 6 second exposures with 5 second intervals. 1. Fire in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
Practice 6. Rapid Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Figure 12 or SARTS Figure 12d. 2. 1 x 12 second exposure 1. Fire in the nominated position. 2. Order “Five rounds rapid, Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire five rounds at the exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
Practice 7. Snap Range/Positioning
200 m Kneeling Supported
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 5 x 8 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Fire in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
Practice 8. Rapid Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
200 m Prone 5 Rounds 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 1 x 12 second exposures. 1. Fire in the nominated position. 2. Order “Five Rounds Rapid, Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire five rounds at the exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
4-37
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Scoring 04115. One point per hit. Standards 04116. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at each firing distance in Practices 5 to 8. Failure to achieve the OMS at any firing distance will constitute a failure of the LF lesson, however, only the practices at the firing distances where the OMS was not met need to be fired again. Firers who fail are to undergo further practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness, before re-testing.
Prac
Range
Total Rounds
OMS Requirement
HPS
BCC
5&6
100m
10
6
10
7&8
200m
10
5
10
Time Chart 04117. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed.
4-38
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
5
100 m Figure 12
UP DOWN 05 12 17 24 29 36 41 48 53 1:00
Fall when hit.
Remarks
6
100 m Figure 12
UP DOWN 05 18
Up and hold.
7
200 m Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 14 19 28 32 41 45 54 59 1:08
Fall when hit.
8
200 m Figure 11
As for Practice 6.
Up and hold.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
CHAPTER 5 INFANTRY SECTION DESIGNATED MARKSMAN (SDM (LSW)) Scope 0501. Chapter 5 sets out all SDM live firing (LF) lessons to be completed in LFMT Stages 1, 2 and 3 of Training the Battle Shot. It includes the application of lessons to the Infantry and the progression and frequency with which they are to be fired. 0502. This progression and frequency of firing is essential for preparing personnel for the Infantry SDM Annual Combat Marksman- ship Test (ACMT) in LFMT Stage 3. It is also essential in preparing the firer for mandatory TLFTT and LFTT. The detail of TLFTT and LFTT is in Chapters 10 and 11 respectively.
Contents SCOPE 5-1 TRAINING AND FIRING SEQUENCE 5-1 SAFETY 5-2 CONDUCT OF LF LESSONS
5-2
WEAPON HANDLING TESTS GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 5-4 DEFINITION OF STANDARDS 5-4 WHTs 5-5 LF LESSON 1 5-9 LF LESSON 2
5-11
LF LESSON 3
5-13
LF LESSON 4
5-15
LF LESSON 5
5-18
LF LESSON 6
5-20
LF LESSON 7
5-24
ACMT PREPARATION 5-27 ACMT 5-31 CBRN INSTRUCTION/ASSESSMENT 5-37
Training and Firing Sequence 0503. Combat Infantryman’s Course (CIC). The LF lessons listed within the Commanders Guide are to be fired by all recruits during Combat Infantryman’s Course (CIC) using Optic Sight. Reserve recruits are to achieve the same standards as regular recruits: 0504. Regular and Reserve Units. The ACMT Preparation is to be fired annually by all DCC Role Firers in Regular and Reserve units whose personal weapon is the SDM (LSW). 0505. ACMT Familiarisation with DCCT. After the ACMT Preparation and before the ACMT is fired on the range, use of DCCT to familiarise firers with the ACMT Prac tices will improve First Time Pass rates and the overall standard of shooting. 0506. Remedial Training. DCCT provides an invaluable aid to the remedial train ing of the poor shot. COs are encouraged to make full use of the facilities wherever they are available. However, final confirmation must be by the use of live firing. All SDM (LSW) LF lessons can be fired on DCCT and may be used as a remedial aid or as a rehearsal prior to firing on the range.
5-1
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Safety 0507. It is mandatory for all firers to have completed WHTs prior to live firing of a weapon, in order to ensure a minimum standard of safety. Conducting officers must confirm that all personnel firing any weapon have completed the relevant WHTs prior to firing. Conduct of LF Lessons 0508. General Requirements. The general requirements of equipment and outline range procedures which apply to all ranges are shown below. Any requirements specific to a particular LF lesson are contained at the start of each lesson. 0509. Stores. The following stores are required: SDM (LSW)) complete to CES Cleaning material Issued, serviceable hearing protection Combat Helmets Issued Body Armour Personal Shooting Record Book Coach’s Aide Memoire (AF B71158) Binoculars First aid kit SAC Stop watches
1 per firer As required 1 per firer 1 per firer 1 per firer 1 per firer 1 per coach 1 per coach Complete As required As required
0510. Dress. The dress for (SDM (LSW)) LF lessons should include belt order webbing, Combat Helmets and body armour). Additionally, when OSPREY, Mark 7 helmets, ballistic eye protection and (SDM (LSW)) ancillaries are issued, the firer should be given the opportunity to practice with them. The dress rules for Phase One Recruits and Trainee Combat Infantrymen should be applied sensibly with a gradual increase in the amount of additional equipment. However, the conditions for the ACMT are to be rigorously applied. 0511. DCCT. Personnel are to fire the boresighting practice before firing any other shoots using DCCT. Firers can be given a preview of all the practices on DCCT in order to familiarise themselves with the conditions. 0512. SAC. The SAC is to be used to bore sight the rifle prior to firing a grouping practice. Once zeroed, the Personal Zeroing Position (PZP) is to be noted in the firers’ shooting record card and the reading is to be checked prior to any future live firing lesson. The SAC cannot be used for lessons fired on DCCT. 0513. Weapon and Firing Preparation. a. Where possible, SDM (LSW)s are to be prepared for firing prior to moving to the range, to ensure they are prepared under ‘ideal’ conditions and not those that may be experienced on the range. 5-2
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
b. Check each firer has the issued, serviceable hearing protection and his shooting record card in his possession. c. Observation of fall of shot is obvious using SUSAT at 25 metres. During grouping practices it must be emphasized to firers that they are to take the correct point of aim for each shot and avoid aiming off. d.
If fire trenches are not available the prone position is to be used.
0514. Aiming Marks. The POA is to be the bottom centre of the patch for Iron sights and at the bottom right or left corner when optic sights are used. 0515. Coaching. DCC Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms, The SA80 A2 (5.56 mm) System (Rifle, LSW and Carbine) and Associated Equipment contains full details of coaching requirements. Some essential points to ensure are: a. The conducting officer and all coaches on the range must have prior knowledge of coaching techniques. b. Where possible a coach should be with each firer. If there are insufficient coaches the Master Coach system should be used. c. For ranges up to and including 300 metres, sights are to be set at 300. Personnel are to be reminded to alter their sights prior to firing at ranges beyond 300 metres. d. All group sizes, MPIs, POAs for other positions, and scores are to be recorded on the firers’ personal shooting record card. e. Coaches are to be in possession of binoculars during all elementary and advanced application of fire lessons. 0516. Spotters. When grouping at 25 metres, to enable firers and coaches to gain the maximum information from the shots fired, members of the waiting detail should be employed as spotters, using binoculars, to plot the arrival of each shot or burst. To achieve maximum value from this type of live firing, it is essential that firers are given every opportunity to discuss the results of their shooting with their coach. 0517. Guide to Progress. Firers who do not attain the suggested measure of pro gress should be given further coaching or firing practice before progressing. 0518. Scoring. Scores are to be recorded and announced to the firers at the end of each practice. Details of the scoring system are shown in each individual lesson. 0519. End of Lesson Procedure. At the end of each LF lesson the following drills are to be completed once the range has been cleared: a.
Questions from the firers on the range period. 5-3
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
b.
Normal safety precautions/declaration.
c.
Pack kit.
d. Summary of standard achieved, specific points relevant to lesson, forecast of the next SDM (LSW) LF lesson. WHTs General Instructions 0520. Purpose. The purpose of WHTs is to provide a measure of personal weapon handling skill throughout the Services in line with operational safety and handling requirements. Mandatory testing ensures that handling skills of all personnel are monitored accurately and rectified if necessary. 0521. Testing and Results. a. All tests are to be carried out in daylight and conducted by a qualified, competent instructor. Standards are to be measured: (1)
At an appropriate stage during Phase 1 Recruit Training.
(2) At intervals in accordance with MATTs for regular and reserve units. b. Results. All results must be recorded in accordance with unit and chain of command procedures. 0522. Conduct. NSPs are to be carried out by the instructor on all weapons and drill ammunition prior to any WHT taking place. Tests are to be completed consecutively and are to be carried out in barracks using drill ammunition. 0523. Dress. Tests are to be carried out wearing belt order webbing with combat helmet and Issued Body Armour. Definition of Standards 0524. Handling Standards. Handling Standards achieved in WHTs are defined as: Pass — Pass in all tests. Fail
— Fail in any test.
0525. Training Performance Standards. A firer is considered competent on achieving the pass standard. Failure to meet the pass standard indicates that the firer is not competent in the use of the SDM (LSW). Retesting is to be carried out on completion of remedial training on the individual test(s) that were failed.
5-4
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
WHTs SDM (LSW) Subject Stores Conditions Marking
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
Subject Stores Conditions Marking
Test No. 1 Safety SDM (LSW) unloaded. Safety Catch at ‘F’, change lever at ‘R’. Weapon lying on the ground. 1. Order the firer to “Take control of the weapon”. The firer, without further direction, is to pick up the weapon and carry out full normal safety precautions 1. Standard: Pass Fail Test No. 2 Stripping, Cleaning and Assembling SDM (LSW) with sling fitted, unloaded, cleaning roll (with combination tool out), flannelette and oil. 1. Order the firer to “Strip the SDM (LSW) as for daily cleaning”. Ask the following questions: a. What size flannelette is used to clean the barrel? b. What size flannelette is used to oil the barrel? c. What are the differences to normal daily cleaning when in the following conditions? (choose any 2 conditions) (1) Heavy rain and damp conditions. (2) Dry, sandy or dusty conditions. (3) Cold and extreme cold conditions. (4) Hot, wet conditions. 2. Order the firer to indicate the parts of the combination tool that are used to clean the gas plug. 3. Order the firer to “Assemble the SDM (LSW) and carry out the function test”. 4. Ask the following question: a. If during the function test, or at any time you notice the change lever over-rotates beyond its stops, what action is to be taken. 1. Standard: Pass — 1 to 2 mistakes. Fail — More than 2 mistakes. 2. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety. Test No. 3 Magazine Filling 30 rounds, magazine, stopwatch. On the command “Go” the firer fills his magazine with 30 rounds by hand. Instructor’s Note: All ammunition is to be removed from the magazine, fit depressor. Standard: Pass — Less than 75 seconds. Fail — Over 75 seconds.
5-5
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
Subject Stores Conditions Marking
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
5-6
Test No. 4 Loading – Prone Bipod Supported Position SDM (LSW), one magazine in fastened pouch. 1. Order “Bipod Supported Position – down”. 2. Give the command “Load”. Pouches must be refastened. Instructor’s Note: Leave weapon loaded for Test No 5. 1. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 2. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 3. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety. Test No. 5 Ready Drill Prone Position SDM (LSW) loaded (from Test No. 4), representative targets Once the firer has aligned himself, on to the target order “Ready” or issue a range. 1. The actions test- ed are those relating to the Ready Drill only. 2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 3. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety. Test No. 6 Immediate Action (IA) Forward Assist SDM (LSW) loaded representative targets 1. Order “Fire”. 2. Order “SDM (LSW) firing alright – SDM (LSW) stops”. Firer to carry out the IA...”Cocking handle fully forward”. Firer is to tap forward on the cocking handle and continue firing. 3. Order “SDM (LSW) fires alright” “Stop”. 1. The actions tested are those relating to the (IA) and Forward Assist Drills only. 2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 3. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
Test No. 7 IA and Loose Magazine Drill SDM (LSW) loaded, - representative targets. 1. Order “Fire” “SDM (LSW) firing alright – SDM (LSW) stops”. Firer to carry out the IA...”Cocking handle fully forward”. Firer is to tap forward on the cocking handle and continue firing. 2. Order “SDM (LSW) still fails to fire”. 3. On examination of body and chamber order “Rounds in magazine – chamber clear”. Alloy the firer to complete the drill and fire. 4. Order “SDM (LSW) fires alright” “Stop”. 1. The actions tested are those relating to the Loose Magazine Drill only. 2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 3. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety. Test No. 8 IA and Obstruction Drill SDM (LSW) loaded, representative targets. 1. Order “Fire” “SDM (LSW) firing alright – SDM (LSW) stops”. Firer to carry out the IA...“Cocking handle NOT fully forward”. 2. On examination of the body and chamber, order “Obstruction”. 3. When the firer has removed the magazine and attempted to clear the obstruction by hand or using a tool from the maintenance kit, order “Obstruction Clear”. 4. When the firer has visually inspected the chamber order “Chamber Clear”. 5. Firer is to complete the Obstruction Drill. 6. Order “SDM (LSW) fires alright” “Stop”. 1. The actions tested are those relating to the Obstruction Drill only. 2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 3. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
5-7
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
Subject Stores Conditions Marking
5-8
Test No. 9 IA and Empty Magazine Drill SDM (LSW) loaded, representative targets. 1. Instruct the firer to cock the weapon and apply the Holding Open Catch, with the working parts held to the rear, order “Test and adjust – fire” “SDM (LSW) firing alright – SDM (LSW) stops”. 2. Firer is to carry out the IA...”Empty Magazine”. Firer is to carry out the drill for an empty magazine. 3. When the firer has completed the drill and continues firing, order “SDM (LSW) fires alright” “Stop”. 1. The actions tested are those relating to the Empty Magazine Drill only. 2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 3. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety. Test No. 10 Unloading SDM (LSW) loaded and ready (from Test No. 9) The test follows on from Test No. 9. Give the command “Unload”. The test is not complete until the firer has recovered the ejected round, replaced it in the magazine and fastened the pouch. 1. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 2. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 3. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
SDM LF 1. — Introductory Shoot at 25 Metres (Prone) A. RCO Notes 0526. Aim. To confirm that the firer knows how to prepare the SDM(LSW) for firing. Then by firing single shots confirm that the firer can aim, hold and fire the weapon. Finally, to confirm that he knows how to clean the SDM (LSW) after firing. 0527. Conduct. This lesson is to be conducted on a 25 metre range or ETR with screens placed 25 metres from the firers. 0528. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to complete all practices. 0529. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x sheet of talc per coach 1 x Non-permanent marker pen per coach 1 x witness screen per firer each with 4 x 25 mm square aiming marks 34 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0530. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0531. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate where necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Preparation for Firing 0532. Explain that the procedures for preparing the SDM (LSW) for firing and cleaning after firing are the same as for the rifle. Practice Details 0533. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Familiarisation Single Rounds Range/Positioning
25 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
2 x 25 mm aiming marks on a screen
Instructions
1. Fire a 5 round group at each aim- ing mark. 2. Discuss the groups and record the group sizes.
5-9
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Familiarisation Bursts on Screen Range/Positioning
25 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds (4 mags of 3 rounds)
Target/ Exposure
4 x 25 mm aiming marks on a screen
Instructions
1. Fire one burst of 3 rounds at each aiming mark. 2. Discuss the groups, record the group sizes.
Practice 3. Confirmation Bursts Range/Positioning
25 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
4 x 25 mm aiming marks on a screen
Instructions
1. Fire one burst of 2-3 rounds at each aiming mark. 2. Discuss the groups and record the first round and burst group sizes.
Firers Goals and Progress 0534. The following group sizes should be used as a guide to progress during practice 1: a.
Dismounted Close Combat Role – 46-65mm
After Firing Procedure 0535. Cleaning after Firing. Confirm Stripping, Cleaning and Assembling. 0536. Confirm by practice. LSWs are to be inspected and left lightly oiled. 0537. Care after Cleaning. Remind: Under normal circumstances the bore, chamber and other gas affected parts must be thoroughly cleaned, inspected and reoiled daily for a minimum period of five days after the LSW has been fired. End of Lesson Procedure
5-10
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
SDM LF 2. — Zeroing at 25 Metres A. RCO Notes 0538. Aim. To zero the weapon by superimposing the firers’ MPI onto the CZP, 0539. Conduct. This lesson is to be conducted on a 25 metre range or ETR with screens placed 25 metres from firers. 0540. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 15 minutes to complete all practices. 0541. Stores. Normal range stores (25 m range) 1 x witness screen target 1 x 25 m zeroing chart for each firer 12 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer 0542. Miscellaneous a. Firers must achieve a 50 mm group with 3 rounds from the prone position at 25 metres with Iron Sight or 38 mm group with Optic Sight during Practice 2 before their sights are adjusted. b. Conducting officers, NCO coaches and firers (when applicable) are to be fully conversant with the details in Ref B relating to Zeroing. c. Weapons must be collimated or bore sighted before live firing commences. d. Firers are to record in their Shooting Record Card any displacement of the MPI from the CZP when firing from positions other than prone. Coaches are to emphasise the importance of this to their firers.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0543. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0544. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 0545. Practice details are as follows:
5-11
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 1. Grouping Range/Positioning
25m Prone
Ammunition
9 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1 x 25 m zeroing chart for each firer
Instructions
1. Fire 3 x 3 round groups at the same aiming mark. 2. The firer is to apply their safety catch, stand up, then re-adopt their position between each group. 3. Discuss the group and measure the group size. 4. Identify the MPI and adjust for zero if necessary.
Practice 2. Check Group Range/Positioning
25 m Prone
Ammunition
3 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1 x 25 m zeroing chart for each firer
Instructions
1. Fire a 3 round check group to confirm zero. 2. If the correct zero is not achieved (see Rifle Lesson 17), repeat Practice 1 using the group plus a further 6 rounds. 3. Once zero is con- firmed record settings using the SAC.
Firers Goals and Progress 0546. The following 3 round group sizes are necessary to accurately zero: a.
Dismounted Close Combat Role – 38mm
End of Lesson Procedure 0547. Personal Zeroing Positions (PZPs) are to be recorded once correctly zeroed.
5-12
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
SDM LF 3 – Grouping at 100 Metres A. RCO Notes 0548. Aim. To confirm that the SDM can apply his group to the centre of the target from the prone and fire trench positions. 0549. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on either a CGR (with or without SARTS), an ETR if converted to SARTS, or a GR. 0550. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 20 minutes to complete all practices. If SARTS is used, it may be possible to reduce the timings. 0551.
Stores. Normal Range Stores 2 x 1.220m screens with Figure 11 per firer or 1 x Figure 12d per firer (on SARTS converted range) 20 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer
Preliminaries 0552. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0553. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the Range Safety Rules (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)). Practice Details 0554. Practice details as follows: Practice 1. Grouping Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d.
Instructions
1. Fire a 5 round group. 2. Discuss the group, record the group size. 3. Repeat the practice.
5-13
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Grouping Range/Positioning
100 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d.
Instructions
1. Fire a 5 round group. 2. Discuss the group, position of the MPI and note any adjustments needed to the POA. 3. Record group size. 4. Repeat the practice.
Standards 0555. The group sizes that should be achieved are: Practice 1 – 150 mm Practice 2 – 150 mm End of Lesson Procedure
5-14
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
SDM LF 4 – Elementary Application of Fire 200 – 400 Metres A. RCO Notes 0556. Aim. To practise the SDM in engaging targets by deliberate fire, using single shots, from the prone and fire trench positions. 0557. Conduct. The lesson should ideally be conducted on either a CGR (with or without SARTS), or a GR. It may also be conducted on an ETR if converted to SARTS. 0558. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 45 minutes to complete all practices. If SARTS is being used it may be possible to reduce the timings. 0559.
Stores. Normal range stores Gallery Range or CGR without SARTS 100-300 m – 1 x Figure 11 on a 1.220 m screen per firer inscribed with a 760 mm and a 1.220 m circle 400 m – 1 x Triple Figure 11 per firer CGR and ETR fitted with SARTS CGR Left Coffin–Triple Figure 11 } In each Right Coffin–Single Figure 11 } lane ETR 100m and 200m –Single Figure 11 300m–Triple Figure 11 or SARTS converted range SARTS Figure 11 with scoring area image on monitor (100-200 metres) SARTS Figure 11 with triple Figure 11 image on monitor (300-400 metres) 35 rounds 5.56 mm 4B1T ammunition per firer (Ball ammunition if tracer ban is in force)
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0560. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0561. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)). Practice Details 0562. Practice details are as follows:
5-15
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 1. Grouping Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
Figure 11 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d. 1. Fire 1 x 5 rounds groups at the aiming mark. 2. Discuss the group, record the group size.
Practice 2. Deliberate Range/Positioning
200 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 5 rounds application. 2. All shots are to be signalled. 3. Discuss results and note the appropriate POA on the shooting record card.
Practice 3. Deliberate Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 5 rounds application. 2. All shots are to be signalled. 3. Discuss results and note the appropriate POA on the shooting record card.
Practice 4. Deliberate Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 5 rounds application. 2. All shots are to be signalled. 3. Discuss results and note the appropriate POA on the shooting record card.
5-16
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 5. Deliberate Range/Positioning
300 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 5 rounds application. 2. All shots are to be signalled. 3. Discuss results and note the appropriate POA on the shooting record card.
Practice 6. Deliberate Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11 on a screen or SARTS Triple Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 5 rounds application. 2. All shots are to be signalled. 3. Discuss results and note the appropriate POA on the shooting record card.
Practice 7. Deliberate Range/Positioning
400 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11 on a screen or SARTS Triple Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 5 rounds application. 2. All shots are to be signalled. 3. Discuss results and note the appropriate POA on the shooting record card.
Scoring 0563. After the 5 shots the target is lowered and all shot holes are indicated with spotting discs. 0564. The firer/coach will identify the MPI and establish the new POA. Fire a further 5 rounds. After the 5th shot the target is lowered and all shots are indicated with spotting discs. Firers Goals and Progress 0565. Achieving group sizes in relation to the ESA and applying fire successfully. End of Lesson Procedure
5-17
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
SDM LF 5 – Elementary Application of Fire 400 – 600 Metres A. RCO Notes 0566. Aim. To practise the SDM in engaging targets at longer ranges by deliberate fire, using single shots from the prone position. 0567. Conduct. The may be conducted on either a CGR (with or without SARTS), or a GR. It may also be conducted on an ETR if converted to SARTS. 0568. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. If SARTS is being used it may be possible to reduce the timings. 0569.
Stores. Normal range stores Gallery Range 1 x Figure 11 on a 1.220 m screen per firer inscribed with a 760 mm and a 1.220 m circle 1 x Triple Figure 11 per firer or SARTS Converted Range 1 x Figure 11 per firer with Triple Figure 11 image on monitor 35 rounds 5.56 mm 4B1T ammunition per firer (Ball ammunition if tracer ban is in force)
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0570. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0571. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)). Practice Details 0572. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Grouping Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
5-18
Figure 11 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d. 1. Fire 1 x 5 rounds groups at the aiming mark. 2. Discuss the group, record the group size.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Deliberate (Fired Twice) Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 5 rounds application. 2. All shots are to be signalled. 3. Discuss results and note the appropriate POA on the shooting record card. 4. Repeat the practice and record the score.
Practice 3. Deliberate (Fired Twice) Range/Positioning
500 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 5 rounds application. 2. All shots are to be signalled. 3. Discuss results and note the appropriate POA on the shooting record card. 4. Repeat the practice and record the score.
Practice 4. Deliberate (Fired Twice) Range/Positioning
600 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 5 rounds application. 2. All shots are to be signalled. 3. Discuss results and note the appropriate POA on the shooting record card. 4. Repeat the practice and record the score.
Scoring 0573. After the 5 shots the target is lowered and all shot holes are indicated with spotting discs. 0574. The firer/coach will identify the MPI and establish the new POA. Fire a further 5 rounds. After the 5th shot the target is lowered and all shots are indicated with spotting discs. Firers Goals and Progress 0575. Achieving group sizes in relation to the ESA and applying fire successfully. End of Lesson Procedure 5-19
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
SDM LF 6 – Advanced Application of Fire 100 – 400 Metres A. RCO Notes 0576. Aim. To practise the SDM in engaging targets by snap and rapid fire from the prone and fire trench positions. 0577. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on an ETR or CGR (with or without SARTS), where these ranges are not available it may be fired on a GR. 0578.
Time Chart. A time chart is included after the Practice Details.
0579. Timing. practices. 0580.
Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all
Stores. Normal range stores 1 x Figure 11 on a 1.220 m screen per firer inscribed with a 760 mm and a 1.220 m circle ETR 1 x Figure 11 at 100/200 metres 1 x Triple Figure 11 at 300 metres CGR Left Coffin - Triple Figure 11 } In each Right Coffin - Single Figure 11 } lane Gallery Range 1 x Figure 11 per firer at 100-300 metres 1 x Triple Figure 11 per firer at 400 metres or SARTS converted range SARTS Figure 11 per firer at 100-300 metres SARTS Figure 11 with triple Figure 11 image on monitor per firer at 400 metres 62 rounds 5.56 mm 4B1T ammunition per firer (Ball ammunition if tracer ban is in force)
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0581. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0582. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) 0583. Miscellaneous. Range Conducting Officers are to note that when the lesson is fired on an ETR, firing from 400m may restrict the number of firers to 8 (Targets 1 to 4 and 9 to 12). Practice Details 0584. Practice details as follows: 5-20
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 1. Grouping Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
Figure 11 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Figure 11. 1. Fire 1 x 5 rounds groups at the aiming mark. 2. Discuss the group, record the group size.
Practice 2. Snap Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
Practice 3. Rapid Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 1 x 20 second exposure.
Instructions
1. Firer in the standing alert position (bipod folded), 5m to the rear of the firing point. 2. Order “Watch Out”. 3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to run onto the firing point, adopt the nominated position (bipod down) and fire 10 rounds at the expo- sure. 4. Targets up and hold.
Practice 4. Snap Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
5-21
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 5. Rapid Range/Positioning
200 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
10 Rounds 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 1 x 12 second exposure. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 10 rounds at the exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
Target/ Exposure Instructions
Practice 6. Snap Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
Target/ Exposure Instructions
Practice 7. Rapid Range/Positioning
300 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
10 Rounds 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 1 x 12 second exposure. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 10 rounds at the exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
Target/ Exposure Instructions
Practice 8. Snap Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds 1. Triple Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 4 x 6 second exposures with irregular intervals 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 3 rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
Target/ Exposure Instructions
Scoring 0585. Scores are to be recorded and announced at the conclusion of each practice. Practices 2 to 8 – One point per hit. 5-22
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Firers Goals and Progress 0586. The OMS for each practice or group of practices shown in the table below is a guide to progress.
Prac
Range
Total Rounds
OMS Requirement
HPS
DCC
2&3
100m
15
11
15
4&5
200m
15
11
15
6&7
300m
15
11
15
8
400m
12
8
12
End of Lesson Procedure
SDM LF 6 – Time Chart Practice
Range/Target
Timings
2
100 m Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 10 16 21 25 30 35 40 43 48
Fall when hit.
Remarks
3
100 m Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 26
Up and Hold
4
200 m Figure 11
As for Practice 2.
Fall when hit.
5
200 m Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 18
Up and Hold
6
300 m Figure 11 (200m bank of tgts)
As for Practice 2.
1. Fall when hit. 2. Personnel fire from the 400 m firing point on an ETR with or without SARTS.
7
300 m Figure 11 (200m bank of tgts)
UP DOWN 05 18
1. Up and hold. 2. Personnel fire from the 400 m firing point on an ETR with or without SARTS.
8
400 m Triple Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 12 17 24 28 35 40 47
Up and Hold
5-23
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
SDM LF 7 – Advanced Application of Fire 400 – 600 Metres A. RCO’S Notes 0587. Aim. To practise the SDM in engaging targets by snap and rapid fire from the prone position. 0588. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on an ETR or CGR (with or without SARTS), where these ranges are not available it may be fired on a GR. 0589.
Time Chart. A time chart is included after the Practice Details.
0590. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 20 minutes to complete all practices. 0591. Stores. Normal range stores ETR 1 x Figure 11 on a 1.220 m screen per firer inscribed with a 760 mm and a 1.220 m circle 1 x Triple Figure 11 per firer or SARTS converted range SARTS Figure 11 with triple Figure 11 image on monitor per firer 41 rounds 5.56 mm 4B1T ammunition per firer (Ball ammunition if tracer ban is in force)
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0592. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0593. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 0594. Practice details as follows: Practice 1. Grouping Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
5-24
Figure 11 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d. 1. Fire 1 x 5 rounds groups at the aiming mark. 2. Discuss the group, record the group size.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Snap Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Triple Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 4 x 6 second exposures with intervals of 10 seconds. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 3 rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
Practice 3. Snap Range/Positioning
500 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Triple Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 4 x 6 second exposures with intervals of 10 seconds. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 3 rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
Practice 4. Snap Range/Positioning
600 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Triple Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 4 x 6 second exposures with intervals of 10 seconds. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 3 rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
Scoring 0595. Scores are to be recorded and announced at the conclusion of each practice. Practices 2 to 4 – One point per hit. Firers Goals and Progress 0596. The OMS for each practice or group of practices shown in the table below is a guide to progress.
5-25
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Prac
Range
Total Rounds
OMS Requirement
HPS
DCC
2
400m
12
8
12
3
500m
12
8
12
4
600m
12
8
12
End of Lesson Procedure
SDM LF 7 – Time Chart 0597. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed. Practice
Range/Target
Timings
2
400 m Triple Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 12 22 29 39 46 56 1:03
3
500 m Triple Figure 11
As for Practice 2.
Up and Hold
4
600 m Triple Figure 11
As for Practice 2.
Up and Hold
5-26
Remarks Up and Hold
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
SDM ACMT Preparation A. RCO Notes 0598. Aim. To prepare the firer for the ACMT; by zeroing the weapon and identifying the MPI of groups fired from all of the ranges and firing positions used during the ACMT in order to establish the correct Points of Aim (POA). 0599. Firing Requirement. This shoot must be fired annually by all personnel employed in the DCC Role whose personal or alternate weapon is the SDM (LSW), immediately prior to the ACMT. 05100. Ranges. This ACMT Preparation can be conducted on the same range as the ACMT (ETR, GR, CGR). 05101. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 120 minutes to complete practices 1 to 7. 05102. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x Figure 11 on a screen with a 75 mm x 100 mm white patch (bottom centre of the patch on the centre of the figure) per firer. 1 x Figure 11 at 100, 200 and 300 metres per firer 1 x Triple Figure 11 at 400, 500 and 600 metres per firer or SARTS converted range 1 x Figure 11 at 100, 200 and 300 metres per firer 1 x Triple Figure 11 at 400, 500 and 600 metres per firer 75 x rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer 05103. Miscellaneous. a. The dress and equipment for the ACMT Preparation is to be the same as the ACMT. b. Weapons must be collimated or bore sighted before live firing commences. c. Firers must achieve a 225 mm group with 20 rounds from the prone position at 100 metres with Optic Sight during Practice 1 before adjusting their sights. d. Coaching is permitted during the ACMT Preparation. However, as the LF is for trained personnel they must be encouraged to make their own decisions when zeroing, establishing MPI and recording their POA for all ranges and firing positions used in the ACMT.
5-27
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
e. Conducting officers, NCO coaches and personnel are to be fully conversant with the details in DCC Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms, The SA80 A2 and LSW (5.56 mm) System (Rifle, Light Support Weapon and Carbine) and Associated Equipment relating to Zeroing and Application of Fire. f. To maximise First Time Pass Rates (FTPR), after this ACMT Preparation and before the ACMT is fired on a range, the ACMT should be conducted on the DCCT to familiarise firers with the practices.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 05104. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 05105. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)). Practice Details 05106. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Zeroing Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Figure 11 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d 1. Fire 4 x 5 round groups at the same aiming mark. 2. The firer is to apply his safety catch, stand up and then re-adopt his position between groups. 3. Discuss the group and measure the group size. 4. Identify the MPI and adjust for zero if necessary.
Practice 2. Check Group Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
5-28
Figure 11 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d 1. Fire a 5 round check group to confirm zero. 2. If the correct zero is not achieved repeat Practice 1 using the group plus a further 15 rounds. 3. Once zero is con- firmed record settings using the SAC.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 3. Establish POA 200 m Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 5 rounds application to confirm the MPI. 2. If possible all shots are to be signalled or viewed 3. Firers are to record their POA on the shooting record. 4. Fire further rounds (5 maximum) to confirm the POA.
Practice 4. Establish POA 300 m Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 5 rounds application to confirm the MPI. 2. If possible all shots are to be signalled or viewed 3. Firers are to record their POA on the shooting record. 4. Fire further rounds (5 maximum) to confirm the POA.
Practice 5. Establish POA 400 m Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 5 rounds application to confirm the MPI. 2. If possible all shots are to be signalled or viewed 3. Firers are to record their POA on the shooting record. 4. Fire further rounds (5 maximum) to confirm the POA.
Practice 6. Establish POA 500 m Range/Positioning
500 m Prone
Ammunition
10 rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 5 rounds application to confirm the MPI. 2. If possible all shots are to be signalled or viewed 3. Firers are to record their POA on the shooting record. 4. Fire further rounds (5 maximum) to confirm the POA.
5-29
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 7. Establish POA 600 m Range/Positioning
600 m Prone
Ammunition
10 rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 5 rounds application to confirm the MPI. 2. If possible all shots are to be signalled or viewed 3. Firers are to record their POA on the shooting record. 4. Fire further rounds (5 maximum) to confirm the POA.
End of Lesson Procedure
5-30
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
SDM ACMT A. RCO Notes 05107. Firing Requirement. SDM (LSW)) ACMT is to be fired annually by all combat infantrymen who are appointed SDM. 05108. Ranges. SDM ((LSW)) ACMT can be fired on an ETR, Gallery Range or CGR. Where the test is fired on ranges converted to SARTS, the firing point monitors are to be positioned where the firers cannot view them. 05109. Stores. CGRs and ETRs are to be rigged as follows: CGR.
Right Coffin Left Coffin
– Single Figure 11 } In each – Triple Figure 11 } lane
ETR.
100 m and 200 m 300 m
– Single Figure 11 – Triple Figure 11
SARTS Ranges. 100-300 m – SARTS Figure 11 400-600 m – SARTS Figure 11 with Triple Figure 11 image on monitor 05110. Range Conducting Officers are to note that when the lesson is fired on an ETR, firing from 400m may restrict the number of firers to 8 (Targets 1 to 4 and 9 to 12) 05111. Timings. It will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices of ACMT. If an ETR is used, these timings might reduce. 05112. Rules. a. The dress and equipment for this test is to be combat dress, belt order webbing, combat helmet, combat body armour (as issued) and issued, serviceable hearing protection. b.
No extra time will be given for stoppages
c.
Coaching and signalling are not permitted.
d.
Optic sight only is to be used.
e.
If fire trenches are not available, the prone position is to be used.
f.
All positions are to be bipod supported.
g.
Ammunition allocation for ACMT includes 5 rounds for check zeroing.
05113. Time Charts. Time charts for the ACMT are included after the Practice Details. 05114. Ammunition. ACMT – 85 rounds including grouping. 5-31
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Preliminaries
B. Conduct of the Lesson
05115. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 05116. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) 05117. Revision. Practice 1. Grouping Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
Figure 11 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Figure 11. 1. Fire 1 x 5 rounds groups at the aiming mark. 2. Discuss the group, record the group size.
Practice Details 05118. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Snap Range/Positioning
600 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Triple Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 4 x 6 second exposures with irregular intervals 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 3 rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
Practice 2. Rapid Range/Positioning
500 m Prone
Ammunition
9 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
5-32
1. Triple Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 1 x 12 second exposure followed by 2 x 6 second exposures with irregular intervals 1. Firer in the standing alert position (bipod folded), 5m to the rear of the firing point. 2. Order “Watch Out”. 3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to run onto the firing point, adopt the nominated position (bipod down) and fire 3 rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 3. Snap Range/Positioning
500 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Triple Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 4 x 6 second exposures with irregular intervals 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 3 rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
Practice 4. Snap Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Triple Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 4 x 6 second exposures with irregular intervals 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 3 rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
Practice 5. Rapid Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 1 x 20 second exposure. 1. Firer in the standing alert position (bipod folded), 5m to the rear of the firing point. 2. Order “Watch Out”. 3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to run onto the firing point, adopt the nominated position (bipod down) and fire 10 rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
5-33
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 6. Snap Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 1 x 12 second exposure followed by 4 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firer in the standing alert position (bipod folded), 5m to the rear of the firing point. 2. Order “Watch Out”. 3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to run onto the firing point, adopt the nominated position (bipod down) and fire 2 rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
Practice 7. Rapid Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 1 x 20 second exposure. 1. Firer in the standing alert position (bipod folded), 5m to the rear of the firing point. 2. Order “Watch Out”. 3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to run onto the firing point, adopt the nominated position (bipod down) and fire 10 rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
Practice 8. Snap Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 1 x 11 second exposure followed by 4 x 3 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firer in the standing alert position (bipod folded), 5m to the rear of the firing point. 2. Order “Watch Out”. 3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to run onto the firing point, adopt the nominated position (bipod down) and fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
05119. Scoring. All practices – On point per hit.
5-34
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
05120. Standard. The OMS for each practice is shown in the table below. If a firer fails a practice they must reshoot that practice only to achieve the OMS. Firers who fail are to have coaching before re-testing.
Prac
Range
Total Rounds
OMS Requirement
HPS
DCC
2
600m
12
8
12
3
500m
21
15
21
4
400m
12
8
12
5
300m
20
14
20
6
200m
10
7
10
7
100m
5
3
5
5-35
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
SDM ACMT – Time Chart 05121. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed.
5-36
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
Remarks
1
600 m Triple Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 12 19 26 30 37 42 49
Up and hold.
2
500 m Triple Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 18 28 35 39 46
Up and hold.
3
500 m Triple Figure 11
As for Practice 1.
Up and hold.
4
400 m Triple Figure 11
As for Practice 1.
Up and hold.
5
300 m Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 26
1. Up and hold. 2. Personnel fire from the 400 m firing point on an ETR.
6
300 m Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 18 25 30 35 40 46 51 55 1:00
1. Up and hold. 2. Personnel fire from the 400 m firing point on an ETR.
7
200 m Figure 11
As for Practice 5.
Up and hold.
8
100 m Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 17 24 28 33 37 43 47 51 55
Up and hold.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Annual Firing in CBRN Conditions Instructional Shoot And Assessment A. Instructor’s Notes 05122. Aim. To practise and assess the firer in engaging targets in CBRN conditions by deliberate, snap and rapid shooting from the prone and kneeling unsupported and supported positions. 05123. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on either a CGR or ETR if converted to SARTS, or a GR. 05124. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 1 hour to complete all practices. If SARTS is being used it may be possible to reduce the timings. 05125. Time Chart. A time chart for Practices 5 to 8 is included after the practice details. 05126. Stores. Normal range stores Gallery Range (Practices 1 to 4) 1 x Figure 12 on a 1.220 m screen per firer inscribed with a 760 mm and a 1.220 m circle at 100 metres 1 x Figure 11 on a 1.220 m screen per firer inscribed with a 760 mm and a 1.220 m circle at 200 metres Gallery Range (Practices 5 to 8) 1 x Figure 12 at 100 metres per firer 1 x Figure 11 at 200 metres per firer or SARTS converted range 1 x Figure 12 per firer at 100 metres 1 x Figure 11 per firer at 200 metres 40 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer 05127. Miscellaneous. Full IPE should be worn. As a minimum firers are to wear respirator and CBRN gloves.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 05128. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 05129. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))
5-37
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice Details 05130. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Deliberate Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 12 on a screen or SARTS Figure 12
Instructions
1. Fire 5 rounds to identify the POA. 2. Record the score and note the appropriate POA on the shooting record card.
Practice 2. Deliberate Range/Positioning
100 m Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 12 on a screen or SARTS Figure 12
Instructions
As per Prac 1
Practice 3. Deliberate Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 11
Instructions
As per Prac 1
Practice 4. Deliberate Range/Positioning
200 m Kneeling Supported
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 11
Instructions
As per Prac 1
5-38
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Assessment Details 05131. Practice details are as follows: Practice 5. Snap Range/Positioning
100 m Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Figure 12 or SARTS Figure 12. 2. 5 x 6 second exposures with 5 second intervals. 1. Fire in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
Practice 6. Rapid Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Figure 12 or SARTS Figure 12. 2. 1 x 12 second exposure 1. Fire in the nominated position. 2. Order “Five rounds rapid, Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire five rounds at the exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
Practice 7. Snap Range/Positioning
200 m Kneeling Supported
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 5 x 8 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Fire in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
Practice 8. Rapid Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 1 x 12 second exposures. 1. Fire in the nominated position. 2. Order “Five Rounds Rapid, Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire five rounds at the exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
5-39
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Scoring 05132. One point per hit. Standards 05133. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at each firing distance in Practices 5 to 8. Failure to achieve the OMS at any firing distance will constitute a failure of the LF lesson, however, only the practices at the firing distances where the OMS was not met need to be fired again. Firers who fail are to undergo further practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness, before re-testing. Prac
Range
Total Rounds
OMS Requirement
5&6
100m
10
6
10
7&8
200m
10
5
10
DCC
HPS
Time Chart 05134. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed.
5-40
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
5
100 m Figure 12
UP DOWN 05 12 17 24 29 36 41 48 53 1:00
Fall when hit.
6
100 m Figure 12
UP DOWN 05 18
Up and hold.
7
200 m Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 14 19 28 32 41 45 54 59 1:08
Fall when hit.
8
200 m Figure 11
As for Practice 6.
Remarks
Up and hold.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
CHAPTER 6 SHARPSHOOTER RIFLE 7.62MM L129A1 Scope 0601. Chapter 6 sets out all L129A1 live firing (LF) lessons to be completed in LFMT Stages 1, 2 and 3 of Training the Battle Shot. It includes the application of lessons to the Arms and Services and the progression and frequency with which they are to be fired. 0602. This progression and frequency of firing is essential for preparing personnel for the L129A1 Annual Combat Marksmanship Test (ACMT) in LFMT Stage 3. It is also essential in preparing the firer for mandatory TLFTT and LFTT. The actual detail of TLFTT and LFTT are in Chapters 10 and 11 respectively.
Contents SCOPE 6-1 TRAINING AND FIRING SEQUENCE 6-1 SAFETY 6-2 CONDUCT OF LF LESSONS 6-2 WEAPON HANDLING TESTS GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 6-4 DEFINITION OF STANDARDS 6-4 WHTs 6-5 LF LESSON 1 6-8 LF LESSON 2 6-11 LF LESSON 3 6-14 LF LESSON 4 6-16 LF LESSON 5 6-20 LF LESSON 6 6-23 ACMT PREPARATION 6-25 ACMT 6-29 CBRN INSTRUCTION/ASSESSMENT 6-35
Training and Firing Sequence 0603. Initial Training. The LF lessons listed within the Commanders Guide are to be fired by all DCC role personnel during initial training of the L129A1. Reserve personnel are to achieve the same Firers Goals and Progress as regular personnel: 0604. DCC Role — Regular and Reserve Units. The ACMT Preparation is to be fired annually by all DCC Role firers in Regular and Reserve units whose personal weapon is the L129A1. 0605. ACMT Familiarisation with DCCT. After the ACMT Preparation and before the ACMT is fired on the range, use of DCCT once available to familiarise firers with the ACMT Practices will improve First Time Pass rates and the overall standard of shooting. 0606. Remedial Training. DCCT provides an invaluable aid to the remedial train ing of the poor shot. COs are encouraged to make full use of the facilities wherever they are available. However, final confirmation must be by the use of live firing. All Rifle LF lessons can be fired on DCCT and may be used as a remedial aid or as a rehearsal prior to firing on the range.
6-1
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Safety 0607. It is mandatory for all firers to have completed WHTs prior to live firing of a weapon, in order to ensure a minimum standard of safety. Conducting officers must confirm that all personnel firing any weapon have completed the relevant WHTs prior to firing. Conduct of LF Lessons 0608. General Requirements. The general requirements of equipment and outline range procedures which apply to all ranges are shown below. Any requirements specific to a particular LF lesson are contained at the start of each lesson. 0609. Stores. The following stores are required: L129A1 complete to CES Cleaning material Issued, serviceable hearing protection Combat Helmets Body Armour Personal Shooting Record Book Coach’s Aide Memoire (AF B71158) Binoculars First aid kit SAC Stop watch
1 per firer As required 1 per firer 1 per firer 1 per firer 1 per firer 1 per coach 1 per coach Complete As required As required
0610. Dress. Dress for L129A1 LF lessons should include belt order webbing. Combat helmets and body armour are to be worn for all DCCT and LF lessons. 0611. DCCT (Once Programmed). Personnel are to fire the bore sighting practice before firing any other shoots using DCCT. Firers can be given a preview of all the practices on DCCT in order to familiarise themselves with the conditions. 0612. Small Arms Collimator (SAC).. The SAC is to be used to bore sight the L129A1 prior to firing a grouping practice. Once zeroed, the PZP reading from SAC is to be noted in the firers’ shooting record card and the reading is to be checked prior to any future LF lesson. The SAC cannot be used for lessons fired on DCCT. 0613. Weapon and Firing Preparation. a. Where possible, weapons are to be prepared for firing prior to moving to the range, to ensure they are prepared under ‘ideal’ conditions and not those that may be experienced on the range. b. Check each firer has the issued, serviceable hearing protection and his shooting record card in his possession.
6-2
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
c. Observation of fall of shot is obvious using ACOG at 25 metres. During grouping practices it must be emphasized to firers that they are to take the correct point of aim for each shot and avoid aiming off. d.
If fire trenches are not available the prone position is to be used.
0614. Aiming Marks. Aiming Marks. Where white patches are used the POA is to be the bottom centre of the white patch. 0615. Coaching. Ref D contains full details of coaching requirements. Some essential points to ensure are: a. The conducting officer and all coaches on the range must have prior knowledge of coaching techniques. b. Where possible a coach should be with each firer. If there are insufficient coaches the Master Coach system should be used. c. All group sizes, MPIs, POAs for other positions, and scores are to be recorded on the firers’ personal shooting record card. d. Coaches are to be in possession of binoculars during all elementary and advanced application of fire lessons. 0616. Spotters. When grouping at 25 metres, to enable firers and coaches to gain the maximum information from the shots fired, members of the waiting detail should be employed as spotters, using binoculars, to plot the arrival of each shot or burst. To achieve maximum value from this type of live firing, it is essential that firers are given every opportunity to discuss the results of their shooting with their coach. 0617. Guide to Progress. Firers who do not attain the suggested measure of pro gress should be given further coaching or firing practice before progressing. 0618. Scoring. Scores are to be recorded and announced to the firers at the end of each practice. Details of the scoring system are shown in each individual lesson. 0619. End of Lesson Procedure. At the end of each LF lesson the following drills are to be completed once the range has been cleared: a.
Questions from the firers on the range period.
b.
Normal safety precautions/declaration.
c.
Pack kit.
d. Summary of standard achieved, specific points relevant to lesson, forecast of the next L129A1 LF lesson.
6-3
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
WHTs General Instructions 0620. Purpose. The purpose of WHTs is to provide a measure of personal weapon handling skill throughout the Services in line with operational safety and handling requirements. Mandatory testing ensures that handling skills of all personnel are monitored accurately and rectified if necessary. 0621. Testing and Results. a. All tests are to be carried out in daylight and conducted by a qualified, competent instructor. Standards are to be measured: (1)
At an appropriate stage during Phase 1 Recruit Training.
(2) At intervals in accordance with MATTs for regular and reserve units. b. Results. All results must be recorded in accordance with unit and chain of command procedures. 0622. Conduct. NSPs are to be carried out by the instructor on all weapons and drill ammunition prior to any WHT taking place. Tests are to be completed consecutively and are to be carried out in barracks using drill ammunition. 0623. Dress. Tests are to be carried out wearing belt order webbing with combat helmet and issued body armour. Definition of Standards 0624. Handling Standards. Handling Standards achieved in WHTs are defined as: Pass — Pass in all tests. Fail — Fail in any test. 0625. Training Performance Standards. A firer is considered competent on achieving the pass standard. Failure to meet the pass standard indicates that the firer is not competent in the use of the L129A1. Retesting is to be carried out on completion of remedial training on the individual test(s) that were failed.
6-4
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
WHTs 7.62mm Sharpshooter Rifle L129A1 Subject Stores Conditions Marking
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
Test No. 1 Safety Rifle unloaded. Weapon lying on the ground. 1. Order the firer to “Take control of the weapon”. The firer, without further direction, is to pick up the weapon and carry out full normal safety precautions 1. Standard: Pass Fail Test No. 2 Stripping, Cleaning and Assembling Rifle with sling fitted, unloaded, cleaning roll (with combination tool out), flannelette and oil. 1. Order the firer to “Strip the Rifle as for daily cleaning”. Ask the following questions: a. What size flannelette is used to clean the barrel? b. What size flannelette is used to oil the barrel? c. What are the differences to normal daily cleaning when in the following conditions? (choose any 2 conditions) (1) Heavy rain and damp conditions. (2) Dry, sandy or dusty conditions. (3) Cold and extreme cold conditions. (4) Hot, wet conditions. 2. Order the firer to “Assemble the Rifle and carry out the function test”. 1. Standard: Pass — Up to 2 mistakes. Fail — More than 2 mistakes. 2. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety. Test No. 3 Magazine Filling 20 rounds, magazine, stopwatch. On the command “Go” the firer fills his magazine with 20 rounds by hand. Instructor’s Note: All ammunition is to be removed from the magazine on completion, fit depressor. No time limit
6-5
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Subject Stores Conditions Marking
Subject Stores Conditions Marking
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
6-6
Test No. 4 Loading Rifle, one magazine in fastened pouch. 1. Give the command “Load”. Pouches must be refastened. Instructor’s Note: Leave weapon loaded for Test No 5. 1. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 2. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 3. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety. Test No. 5 Ready Drill Rifle loaded (from Test No. 4), representative targets 1. Order “Prone position down”. Once the firer has aligned himself, on to the target order “Ready” or issue a range. 1. The actions tested are those relating to the Ready Drill only. 2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 3. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety. Test No. 6 Immediate Action (IA) and Loose Magazine Rifle loaded representa- tive targets 1. Order “Fire” “Rifle firing alright – Rifle stops”. Firer to carry out the IA. 2. On examination of the body and chamber, order“Rounds in the magazine no rounds in the chamber” the firer is to check the magazine is correctly fitted operate the bolt release catch and continue firing. 3. Order “Rifle fires alright” “Stop”. 1. The actions tested are those relating to the (IA) and loose magazine only . 2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 3. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
Subject Stores Conditions Marking
Test No. 7 IA and Obstruction Drill Rifle loaded, representative targets. 1. Order “Fire” “Rifle firing alright – Rifle stops”. Firer to carry out the IA. 2. On examination of the body and chamber, order “Obstruction”. 3. When the firer has removed the magazine and attempted to clear the obstruction by hand or using a tool from the maintenance kit, order “Obstruction Clear”. 4. When the firer has visually inspected the chamber, order “Chamber Clear”. 5. Firer is to complete the Obstruction Drill. 6. Order “Stop”. 1. The actions tested are those relating to the Obstruction Drill only. 2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 3. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety. Test No. 8 IA and Empty Magazine Drill Rifle loaded, representative targets. 1. Instruct the firer to cock the weapon and apply the Bolt Release Catch, with the working parts held to the rear, order “Test and adjust – Fire” “Rifle firing alright – rifle stops”. 2. Firer is to carry out the IA...”Empty Magazine”. Firer is to carry out the drill for an empty magazine. 3. When the firer has completed the drill and continued firing, order “Stop”. 1. The actions tested are those relating to the Empty Magazine Drill only. 2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 3. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety. Test No. 9 Unloading Rifle loaded and ready The test follows on from Test No. 8. Give the command “Unload”. The test is not complete until the firer has recovered the ejected round, replaced it in the magazine and fastened the pouch. 1. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 2. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 3. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
6-7
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
LF 1. — Grouping and Zeroing at 100 Metres (All Positions) A. RCO Notes 0626. Aim. To zero the weapon by superimposing the personnel’ MPI onto the CZP, and compare the MPI of groups fired from the kneeling/squatting, sitting, standing positions and note any requirement to aim off. 0627. Conduct. This lesson may be conducted on either a CGR (with or without SARTS), an ETR if converted to SARTS or a GR. During the reprogramming of SARTs this LF lesson may have to be fired on a GR. 0628. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 2 hours to complete all practices 0629. Stores. Normal range stores 2 x 1.220 m screens with Figure 12 per firer each with a 75 mm x 100 mm white patch positioned with the bottom centre of the patch on the centre of the figure or 1 x Figure 12d per firer (on SARTS converted range) 56 x rounds 7.62 mm Ball ammunition per firer 0630. Miscellaneous. a. Firers must achieve a 75 mm group with 20 rounds from the prone position at 100 metres during Practice 2 before their sights are adjusted. b. Conducting officers, NCO coaches and personnel (when applicable) are to be fully conversant with the details in Ref D relating to Zeroing. c. The ACOG and Red dot Reflex sight must be bore sighted before live firing commences. d. Firers are to record in their Shooting Record Card any displacement of the MPI from the CZP when firing from positions other than prone. Coaches are to emphasise the importance of this to their firers. e. In order to complete Practice 3 on a SARTS range, the practice is divided into 3A and 3B. 3A presents a target for 1 minute, enabling 2 shots on fall when hit. 3B presents the target for 15 minutes up and hold enabling the Grouping procedure to be completed.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0631. Safety. Normal safety precautions.
6-8
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
0632. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 0633. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Grouping Range/Positioning
100 m Prone bipod supported
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
Figure 12 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d 1. Fire 1 x 5 round group at the aiming mark. 2. Discuss the group and record the group size.
Practice 2. Zeroing Range/Positioning
100 m Prone bipod supported
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Figure 12 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d 1. Fire 4 x 5 round groups at the same aiming mark. 2. The firer is to apply his safety catch, stand up, then re-adopt his position between each group. 3. Discuss the group and measure the group size. 4. Identify the MPI and adjust for zero if necessary.
Practice 3. Check Group Range/Positioning
100 m Prone bipod supported
Ammunition
7 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Figure 12 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d 1. Fire two rounds off the POA to stabilise the adjustment mechanism. 2. Fire a 5 round check group to confirm zero. 3. If the correct zero is not achieved (see Rifle Lesson 16, repeat Practice 2 using the group plus a further 15 rounds. 4. Once zero is confirmed record settings using the SAC.
Practice 4. Grouping Range/Positioning
100m prone unsupported
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Fig 12 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d
6-9
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Instructions
1. Fire a 3 round group. 2. Discuss the groups and record the group sizes. 3. Compare with the MPI achieved in the prone position and note any requirement to aim off. 4. Repeat the practice.
Practice 5. Grouping Range/Positioning
100 m Kneeling Unsupported/ Squatting
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d 1. Fire a 3 round group. 2. Discuss the groups and record the group sizes. 3. Compare with the MPI achieved in the prone bipod supported position and note any requirement to aim off. 4. Repeat the practice.
Practice 6. Grouping Range/Positioning
100 m Sitting Unsupported
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d 1. Fire a 3 round group. 2. Discuss the groups and record the group sizes. 3. Compare with the MPI achieved in the prone bipod supported position and note any requirement to aim off. 4. Repeat the practice.
Practice 7. Grouping Range/Positioning
100 m Standing Unsupported
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d 1. Fire a 3 round group. 2. Discuss the groups and record the group sizes. 3. Compare with the MPI achieved in the prone bipod supported position and note any requirement to aim off. 4. Repeat the practice.
End of Lesson Procedure 0634. Personal Zeroing Positions (PZPs) are to be recorded once correctly zeroed. 6-10
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
LF 2. — Elementary Application of Fire up to 300 Metres (All Positions) A. RCO Notes 0635. Aim. To practise the firer in engaging targets by deliberate fire from the prone (with and without bipod support), kneeling supported, kneeling unsupported/squatting, sitting unsupported and standing supported positions. 0636. Conduct. It may be conducted on either a CGR (with or without SARTS), or a GR. It may also be conducted on an ETR if converted to SARTS. During the reprogramming of SARTs this LF lesson may have to be fired on a GR 0637. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 2 hours to complete all practices 0638. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x Figure 12 on a 1.220 m screen inscribed with a 760 mm and a 1.220 m circle per firer at 100 metres. 1 x Figure 11 on a 1.220 m screen inscribed with a 760 mm and a 1.220 m circle per firer at 200-300 metres or SARTS converted range 1 x Figure 12d per firer at 100 metres 1 x Figure 11 per firer at 200-300 metre 39 rounds 7.62 mm Ball ammunition per firer (if required). 0639. Miscellaneous. POA from LF1 and the effect of range and wind should be discussed before each practice.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0640. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0641. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 0642. Practice details are as follows:
6-11
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 1. Grouping Range/Positioning
100 m Prone bipod supported.
Ammunition
3 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
Fig 12 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d 1. Fire 1 x 3 round group at the aiming mark. 2. Discuss the group and record the group size.
Practice 2. Deliberate Range/Positioning
200 m Prone bipod supported.
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 11 1. Fire 3 rounds application. 2. All shots are to be signalled. 3. Record the score and note the appropriate POA on the shooting record card. 4. Repeat the practice.
Practice 3. Deliberate Range/Positioning
200 m Prone Unsupported
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 11 1. Fire 3 rounds application. 2. All shots are to be signalled. 3. Record the score and note the appropriate POA on the shooting record card. 4. Repeat the practice.
Practice 4. Deliberate Range/Positioning
200 m Kneeling unsupported/ squatting.
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
6-12
Fig 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 11 1. Fire 3 rounds application. 2. All shots are to be signalled. 3. Record the score and note the appropriate POA on the shooting record card. 4. Repeat the practice.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 5. Deliberate Range/Positioning
200 m Kneeling supported
Ammunition
6 Rounds Fig 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 11 1. Fire 3 rounds application. 2. All shots are to be signalled. 3. Record the score and note the appropriate POA on the shooting record card. 4. Repeat the practice.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 6. Deliberate Range/Positioning
200 m Standing Supported
Ammunition
6 Rounds Fig 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 11 1. Fire 3 rounds application. 2. All shots are to be signalled. 3. Record the score and note the appropriate POA on the shooting record card. 4. Repeat the practice.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 7. Deliberate Range/Positioning
300 m prone bipod supported
Ammunition
6 Rounds Fig 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 11 1. Fire 3 rounds application. 2. All shots are to be signalled. 3. Record the score and note the appropriate POA on the shooting record card. 4. Repeat the practice.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Scoring 0643. After the 3 shots the target is lowered and all shot holes are indicated with spotting discs. 0644. The firer/coach will identify the MPI and establish the new POA. Fire a further 3 rounds. After the 3rd shot the target is lowered and all shots are indicated with spotting discs. Firers Goals and Progress 0645. Achieving group sizes in relation to the ESA and applying fire successfully. End of Lesson Procedure 6-13
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
LF 3 – Elementary Application of Fire 400 – 600 Metres A. RCO Notes 0646. Aim. To practise the firer in engaging targets at longer ranges from the prone position (with and without bipod support). 0647. Conduct. The may be conducted on either a CGR (with or without SARTS), or a GR. It may also be conducted on an ETR if converted to SARTS. During the reprogramming of SARTs this LF lesson may have to be fired on a GR 0648. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. If AMS is being used it may be possible to reduce the timings. 0649. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x Figure 11 on a 1.2 metre screen per firer or SARTS Converted Range 1 x Figure 11 per firer on monitor 21 rounds 7.62 mm Ball ammunition per firer
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0650. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0651. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)). Practice Details 0652. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Grouping Range/Positioning
100 m Prone bipod supported.
Ammunition
3 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
6-14
Fig 11 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d 1. Fire 1 x 3 round group at the aiming mark. 2. Discuss the group and record the group size.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Deliberate (Fired Twice) Range/Positioning
400 m Prone bipod supported.
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a 1.2m screen
Instructions
1. Fire 3 rounds application. 2. All shots are to be signalled. 3. Record the score and note the appropriate POA on the shooting record card. 4. Repeat the practice and record the score..
Practice 3. Deliberate (Fired Twice) Range/Positioning
500 m Prone bipod supported.
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a 1.2m screen
Instructions
1. Fire 3 rounds application. 2. All shots are to be signalled. 3. Record the score and note the appropriate POA on the shooting record card. 4. Repeat the practice and record the score..
Practice 4. Deliberate (Fired Twice) Range/Positioning
600 m Prone bipod supported.
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a 1.2m screen
Instructions
1. Fire 3 rounds application. 2. All shots are to be signalled. 3. Record the score and note the appropriate POA on the shooting record card. 4. Repeat the practice and record the score..
Scoring 0653. After the 3 shots the target is lowered and all shot holes are indicated with spotting discs. 0654. The firer/coach will identify the MPI and establish the new POA. Fire a further 3 rounds. After the 3rd shot the target is lowered and all shots are indicated with spotting discs. Firers Goals and Progress 0655. Achieving group sizes in relation to the ESA and applying fire successfully. End of Lesson Procedure 6-15
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
LF 4 – Advanced Application of Fire 100 – 300 Metres A. RCO Notes 0656. Aim. To practice the firer in engaging targets by snap and rapid fire from the combat positions. 0657. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on an ETR or CGR (with or without SARTS), where these ranges are not available it may be fired on a GR. During the reprogramming of SARTs this LF lesson may have to be fired on a GR. 0658. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the Practice Details. 0659. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. 0660. Stores. Normal range stores ETR 1 x Figure 12 at 100 metres 1 x Figure 11 at 200-300 metres CGR Gallery Range SARTS converted range SARTS Figure 12d per firer at 100 metres SARTS Figure 11 per firer at 200-300 metres 27 rounds 7.62 mm Ball ammunition per firer Preliminaries
B. Conduct of the Lesson
0661. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0662. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 0663. Practice details as follows: Practice 1. Grouping Range/Positioning
100m Prone bipod supported
Ammunition
3 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
6-16
Figure 12 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d. 1. Fire 1 x 3 rounds groups at the aiming mark. 2. Discuss the group, record the group size.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 5. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
100m Kneeling supported 3 Rounds 1. Figure 12 or SARTS Figure 12d. 2. 3 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
100 m Standing supported 3 Rounds 1. Figure 12 or SARTS Figure 12d. 2. 3 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
200 m Prone bipod supported 3 Rounds 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 3 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
200 m Prone unsupported 3 Rounds 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 3 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
6-17
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 6. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
Practice 7. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 8. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 9. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
6-18
200 m Sitting supported 3 Rounds 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 3 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
200 m Kneeling supported 3 Rounds 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 3 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
300 m Prone bipod supported 3 Rounds 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 3 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
300 m Sitting supported 3 Rounds 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 3 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Scoring 0664. Scores are to be recorded and announced at the conclusion of each practice. Practices 2 to 9 – One point per hit. Firers Goals and Progress 0665. The OMS for each practice or group of practices shown in the table below is a guide to progress Total Rounds
OMS Requirement
100m
6
4
6
200m
12
9
12
300m
6
4
6
Ser
Range
1 2 3
HPS
End of Lesson Procedure
LF 4 – Time Chart 0666. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed. Practice
Range/Target
Timings
Remarks
2
100 m Figure 12
UP DOWN 06 11 16 21 25 30
Fall when hit.
3
100 m Figure 12
As for Practice 2.
Fall when hit.
4
200 m Figure 12
As for Practice 2.
Fall when hit.
5
200 m Figure 12
As for Practice 2.
Fall when hit.
6
200 m Figure 12
As for Practice 2.
Fall when hit.
7
200 m Figure 12
As for Practice 2.
Fall when hit.
8
300 m Figure 12
As for Practice 2.
Fall when hit.
9
300 m Figure 12
As for Practice 2.
Fall when hit.
6-19
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
LF 5 – Advanced Application of Fire 400 – 600 Metres A. RCO Notes 0667. Aim. To practise the firer in engaging targets by snap and rapid fire from the prone position. 0668. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on an ETR or CGR (with or without SARTS), where these ranges are not available it may be fired on a GR. 0669. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the Practice Details. 0670. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 20 minutes to complete all practices. 0671. Stores. Normal range stores ETR 1 x Figure 12 at 100 metres 1 x Figure 11 at 200-300 metres CGR Gallery Range SARTS converted range SARTS Figure 12d per firer at 100 metres SARTS Figure 11 per firer at 200-300 metres 50 rounds 7.62 mm Ball ammunition per firer
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0672. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0673. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 0674. Practice details as follows: Practice 1. Grouping Range/Positioning 100 m Prone Ammunition 3 Rounds Figure 12 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Target/ Exposure Figure 12d. 1. Fire 1 x 3 rounds groups at the aiming mark. Instructions 2. Discuss the group, record the group size.
6-20
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
Practice 3. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
Practice 4. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
400 m Prone 15 Rounds 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 5 x 6 second exposures with intervals of 10 seconds. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 3 rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
500 m Prone 15 Rounds 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 5 x 6 second exposures with intervals of 10 seconds. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 3 rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
600 m Prone 15 Rounds 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 5 x 6 second exposures with intervals of 10 seconds. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 3 rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
Scoring 0675. Scores are to be recorded and announced at the conclusion of each practice. Practices 2 to 4 – One point per hit.
6-21
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Firers Goals and Progress 0676. The OMS for each practice or group of practices shown in the table below is a guide to progress. Prac
Range
Total Rounds
OMS Requirement
HPS
2
400m
15
12
15
3
500m
15
11
15
4
600m
15
11
15
End of Lesson Procedure
LF 5 – Time Chart 0677. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed.
6-22
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
2
400 m Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 12 23 30 40 47 56 1.03 1.15 1:22
Remarks
3
500 m Figure 11
As for Practice 2.
Up and Hold
4
600 m Figure 11
As for Practice 2.
Up and Hold
Up and Hold
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
LF 6. — Grouping (All Positions) With Red Dot Reflex Sight A. RCO’s Notes 0678. Aim. To practise the firer in engaging targets at short range using the Red dot reflex sight. 0679. Conduct. This lesson may be conducted on either a CGR (with or without SARTS), an ETR if converted to SARTS or a GR. During the reprogramming of SARTs this LF lesson may have to be fired on a GR. 0680. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. 0681. Stores. Normal range stores 2 x 1.220 m screens with Figure 12 per firer each with a 75 mm x 100 mm white patch positioned with the bottom centre of the patch on the centre of the figure or 1 x Figure 12d per firer (on SARTS converted range) 33 x rounds 7.62 mm Ball ammunition per firer. 0682. Miscellaneous. a.
Weapons must be boresighted before live firing commences.
b. Firers are to record in their Shooting Record Card any displacement of the MPI from the CZP when firing from positions other than prone. Coaches are to emphasise the importance of this to their firers. Preliminaries
B. Conduct of the Lesson
0683. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0684. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 0685. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Grouping Range/Positioning 50 m Prone bipod supported Ammunition 3 Rounds Fig 12 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or Target/ Exposure SARTS Figure 12d 1. Fire 1 x 3 round group at the aiming mark. Instructions 2. Discuss the group and record the group size.
6-23
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Grouping Range/Positioning 50 m Kneeling unsupported /squatting Ammunition 6 Rounds Fig 12 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or Target/ Exposure SARTS Figure 12d 1. Fire a 3 round group. 2. Discuss the groups and record the group sizes. Instructions 3. Compare with the MPI achieved in the prone bipod supported position and note any requirement to aim off. 4. Repeat the practice. Practice 3. Grouping Range/Positioning 50 m Standing unsupported Ammunition 6 Rounds Fig 12 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or Target/ Exposure SARTS Figure 12d Instructions As per practice 2 Practice 4. Grouping Range/Positioning 100 m Kneeling unsupported/squatting Ammunition 6 Rounds Fig 12 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or Target/ Exposure SARTS Figure 12d Instructions As per practice 2 Practice 5. Grouping Range/Positioning 100 m Sitting unsupported Ammunition 6 Rounds Fig 12 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or Target/ Exposure SARTS Figure 12d Instructions As per practice 2
End of Lesson Procedure
6-24
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
L129A1 ACMT Preparation A. RCO Notes 0686. Aim. To prepare the firer for the ACMT; by zeroing and identifying the MPI of groups fired from all the ranges and firing positions used during the ACMT in order to establish the correct Points of Aim 0687. Firing Requirement. This shoot is to be fired annually by all soldiers who are appointed as Sharpshooters with the 7.62mm Sharpshooter Rifle, prior to the ACMT 0688. Ranges. The ACMT Preparation can be fired on an ETR, Gallery Range or CGR. Where the test is fired on ranges converted to SARTS, the firing point monitors are to be positioned where the firers cannot view them. During the reprogramming of SARTs this LF lesson may have to be fired on a GR. 0689. Timing. It will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. If an ETR is used, these timings may reduce 0690. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x Figure 12 on a screen with a 75 mm x 100 mm white patch (bottom centre of the patch on the centre of the figure) per firer. 1 x Figure 12 at 100 metres per firer 1 x Figure 11 at 200-400 metres per firer or SARTS converted range 1 x Figure 12 at 100 metres per firer 1 x Figure 11 at 200-400 metres per firer 63 x rounds 7.62 mm Ball ammunition per firer 0691. Miscellaneous. a. The dress and equipment for the ACMT Preparation is to be the same as the ACMT. b. The ACOG and Red dot Reflex sight must be bore sighted before live firing commences. c. Coaching is permitted during the ACMT Preparation. However, as the LF is for trained personnel they must be encouraged to make their own decisions when zeroing, establishing MPI and recording their POA for all ranges and firing positions used in the ACMT. d. Conducting officers, NCO coaches and personnel are to be fully conversant with the details in Ref D relating to Zeroing and Application of Fire.
6-25
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
e. In order to complete Practice 2 on a SARTS range, the practice is divided into 3A and 3B. 3A presents a target for 1 minute, enabling 2 shots on fall when hit. 3B presents the target for 15 minutes up and hold enabling the Grouping procedure to be completed.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0692. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0693. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)). Practice Details 0694. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Zeroing Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100 m Prone bipod supported 20 Rounds Figure 12 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Figure 12 1. Fire 4 x 5 round groups at the same aiming mark. 2. The firer is to apply his safety catch, stand up, then re-adopt his position between each group. 3. Discuss the group and measure the group size. 4. Identify the MPI and adjust for zero if necessary.
Practice 2. Check Group Range/Positioning 100 m Prone bipod supported Ammunition 7 Rounds Figure 12 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Target/ Exposure Figure 12 1. Fire two rounds off the POA to stabilise the adjustment mechanism. 2. Fire a 5 round check group to confirm zero. Instructions 3. If the correct zero is not achieved (see Rifle Lesson 16, repeat Practice 1 using the group plus a further 15 rounds. 4. Once zero is confirmed record settings using the SAC.
6-26
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 3. Grouping Range/Positioning 50 m Standing Ammunition 3 Rounds Target/ Exposure 1. Figure 12 or SARTS Figure 12. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Fire 3 rounds application to confirm the MPI. Instructions 3. If possible the shots are to be signalled or viewed. 4. Record the MPI and POA. Practice 4. Grouping Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
100 m Standing 3 Rounds 1. Figure 12 or SARTS Figure 12 As per practice 3.
Practice 5. Grouping Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
100 m Kneeling/ squatting unsupported 3 Rounds 1. Figure 12 or SARTS Figure 12 As per practice 3.
Practice 6. Grouping Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
200 m prone unsupported 3 Rounds 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. As per practice 3.
Practice 7. Grouping Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
200 m Kneeling supported 3 Rounds 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. As per practice 3.
Practice 8. Grouping Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
300 m Sitting 3 Rounds 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. As per practice 3.
6-27
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 9. Grouping Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
300 m Prone bipod supported or unsupported 3 Rounds 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. As per practice 3.
Practice 10. Grouping Range/Positioning 400 m Prone bipod supported Ammunition 5 Rounds Target/ Exposure 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Fire 5 rounds application to confirm the MPI. Instructions 3. If possible the shots are to be signalled or viewed. 4. Record the MPI and POA. Practice 11. Grouping Range/Positioning 500 m Prone bipod supported Ammunition 5 Rounds Target/ Exposure 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. Instructions As per practice 10 Practice 12. Grouping Range/Positioning 600 m Prone bipod supported Ammunition 5 Rounds Target/ Exposure 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. Instructions As per practice 10
End of Lesson Procedure
6-28
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
L129A1 ACMT A. RCO Notes 0695. Firing Requirement. The ACMT is to be fired annually by all personnel who are appointed as Sharpshooters with the 7.62mm Sharpshooter Rifle. 0696. Ranges. The ACMT can be fired on an ETR, Gallery Range or CGR. Where the test is fired on ranges converted to SARTS, the firing point monitors are to be positioned where the firers cannot view them. 0697. Stores CGR.
Right Coffin Left Coffin
Figure 12 Figure 11
ETR.
100 m 200-600 m
- Figure 12 - Figure 11
SARTS Ranges.
100 200-600 m
SARTS Figure 12 SARTS Figure 11
– –
0698. When fired on an ETR, lane restrictions may apply from the 400m firing point and beyond. 0699. Timings. It will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. If an ETR is used, these timings might reduce. 06100. Rules. a. The dress and equipment for this test is to be combat dress, belt order webbing, combat helmet, body armour and issued, serviceable hearing protection. b.
No extra time will be given for stoppages
c.
Coaching and signalling are not permitted.
d.
Optic sight only is to be used.
e.
If fire trenches are not available, the prone position is to be used.
f.
All positions are to be bipod supported.
g.
Ammunition allocation for ACMT includes 5 rounds for check zeroing.
06101. Time Charts. Time charts for the ACMT are included after the Practice Details. 06102. Ammunition. ACMT – 61 rounds including grouping.
6-29
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
B. Conduct of the Lesson
Preliminaries
06103. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 06104. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) 06105. Preparation. Practice 1. Grouping Range/Positioning 100 m Prone Ammunition 5 Rounds Figure 12 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Target/ Exposure Figure 12. 1. Fire 1 x 5 rounds groups at the aiming mark. Instructions 2. Discuss the group, record the group size.
Practice Details 06106. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 2. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
6-30
50 m Standing 3 Rounds 1. Figure 12 or SARTS Figure 12. 2. 3 x 2 second exposures with irregular intervals 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 1 round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit
100 m Standing and kneeling/squatting unsupported 6 Rounds 1. Figure 12 or SARTS Figure 12. 2. 3 x double exposures of 3 seconds per exposure 1. Firer in the standing alert position. 2. Order “watch and shoot” 3. On appearance of the target fire 1 round from the standing and then adopt the kneeling or squatting position and fire a further round at the second exposure. 4. All targets are fall when hit 5. Only 1 round is to be fired from each position. 6. Stand up between exposures
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 3. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Rapid Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 5. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 6. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
200 m Prone unsupported 5 Rounds 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 5 x 7 second exposures standing in between exposures. 1. Fire in the standing alert position. Both hands must be on the rifle. 2. Order “watch out” 3. On appearance of the target the firer is to drop into the nominated position and fire 1 round at the target. 4. Targets fall when hit. 5. Apply safety catch and stand up between exposures. 200 m Kneeling supported 5 Rounds 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 1 x 10 second exposure. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 5 rounds rapid. 4. Targets up and hold 200 m Kneeling supported 3 Rounds 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 1 x 1 second flash exposure followed 4 seconds later by 3 x 4 second exposures at irregular intervals. 1. Firer in the standing alert position, 5m to the rear of the firing point. 2. Order “Watch Out”. 3. The appearance of the 1 second target is the signal for the firer to run onto the firing point, adopt the nominated position and fire 1 round at each subsequent exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
300 m Sitting 3 Rounds 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 3 x 4 second exposures at irregular intervals 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 1 round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit
6-31
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 7. Rapid Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
Practice 8. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 9. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
Practice 10. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
6-32
300 m Prone bipod supported or unsupported 5 Rounds 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 1 x 10 second exposure 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “watch and shoot” 3. On appearance of the target fire 5 rounds rapid. 4. Target up and hold. 300 m Prone bipod supported or unsupported 5 Rounds 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 1 x 1 second flash exposure followed 5 seconds later by a 3 second exposure. 3. To be completed 5 times in total. 1. Firer in the standing alert position 5m to the rear of the firing point. 2. Order “Watch Out”. 3. The appearance of the 1 second target exposure is the signal for the firer to run onto the firing point, adopt the nominated position and fire 1 round at the further exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit. 5. On completion apply safety catch and move back 5 metres to the rear.
400 m Prone bipod supported 5 Rounds 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 1 round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit
500 m Prone bipod supported 8 Rounds 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 1 x 8 second exposure followed by 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. On the first exposure fire a maximum of 3 rounds at the exposure. 4. All subsequent exposures are to be engaged with 1 round only. 5. Targets fall when hit
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 11. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
600 m Prone bipod supported 8 Rounds 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 1 x 8 second exposure followed by 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. On the first exposure fire a maximum of 3 rounds at the exposure. 4. All subsequent exposures are to be engaged with 1 round only. 5. Targets fall when hit
Scoring One point per hit. Standard 06107. The OMS for each practice is shown in the table below. If a firer fails a practice they must reshoot that practice only to achieve the OMS. Firers who fail are to have coaching before re-testing. Prac
Range
Total Rounds
OMS Requirement
HPS
1
50m
3
2
3
2
100m
6
4
6
3
200m
5
3
5
4&5
200m
8
5
8
6
300m
3
2
3
7
300m
5
3
5
8
300m
5
3
5
9
400m
5
3
5
10
500
8
4
6
11
600
8
4
6
33
52
Total
6-33
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
L129A1 ACMT – Time Chart 06108. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed. Practice
Range/Target
1
100 m Figure 12
2
100 m Figure 12
3
200 m Figure 11 200 m Figure 11 200 m Figure 11
4 5
6
300 m Figure 11
7
300 m Figure 11 300 m Figure 11
8
6-34
9
400 m Figure 11
10
500 m Figure 11
11
600 m Figure 11
Timings UP DOWN 05 08 19 22 30 33 UP DOWN 05 09 19 23 30 34 UP DOWN 05 13 UP DOWN 05 16 UP DOWN 06 07 11 16 25 30 36 41 UP DOWN 05 10 19 24 30 35 UP DOWN 05 16 UP DOWN 05 06 11 15 UP DOWN 05 10 19 24 30 35 41 46 50 55 UP DOWN 05 14 25 30 40 45 49 54 1.00 1.05 1.07 1.12 As per Practice 10
Remarks 1. Fall when hit
Up and hold
1. Repeat 4 times. 2. Fall when hit Up and hold 1. Fall when hit
1. Fall when hit
Up and hold 1. Reset and repeat 4 times. 1. Fall when hit 1. Fall when hit
1. Fall when hit
1. Fall when hit
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Firing in CBRN Conditions Instructional Shoot and Assessment A. RCO Notes 06109. Aim. To practise and assess the firer in engaging targets in CBRN conditions by deliberate, snap and rapid shooting from the prone and kneeling unsupported and supported positions. 06110. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on either a CGR or ETR if converted to SARTS, or a GR. Where the assessment (Practices 5 to 8) is fired on ranges converted to SARTS the firing point monitors are to be positioned where the firers can- not view them. 06111. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 1 hour to complete all practices. If SARTS is being used it may be possible to reduce the timings. 06112. Time Chart. A time chart for Practices 5 to 8 is included after the practice details. 06113. Stores. Normal range stores Gallery Range (Practices 1 to 4) 1 x Figure 12 on a 1.220 m screen per firer inscribed with a 760 mm and a 1.220 m circle at 100 metres 1 x Figure 11 on a 1.220 m screen per firer inscribed with a 760 mm and a 1.220 m circle at 20 metres Gallery Range (Practices 5 to 8) 1 x Figure 12 1 x Figure 11 or SARTS converted range 1 x Figure 12d per firer 1 x Figure 11 40 rounds 7.62 mm Ball ammunition per firer 06114. Miscellaneous. Full IPE should be worn. As a minimum firers are to wear respirator and CBRN gloves.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 06115. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 06116. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) 6-35
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice Details 06117. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Deliberate Range/Positioning 100 m Prone Ammunition 5 Rounds Target/ Exposure Figure 12 on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d 1. Fire 5 rounds application. 2. All shots are to be signalled. Instructions 3. Record the score and note the appropriate POA on the shooting record card. Practice 2. Deliberate Range/Positioning 100 m Kneeling Unsupported Ammunition 5 Rounds Target/ Exposure Figure 12 on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d 1. Fire 5 rounds application. 2. All shots are to be signalled. Instructions 3. Record the score and note the appropriate POA on the shooting record card. Practice 3. Deliberate Range/Positioning 200 m Prone Ammunition 5 Rounds Target/ Exposure Figure 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 11 1. Fire 5 rounds application. 2. All shots are to be signalled. Instructions 3. Record the score and note the appropriate POA on the shooting record card. Practice 4. Deliberate Range/Positioning 200 m Kneeling Supported Ammunition 5 Rounds Target/ Exposure Figure 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 11 1. Fire 5 rounds application. 2. All shots are to be signalled. Instructions 3. Record the score and note the appropriate POA on the shooting record card.
6-36
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Assessment Details 06118. Practice details are as follows: Practice 5. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
Practice 6. Rapid Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
Practice 7. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
Practice 8. Rapid Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
100 m Kneeling Unsupported 5 Rounds 1. Figure 12 or SARTS Figure 12d. 2. 5 x 6 second exposures with 5 second intervals. 1. Fire in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
100 m Prone 5 Rounds 1. Figure 12 or SARTS Figure 12d. 2. 1 x 12 second exposure 1. Fire in the nominated position. 2. Order “Five rounds rapid, Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire five rounds at the exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
200 m Kneeling Supported 5 Rounds 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 5 x 8 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Fire in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
200 m Prone 5 Rounds 1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 1 x 12 second exposures. 1. Fire in the nominated position. 2. Order “Five Rounds Rapid, Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire five rounds at the exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
6-37
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Scoring 06119. One point per hit. Standards 06120. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at each firing distance in Practices 5 to 8. Failure to achieve the OMS at any firing distance will constitute a failure of the LF lesson, however, only the practices at the firing distances where the OMS was not met need to be fired again. Firers who fail are to undergo furtheir practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness, before re-testing. Prac
Range
Total Rounds
OMS Requirement
HPS
5&6
100m
10
7
10
7&8
200m
10
7
10
Firing In CBRN Time Chart 06121. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed.
6-38
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
5
100 m Figure 12
UP DOWN 05 12 17 24 29 36 41 48 53 1:00
Fall when hit.
Remarks
6
100 m Figure 12
UP DOWN 05 18
Up and hold.
7
200 m Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 14 19 28 32 41 45 54 59 1:08
Fall when hit.
8
200 m Figure 11
As for Practice 6.
Up and hold.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
CHAPTER 7 THE LIGHT MACHINE GUN (LMG) Scope 0701. Chapter 7 sets out all LMG live firing (LF) lessons to be completed in LFMT Stages 1, 2 and 3 of Training the Battle Shot. It includes the application of lessons to all Arms and Services and the progression and frequency with which they are to be fired. 0702. This progression and frequency of firing is essential for preparing gunners for LMG Annual Combat Marksmanship Test (ACMT) in LFMT Stage 3. It is also essential in preparing the gunner for mandatory TLFTT and LFTT. The actual detail of TLFTT and LFTT is in Chapters 10 and 11 respectively.
Contents SCOPE 7-1 TRAINING AND FIRING SEQUENCE 7-1 SAFETY 7-1 CONDUCT OF LF LESSONS 7-2 WEAPON HANDLING TESTS GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 7-4 DEFINITION OF STANDARDS 7-4 WHTs 7-5 LF LESSON 1 7-7 LF LESSON 2
7-9
LF LESSON 3
7-11
LF LESSON 4
7-14
LF LESSON 5
7-17
LF LESSON 6 7-20 ACMT PREPARATION 7-24 ACMT 7-27 CBRN ASSESSMENT 7-31
Training and Firing Sequence 0703. Initial Training. The LF lessons listed within the Commanders Guide are to be fired by all DCC role personnel during initial training of the LMG. Reserve personnel are to achieve the same Gunners Goals and Progress as regular personnel: 0704. DCC Role — Regular and Reserve Units. The ACMT Preparation is to be fired annually by all DCC Role gunners in Regular and Reserve units whose personal weapon is the LMG. 0705. ACMT Familiarisation with DCCT. After the ACMT Preparation and before the ACMT is fired on the range, use of DCCT to familiarise gunners with the ACMT Practices will improve First Time Pass rates and the overall standard of shooting. 0706. Remedial Training. DCCT provides an invaluable aid to the remedial training of the poor shot. COs are encouraged to make full use of the facilities wherever they are available. However, final confirmation must be by the use of live firing. All LMG LF lessons can be fired on DCCT and may be used as a remedial aid or as a rehearsal prior to firing on the range. Safety 0707. It is mandatory for all gunners to have completed WHTs prior to their first live firing of a weapon, in order to ensure a minimum standard of safety. Conducting officers must confirm that all gunners firing any weapon for the first time have completed the relevant WHTs prior to firing. 7-1
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Conduct of LF Lessons 0708. General Requirements. The general requirements of equipment and outline range procedures which apply to all ranges are shown below. Any requirements specific to a particular LF lesson are contained at the start of each lesson. 0709. Stores. The following stores are required: LMG complete to CES Cleaning material Issued, serviceable hearing protection Combat Helmets Issued Body Armour Personal Shooting Record Card (AF B6994A/B) Coach’s Aide Memoire (AF B71158) Binoculars First aid kit SAC Stop watch
1 per firer As required 1 per firer 1 per firer 1 per firer 1 per firer 1 per coach 1 per coach Complete As required As required
0710. Dress. Dress for LMG LF lessons should include belt order webbing. Combat helmets and body armour are to be worn for all DCCT and LF lessons. 0711. DCCT. Gunners are to fire the bore sighting practice before firing any other shoots using DCCT. Gunners can be given a preview of all the practices on DCCT in order to familiarise themselves with the conditions. 0712. Sighting System. The LMG can be fitted with iron sights or optic sights. Initial training should be conducted using the iron sights. 0713. Small Arms Collimator (SAC). SAC is to be used to bore sight the LMG prior to firing a grouping practice. Once zeroed, the PZP reading fro m SAC is to be noted in the gunners’ shooting record card and the reading is to be checked prior to any future LF lesson. 0714. Weapon and Firing Preparation. a. Where possible, LMGs are to be prepared for firing prior to moving to the range, to ensure they are prepared under ‘ideal’ conditions and not those that may be experienced on the range. b. Check each firer has the issued, serviceable hearing protection and his shooting record card in his possession. c. During grouping practices it must be emphasized to gunners that they are to take the correct point of aim for each shot and avoid aiming off. d. 7-2
If fire trenches are not available the prone position is to be used.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
0715. Aiming Marks. Where white patches are used the POA is to be the bottom centre of the white patch. 0716. Coaching. Ref C and the Coaching Aide Memoire contain full details of coaching requirements. Some essential points to ensure are: a. The conducting officer and all coaches on the range must have prior knowledge of coaching techniques. b. Where possible a coach should be with each firer. If there are insufficient coaches the Master Coach system should be used. c. If using Iron sights the aperture marked with 3 is used for all ranges up to and including 300 metres, for ranges beyond 300 metres use the aperture marked with 6. If using SUSAT for ranges up to and including 300 metres, sights are to be set at 300. Gunners are to be reminded to alter their sights prior to firing at ranges beyond 300 metres. d. All group sizes, MPIs, POAs for other positions, and scores are to be recorded on the gunners’ personal shooting record card. e. Coaches are to be in possession of binoculars during all elementary and advanced application of fire lessons. 0717. Spotters. When grouping at 25 metres, to enable gunners and coaches to gain the maximum information from the shots fired, members of the waiting detail should be employed as spotters, using binoculars, to plot the arrival of each shot or burst. To achieve maximum value from this type of live firing, it is essential that gunners are given every opportunity to discuss the results of their shooting with their coach. 0718. Gunners Goals and Progress. Gunners who do not attain the required Gunners Goals and Progress should be given further coaching and firing practice before firing again. 0719. Scoring. Scores are to be recorded and announced to the gunners at the end of each practice. Details of the scoring system are shown in each individual lesson. 0720. End of Lesson Procedure. At the end of each LF lesson the following drills are to be completed once the range has been cleared: a.
Questions from the gunners on the range period.
b.
Normal safety precautions/declaration.
c.
Pack kit.
d. Summary of standard achieved, specific points relevant to lesson, forecast of the next LMG LF lesson.
7-3
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
WHTs General Instructions 0721. Purpose. The purpose of WHTs is to provide a measure of personal weapon handling skill throughout the Army in line with operational safety and handling requirements. Mandatory testing ensures that handling skills of all personnel are monitored accurately and rectified if necessary. It is an indication of a unit’s operational readiness. 0722. Testing and Results. a.
WHTs are to be taken as follows: (1) At an appropriate stage during Other Arms Phase 1 Recruit Training. (2)
In accordance with MATTs for regular and Reserves units.
b. Results. All results must be recorded in accordance with unit and chain of command procedures. 0723. Conduct. NSPs are to be carried out by the instructor on all weapons and drill ammunition prior to any WHT taking place. Tests are to be completed consecutively and are to be carried out in barracks using drill ammunition. 0724. Dress. Tests are to be carried out wearing belt order webbing with combat helmet. Definition of Standards 0725. Handling, Gunners Goals and Progress . Handling Gunners Goals and Progress achieved in WHTs are defined as: Pass — Pass in all tests. Fail — Fail in any test. 0726. Training Performance Standards. A firer is considered competent on achieving the pass standard. Failure to meet the pass standard indicates that the firer is not competent in the use of the LMG. Retesting is to be carried out on completion of remedial training on the individual test(s) that were failed.
7-4
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
WHTs LMG Subject Stores Conditions Marking
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
Subject Stores Conditions Marking
Subject Stores Conditions Marking
Test No. 1 Safety Gun unloaded. 1. Order the firer to “Take control of the gun”. 2. The firer, without further directive, is to carry out the normal safety precautions on the gun. 1. Standard: Pass Fail Test No. 2 Stripping Cleaning Assembling LMG Spare parts wallet, complete. 1 Spare barrel. 1. Order the firer to “strip the gun for daily cleaning”. Ask him the following: a. What size flannelette is used to oil the bore? b. What size flannelette is used to oil the cylinder? 2. Order the firer to “Assemble the gun and carry out the function test”. 1. The main purpose of this test is to assess the firer’s ability to strip and assemble the gun. He should therefore be assessed with this in mind. 2. Standard: Pass — 1 to 2 mistakes. Fail — More than 2 mistakes. 3. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety. Test No. 3 Loading LMG Soft pouch containing belt of 15 drill rounds. Gunner stood behind the gun. Safety catch at ‘Fire’. Soft pouch on the ground on the left of the gun. Order “Load”. 1. Standard: Pass — 1 to 2 mistakes. Fail — More than 2 mistakes. 2. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety. Test No. 4 Ready Drill As for Test No. 3 1. Order “200”. 1. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 2. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
7-5
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
Subject Stores Conditions Marking
7-6
Test No. 5 Immediate Action (IA) As for Test No. 4 1. Order “Fire”. 2. Order “Gun firing alright - Gun stops”. After the Gunner cocks the gun, order “Live Round Ejected”. Once the gunner operates the trigger order “Gun fails to fire”. Once the gunner has completed the IA Drill, order “Gun fires alright” “Stop”. 1. No time limit is imposed but all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 2. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 3. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety. Test No. 6 Immediate Action (IA) and Gas Stoppage As for Test No. 5 1. Order “Fire”. 2. Order “Gun firing alright - Gun stops”. After the Gunner cocks the gun, order “Live Round Ejected”. Once the gunner operates the trigger order “Gun gunners one or two more rounds and stops again”. Once the gunner cocks the gun, order “Live round ejected”. After the gunner changes the barrel and operates the trigger, order “Gun fires alright” “Stop”. 1. No time limit is imposed but all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 2. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 3. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety. Test No. 7 Unloading As for Test No. 5 1. Gunner behind the gun loaded with the safety catch applied order “Unload”. The test is not complete until the gunner is standing up behind the gun. 1. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 2. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
LMG LF 1. — Introductory Shoot 25 Metres A. RCO Notes 0727. Aim. To teach the preparation of the gun for firing and then to confirm that the firer can hold, aim and fire the LMG in controlled bursts. Finally to teach cleaning the gun after firing. 0728. Conduct. The lesson is to be conducted on a 25 metre range or ETR with screens placed 25 metres from the gunners. 0729. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. 0730. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x witness screen per firer each with 4 x 25 mm square aiming marks 30 x 5.56 mm rounds (ball link) per firer 0731. Miscellaneous. Instructors should be aware that additional time may be required in this lesson for the adjustment of sights to obtain correct eye relief.
B. Conduct of the Lesson
Preliminaries
0732. Safety. Normal safety precautions (to include checking of barrels for obstructions). 0733. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate, as necessary, the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) 0734. Preparing the Gun for Firing. Remind the squad of the procedures for preparing the gun before firing. 0735. Confirm by practice. Prepare the guns for firing. Practice Details 0736. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Familiarisation Range/Positioning
25 m Prone
Ammunition
6 Rounds (Two 3 round belts)
Target/ Exposure
2 x 25 mm aiming marks on a screen
Instructions
Fire each belt in one burst. Carry out IA after each expended belt.
7-7
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Length of Burst Range/Positioning
25 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds (Four 3 round belts)
Target/ Exposure
4 x 25 mm aiming marks on a screen
Instructions
1. Fire one burst of three rounds at each aiming mark. 2. Discuss the groups and record the group sizes.
Practice 3. Confirmation Range/Positioning
25 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds (One 12 round belt)
Target/ Exposure
4 x 25 mm aiming marks on a screen
Instructions
1. Fire one burst of three rounds at each aiming mark. 2. Discuss the groups and record the first round and burst group sizes.
Gunners Goals and Progress 0737. An average burst group size of 125 mm in Practice 3. After Firing Procedure 0738. Cleaning After Firing. Confirm stripping, cleaning and assembling. 0739. Confirm by practice. Guns are to be inspected and left lightly oiled. 0740. Care After Cleaning. Remind: Under normal conditions the bore, chamber and other gas affected parts must be thoroughly cleaned, inspected and re-oiled daily for a minimum period of five days after the gun has been fired. End of Lesson Procedure
7-8
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
LMG LF 2. — Grouping at 100 Metres A. RCO Notes 0741. Aim. To determine the gunners grouping ability with the LMG. 0742. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on either a CGR (with or without SARTS), an ETR (with or without SARTS), a GR, a 100 m Zeroing Range or a MMTTR. 0743. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 60 minutes to complete all practices. 0744. Stores. Normal range stores 2 x 1.220 m screens with Fig 11 per firer (1 x 1.220 m screen per firer on an ETR or MMTTR) each with a 75 mm x 100 mm white patch positioned with the bottom centre of the patch on the centre of the figure or 1 x Fig 12d per firer (on SARTS converted range) 60 x 5.56 mm rounds (ball link) ammunition per firer.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0745. Safety. Normal safety precautions (to include checking of barrels for obstructions). 0746. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 0747. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Grouping Range/Positioning
100 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Figure 11 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen in front and rear target frames or SARTS Figure 12d 1. Fire one burst of 3-5 rounds at each target. 2. Examine the targets and record group sizes. 3. Repeat 1 and 2 above. 4. Calculate the average group size from the total of four groups fired and record. 5. Rounds remaining are to be handed in.
7-9
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Grouping Range/Positioning
100 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
Figure 11 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d 1. Fire 20 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds at the target. 2. Examine the target, record the group size.
Practice 3. Grouping Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
Figure 11 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d 1. Fire 20 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds at the target. 2. Examine the target, record the group size.
Gunners Goals and Progress 0748. The standard to be achieved in Practices 2 and 3 is: Pass — 750 mm group. End of Lesson Procedure
7-10
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
LMG LF 3. — Zeroing at 100 Metres A. RCO Notes 0749. Aim. To superimpose the firer’s Mean Point of Impact (MPI) on the Correct Zero Position (CZP). 0750. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on either a CGR (with or without SARTS), an ETR (with or without SARTS), a GR, a 100 m Zeroing Range or a MMTTR. 0751. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 60 minutes to complete all practices. 0752. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x 1.220 m screen with Fig 11 per firer with a 75 mm x 100 mm white patch positioned with the bottom centre of the patch on the centre of the figure or 1 x Fig 12d per firer (on SARTS converted range) 40 x 5.56 mm rounds (ball link) ammunition per firer (SUSAT) (includes 5 rounds fire trench) 60 x 5.56 mm rounds (ball link) ammunition per firer (Iron sights) (includes 5 rounds fire trench) 0753. Miscellaneous. a. Gunners are to achieve a burst group size of 675 mm with 20 rounds in Practice 2 before sights are adjusted. b. The correct zero position (CZP) is 125 mm above the point of aim. In Practice 3 the gun is correctly zeroed if the distance from the CZP to the MPI is within 50 mm. c. If Iron sights are used both barrels are to be zeroed. If using SUSAT the registration practice should be fired with the second barrel. d. Practice 6 is only to be fired if you completed practices 1, 2 and 3 with the SUSAT fitted. Preliminaries
B. Conduct of the Lesson
0754. Safety. Normal safety precautions (to include checking of barrels for obstructions). 0755. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) 7-11
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice Details 0756. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Limbering Up Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Stop butt (off the edge of the zeroing screen) If using SARTS range, firers may engage the target
Instructions
Fire 5 rounds in bursts.
Practice 2. Grouping Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
Figure 11 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d 1. Fire 20 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds at the same aiming mark. Stand up after every second burst. 2. Discuss the group size and position. 3. Identify the MPI and adjust for zero if necessary.
Practice 3. Check Group Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As for Practice 2
Instructions
1. Fire a 5 round burst to determine MPI. 2. If correct zero is not achieved, repeat Practice 2 using the group plus a further 15 rounds.
Practice 4. Iron Sight Zero Second Barrel Range/Positioning
100m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As for Practice 2
Instructions
As for Practice 2
7-12
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 5. Iron Sight Check Group Range/Positioning
100m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As for Practice 2
Instructions
As for Practice 3
Practice 6. SUSAT Register Second Barrel Range/Positioning
100m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As for Practice 2
Instructions
As for Practice 3
Practice 7. MPI Check (Iron Sight or SUSAT) Range/Positioning
100m Fire Trench
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As for Practice 2
Instructions
As for Practice 3
Gunners Goals and Progress 0757. A 5 round burst group size of 450 mm in Practice 3 and 5 End of Lesson Procedure
7-13
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
LMG LF 4. — Application of Fire at 200 Metres A. RCO Notes 0758. Aim. To practise gunners in engaging targets at 200 metres. 0759. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on either a CGR (with or without SARTS), an ETR (if converted to SARTS) or a GR. 0760. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. 0761. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the Practice Details. 0762. Stores. Normal range stores 2 x Double Fig 11 on a 1.220 m screen per firer SARTS converted range 1 x SARTS Fig 11 per firer with double Fig 11 image on monitor 60 x 5.56 mm rounds (ball link or 4B/1T) ammunition per firer 0763. Miscellaneous. Determine the firer’s expected scoring area and confirm the POA/wind allowance.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0764. Safety. Normal safety precautions (to include checking of barrels for obstructions). 0765. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 0766. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Sighting Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Double Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire two bursts of 3-5 rounds. 2. MPI of each burst to be signalled.
7-14
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Timed Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Double Figure 11. 2. 1 x 60 second exposure. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 20 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds. 4. MPI to be signalled at the end of the exposure. 5. Targets up and hold.
Practice 3. Sighting Range/Positioning
200 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Double Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire two bursts of 3-5 rounds. 2. MPI of each burst to be signalled.
Practice 4. Timed Range/Positioning
200 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Double Figure 11. 2. 1 x 60 second exposure. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 20 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds. 4. MPI to be signalled at the end of the exposure. 5. Targets up and hold.
Scoring 0767. After each burst the target is lowered and the MPI is indicated with spotting discs. Gunners Goals and Progress 0768. Achieving group sizes in relation to the ESA and applying fire successfully. End of Lesson Procedure
7-15
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
LMG LF 4 — Time Chart 0769. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges this will be insufficient, therefore, additional time for target movement is to be allowed. Practice
Range/ Target
1
200 m Double Figure 11
2
200 m Double Figure 11
Up Down 05 1:07
3
200 m Double Figure 11
As for Practice 1.
As for Practice 1.
4
200 m Double Figure 11
As for Practice 2.
As for Practice 2.
7-16
Timings No time limit
Remarks 1. Up and hold. 2. MPI of each burst to be signalled, (2 x bursts). 1. Up and hold. 2. MPI to be signalled at end of exposure.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
LMG LF 5. — Application of Fire at 300 and 400 Metres A. RCO Notes 0770. Aim. To practise the firer in engaging targets at 300 and 400 metres. 0771. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on either a CGR (with or without SARTS), an ETR (if converted to SARTS) or a GR. 0772. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. 0773. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the Practice Details. 0774. Stores. Normal range stores GR or CGR without SARTS: 1 x Triple Fig 11 per firer SARTS converted range 1 x SARTS Fig 11 per firer with Triple Fig 11 image on monitor 65 x 5.56 mm rounds (ball link or 4B/1T) ammunition per firer 0775. Miscellaneous. Determine the gunners’ expected scoring area and confirm the POA/wind allowance.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0776. Safety. Normal safety precautions (to include checking of barrels for obstructions). 0777. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 0778. The practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Sighting Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 10 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds. 2. MPI of each burst to be signalled.
7-17
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Timed Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Triple Figure 11. 2. 1 x 45 second exposure. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 15 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds. 4. MPI to be signalled at the end of the exposure. 5. Targets up and hold.
Practice 3. Timed Range/Positioning
300 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Triple Figure 11. 2. 1 x 30 second exposure. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 15 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds. 4. MPI to be signalled at the end of the exposure. 5. Targets up and hold.
Practice 4. Sighting Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 10 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds. 2. MPI of each burst to be signalled.
Practice 5. Timed Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
7-18
1. Triple Figure 11. 2. 1 x 45 second exposure. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 15 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds. 4. MPI to be signalled at the end of the exposure. 5. Targets up and hold.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Scoring 0779. After each burst the target is lowered and the MPI is indicated with spotting discs. Gunners Goals and Progress 0780. Achieving group sizes in relation to the ESA and applying fire successfully. End of Lesson Procedure
LMG LF 5 — Time Chart 0781. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges this will be insufficient, therefore, additional time for target movement is to be allowed Practice
Range/ Target
Timings
Remarks
1
300 m Triple Figure 11
No time limit
2
300 m Triple Figure 11
Up Down 05 51
1. Up and hold. 2. MPI to be signalled at end of exposure.
3
300 m Triple Figure 11
Up Down 05 36
As for Practice 2.
4
400 m Triple Figure 11
As for Practice 1.
As for Practice 1.
5
400 m Triple Figure 11
As for Practice 2.
As for Practice 2.
1. Up and hold. 2. MPI of each burst to be sig- nalled.
7-19
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
LMG LF 6. — Advanced Application of Fire at 200, 300 and 400 Metres A. RCO Notes 0782. Aim. To practise the gunners in taking up fire positions and engaging fleeting targets at ranges of 200, 300 and 400 metres. 0783. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on either a CGR or ETR (with SARTS) or a GR. 0784. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. 0785. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the Practice Details. 0786. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x Double Fig 11 per firer (200 metres) 1 x Triple Fig 11 per firer (300 and 400 metres) SARTS converted range 1 x SARTS Fig 11 per firer with Double Fig 11 image on monitor (200 metres) 1 x SARTS Fig 11 per firer with Triple Fig 11 image on monitor (300 and 400 metres) 95 x 5.56 mm rounds (ball link or 4B/1T) ammunition per firer 0787. Miscellaneous. Determine the gunners’ expected scoring area and con- firm the POA/wind allowance.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0788. Safety. Normal safety precautions (to include checking of barrels for obstructions). 0789. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 0790. The practice details are as follows:
7-20
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 1. Sighting Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Double Figure 11. 2. 1 x 60 second exposure. 1. Fire 10 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds. 2. MPI of each burst to be signalled.
Practice 2. Timed Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Double Figure 11. 2. 1 x 60 second exposure. 1. Gunners lined up 50 metres to the rear of the firing point with guns loaded and carried by the carrying handle. 2. Order “Watch out – Advance”. Gunners are to advance at the walk. 3. After 10 metres the RCO is to signal the targets to be raised. 4. The appearance of the targets is the signal for the gunners to run onto the firing point, adopt the nominated position, make ready and fire 15 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds. 5. Targets up and hold.
Practice 3. Sighting Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Triple Figure 11. 2. 1 x 60 second exposure. 1. Fire 10 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds. 2. MPI of each burst to be signalled.
Practice 4. Timed Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
30 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Triple Figure 11. 2. 6 x 3 second exposures with irregular intervals over a period of one minute. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one burst of 3-5 rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
7-21
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 5. Sighting Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Triple Figure 11. 2. 1 x 60 second exposure. 1. Fire 10 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds. 2. MPI of each burst to be signalled.
Practice 6. Timed Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Triple Figure 11. 2. 4 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals over a period of two minutes. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one burst of 3-5 rounds at each expo- sure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
Scoring 0791. Scores are to be recorded and announced on conclusion of each practice: Practice 2
—
One point per hit
Practices 4 and 6
—
5 points per successful engagement
Gunners Goals and Progress 0792. Standard. The OMS for each practice is shown in the table below. If a firer fails a practice they must reshoot that practice only to achieve the OMS. Gunners who fail are to have coaching before re-testing. Prac
Range
Total Rounds
OMS Requirement
HPS
2
200m
15
7
15
4
300m
30
15
30
6
400m
20
10
20
End of Lesson Procedure
7-22
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
LMG LF 6 — Time Chart 0793. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges this will be insufficient, therefore, additional time for target movement is to be allowed. Practice
Range/ Target
Timings
Remarks
1
200 m Double Figure 11
No time limit
2
200 m Double Figure 11
Up Down 05 1:06
Up and Hold.
3
300 m Triple Figure 11
As for Practice 1.
As for Practice 1.
4
300 m Triple Figure 11
Up Down 05 09 13 17 22 26 34 38 44 48 54 58
Fall when hit.
5
400 m Triple Figure 11
As for Practice 2.
As for Practice 1.
6
400 m Triple Figure 11
Up Down 05 10 45 50 1:10 1:15 1:55 2:00
Fall when hit.
1. Up and hold. 2. MPI of each burst to be signalled.
7-23
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
LMG ACMT Preparation A.RCO Notes 0794. Aim. To prepare the firer for the ACMT; by zeroing the weapon and identifying the MPI of groups fired from all of the ranges and firing positions used during the ACMT in order to establish the correct Points of Aim (POA). 0795. Firing Requirement. This shoot must be fired annually by all personnel whose personal is the LMG, immediately prior to the ACMT. 0796. Ranges. This ACMT Preparation can be conducted on the same range as the ACMT (ETR, GR, and CGR). 0797. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 120 minutes to complete practices 1 to 5. 0798. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x Figure 11 on a screen with a 75 mm x 100 mm white patch (bottom centre of the patch on the centre of the figure) per firer. 1 x double Figure 11 at 200 metres per firer 1 x triple Figure 11 at 300 and 400 metres per firer 125 x rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer 0799. Miscellaneous. a. The dress and equipment for the ACMT Preparation is to be the same as the ACMT. b. Weapons must be collimated or bore sighted before live firing commences. c. Gunners must achieve a 675 mm group with 20 rounds from the prone position at 100 metres with Iron Sight or Optic Sight during Practice 1 before adjusting their sights. d. Coaching is permitted during the ACMT Preparation. However, as the LF is for trained gunners they must be encouraged to make their own decisions when zeroing, establishing MPI and recording their POA for all ranges and firing positions used in the ACMT. e. Conducting officers, NCO coaches and gunners are to be fully conversant with the details in Infantry Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms, Pamphlet No. 8, LMG (5.56 mm) and Associated Equipment relating to Zeroing and Application of Fire. f. To maximise First Time Pass Rates, after this ACMT Preparation and before the ACMT is fired on a range, the ACMT should be conducted on the DCCT to familiarise gunners with the practices. 7-24
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 07100. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 07101. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)). Practice Details 07102. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Zeroing Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Figure 11 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Figure 11 1. Fire 20 rounds in 3- 5 bursts at the same aiming mark. 2. The firer is to apply his safety catch, stand up, after every second burst. 3. Discuss the group size and position. 4. Identify the MPI and adjust for zero if necessary.
Practice 2. Check Group Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
Figure 11 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Figure 11 1. Fire a 5 round burst to determine MPI. 2. If the correct zero is not achieved repeat Practice 1 using the group plus a further 15 rounds. 3. Once zero is confirmed record settings using the SAC.
Practice 3. Establish POA 200 m Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
25 Rounds (Max)
Target/ Exposure
Double Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 3-5 rounds bursts application to confirm the MPI. 2. If possible all bursts are to be signalled or viewed. 3. Gunners are to record their POA on the shooting record. 4. Fire further rounds (3-5 maximum) to confirm the POA.
7-25
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 4. Establish POA 300 m Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
35 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 3-5 rounds bursts application to confirm the MPI. 2. If possible all bursts are to be signalled or viewed 3. Gunners are to record their POA on the shooting record. 4. Fire further rounds (5 maximum) to confirm the POA.
Practice 5. Establish POA 400 m Range/Positioning
400m Prone
Ammunition
40 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 3-5 rounds bursts application to confirm the MPI. 2. If possible all bursts are to be signalled or viewed. 3. Gunners are to record their POA on the shooting record. 4. Fire further rounds (3-5 maximum) to confirm the POA.
Note Targets positioned in the Hythe frames or SARTS on top of the Mantlet may only be engaged where Range Standing Orders permit their use. End of Lesson Procedure
7-26
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
LMG ACMT A. RCO Notes 07103. Firing Requirement. ACMT. LMG ACMT is to be fired annually by all personnel whose personal weapon is the LMG. 07104. Ranges. LMG ACMT can be fired on an ETR (with SARTS), a CGR (with SARTS) or a GR. Where the test is fired on ranges converted to SARTS the firing point monitors are to be positioned where the gunners cannot view them. 07105. Stores. CGRs and ETRs are to be rigged as follows: GR
200 m 300-400 m
— Double Figure 11 — Triple Figure 11
SARTS Ranges
200 m
— SARTS Figure 11 with double Figure 11 image on monitor
300-400 m
— SARTS Figure 11 with triple Figure 11 image on monitor
07106. Timings. It will take approximately 45 minutes to complete all practices of ACMT. 07107. Rules. a. The dress and equipment for this test is to be combat dress, belt order webbing, combat helmet, combat body armour and issued, serviceable hearing protection. b.
No extra time will be given for stoppages.
c.
Coaching and signalling are not permitted.
d.
Rounds may not be carried forward from one practice to another.
e. Ammunition allocation for ACMT includes 15 rounds for registration from which 5 rounds are to be fired at each range prior to starting practices. 07108. Time Charts. Time charts for the ACMT are included after the Practice Details. 07109. Ammunition. ACMT — 145 rounds.
7-27
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Preliminaries
B. Conduct of the Lesson
07110. Safety. Normal safety precautions (to include checking of barrels for obstructions). 07111. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 07112. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Defence Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Double Figure 11. 2. 1 x 60 second exposure. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 20 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds. 4. Targets up and hold.
Practice 2. Enemy Counter Attack Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
30 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Triple Figure 11. 2. 6 x 3 second exposures with irregular intervals over a period of one minute. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one burst of 3-5 rounds at each expo- sure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
Practice 3. Defence Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
7-28
1. Triple Figure 11. 2. 4 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals over a period of two minutes. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one burst of 3-5 rounds at each expo- sure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 4. Attack Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
a. 400 m Prone b. 300 m Prone a. 20 Rounds b. 20 Rounds 1. Triple Figure 11 at 400 and 300 metres. 2. 1 x 24 second exposure followed by 3 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals over a one minute period at each distance. 1. Firer in the prone position at 500 metres, gun loaded with 40 rounds. 2. Order “Watch out – Advance”. Gunners are to advance at the walk. 3. When the gunners are 35 metres from the firing point the RCO is to signal the targets to be raised. 4. The appearance of the targets is the signal for the gunners to run to the 400 metre firing point, adopt the prone position, make ready and fire one burst of 3-5 rounds at each exposure. 5. Targets fall when hit, after the fourth exposure order “Prepare to Move”, the gunners are to make safe with a 20 round belt. 6. Order “Watch out – Advance”. Gunners are to advance at the walk. 7. Repeat the procedure at 300 metres. 8. Targets fall when hit.
Practice 5. Point of Fire Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Double Figure 11 at 200 metres. 2. 1 x 1 second exposure followed 30 seconds later by 4 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals over a one minute period. 1. Firer in the prone position at 300 metres, gun loaded with 20 rounds. 2. Order “Watch out”. 3. The appearance of the target for 1 second is the signal for the gunners to run to the 200 metre firing point, adopt the prone position and make ready. 4. 30 seconds after the initial exposure there will be 4 exposures of 4 seconds. Fire one burst of 3-5 rounds at each exposure. 5. Targets fall when hit.
Scoring Practice 1
—
One point per hit
Practices 2, 3, 4 and 5
—
5 points per effective engagement
7-29
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Standard 07113. The OMS for each practice is shown in the table below. If a firer fails a practice they must reshoot that practice only to achieve the OMS. Gunners who fail are to have coaching before re-testing. Prac
Range
Total Rounds
OMS Requirement
HPS
1&5
200m
40
20
40
2&4b
300m
50
25
50
3&4a
400m
40
20
40
LMG ACMT — Time Chart 07114. One extra second has been included for target movement. Practice
Range/ Target
1
200 m Double Figure 11
Up Down 05 1:06
Up and hold.
2
300 m Triple Figure 11
Up Down 05 09 13 17 22 26 31 35 45 49 56 1:00
Fall when hit.
3
400 m Triple Figure 11
Up Down 05 10 45 50 1:10 1:15 1:55 2:00
Fall when hit.
4a
400 m Triple Figure 11
Up Down 05 30 38 43 48 53 1.00 1:05
1. RCO will signal for exposure. 2. Fall when hit.
4b
300 m Triple Figure 11
As for Practice 4a
As for Practice 4a.
5
200 m Double Figure 11
Up Down 05 07 37 42 50 55 1:10 1:15 1:25 1:30
Fall when hit.
7-30
Timings
Remarks
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Firing In CBRN Conditions Instructional Shoot and Assessment A. RCO Notes 07115. Aim. To practise and assess gunners in engaging targets in CBRN conditions from the prone position. 07116. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on either a CGR or ETR if converted to SARTS, or a GR. Where the assessment (Practices 5 to 8) is fired on a range converted to SARTS the firing point monitors are to be positioned where the gunners can- not view them. 07117. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 1 hour to complete all practices. 07118. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the practice details. 07119. Stores. Normal range stores 2 x Double Fig 11 on a 1.220 m screen per firer (200 m) 1 x Triple Fig 11 per firer (300 m) SARTS converted range SARTS Fig 11 per firer with double Fig 11 image displayed on a monitor (200 m) SARTS Fig 11 per firer with triple Fig 11 image displayed on a monitor (300 m) 160 x 5.56 mm rounds (ball link or 4B/1T) ammunition per firer 07120. Miscellaneous. Full IPE should be worn. As a minimum gunners are to wear respirator and CBRN gloves. Preliminaries
B. Conduct of the Lesson
07121. Safety. Normal safety precautions (to include checking of barrels for obstructions). 07122. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 07123. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Sighting Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Double Figure 11 on a screen. 2. 1 x 60 second exposure. 1. Fire two bursts of 3-5 rounds. 2. MPI of each burst to be signalled.
7-31
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Timed Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Double Figure 11 on a screen. 2. 1 x 30 second exposure. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 20 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds. 4. MPI to be signalled at the end of the exposure. 5. Targets up and hold.
Practice 3. Sighting Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11 on a screen
Instructions
1. Fire two bursts of 3-5 rounds. 2. MPI of each burst to be signalled.
Practice 4. Timed Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Triple Figure 11 on a screen. 2. 1 x 30 second exposure. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 20 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds. 4. MPI to be signalled at the end of the exposure. 5. Targets up and hold.
Practice 5. Rapid Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
7-32
1. Double Figure 11. 2. 1 x 60 second exposure. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 20 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds. 4. Targets up and hold.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 6. Snap Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
30 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Double Figure 11. 2. 6 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals over one minute. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one burst of 3-5 rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
Practice 7. Snap Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Triple Figure 11. 2. 4 x 4 second exposures at irregular intervals. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one burst of 3-5 rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
Practice 8. Snap Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
30 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Triple Figure 11. 2. 6 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals over one minute. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one burst of 3-5 rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
Scoring 07124. Sighting practices are not scored. Practices 2, 4, 5 and 6 — 1 point per hit. Practices 7 and 8
— 5 points per effective engagement.
Standard 07125. The OMS for each practice is shown in the table below. If a firer fails a practice they must reshoot that practice only to achieve the OMS. Gunners who fail are to have coaching before re-testing. 7-33
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Prac
Range
Total Rounds
OMS Requirement
HPS
5&6
200m
50
30
50
7&8
300m
50
30
50
End of Lesson Procedure
Time Chart 07126. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed. Practice
Range/Target
Timings
Remarks
1
200 m Double Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 1.06
1. Up and hold. 2. MPI of each burst to be signalled, (2 x bursts).
2
200 m Double Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 36
3
300 m Triple Figure 11
As for Practice 1.
1. Up and hold. 2. MPI to be signalled at end of exposure. As for Practice 1.
4
300 m Triple Figure 11
As for Practice 2.
As for Practice 2.
5
200 m Double Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 1:06
Up and hold.
6
200 m Double Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 10 15 20 24 29 33 38 44 49 1.00 1.05
Fall when hit.
7
300 m Triple Figure 11
Fall when hit.
8
300 m Triple Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 10 15 20 26 31 35 40 As for Practice 6.
7-34
Fall when hit.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
CHAPTER 8 SERVICE PISTOL Scope 0801. Chapter 8 sets out all Service Pistol live firing (LF) lessons to be completed in LFMT Stages 1, 2 and 3 of Training the Battle Shot. It includes the application of the lessons to all Arms and Services and the progression and frequency with which they are to be fired. 0802. This progression and frequency of firing is essential for preparing personnel for the Pistol Annual Combat Marksmanship Test (ACMT) in LFMT Stage 3. Pistol Users
Contents SCOPE 8-1 PISTOL USERS 8-1 TRAINING AND FIRING SEQUENCE 8-1 SAFETY 8-1 CONDUCT OF LF LESSONS 8-2 WEAPON HANDLING TESTS GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 8-3 DEFINITION OF STANDARDS 8-4 WHTs 8-4 LF LESSON 1 8-7 LF LESSON 2
8-10
LF LESSON 3
8-11
LF LESSON 4
8-13
LF LESSON 5
8-15
LF LESSON 6 8-17 ACMT PREPARATION 8-20 ACMT 8-22 CBRN ASSESSMENT 8-26
0803. Personnel who are issued with the Service Pistol, both Regular and Reserve firers from all Arms and Services, in headquarters, other staffs and units are to pass the ACMT annually. Training and Firing Sequence
0804. Service Pistol User — Initial Training. The LF lessons listed within the Commanders Guide are to be fired by all personnel during initial training of the Service Pistol. Reserve personnel are to achieve the same firers Goals and Progress as regular personnel: 0805. Regular and Reserve Units. The ACMT Preparation is to be fired annually by all personnel in Regular and Reserve units who are issued with the Service Pistol. 0806. ACMT Familiarisation with DCCT. After the ACMT Preparation and before the ACMT is fired on the range, use of DCCT to familiarise firers with the ACMT Practices will improve First Time Pass rates and the overall standard of shooting. 0807. Remedial Training. DCCT provides invaluable aids to the remedial training of the poor shot. COs are encouraged to make full use of the facilities wherever they are available. However, final confirmation must be by the use of live firing. Safety 0808. It is mandatory for all firers to have completed WHTs prior to their first live firing of a weapon, in order to ensure a minimum standard of safety. Conducting officers must confirm that all firers firing any weapon for the first time have completed the relevant WHTs prior to firing. 8-1
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Conduct of LF Lessons 0809. General Requirements. The general requirements of equipment and outline range procedures which apply to all ranges are shown below. Any requirements specific to a particular LF lesson are contained at the start of each lesson. 0810. Stores. The following stores are required: Pistols with holsters Magazines Cleaning rods Cleaning materials Issued, serviceable hearing protection Helmets Combat Issued Combat Body Armour Personal Shooting Record Book Coaches Aide Memoire (AF B71158) First aid kit Stopwatch
As required 2 per pistol 1 per pistol As required 1 per firer 1 per firer 1 per firer 1 per firer 1 per coach Complete As required
0811. Dress. Dress for Pistol LF lessons should include belt order webbing, including a pistol holster. Combat helmets and Combat Body Armour are to be worn for all LF lessons. 0812. Weapon and Firing Preparation. a. Where possible, pistols are to be prepared for firing prior to moving to the range to ensure they are prepared under ‘ideal’ conditions and not those that may be experienced on the range. b. Check each firer has the issued, serviceable hearing protection and his shooting record card in his possession. c. Observation of the fall of shot is obvious at short ranges (10 – 25 metres). During grouping practices it must be emphasized to firers that they are to take the correct point of aim (POA) for each shot and avoid aiming off. 0813. Aiming Marks. Where white patches are used the POA is to be bottom centre of the patch. 0814. Coaching. Infantry Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms,Pistol L131A1 contains full details of coaching requirements. Some essential points to ensure are: a. The conducting officer and all coaches on the range must have prior knowledge of coaching techniques. b. Where possible a coach should be with each firer. If there are insufficient coaches the Master Coach system should be used. 8-2
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
c. All group sizes, Mean Points of Impact (MPI), POAs for all positions and scores are to be recorded on the firers’ personal shooting record cards. d. Coaches are to be in possession of binoculars during snap shooting practices. 0815. Spotters. When grouping, to enable firers and coaches to gain the maximum benefit from the shots fired, members of the waiting detail should be employed as spotters, using binoculars, to plot the arrival of each shot. To achieve maximum value from this type of live firing, it is essential that firers are given every opportunity to discuss the results of their shooting with their coach. 0816. Firers Goals and Progress. Firers who do not achieve the required Firers Goals and Progress should be given further coaching before firing again. 0817. Scoring. Scores are to be recorded and announced to the firers at the end of each practice. Details of the scoring system are shown in each individual lesson. 0818. End of Lesson Procedure. At the end of each LF lesson the following drills are to be completed once the range has been cleared: a.
Questions from the firers on the range period.
b.
Normal safety precautions/declaration.
c.
Pack kit.
d. Summary of the standard achieved, specific points relevant to lesson, fore- cast of the next LF lesson. WHTs General Instructions 0819. Purpose. The purpose of WHTs is to provide a measure of personal weapon handling skill throughout the Army in line with operational safety and handling requirements. Mandatory testing ensures that handling skills of all personnel are monitored accurately and rectified if necessary. It is an indication of a unit’s operational readiness. 0820. Testing and Results. a. Firers in regular and reserve units whose personal or alternate weapon is the Service Pistol are to complete their tests in accordance with MATTs. All tests are to be carried out in daylight and conducted by a qualified, current and competent instructor. b. Results. All results must be recorded in accordance with unit and chain of command procedures. 0821. Conduct. NSPs are to be carried out by the instructor on all weapons and drill ammunition prior to any WHT taking place. Tests are to be completed consecutively and are to be carried out in barracks using drill ammunition. 8-3
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
0822. Dress. Tests are to be carried out wearing belt order webbing with combat helmet. Definition of Firers Goals and Progress 0823. Handling, Firers Goals and Progress. Handling Gunners Goals and Progress achieved in WHTs are defined as: Pass
—
Pass in all tests.
Fail
—
Fail in any test.
0824. Training Performance Firers Goals and Progress. A firer is considered competent on achieving the pass standard. Failure to meet the pass standard indicates that the firer is not competent in the use of the Pistol. Resting is to be carried out after completion of remedial training on the individual test(s) that were failed. WHTS General Service Pistol L131A1 Subject Stores Conditions Marking
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
8-4
Test No. 1 Safety Unloaded pistol lying on the ground. 1. Order the firer “Take control of the pistol”. The firer, without further direction, is to: a. Pick up the pistol and carry out full normal safety precautions. 1. Standard: Pass Fail Test No. 2 Stripping, Cleaning and Assembling Pistol unloaded, cleaning kit box, flannelette and cleaning rags, cleaning rod, oil. 1. Order the firer to “strip the pistol as for daily cleaning”. Ask the following questions: a. What are the differences to normal daily cleaning when in the following conditions? (choose any 2 conditions) (1) Wet conditions. (2) Dry, sandy or dusty conditions. (3) Cold and extreme cold conditions. (4) Hot, wet conditions. b. What materials are provided for cleaning the pistol? 2. Order the firer to “Assemble the pistol and carry out the function test” 1. Standard: Pass — 1 to 2 mistakes. Fail — More than 2 mistakes. 2. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Subject Stores Conditions Marking Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
Subject Stores Conditions Marking
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
Test No. 3 Magazine Filling Magazine, 17 drill rounds. The firer will fill the magazine by hand with 17 drill rounds. Instructor’s Note: Leave magazine filled with 3 rounds on completion . No time limit. Test No. 4 Loading Pistol, one magazine from test 3. Holster worn by the firer. Pistol and magazine in the holster. Order “Load”. Pistols must be secured in holster at the end of the drill. Instructor’s Note: The firer is to load with the magazine containing drill rounds Leave the pistol loaded for Test 5. 1. Standard: Pass — 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 2. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety. Test No. 5 Ready Drill – Standing Position Pistol loaded and in the holster (from Test 4), representative targets. Order “Standing Position – Ready”. 1. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 2. Standard: Pass – 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 3. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety. Test No. 6 Immediate Action (IA) Pistol loaded and ready (from Test 5), representative targets. 1. Order “Fire” “Pistol firing alright – pistol stops”. Firer to carry out the IA. 2. Firer is to check the magazine is fitted correctly, cock the pistol and continue firing. 3. Order “Stop”. 1. The actions tested are those relating to the IA drills only. 2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 3. Standard: Pass – 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
8-5
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
Subject Stores Conditions
Marking
Subject Stores Conditions Marking
8-6
Test No. 7 Obstruction Drill Pistol loaded and ready (from Test 6), representative targets. 1. Order “Fire” “Pistol firing alright – Pistol stops”. Firer to carry out the IA.“Slide NOT fully forward”. 2. On examination of body and chamber, order “Obstruction”. 3. When the firer has attempted to shake out the obstruction, order “Obstruction NOT clear”. When the firer has removed the magazine and attempted to remove the obstruction by hand, order “Obstruction clear”. 4. Firer is to complete the obstruction drill. 5. Order “Stop - Make Safe”. 1. The actions tested are those relating to Obstruction Drills only. 2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 3. Standard: Pass – 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety. Test No. 8 Empty Magazine Drill Pistol made safe with an empty magazine (from Test 7), representative targets. 1. Instruct the firer to cock the weapon. With the slide held to the rear, order “Fire” “Pistol firing alright – Pistol stops”. 2. Firer is to carry out the IA...”Empty Magazine”. Firer is to carry out the drill for an empty magazine. 3. When the firer has completed the drill and continued firing, order “Stop”. 1. The actions tested are those relating to Empty Magazine Drills only. 2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions should be carried out quickly and correctly. 3. Standard: Pass – 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety. Test No. 9 Unloading Pistol loaded and ready (from Test 8). Order “Unload”. The test is not complete until the firer has secured the pistol and into the holster and secured the magazine. 1. Standard: Pass – 1 mistake. Fail — More than 1 mistake. 2. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Pistol LF 1. — Introductory Shoot and Grouping at 10 Metres A. RCO Notes 0825. Aim. To teach how to prepare pistols for firing, to confirm that the firer can aim, hold and fire the pistol and how to clean the pistol after firing. 0826. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 20 minutes to complete all practices. 0827. Stores. Normal ranges stores 1 x witness screen with 2 x 75 mm x 100 mm aiming marks per firer 30 rounds 9 mm Ball ammunition per firer
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0828. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0829. Preparing the Pistol for Firing. Explain and demonstrate: a.
Strip the pistol as for daily cleaning, clean it.
b.
Inspect the parts to make certain they are serviceable.
c.
In those conditions where oiling is permitted, lightly oil the following: (1) The guide grooves and rib on the body within which the slides moves. (2) A very slight amount in the trigger mechanism and the hammer swivel pin. (3)
The guide grooves on the slide.
(4)
The outside of the barrel (except the bullet guide).
(5)
The main spring guide and main spring.
(6)
The inside of the slide (except the face of the breech).
d. Assemble the pistol. Hand operate the slide several times to ensure that the action works smoothly. e.
Make certain that the outside of the pistol is always dry.
8-7
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
f.
Strip, clean and leave dry both magazines.
0830. Confirm by practice. 0831. Range Safety and Discipline. Explain and demonstrate that as the pistol can be easily discharged in a wrong direction, the following rules are to apply to all range firing: a.
Pistols are to be kept in their holsters until on the firing point.
b. When in the ‘alert’ position, never turn round to talk to the safety supervisor or coach. c. The drill for drawing pistols, loading, unloading etc, will be strictly enforced. Keep the pistol pointing towards the target while clearing a stoppage. d. The chair for use on the sitting practice is to be positioned facing the targets. RCOs are responsible for ensuring that chairs are placed in a position where they will not become unstable and/or sink into the range floor e. Coaches are to stand so that they are looking over the firer’s left shoulder. f. No one must stand near the right shoulder of the firer from the moment “Load” is given until the order “Ease Springs” has been actioned. 0832. Confirm by questions and practice. 0833. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate where necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 0834. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Grouping (Fired Twice) Range/Positioning
10 m Standing Kneeling Sitting (Chair)
Ammunition
30 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1 x screen with 2 x 75 mm x 100 mm aiming marks
Instructions
1. Fire a 5 round group at left target. 2. Discuss the groups and record the group sizes. 3. Fire a further 5 rounds at the right aiming mark. 4. Repeat the practice for each position.
Firers Goals and Progress 0835. The average group size that should be achieved in the repeat practice is 180 mm. 8-8
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
After Firing Procedure 0836. Equipment Damage. Sharp tools are NOT to be used to remove carbon fouling. Scotch bright pads only may be used to clean stubborn carbon fouling from the breech face. They are NOT to be used to clean any other part of the pistol. 0837. Cleaning after Firing. Explain and demonstrate: a.
Carry out NSPs, strip the pistol.
b. The bore is easier to clean immediately after firing while the barrel is still warm. If this is not possible, thoroughly oil the bore to assist later cleaning. At the appropriate time clean the barrel as taught and, except in sandy conditions, leave it oiled. c. With an oily rag, wipe off all fouling from the inside of the slide, particularly the face of the firing pin hole. d.
Clean the magazines.
e.
Assemble the pistol then test the functioning.
0838. Care after Firing. Explain: a. Under normal circumstances the bore must be thoroughly cleaned, inspected and re-oiled daily for a minimum period of five days after the pistol has been fired. b. In very dusty conditions pistols must be dry cleaned and inspected daily. If oil has to be used to remove rust, use it sparingly and remove all traces after- wards. 0839. Confirm by questions and practice. End of Lesson Procedure
8-9
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Pistol LF 2 — Identifying Points of Aim (POA) A. RCO Notes 0840. Aim. To establish the firers’ Point of Impact and POA at 3 to 15m. 0841. Conduct. Planning Officers are to check Range Orders and/or confirm with the RAU that CQM practices are permitted. CQM practices may be conducted on LFTTA providing the RCO is suitably qualified. CQM is not to be conducted on 1908 Design Barrack Ranges. 0842. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to complete all practices. 0843. Stores. Normal range stores 2 x Figure Targets with 4 x 25mm aiming marks per target 24 rounds 9 mm Ball ammunition per firer
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0844. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0845. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 0846. Practice details are as follows. Practice 1. Identify and Apply the POA Range/Positioning
3, 5, 10 and 15m Standing CQB Position
Ammunition
24 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure Target with 4 x 25mm aiming marks
Instructions
1. Fire 3 well aimed shots at the nominated aiming marker. 2. Discuss the fall of shot and sub- sequent aim off. 3. Repeat the practice at all ranges to confirm the POA.
Firers Goals and Progress 0847. Record all Points of Aim. End of Lesson Procedure 8-10
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Pistol LF 3 — Accelerated Fire at 3 – 15 Metres A. RCO Notes 0848. Aim. To practice and confirm the ability of a firer to apply accelerated firing techniques in order to achieve multiple, rapid and accurate hits on target. 0849. Conduct. Planning Officers are to check Range Orders and/or confirm with the RAU that CQM practices are permitted. CQM practices may be conducted on LFTTA providing the RCO is suitably qualified. CQM is not to be conducted on 1908 Design Barrack Ranges. 0850. Timings Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. 0851. Stores. Normal range stores 2 Fig 11/21 targets per firer 48 rounds 9 mm Ball ammunition per firer
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0852. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0853. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) 0854. Firing Practice. Explain that learning to quickly adopt the correct position and hold of a weapon will allow a firer to engage a target with increasing speed and accuracy at close quarters. Practice Details 0855. Practice details are as follows:
8-11
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 1. Accelerated Fire. Range/Positioning
15m Standing
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 11/21. 2. 3 x 3 second exposure. 1. Fire 2 shots with 1 second shot cadence at the left target. 2. Dress forward and discuss the results. 3. Repeat the practice on the right target. 4. Dress forward and discuss the results, record the scores on the right target only.
Practice 2. Accelerated Fire. Range/Positioning
10m Standing
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21. 2. 3 x 3 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
Practice 3. Accelerated Fire. Range/Positioning
5m Standing
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21. 2. 3 x 2 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1 but with a half second shot cadence.
Practice 4. Accelerated Fire Range/Positioning
3m Standing
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21. 2. 3 x 2 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1 but with a quarter second shot cadence.
Scoring 0856. Two points per hit within the CQM scoring area, one point anywhere else on the target. Firers Goals and Progress HPS – 48 Pass – 34 End of Lesson Procedure 8-12
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Pistol LF 4 — Failure to Stop A. RCO Notes 0857. Aim. To confirm the firers’ ability to rapidly engage a target using two POA. 0858. Conduct. Planning Officers are to check Range Orders and/or confirm with the RAU that CQM practices are permitted. CQM practices may be conducted on LFTTA providing the RCO is suitably qualified. CQM is not to be conducted on 1908 Design Barrack Ranges. 0859. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices 0860. Stores Normal range stores 1 Fig 11/21 target per firer 32 rounds 9 mm Ball ammunition per firer
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0861. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0862. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) 0863. Firing Practice. Explain that the firer may be required to engage the body and subsequently the head with well aimed shots in order to defeat the enemy at close quarters. Practice Details 0864. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Failure to Stop Range/Positioning
15m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Fig 11/21. 2. 2 x 4 second exposure. 1. Firer in the CQB stance. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire Two shots at the body and two to the head at each engagement. 4. Discuss the fall of shot, record scores and patch up.
8-13
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Failure to Stop Range/Positioning
10m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21. 2. 2 x 4 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
Practice 3. Failure to Stop Range/Positioning
5m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21. 2. 2 x 3 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
Practice 4. Failure to Stop Range/Positioning
3m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21. 2. 2 x 3 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
Scoring 0865. Two points per hit in the central scoring CQM area, one point per hit everywhere else on the target. Firers Goals and Progress HPS – 64 Pass – 45 End of Lesson Procedure
8-14
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Pistol LF 5 – Close Range Multiple Targets A. RCO Notes 0866. Aim. To practice the firer in engaging multiple targets by rapid shooting at close range. 0867. Conduct. Planning Officers are to check Range Orders and/or confirm with the RAU that CQM practices are permitted. CQM practices may be conducted on LFTTA providing the RCO is suitably qualified. CQM is not to be conducted on 1908 Design Barrack Ranges. 0868. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. 0869. Stores. Normal range stores 2 x Fig 11/21 targets per firer 32 rounds 9 mm Ball ammunition per firer
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0870. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0871. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) 0872. Firing Practice. Explain that when confronted with multiple targets at close range, a firer must quickly decide the priority of engagement before engaging rapidly and accurately. Practice Details 0873. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Pairs Range/Positioning
15m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. 2 x Fig 11/21. 2. 2 x 4 second exposure. 1. On command or appearance of the targets, fire two rounds at each target. 2. After the second engagement, dress forward and discuss the results. 3. Record the scores.
8-15
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Pairs Range/Positioning
10m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. 2x Fig 11/21. 2. 2 x 4 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
Practice 3. Pairs Range/Positioning
5m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. 2x Fig 11/21. 2. 2 x 4 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
Practice 4. Pairs Range/Positioning
3m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. 2x Fig 11/21. 2. 2 x 4 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
Scoring 0874. Two points per hit in the central scoring CQM area, one point per hit anywhere else on the target. Firers Goals and Progress HPS – 64. Pass – 45 End of Lesson Procedure
8-16
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Pistol LF 6. — Advanced Snap Shooting A. RCO Notes 0875. Aim. To practise snap shooting at a single fleeting enemy from the standing, kneeling and sitting positions at ranges up to 25 metres. 0876. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 20 minutes to complete all practices. 0877. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x Stopwatch 2 x Figure 11 per firer 1x Chair per firer 39 rounds 9 mm Ball ammunition per firer
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0878. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0879. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules (see Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)). 0880. Miscellaneous. a. If swivel mechanisms are not available, exposure times are to be controlled using whistle blasts. A short whistle blast signifying the beginning and a long whistle blast, the end of each exposure. b. The chair for use on the sitting practice is to be positioned facing the targets. RCOs are responsible for ensuring that chairs are placed in a position where they will not become unstable and/or sink into the range floor Practice Details 0881. Practice details are as follows:
8-17
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 1. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
15 m Sitting (Chair) 3 x Sighters 6 Rounds 1. 2 x Figure 11. 2. 3 x 5 second exposures with intervals of between 5–10 seconds. 1. Firer in the sitting position. Made Safe with the pistol holstered. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 2 rounds at the left target in each exposure. 4. Make safe and holster the pistol after each exposure. 5. Record the scores.
Practice 2. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
20 m Standing and Kneeling 3 x Sighters 12 Rounds 1. 2 x Figure 11. 2. 3 x 5 second exposures with intervals of between 5–10 seconds. 1. Firer in the standing alert position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 2 rounds at the left target in each exposure. 4. Return to the alert position after each exposure. 5. Repeat the practice in the kneeling position at the right target. 6. Record the scores.
Practice 3. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
25 m Standing and Sitting 3 x Sighters 12 Rounds 1. 2 x Figure 11. 2. 3 x 5 second exposures with intervals of between 5–10 seconds. 1. Firer in the standing alert position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 2 rounds at the left target in each exposure. 4. Return to the alert position after each exposure. 5. Repeat the practice in the sitting position at the right target. 6. Record the scores.
Scoring 1 point per hit. Firers Goals and Progress HPS – 30 Pass – 21 End of Lesson Procedure 8-18
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Pistol LF 6. — Time Chart 0882. One extra second has been included for target movement. Practice
Range/ Target
Timings
Remarks
1
15 m 2 x Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 11 17 23 31 37
Reset watch and repeat the practice.
2
20 m 2 x Figure 11
As for Practice 1
Reset watch and repeat the practice.
3
25 m 2 x Figure 11
As for Practice 1
Reset watch and repeat the practice.
8-19
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Pistol ACMT Preparation A. RCO Notes 0883. Aim. To prepare the firer for the ACMT; by identifying the MPI of groups fired from all of the ranges and firing positions used during the ACMT in order to establish the correct Points of Aim (POA). 0884. Firing Requirement. This shoot must be fired annually by all personnel whose personal or alternate weapon is the pistol. 0885. Ranges. This ACMT Preparation can be conducted on the same range as the ACMT. 0886. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to complete practices 1 to 3. 0887. Stores. Normal range stores 4 x Figure 11/21 per firer 38 rounds 9mm ball per firer 0888. Miscellaneous. a. The dress and equipment for the ACMT Preparation is to be the same as the ACMT. b. Coaching is permitted during the ACMT Preparation. However, as the LF is for trained firers they must be encouraged to make their own decisions, establishing MPI and recording their POA for all ranges and firing positions used in the ACMT. c. Conducting officers, NCO coaches and firers are to be fully conversant with the details in the appropriate Pistol General Staff Publication. d. To maximise First Time Pass Rates (FTPR), after this ACMT Preparation and before the ACMT is fired on a range, the ACMT should be conducted on the DCCT to familiarise firers with the practices.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0889. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 0890. Range Safety Rules. a. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules (see Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)). 8-20
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice Details 0891. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Confirm CQB POA Range/Positioning
3, 5, 10 and 15m Standing CQB Position
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
2 x Figure 11/21 with 2 x 25 mm aiming mark
Instructions
1. At each range, fire 1 well aimed shot at the nominated aiming mark. 2. Establish the POA. 3. Fire a second shot to confirm the POA..
Practice 2. Establish POA Range/Positioning
20m Standing & kneeling
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
2 x Figure 11/21
Instructions
1. Fire a 5 round group to confirm the MPI. 2. Repeat the practice.
Practice 3. Establish POA Range/Positioning
25m Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
2 x Figure 11/21
Instructions
1. Fire a 5 round group 2. Discuss the position of the MPI and note adjustments needed to the POA. 3. Repeat the practice.
End of Lesson Procedure
8-21
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Pistol ACMT A. RCO Notes 0892. Firing Requirement. The Pistol ACMT is to be fired annually by all personnel whose personal or alternate weapon is the Service Pistol. 0893. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 25 minutes to complete all practices. 0894. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x Stopwatch 2 x Figure 11/21 per firer 1x Chair per firer 0895. Rules. a. Dress and equipment for this test is to be combat dress, belt order including pistol holster, combat helmet, body armour and issued, serviceable hearing protection. b.
No extra time will be given for stoppages. Coaching is not permitted.
c. If swivel mechanisms are not available, exposure times are to be controlled using whistle blasts. A short whistle blast signifying the beginning and a long whistle blast, the end of each exposure. d. Chairs are to be positioned at 10m prior to practice 4. They are to face the target and be located in a stable and level position. 0896. Time Charts. Time charts to assist range staff are included after the Practice Details. 0897. Ammunition. — 32 rounds. 0898. Magazines. — 4 magazines of 8 rounds are to be used.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 0899. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 08100. Range Safety Rules. a. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules (see Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)).
8-22
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice Details 08101. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Snap Range/Positioning
25 m Standing
Ammunition
4 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2 x Figure 11. 2. 1 x 8 second exposure 1. Firer in the standing alert position, ready, with the safety catch applied. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 4 rounds from the standing position at the left target 4. Record the scores.
Practice 2. Snap Range/Positioning
20 m Standing & Kneeling
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2 x Figure 11. 2. 2 x 5 second exposures with intervals of 5-10 seconds 1. Firer in the standing alert position. 2. Order “Watch and shoot”. 3. Fire 2 rounds at the left tgt on each exposure. 4. Return to the alert position after each exposure. 5. Repeat the practice kneeling at the right hand tgt. 6. Record the scores.
Practice 3. CQB Range/Positioning
15,10,5 and 3m Standing CQB Position
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
2 x Figure 11/21 with 1 x 4 second exposure at each range.
Instructions
1. Firer in the CQB stance at 15m. 2. Multiple tgts fire 2 shots at each tgt. 3. Order Watch and Shoot. 4. Apply safety/Holster move to 10m and repeat 10m practice. 5. Apply safety/holster move to 5m. 6. Firer in the CQB stance at 5m. 7. Failure to stop fire 2 shots at the body and 2 shots to head of the left tgt. 8. Order Watch and Shoot. 9. Apply safety/holster move to 3m and repeat the 5m practice. 10. Record scores.
8-23
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 4. Snap Range/Positioning
10 m Sitting (Chair)
Ammunition
4 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2 x Figure 11/21. 2. 2 x 7 second exposures with an interval of 5-10 seconds. 1. Firer in the sitting chair position with the pistol made safe in the holster. 2. Fire 2 rounds at the left tgt on the first exposure. 3. Make safe and return the pistol to the holster after the first exposure. 4. Fire 2 rds at the right tgt on the second exposure. 5. Order Watch and Shoot. 6. Record the scores.
Scoring 08102. Practice 1 & 2 one points per hit, practice 3 & 4 2 points per hit within the inner or outer scoring area. One point per hit anywhere else on the target. Standards 08103. The OMS for each practice is shown in the table below. If a firer fails a practice they must reshoot that practice only to achieve the OMS. Firers who fail are to have coaching before re-testing. Prac
Range
Rounds
1&2
20/25 m
3&4
3-15 M
OMS Requirement
HPS
Pistol User
Mksm
12
7
10
12
20
28
36
40
08104. Marksman. To qualify as a Marksman a firer must achieve the Marksman score or more for all practices at the first attempt. Firers are NOT permitted to re-shoot practices or the whole ACMT in order to qualify as a Marksman. Marksmen are entitled to wear the badge for one year before they must re-qualify.
8-24
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Pistol ACMT — Time Chart 08105. One extra second has been allowed for target movement. Practice
Range/ Target
Timings
Remarks
1
25 m 2 x Figure 11/21
UP DOWN 05 14
2
20 m 2 x Figure 11/21
UP DOWN 05 11 17 23
1. Reset watch and repeat
3
3-15 m 2 x Figure 11/21
UP DOWN 05 09
1. Tgts up and hold 2. Exposures controlled by whistle or commands
4
10 m 2 x Figure 11/21
UP DOWN 05 13
1. Reset watch and repeat
8-25
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Firing in CBRN Conditions — Pistol Assessment A. RCO’S Notes 08106. Aim. To practise and assess soldiers in target engagement in CBRN conditions from the standing and kneeling positions at ranges up to 25 metres. 08107. Conduct. Planning Officers are to check Range Orders and/or confirm with the RAU that the practices contained in this lesson are permitted. Practices may be conducted on LFTTA providing the RCO is suitably qualified. 08108. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 25 minutes to complete all practices. 08109. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x Stopwatch 2 x Figure 11 per firer 18 rounds 9 mm Ball ammunition per firer
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 08110. Safety. Normal safety precautions 08111. Range Safety Rules. a. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules (see Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)). Practice Details 08112. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Rapid Range/Positioning
15 m Standing
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
8-26
1. 2 x Figure 11. 2. 1 x 12 second exposure. 1. Firer in the nominated position, wearing respirator and gloves. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 6 rounds at the left target. 4. Record the scores.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Snap Range/Positioning
20 m Kneeling
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2 x Figure 11. 2. 3 x 7 second exposures with intervals of 4 seconds. 1. Firer in the standing alert position, wearing respirator and gloves. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to adopt the nominated position and fire two rounds at the right target. 4. Return to the standing alert position between exposures. 5. Record the scores.
Practice 3. Snap Range/Positioning
25 m Kneeling
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
2 x Figure 11. 3 x 5 second exposures with intervals of 4 seconds. Firer in the nominated position, wearing respirator and gloves. Order “Watch and Shoot”. Fire one round at each target in each exposure. Return to the alert position between exposures. Record the scores.
Scoring 1 point per hit. Standards HPS – 18 Pass – 11 End of Lesson Procedure
8-27
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Pistol CBRN —Time Chart 08113. One extra second has been included for target movement.
8-28
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
1
15 m 1 x Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 18
2
20 m 2 x Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 13 17 25 29 37
3
25 m 2 x Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 11 15 21 25 31
Remarks
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Chapter 9 (Reserved)
9-1
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
9-2
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
CHAPTER 10 TRANSITION TO LIVE FIRING TACTICAL TRAINING Scope
Contents
SCOPE 10-1 1001. Chapter 10 sets out Stage 4 in COMPLETION OF TLFTT SHOOTS 10-1 the System for Training the Battle Shot — SECTION 1 – RIFLE/LSW 10-2 Transition to Live Firing Tactical Training SECTION 2 – LMG 10-50 (TLFTT). The shoots in this Stage are SECTION 3 – SHARPSHOOTER 10-75 central to the successful transition from SECTION 4 – CQM RIFLE/PISTOL 10-96 basic shooting standards achieved in Live SECTION 5 – CQM LMG 10-109 Firing Marksmanship Training (LFMT) SECTION 6 – F&M TEST 10-122 Stages 1 to 3 to the more testing operational shooting skills required by all Arms and Services
1002. For DCC Roled firers in particular, TLFTT prepares and trains firers for the LFTT exercises in which they will participate. Completion of TLFTT Shoots 1003. The following shoots contained in this chapter are available to be fired by All Arms and Services as directed by the chain of command or PJHQ. The Commanders Guide at Table 1 within Chapter 1 directs the training to be completed.
10-1
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Section 1. Rifle/LSW Application of TLFTT Shoots 1004. Firing At The LNV. Firing at the LNV is to be conducted in accordance with the Commanders’ Guide within Chapter 1. The results of firing at the LNV - Assessments are to be recorded on unit computer systems. 1005. Firing with NVD and Thermal Imaging Sights. NVD/TI Shoots are to be fired in accordance with the Commanders’ Guide within Chapter 1. The results of firing with NVD/TI Assessments are to be recorded on unit computer systems.
Contents FIRING AT MOVING TARGETS-INSTRUCTIONAL 10-3 FIRING AT MOVING TARGETS - USING FP COVER 10-7 FIRING AT MOVING TARGETS —-ASSESSMENT 10-9 MOVING TARGETS AT LONGER RANGES 10-12 FIRING AT THE LNV 10-14 FIRING WITH NVD/TI — ZEROING 10-19 FIRING WITH NVD/TI — ASSESSMENT 10-21 FIRING WITH HMNVS AND LA AT 25 METRES 10-25 FIRING WITH HMNVS AND LA AT 100 METRES 10-27 FIRING WITH HMNVS AND LA — ASSESSMENT 10-29 AUTOMATIC FIRE 10-32 AUTOMATIC FIRE - ASSESSMENT 10-36 IBSR — DEFENSIVE PHASE 10-39 FLANK CONTACTS MOVING VEHICLE 10-41 RIFLE LONG RANGE SUPPRESSION 10-46
1006. Firing At Moving Targets. Firing at Moving Targets shoots are to be fired in accordance with the Commanders’ Guide within Chapter 1. The results of Firing at Moving Targets - Assessments are to be recorded on unit computer systems Operational Shooting Skills and TLFTT Shoots 1007. Increasingly, sights are issued that include a CQB Sight. This is true of both LDS and NVD. The planning of the various TLFTT activities should include additional time and ammunition to allow the firer to practice with the CQB Sight as well as the main optic. 1008. Operational Shooting Skills and TLFTT Shoots. The details of Operational Shooting Skills and TLFTT Shoots are contained in the remaining pages of this chapter. Each practice is contained in separate pages for easy use. 1009. Dress. The dress for the firers is to include belt order webbing, combat helmets and body armour for all LF lessons. Once completed dress may be altered to reflect the operational role.
10-2
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Firing at Moving Targets — Instructional Shoot On DCCT A. RCO Notes 1010. Aim. To practise the methods of engaging crossing targets using DCCT. 1011. Conduct. The shoot is to be conducted using DCCT. Where DCCT is not available the shoot may be conducted on a MMTTR. 1012. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 1 hour 10 minutes to complete all practices on DCCT. Approximately 1 hour 30 minutes will be required for each detail if the lesson is to be fired live. 1013. Stores. Complete DCCT equipment or Normal range stores (MMTTR) 1 screen per firer each with 2 x Figure 20 targets (outwards facing) 120 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer 1014. Miscellaneous. a. Firers are to fire the DCCT bore sighting shoot prior to firing the practices listed below. b. Prior to this lesson, firers are to be revised in ‘Firing at Crossing Targets’ (see Infantry Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms, The SA80 A2 (5.56 mm) System (Rifle, LSW and Carbine) and Associated Equipment.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 1015. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 1016. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules applicable to DCCT. Practice Details 1017. Practice details are as follows:
10-3
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 1. Range/Positioning
50 m Standing Unsupported
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Figure 20 on a screen. 2. 10 x exposures (5 x slow, followed by 5 x fast). 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Discuss the shoot, record the POA.
Practice 2. Range/Positioning
50 m Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Figure 20 on a screen. 2. 10 x exposures (5 x slow, followed by 5 x fast). 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 1 round at each exposure. 4. Discuss the shoot, record the POA.
Practice 3. Range/Positioning
50 m Standing Unsupported
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Figure 20 on a screen. 2. 10 exposures (5 x slow and 5 x fast) in random order. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 2 rounds at each exposure. 4. Discuss the shoot, record the scores.
Practice 4. Range/Positioning
50 m Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-4
1. Figure 20 on a screen. 2. 10 exposures at the slow speed. 1. Firer in the standing alert position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to adopt the nominated position, and fire 2 rounds at each exposure. 4. Between exposures order “Adopt the standing alert position”. 5. Discuss the shoot, record the scores.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 5. Range/Positioning
100 m Standing Unsupported
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Figure 20 on a screen. 2. 10 x exposures (5 x slow, followed by 5 x fast). 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 1 round at each exposure. 4. Discuss the shoot, record the POA.
Practice 6. Range/Positioning
100 m Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Figure 20 on a screen. 2. 10 x exposures (5 x slow, followed by 5 x fast). 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 1 round at each exposure. 4. Discuss the shoot, record the POA.
Practice 7. Range/Positioning
100 m Standing Unsupported
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. 2. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Figure 20 on a screen. 10 exposures (5 x slow and 5 x fast) in random order. Firer in the nominated position. Order “Watch and Shoot”. Fire 2 rounds at each exposure. Discuss the shoot, record the scores.
Practice 8. Range/Positioning
100 m Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 20 on a screen. 2. 10 exposures at the slow speed. 1. Firer in the standing alert position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to adopt the nominated position, and fire 2 rounds at each exposure. 4. Between exposures order “Adopt the standing alert position”. 5. Discuss the shoot, record the scores.
10-5
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Scoring Practices 3, 4, 7 and 8 — 1 point per hit on the target. Firers Goals and Progress HPS — 80 Pass — 52 End of Lesson Procedure
10-6
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Firing at Moving Targets — Using Firing Point Cover A. RCO Notes 1018. Aim. To practise the firer in engaging moving targets from alternate pieces of cover on the MMTTR firing point. 1019. Conduct. The shoot is to be conducted on an MMTTR fixed firing point only. 1020. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 15 minutes to complete all practices. 1021. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x screen per firer with 2 x Figure 20 targets (outwards facing) Spotting discs 24 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer 1022. Miscellaneous. a. If firers are unfamiliar with the MMTTR, the range layout and procedure is to be explained. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)). b.
Timed exposures will be controlled by the RCOs arm signals or paddle.
c. Each firer will start from the left hand piece of cover in each respective lane and move tactically to alternate pieces of cover as the shoot progresses. d.
Firers are to be allowed time to prepare for battle.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 1023. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 1024. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 1025. Practice details are as follows:
10-7
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice - Snap Range/Positioning
As per the MMTTR range furniture
Ammunition
24 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 20 on a screen. 2. 6 double exposures (3 x slow and 3 x fast) in random order. 3. An initial exposure of the targets will initiate the contact. 4. Targets are only exposed once firers are in position and the RCO has signalled to the target operator for the next double- exposure. 1. Firer is loaded and made ready in the standing alert position; 5m to the rear of the left piece of cover. 2. Order “Watch Out”. 3. On appearance of the targets, the firer is to double forward and take cover. 4. The firer will then receive 2 exposures of the Fig 20 target where he is to fire 2 Rounds at the target for each exposure. 5. After the second exposure the firer is to apply his safety catch and move to the next piece of cover. 6. On completion of the last exposure the firer is to apply his safety catch and await further orders.
Scoring 1 point per hit on the target. Firers Goals and Progress HPS — 24 Pass — 15 End of Range Procedure
10-8
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Firing at Moving Targets — Assessment A. RCO Notes 1026. Aim. To practise and assess the firer using the methods of engaging crossing targets on the MMTTR. 1027. Conduct. The shoot is to be conducted on an MMTTR. If no MMTTR is available, the shoot may be conducted using DCCT. 1028. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 50 minutes to complete all practices. 1029. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x screen per firer with 2 x Figure 20 targets (outwards facing) Spotting discs 72 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer 1030. Miscellaneous. If firers are unfamiliar with the MMTTR, the range layout and procedure is to be explained. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)).
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 1031. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 1032. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 1033. Practice details are as follows: Practice - Sighters Range/Positioning
50 m Standing Unsupported and Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 20 on a screen. 2. 8 x exposures in the following order: 2 x slow, 2 x fast, 2 x slow, 2 x fast. 1. Firer in the standing unsupported position. 2. Fire 1 round at each of the first 4 exposures then adopt the kneeling unsupported position and fire 1 round at each of the remaining exposures. 3. Each shot hole is to be indicated by a spotting disc. 4. Discuss the shoot.
10-9
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 1. Range/Positioning
50 m Standing Unsupported
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Figure 20 on a screen. 2. 8 x exposures (4 x slow and 4 x fast) in random order. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 2 Rounds at each exposure. 4. Record the scores.
Practice 2. Range/Positioning
50 m Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
Practice 4. Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
10-10
1. Figure 20 on a screen. 2. 8 x exposures at the slow speed. 1. Firer in the standing alert position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to adopt the nominated position and fire 2 Rounds at each exposure. 4. Between exposures order ”Adopt the standing alert position”. 5. Record the scores.
100 m Standing Unsupported 16 Rounds 1. Figure 20 on a screen. 2. 8 x exposures (4 x slow and 4 x fast) in random order. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 2 Rounds at each exposure. 4. Record the scores.
100 m Kneeling Unsupported 16 Rounds 1. Figure 20 on a screen. 2. 8 x exposures (4 x slow and 4 x fast) in random order. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 2 Rounds at each exposure. 4. Record the scores.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Scoring 1034. 1 point per hit on the target. Standards HPS — 64 Pass — 42 End of Range Procedure
10-11
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Moving Targets at Longer Ranges A. RCO Notes 1035. Aim. To practise the methods of engaging crossing targets using DCCT. 1036. Conduct. The shoot is to be conducted using DCCT ONLY. 1037. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 60 minutes to complete all practices on DCCT. 1038. Stores. Complete DCCT equipment. 1039. Miscellaneous. a. Firers are to fire the DCCT bore sighting shoot prior to firing the practices listed below. b. Prior to this lesson, firers are to be revised in ‘Firing at Crossing Targets’ (see Ref B).
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 1040. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 1041. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules applicable to DCCT. Practice Details 1042. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Identify and apply points of aim for a moving target. Range/Positioning
200m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
WALKING 5 left and 5 right runs of a fig 20 target. 1. At each exposure fire 1 round. 2. Discuss results.
Practice 2. Identify and apply points of aim for a moving target. Range/Positioning
200m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
RUNNING 5 left and 5 right runs of a fig 20 target.
Instructions
As above.
10-12
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 3. Identify and apply points of aim for a moving target. Range/Positioning 300m Prone Ammunition 10 Rounds WALKING Target/ Exposure 5 left and 5 right runs of a fig 20 target. Instructions As above. Practice 4. Identify and apply points of aim for a moving target. Range/Positioning 300m Prone Ammunition 10 Rounds RUNNING Target/ Exposure 5 left and 5 right runs of a fig 20 target. Instructions As above. Practice 5. Identify and apply points of aim for a moving target. Incorporating fresh wind. Range/Positioning 200m Prone Ammunition 10 Rounds WALKING Target/ Exposure 5 left and 5 right runs of a fig 20 target. Instructions As above. Practice 6. Identify and apply points of aim for a moving target. Incorporating wind. Range/Positioning 200m Prone Ammunition 10 Rounds RUNNING Target/ Exposure 5 left and 5 right runs of a fig 20 target. Instructions As above. Practice 7. Identify and apply points of aim for a moving target. Incorporating wind. Range/Positioning 300m Prone Ammunition 10 Rounds WALKING Target/ Exposure 5 left and 5 right runs of a fig 20 target. Instructions As above. Practice 8. Identify and apply points of aim for a moving target. Incorporating wind. Range/Positioning 300m Prone Ammunition 10 Rounds RUNNING Target/ Exposure 5 left and 5 right runs of a fig 20 target. Instructions As above.
End of Lesson Procedure 10-13
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Firing at the Limit of Night Visibility (LNV) Instructional Shoot and Assessment A. RCO Notes 1043. Aim. To practise and assess the methods of engaging targets at the limit of night visibility (LNV). 1044. Conduct. The lesson can be conducted on an ETR, CGR or GR (Service personnel employed on Armed Guarding duties can fire this LF lesson in the DCCT, if a live range is unavailable. 1045. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. It may be necessary during Phase 1 training to allocate 1 x 40 minute period by day for rehearsals. 1046. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the practice details. 1047. Stores. Normal range stores (including): Red Lamps as required by local range regulations 1 x torch fitted with red filter per coach 1 x whistle 1 x Figure 11 stick-in target (draped) per firer (SARTS Figure 11 if using an ETR with SARTS) 30 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer 1048. Miscellaneous. a. Before being trained to shoot at night, the firer must be taught the night vision lessons from DCC Training, Volume 1, Fieldcraft, Battle Lessons and Exercises (not required for users completing the LNV shoot for deployment on armed guarding). The LNV is to be established using the sight to be used for the firing practice (see Chapter 4 of Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)), however the maximum range at which the shoots are to take place is 100 metres. b. Where necessary, the instructional phase of this lesson should be taught or revised on the range while waiting for the correct light level. Range discipline and night range procedures should then be explained and ‘walked through’ before firing begins. c. Timed exposures are to be controlled by whistle blasts. A suggested method is to start the exposure with a short blast and end the exposure with a long blast. d.
10-14
LSW is to be fired bipod supported on practices using the prone position.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 1049. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 1050. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) 1051. Establishing LNV. Using the most applicable method to suit the range establish LNV. (See Chapter 4 of Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Night Shooting 1052. Iron Sight. Explain and demonstrate by day: a.
Select the large aperture.
b.
Observe the target with both eyes open.
c. Correctly position the butt in the shoulder and the cheek on the cheek piece with the rifle angled down below the target. d. Whilst initially observing the target with both eyes and looking over the top of the rear sight, start to raise the weapon until the TRILUX source is observed in the bottom of the field of view. e. Continue to raise the weapon until the TRILUX source appears just below the POA and the rear aperture is presented in front of the right eye. f. As the TRILUX source is about to coincide with the POA, close the left eye. g.
As soon as the TRILUX source is on the POA, squeeze the trigger.
1053. SUSAT/LDS. Explain and demonstrate by day: a.
Ensure the range drum is set at the 300 metre range position (SUSAT).
b. Look through the sight and adjust the brightness until the tip of the pointer/crosshair is adequately illuminated. c.
Hold, aim and fire as for daylight shooting.
1054. Confirm by practice. Practice Details 1055. Practice details are as follows: 10-15
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 1. Sighting Range/Positioning
LNV Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 stick-in (draped).
Instructions
1. Fire in the nominated position. 2. Fire five rounds. 3. Identify the MPI. 4. Targets up and hold.
Practice 2. Snap Range/Positioning
LNV Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Rapid Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-16
1. Figure 11 stick- in (draped). 2. 5 x 5 second exposures with irregular intervals between 5 and 10 seconds. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch, Listen and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Record the scores. 5. Targets up and hold (ETR only – targets fall when hit).
LNV Kneeling Unsupported 5 Rounds 1. Figure 11 stick- in (draped). 2. 5 x 6 second exposures with irregular intervals between 5 and 10 seconds. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch, Listen and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Record the scores. 5. Targets up and hold (ETR only – targets fall when hit).
LNV Prone 5 Rounds 1. Figure 11 stick- in (draped). 2. 1 x 15 second exposure. 1. Firer in the standing alert position. 2. Order “Watch, Listen Out”. 3. At the start of the exposure the firer is to adopt the prone position and fire five rounds rapid at the exposure. 4. Record the scores. 5. Targets up and hold.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 5. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 6. Rapid Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
LNV Kneeling Unsupported 5 Rounds 1. Figure 11 stick- in (draped). 2. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Fire in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch, Listen and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Record the scores. 5. Targets up and hold (ETR only – targets fall when hit).
LNV Prone 5 Rounds 1. Figure 11 stick- in (draped). 2. 1 x 12 second exposure. 1. Firer in the standing alert position. 2. Order “Watch, Listen Out”. 3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to adopt the prone position and fire five rounds rapid at the exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
Scoring 1056. One point per hit. Firers Goals and Progress 1057. Assessment Practices 4, 5 and 6.. HPS — 15 Pass — 10 End of Lesson Procedure
10-17
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Time Chart 1058. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed. Practice
Range/Target
Timings
1
LNV Figure 11 stick-in (draped)
No time limit
2
LNV Figure 11 stick-in (draped)
UP DOWN 05 11 19 25 30 36 45 51 58 1:04
Up and hold. (ETR only – targets fall when hit)
3
LNV Figure 11 stick-in (draped)
As for Practice 2
Up and hold. (ETR only – targets fall when hit)
4
LNV Figure 11 stick-in (draped)
UP DOWN 05 21
Up and hold.
5
LNV Figure 11 stick-in (draped)
UP DOWN 05 10 15 20 26 31 37 42 48 53
Up and hold. (ETR only – targets fall when hit)
6
LNV Figure 11 stick-in (draped)
UP DOWN 05 18
Up and hold.
10-18
Remarks Up and hold.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Firing with NVD/TI — Zeroing (Daylight Shoot) A. RCO Notes 1059. Aim. To zero the NVD/TI sight to the firer’s personal weapon. 1060. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on an ETR or Converted Gallery Range (CGR )(with or without SARTS) or a Gallery Range. 1061. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to complete all practices. 1062. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x Figure 11 on a 1.220 m screen per firer with a 75 mm x 100 mm white/thermal patch positioned with the bottom centre of the patch on the centre of the figure SARTS converted range 1 x Figure 12d per firer 25 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer (Primary User) 1063. Miscellaneous. a. This shoot should take place in daylight immediately before the night practices in NVD/TI Rifle/LSW Assessment. b.
All NVD/TI sights must be bore sighted prior to firing.
c.
LSWs are to fire from the bipod supported position.
d. Conducting officers, NCO coaches and firers (when applicable) are to be fully conversant with the details in Infantry Training, Volume VI, (Intelligence,Surveillance, Target Acquisition and Reconnaissance (ISTAR) Equipment) Platoon and Section STA Equipment.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 1064. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 1065. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate where necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))
10-19
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice Details 1066. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Grouping Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d
Instructions
1. Fire 4 x 5 round groups at the same aiming mark. 2. The firer is to apply the safety catch, stand up, then re-adopt his position between each group. 3. Measure the size of the group. 4. Identify the MPI and adjust for zero if necessary.
Practice 2. Check group Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d
Instructions
1. Fire a 5 round check group to con-firm zero. 2. If the correct zero is not achieved, repeat Practice 1 using the group plus a further 15 Rounds. 3. Once zero is confirmed record settings using the SAC.
Firers Goals and Progress 1067. The 5 round group size that should be achieved is 150 mm. End of Lesson Procedure
10-20
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Firing With NVD/TI — Rifle/LSW Assessment A. RCO Notes 1068. Aim. To practise and assess firers in engaging an enemy at night with the NVD/TI sights fitted to their personal weapon. 1069. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on an ETR (with or without SARTS), CGR or a Gallery Range. 1070. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 15 minutes to complete all practices. 1071. Stores. Normal range stores including: Red lamps as required by local range regulations 1 x torch per coach fitted with red filter 1 x Figure 11 per firer at 100, 200 and 300 metres(Marked for thermal recognition) CGR Left Coffin – Figure 11 40 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer (Primary User) 1072. Miscellaneous. a.
This shoot should be conducted immediately after the zeroing practices.
b.
LSWs are to fire from the bipod supported position.
c. Due to ‘tunnel vision’ at night, range conducting officers should ensure that targets are identified to firers before firing at each range. d.
A time chart is provided after the practice details.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 1073. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 1074. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate where necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 1075. Practice details are as follows:
10-21
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 1. Snap Range/Positioning
100 m Standing Unsupported
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. 1 x Figure 11. 2. 5 x 5 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
Practice 2. Rapid Range/Positioning
100 m Sitting Unsupported
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
Practice 3. Snap Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Rapid Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-22
1. 1 x Figure 11. 2. 1 x 20 second exposure. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 10 Rounds rapid. 4. Targets up and hold.
200 m Kneeling Supported 5 Rounds 1. 1 x Figure 11. 2. 5 x 6 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit. 5. Record the scores.
200 m Fire Trench 10 Rounds 1. 1 x Figure 11. 2. 1 x 20 second exposure. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 10 Rounds rapid at the exposure. 4. Targets up and hold. 5. Record the scores.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 5. Deliberate Range/Positioning 300 m Prone Ammunition 10 Rounds 1. 1 x Figure 11. Target/ Exposure 2. 10 x 6 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. Instructions 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit. 5. Record the scores.
Scoring 1076. One point per hit. Standards HPS — 40 Pass — 24 End of Lesson Procedure
10-23
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Time Chart 1077. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed.
10-24
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
1
100 m Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 11 18 24 28 34 39 45 50 56
Fall when hit.
Remarks
2
100 m Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 26
Up and hold.
3
200 m Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 12 19 26 30 37 43 50 55 1:02
Fall when hit.
4
200 m Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 26
Up and hold.
5
300 m Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 12 19 26 30 37 43 50 55 1:02 1:08 1:15 1:20 1:27 1:31 1:38 1:43 1:50 1:55 2:02
Fall when hit.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Firing with HMNVS and LA — Introductory Shoot at 25 Metres A. RCO Notes 1078. Aim. To confirm that the firer can aim, hold and fire the rifle using HMNVS and LA from the sitting, kneeling, standing position. 1079. Firing Requirement. The Introductory Shoot is only fired during initial training. 1080. Conduct. The lesson is to be conducted on a 25 metre range or ETR with screens placed 25 metres from the firers. 1081. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 20 minutes to complete all practices. 1082. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x witness screen with 4 x 25 mm square (black) aiming marks per firer 30 x 5.56 mm ball Rounds per firer Bore sighting Chart 1083. Miscellaneous. a. Firers’ personal weapons are to be optic/iron sight, zeroed prior to this practice. b. Firers are to adjust both IR and red dot lasers, with the aid of an assistant, onto the CZP using the Bore sight Chart before Practice 1.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 1084. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 1085. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 1086. The practice details are as follows:
10-25
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 1. Grouping (Fired twice – first with red dot, then with IR laser) Range/Positioning
25 m Sitting, Kneeling and Standing
Ammunition
2 x 15 Round magazines
Target/ Exposure
3 x 25 mm square aiming marks
Instructions
1. Fire a five round group from sitting, kneeling and standing positions. 2. Discuss the groups and record the group sizes. 3. Repeat the practice using IR laser.
Firers Goals and Progress 1087. The following group sizes should be used as a guide to progress: Sitting
—
75 mm
Kneeling
—
80 mm
Standing
—
140 mm
End of Lesson Procedure
10-26
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Firing With HMNVS and LA — Grouping and Laser Aimer Alignment at 100 Metres A. RCO Notes 1088. Aim. To superimpose the firer’s Mean Point of Impact (MPI) on to the Correct Zero Position (CZP) for the HMNVS, LA and host weapon. 1089. Conduct. The lesson is to be conducted on either a CGR (with or without SARTS), an ETR (if converted to SARTS) or a GR. 1090. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. 1091. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x 1.220 m screen with Fig 12 per firer (1 x 1.220 m screen per firer on an ETR or MMTTR) each with a 75 mm x 100 mm white patch positioned with the bottom centre of the patch on the centre of the Fig 12/Fig 12d SARTS target at 100 metres 50 x 5.56 mm ball Rounds per firer 1092. Miscellaneous. a. Firers’ personal weapons are to be optic/iron sight zeroed prior to this practice. b. Firers are to adjust both IR and red dot lasers, with the aid of an assistant, onto the CZP using the Bore sighting Chart before Practice 1. c.
The HMNVS and LA CZP is the same as the host weapon.
d. In Practice 1, the weapon is correctly zeroed is the distance from the CZP to the MPI is 50mm or less (PE). e.
All practices should be fired at night.
Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 1093. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 1094. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))
10-27
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice Details 1095. The practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Check groups Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
1 x 20 Round magazine
Target/ Exposure
Figure 12 on a 1.220 m screen
Instructions
1. Switch on red dot laser. 2. Fire one group of five Rounds. 3. Identify the MPI and adjust red dot laser for zero if necessary. 4. Fire another five round group if necessary. 5. Switch on HMNVS, place in operating position and focus at 100 metres. 6. Switch on IR laser. 7. Fire one group of five. 8. Identify the MPI and adjust LA for zero if necessary. 9. Fire another five round group if necessary.
Practice 2. Register POA Range/Positioning
100 m Kneeling and Standing Alert Positions
Ammunition
1 x 10 Round magazine
Target/ Exposure
As for Practice 1
Instructions
Fire a five round group in each firing position with each laser to determine POA.
Firers Goals and Progress 1096. The group sizes that should be achieved in Practices 1 and 2 (100 metres) are: Prone — 200 mm Kneeling — 225 mm Standing — 450 mm End of Lesson Procedure
10-28
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Firing with HMNVS and LA — Assessment A. RCO Notes 1097. Aim. To assess the firer in engaging targets using HMNVS and LA from the kneeling and standing positions. 1098. Conduct. The assessment is to be conducted on a CGR (with or without SARTS), an ETR (with or without SARTS) or a GR. 1099. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 20 minutes to complete all practices once. 10100. Stores. Red lamps as required by Range Stores Normal range stores 1 x Fig 11 per firer 25 x 5.56 mm ball Rounds per firer 10101. Miscellaneous. a.
All practices must be fired at night using the IR Laser.
b. Firers’ personal weapons are to be optic/iron sight zeroed prior to this practice. c. Firers are to adjust both IR and red dot lasers, with the aid of an assistant, onto the CZP using the Bore sighting Chart before Practice 1. d.
No extra time will be given for stoppages.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 10102. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 10103. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 10104. The practice details are as follows:
10-29
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 1. Snap/ Rapid Range/Positioning
100 m Standing and Kneeling Positions
Ammunition
10 Rounds 1. Figure 11. 2. 2 x 20 second exposures with an interval to allow firers to adopt the patrol position. 1. Firer in the Standing Alert position with the HMNVS and LA ‘On’ and focused at 100 metres. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. On the appearance of the target the firer is to fire one round from the standing position then adopt the kneeling position and fire a further four rounds at the exposure. 4. Firers must adopt the Standing Alert position between exposures. 5. Target up and hold.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 2. Snap Range/Positioning
100 m Standing Alert
Ammunition
5 Rounds 1. Figure 11. 2. 5 x 6 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firer in the nominated position with the HMNVS and LA ‘On’ and focused at 100 metres. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
Target/ Exposure Instructions
Practice 3. Snap Range/Positioning
100 m Kneeling
Ammunition
5 Rounds 1. Figure 11. 2. 5 x 8 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firer in the nominated position with the HMNVS and LA ‘On’ and focused at 100 metres. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
Target/ Exposure Instructions
Practice 4. Snap Range/Positioning
50 m Standing Unsupported
Ammunition
5 Rounds 1. Figure 12. 2. 5 x 6 second exposures. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
Target/ Exposure Instructions
10-30
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Scoring 10105. Scores are to be recorded and announced on conclusion of each practice. Practices 1 to 4
—
One point per hit
Standard HPS — 25 Pass — 17 End of Lesson Procedure
Time Chart 10106. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed. Practice
Range/Target
1
100 m Figure 11
Up Down 05 26
Timings
1. Reset watch and repeat once. 2. Up and hold.
Remarks
2
100 m Figure 11
Up Down 05 12 18 25 29 36 41 48 51 58
Fall when hit.
3
100 m Figure 11
Up Down 05 14 19 28 32 41 45 54 1:01 1:10
Fall when hit.
4
50 m Figure 12
Up Down 05 12 17 24 30 37 40 47 54 1:01
Targets fall when hit unless stick in targets are used.
10-31
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Automatic Fire — Instructional Shoot on DCCT A. RCO Notes 10107. Aim. To practise that the firer can hold, aim and fire his weapon correctly when firing bursts. 10108. Conduct. The shoot is to be conducted using DCCT. If DCCT is not available the shoot may be carried out on a range or LFTTA using stick-in targets. 10109. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. 10110. Stores. Complete DCCT equipment or Normal range stores including: 1 x Whistle 1 x Stopwatch 12 x wooden stakes 1 x sledge hammer 1 x roll mine tape Chalk (as required) 1 x Double Figure 11 (stick-in) per firer 120 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer 10111. Miscellaneous. a. Firers are to fire the DCCT bore sighting shoot prior to firing the practices listed below. b. Prior to this lesson, firers are to be revised in the ‘Use of Bursts’ (see Ref B). c. It must be emphasised to firers that only one burst is to be fired per exposure in Practices 3, 6 and 7. d. Timed exposures are to be controlled by whistle blasts. A suggested method is to start the exposure with a short blast and end the exposure with a long blast. e. If the shoot is to be conducted on an ETR the targets are to be positioned 50 metres forward of the main firing point. This will ensure that the electric target mechanisms are not damaged. f. If an ETR is not available an area of flat open ground of approximately 100 m x 100 m within a LFTTA is required. A suggested layout of the range is after the Automatic Fire – Assessment time chart. In these circumstances, RCOs are to hold range qualifications SA(A)(90) or SA(C)(90) in accordance with Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21). 10-32
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 10112. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 10113. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate where necessary the range safety rules applicable to DCCT. Practice Details 10114. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Range/Positioning
25 m Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Double Figure 11. 2. No time limit. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Fire 15 Rounds in bursts of 2–3 Rounds. 3. Discuss the group, record the POA.
Practice 2. Range/Positioning
25 m Standing Unsupported
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. 2. 1. 2. 3.
Double Figure 11. No time limit. Firer in the nominated position. Fire 15 Rounds in bursts of 2–3 Rounds. Discuss the group, record the POA.
Practice 3. Range/Positioning
25 m Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Double Figure 11. 2. 5 x 5 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firer in the standing alert position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to adopt the nominated position and fire one burst of 2-3 Rounds at the exposure. 4. After each exposure order “Apply safety catches, stand up”. 5. Record the scores.
10-33
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 4. Range/Positioning
50 m Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. 2. 1. 2. 3.
Double Figure 11. No time limit. Firer in the nominated position. Fire 15 Rounds in bursts of 2–3 Rounds. Discuss the group, record the POA.
Practice 5. Range/Positioning
50 m Standing Unsupported
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. 2. 1. 2. 3.
Double Figure 11. No time limit. Firer in the nominated position. Fire 15 Rounds in bursts of 2–3 Rounds. Discuss the group, record the POA.
Practice 6. Range/Positioning
50 m Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Double Figure 11. 2. 5 x 5 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firer in the standing alert position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to adopt the nominated position and fire one burst of 2-3 Rounds at each exposure. 4. After each exposure order “Apply safety catches, stand up”. 5. Record the scores.
Practice 7. Range/Positioning
50 m Standing Unsupported and Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
30 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-34
1. Double Figure 11. 2. 5 x 12 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firer in the standing alert position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to fire one burst of 2–3 Rounds from the standing unsupported position, then adopt the kneeling unsupported position and fire a further burst of 2–3 Rounds. 4. After each exposure order “Apply safety catches, stand up”. 5. Record the scores.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Scoring 10115. Practices 3, 6 and 7
—
1 point per hit.
Firers Goals and Progress HPS — 60 Pass — 33 End of Lesson Procedure
10-35
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle/Carbine/Automatic Fire – Assessment 25 Metres A. RCO Notes 10116. Aim. To confirm that the firer can hold, aim and fire his rifle/carbine correctly when firing bursts. 10117. Conduct. This shoot may be conducted on an ETR (if approved by Range Control) or on a LFTTA. 10118. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to complete all practices. 10119. Stores. Normal range stores including: 1 x Whistle 1 x Stopwatch 12 x Wooden Stakes 1 x Sledge Hammer 1 x Roll Mine Tape Chalk (as required) 1 x Double Figure 11 (stick-in) per firer 50 x 5.56 mm Rounds Ball Ammunition per firer 1 x Bayonet per firer (if applicable). 10120. Miscellaneous. a. Timed exposures are to be controlled by whistle blast. A suggested method is to start the exposure with a short blast and end the exposure with a long blast. b. It must be emphasised to the firer that only one burst is to be fired per exposure in Practices 3 and 4. c. If the shoot is to be conducted on an ETR the targets are to be positioned 25m forward of the main firing point providing this is permitted by range standing orders. This will ensure that the electronic target mechanisms are not damaged. d.
A time chart is provided after the practice details.
e. If the bayonet is to be used as part of LFTT then this shoot is to be fired with the bayonet attached to the rifle.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 10121. Safety. Normal safety precautions. The RCO is to check the security and serviceability of bayonets where applicable. 10-36
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
10122. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules applicable (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)). Practice Details 10123. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Range/Positioning
25m Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Double Figure 11 (stick in) 2. No time limit. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Fire 10 Rounds in bursts of 2-3 Rounds. 3. Discuss the group, record the POA.
Practice 2. Range/Positioning
25m Kneeling
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Double Figure 11 (stick in) 2. No time limit. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Fire 10 Rounds in bursts of 2-3 Rounds. 3. Discuss the group, record the POA.
Practice 3. Range/Positioning
25m Standing
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Double Figure 11 (stick in) 2. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals 1. Firers in the standing alert position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. The start of the exposure is the signal for the firer to fire a burst of 2-3 Rounds at each exposure. 4. Between exposures firers are to adopt the standing alert position. 5. Record the scores.
Practice 4. Range/Positioning
25m Kneeling
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Double Figure 11 (stick in) 2. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals
10-37
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
1. Firers in the standing alert position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. The start of the exposure is the signal for the firer to adopt the kneeling position and fire a burst of 2-3 Rounds at each exposure. 4. Between exposures order “Adopt the standing alert position”. 5. Record the scores.
Instructions
Scoring 10124. One point per hit in Practices 3 and 4. Standards HPS – 30 Pass – 21 End of Lesson Procedure
Time Chart Practice
Range/Target
Timings
1
25m Double Figure 11 (Stick in)
No time limit.
1. Up and Hold
Remarks
2
25m Double Figure 11 (Stick in)
No time limit.
1. Up and Hold
3
25m Double Figure 11 (Stick in)
UP DOWN 05 10
1. Up and Hold 2. Reset watch and repeat four times. 3. Record the scores.
4
25m Double Figure 11 (Stick in)
UP DOWN 05 10
1. Up and Hold 2. Reset watch and repeat four times. 3. Record the scores.
Tgt * Tgt Tgt Tgt Tgt Tgt Tgt Tgt Tgt Tgt 25 m - - - - - - - - ** ** Notes: * Targets are to be spaced at least 5 metres apart. ** White mine tape should be used to mark the main firing points at 25 m and 50 m.
10-38
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Individual Battle Shooting Range (IBSR) — Defensive Phase A. RCO Notes 10125. Aim. To practise the firer in engaging targets at differing ranges from alternate pieces of cover on the IBSR. 10126. Conduct. The shoot is to be conducted on the IBSR fixed firing point only. 10127. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 25 minutes to complete all practices. 10128. Stores. Normal range stores 16 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer 10129. Miscellaneous. a. If firers are unfamiliar with the IBSR, the range layout and procedure is to be explained. (See Reference A. b.
Timed exposures will be controlled by the RCOs arm signals or paddle.
c. Each firer will start from the left hand piece of cover in each respective lane and move tactically to alternate pieces of cover as the shoot progresses. d.
Firers are to be allowed time to prepare for battle.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 10130. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 10131. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 10132. Practice details are as follows:
10-39
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 1. Snap Range/Positioning
As per the IBSR range furniture
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 11 or 12 2. 1 x 1 second flash exposure followed by 2 x 4 second exposures at irregular intervals from each piece of cover. 3. Fig 11 and Fig 12 targets are to be randomly exposed as per the RCOs instructions. 4. There will be a total of 8 double exposures and the RCO is to ensure that the exposures are split equally between Fig 11 and Fig 12 targets. 4. Targets are only exposed once firers are in position and the RCO has signalled for the tar- gets to be raised. 1. Firer is loaded and made ready in the standing alert position; 5 m to the rear of the left piece of cover. 2. Order “Watch Out”. 3. On appearance of the flash exposure the firer is to double forward and take cover. 4. The firer will then receive 2 exposures of a Fig 11 or Fig 12 for 4 seconds each at each piece of cover. 5. The firer is to fire one round at each exposure. 6. Targets fall when hit. 7. After the second exposure the firer is to apply his safety catch and move to the next piece of cover. 8. On completion of the last exposure the firer is to apply his safety catch and await further orders.
Scoring 10133. 1 point per hit on the target. Firers Goals and Progress HPS — 16 Pass — 10 End of Lesson Procedure
Time Chart 10134. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed. Practice
Range/Target
Timings
Remarks
Snap
100 m Figure 12
UP DOWN 05 06 17 22 28 33
1. Fall when hit. 2. Reset watch and await RCOs signal.
10-40
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle/LSW (Bipod Legs Folded) Vehicle Mounted Shoots A. RCO Notes 10135. Aim. The aim of this is shoot is to teach firers how to fire the Rifle/LSW (bipod folded). This shoot covers firing at static targets from a moving vehicle when engaged from either flank. 10136. Conduct. This lesson can be conducted on a LFTTA applying the rules contained in References A (Pamphlet 21). Either electric, stick in or pull up targets are required to conduct the shoot. RCOs are to apply either the WDA for flat ground or rough ground. RCOs must also comply with Range Standing Orders. This shoot is to be conducted from: a.
Smooth Track. Tarmac road building up to a maximum speed of 40 kph.
b. Rough Track. Rough surface but without chamfers, pot holes or divots building up to a speed of 25 kph. c. Rough Ground. Track or ground with chamfers, pot holes and divots building up to a speed of 10 kph. 10137. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 60 minutes to complete all practices. 10138. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the practice details. 10139. Stores. Normal range stores Stick in Single Fig 11 Stick in Double Fig 11 Stick in Triple Fig 11 Electric Targets/Pull up Single Fig 11 Electric Targets/Pull up Double Fig 11 Electric Targets/Pull up Triple Fig 11 Paste pot & patches Whistle Mine Tape 60 x 5.56 mm Rounds Ball ammunition Vehicle Goggles
As required As required As required As required As required As required As required As required As required per firer As required 1 per firer
10-41
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
10140. Miscellaneous. a. Only one firer and one safety supervisor is permitted per vehicle. If the LSW is to be used the bipod legs must be folded away the weapon is to be used in the same manner as the rifle. Firing can only take place over the side of the vehicle providing the target being engaged is within the arcs allocated for the range. Under no circumstances is firing to be conducted over the front or the rear or the vehicle (see diagram below for a detailed explanation).
SUGGESTED LAYOUT OF THE RANGE
B. CONDUCT OF THE LESSON Preliminaries 10141. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 10142. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules (See Reference A Pamphlet No. 21).
10-42
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Weapon Safety Rules a. Practice are generic and may be conducted on all permissible vehicle platforms. However, it is the responsibility of the Range Conducting Officers to ensure additional safety considerations, such as the safe firing angle and prefiring checks, are considered before the start of the activity. The information contained in the respective UOR Platform Crew Training Course Folder and training publication is to be adhered to. b. Rollover and drop down drills and a non firing rehearsal are to be practiced by all firers no more than 24 hours prior to live firing. c. Where necessary, external fittings such as antennas and stowage bins are to be removed prior to live firing. d. The limits of engagement must be clearly identifiable on the ground. If no natural features are available, coloured pegs can be used. Firing from a moving vehicle must only take place providing personnel in the vehicle are not within the WDA and the fire is kept within the arc. e.
The LSW is to be zeroed prior to conducting the live firing lesson.
f.
The live firing lesson may be conducted on three different surfaces: (1)
Smooth track (tarmac road) building up to a maximum of 40 kph.
(2) Rough track (rough surface but without chamfers, pot holes or divots) building up to a maximum of 25 kph. (3) Rough ground (track or ground with chamfers, pot holes and divots) building up to a maximum of 10 kph. g. The appropriate WDA template is to be applied. The SA safety angle must be increased by adding the appropriate C of F shown in Ref A. The RCO is to check the condition of the ground on the day of firing. h. Firing from a moving vehicle platform is only to be conducted when firers have successfully completed the static vehicle practices. Additionally, firers are to complete practices on a smooth track before progressing to a rough track and then on to rough ground. i. Safety supervisors are to be positioned in such a way that they can physically and swiftly intervene. Depending on the vehicle type, this may be on the vehicle, on the ground, or in a vehicle following close by. Whatever the circumstances, communications must be maintained between the RCO, supervisor, vehicle crew, and firer at all times.
10-43
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice Details 10143. All Practices are to be fired from the standing position with the bipod folded, practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Range/Positioning
100m
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. 3 x Single Figure 11. 2. Slow moving (see note) 1. Firers in the standing position (See miscellaneous paragraph). 2. Vehicle is to move along the track at the required speed. 3. Firer to fire 5 Rounds rapid at each target. 4. Target up and hold.
Practice 2. Range/Positioning
200m
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. 3 x Double Figure 11. 2. Slow moving (see note) 1. Firers in the standing position (See miscellaneous paragraph). 2. Vehicle is to move along the track at the required speed. 3. Firer to fire 5 Rounds rapid at each target. 4. Target up and hold.
Practice 3. Range/Positioning
300m
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. 3 x Triple Figure 11. 2. Slow moving (see note) 1. Firers in the standing position (See miscellaneous paragraph). 2. Vehicle is to move along the track at the required speed. 3. Firer to fire 5 Rounds rapid at each target. 4. Target up and hold.
Practice 4. Range/Positioning
100m
Ammunition
9 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
10-44
1. 3 x Figure 11. 2. Slow moving (see note) 1. Firers in the standing position (See miscellaneous paragraph). 2. Vehicle is to move along the track at the required speed. 3. Firer to fire 1 burst of 2-3 Rounds at each target. 4. Target up and hold.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Note: To be conducted from a slow moving vehicle travelling at 10 kph then a fast moving vehicle travelling at 25 kph. Scoring 10144. One point per hit on target. Standards 10145. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at each firing distance and at both speeds. Failure to achieve the OMS at any firing distance will constitute a fail of the live firing lesson, however, only the practices at the firing distances where the OMS was not achieved need to be fired again. Firers who fail are to undergo further practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness, before retesting.
Ser
Vehicle Total Range Speed Rounds
1
100m
2 3
10 kph
OMS Requirement
Score
HPS
15
No of Engagements 3
6
15
200m
15
3
6
15
300m
15
3
6
15
4
100m
9
3
3
9
5
100m
15
3
6
15
200m
15
3
6
15
300m
15
3
6
15
100m
9
3
3
9
6 7 8
25 kph
10146. The vehicle is permitted to face any direction and firing may take place from any side of the vehicle, however, all targets being engaged are to be contained within the arc of fire for that range. 10147. If the range does not have a track or road for the vehicle to drive along then you are to mark the route for the vehicle using pegs and mine tape or a suitable method. This will ensure that drivers move along the same route and will assist with control to ensure that fire is contained within the arc of fire for that range. RCOs are to liaise with range control with regards to the vehicle route on the range. End of Lesson Procedure
10-45
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle Long Range Suppression Preparation and Assessment A. RCO Notes 10148. Aim. To practice and assess the firer in engaging targets at ranges from 400 – 600m using snap shooting from the prone position. This LF lesson is to be fired annually by all DCC Fire Team members whose personal weapon is the Rifle. 10149. Conduct. This lesson may be conducted on an ETR, CGR (if converted to SARTS), GR or on DCCT. 10150. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 75 minutes to complete the practices. 10151. Time Chart. A time chart for practices 2, 4 and 6 is included after the practice details. 10152. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x double figure 11 target at 400, 500 and 600 metres per firer 48 Rounds 5.56mm Ball ammunition per firer
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 10153. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 10154. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)). 10155. Revision. Aiming off for wind at long range. Practice Details 10156. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Establish POA Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Double Figure 11.
Instructions
1. Fire 5 Rounds application to confirm the MPI. 2. Firers are to record their POA on the shooting record. 3. Fire further Rounds (up to 5) to confirm the POA.
10-46
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Snap Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Double Figure 11. 2. 6 x 6 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
Practice 3. Establish POA Range/Positioning
500 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Double Figure 11.
Instructions
1. Fire 5 Rounds application to confirm the MPI. 2. Firers are to record their POA on the shooting record. 3. Fire further Rounds (up to 5) to confirm the POA.
Practice 4. Snap Range/Positioning
500 m Prone
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Double Figure 11. 2. 6 x 6 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
Practice 5. Establish POA Range/Positioning
600 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Double Figure 11.
Instructions
1. Fire 5 Rounds application to confirm the MPI. 2. Firers are to record their POA on the shooting record. 3. Fire further Rounds (up to 5) to confirm the POA.
10-47
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 6. Snap Range/Positioning
600 m Prone
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Double Figure 11. 2. 6 x 6 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
Standards 10157. The OMS for each practice or group of practices shown in the table below is a guide to progress. Ser
Range
Total Rounds
OMS Requirement
1
400 m
6
3
Highest Possible Score (HPS) 6
2
500 m
6
3
6
3
600 m
6
3
6
End of Lesson Procedure
10-48
Score
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Rifle Long Range Suppression Preparation and Assessment Time Chart Note. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed. Practice
Range/Target
Timings
2
400 m Double Figure 11
4
500 m Double Figure 11
6
600 m Double Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 1 20 27 35 42 50 57 1.03 1.10 1.17 1.24 UP DOWN 05 12 20 27 35 42 50 57 1.03 1.10 1.17 1.24 UP DOWN 05 12 20 27 35 42 50 57 1.03 1.10 1.17 1.24
Remarks Fall when hit.
Fall when hit.
Fall when hit.
10-49
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Section 2. Light Machine Gun Application of TLFTT Shoots 10158. Firing At The LNV. Firing at the LNV is to be conducted prior to TLFTT/ LFTT if the training during these stages of training the battle shot involve night shooting and as pre-operational training for all combat infantrymen serving in a regular and Reserve battalion. The results of Firing at the LNV - Assessments are to be recorded on unit computer systems.
Contents ENGAGING MOVING TARGETS MOVING TARGETS AT LONGER RANGES FIRING AT THE LIMIT OF NIGHT VISIBILITY FIRING WITH NVD/TI — ZEROING FIRING WITH NVD/TI — ASSESSMENT VEHICLE MOUNTED SHOOTS STATIC VEHICLE SHOOT VEHICLE MOUNTED SHOOTS MOVING VEHICLE SHOOT
10-51 10-53 10-56 10-59 10-61 10-64 10-70
10159. Firing with NVD/TI. NVD/TI Shoots are to be fired prior to TLFTT/LFTT (if NVD is to be used) and as pre-operational training for all combat infantrymen serving in a regular and reserve battalion. The results of Firing with NVD/TI - Assessments are to be recorded on unit computer systems. 10160. Firing At Moving Targets. Firing at Moving Targets shoots are to be fired Within 12 months prior to any LFTT exercise where the firer would be firing at moving targets. The results of Firing at Moving Targets - Assessments are to be recorded on the unit computer systems: Operational Shooting Skills and TLFTT Shoots 10161. Operational Shooting Skills and TLFTT Shoots. The details of Operational Shooting Skills and TLFTT Shoots are contained in the remaining pages of this chapter. Each practice is contained in separate pages for easy use. 10162. Dress. The dress is to include belt order webbing, Combat helmets and Body Armour, to be worn for all LF lessons. The dress for the firers is to include belt order webbing, combat helmets and body armour for all LF lessons. Once completed dress may be altered to reflect the operational role.
10-50
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
LMG - Engaging Moving Targets Preparation and Assessment A. RCO Notes 10163. Aim. To assess the gunner in engaging moving targets on the MMTTR with the LMG. 10164. Conduct. The practice is to be conducted on an MMTTR if Range Orders allow. If no MMTTR is available, the shoot may be conducted using DCCT. 10165. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to complete all practices. 10166. Stores. Normal range stores. 2 x figure 20 targets (outwards facing) per lane. Spotting discs (for MMTTR without SARTS) 100 Rounds 5.56mm ball link per firer. 10167. Miscellaneous. If firers are unfamiliar with the MMTTR, the range layout and procedure is to be explained. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No.21)).
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 10168. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 10169. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)). 10170. Revision. Revise the methods and techniques of engaging crossing targets. Practice Details 10171. Practice details are as follows:
10-51
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 1. Establish POA Range/Positioning
50 m Prone
Ammunition
50 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 20 on a screen. 2. 10 x exposures in the following order: 5 x slow. 5 x fast. 1. Firer in the prone position. 2. Fire 1 burst of 3-5 Rounds at each of the exposures. 3. The MPI of each burst is to be indicated using the SARTS tablet or with a spotting disc. 4. Discuss the practice.
Practice 2. Range/Positioning
50 m Prone
Ammunition
50 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 20 on a screen. 2. 10 x exposures (5 x slow and 5 x fast) in random order. 1. Firer in the prone position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 1 burst of 3-5 Rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit. 5. Record the scores.
Scoring 10172. (Practice 2 only) 1 point per successful engagement. Standards HPS — 10 Pass — 6 (60%) End of Range Procedure
10-52
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Moving Targets at Longer Ranges A. RCO Notes 10173. Aim. To practise the methods of engaging crossing targets using DCCT. 10174. Conduct. The shoot is to be conducted using DCCT ONLY. 10175. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 60 minutes to complete all practices on DCCT. 10176. Stores. Complete DCCT equipment. 10177. Miscellaneous. a. Firers are to fire the DCCT bore sighting shoot prior to firing the practices listed below. b. Prior to this lesson, firers are to be revised in ‘Firing at Crossing Targets’ (see Infantry Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms, The 5.56mm Light Machine Gun (LMG).
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 10178. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 10179. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules applicable to DCCT. Practice Details 10180. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Identify and apply points of aim for a moving target. Range/Positioning
200m Prone
Ammunition
10 rds or a belt of 50.
Target/ Exposure
WALKING 5 left and 5 right runs of a fig 20 target.
Instructions
As above.
10-53
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Identify and apply points of aim for a moving target. Range/Positioning
200m Prone
Ammunition
10 rds or a belt of 50.
Target/ Exposure
RUNNING 5 left and 5 right runs of a fig 20 target.
Instructions
As above.
Practice 3. Identify and apply points of aim for a moving target. Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
10 rds or a belt of 50
Target/ Exposure
WALKING 5 left and 5 right runs of a fig 20 target.
Instructions
As above.
Practice 4. Identify and apply points of aim for a moving target. Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
10 rds or a belt of 50
Target/ Exposure
RUNNING 5 left and 5 right runs of a fig 20 target.
Instructions
As above.
Practice 5. Identify and apply points of aim for a moving target. Incorporating fresh wind. Range/Positioning
200m Prone
Ammunition
10 rds or a belt of 50
Target/ Exposure
WALKING 5 left and 5 right runs of a fig 20 target.
Instructions
As above.
Practice 6. Identify and apply points of aim for a moving target. Incorporating wind. Range/Positioning
200m Prone
Ammunition
10 rds or a belt of 50
Target/ Exposure
RUNNING 5 left and 5 right runs of a fig 20 target.
Instructions
As above.
10-54
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 7. Identify and apply points of aim for a moving target. Incorporating wind. Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
10 rds or a belt of 50
Target/ Exposure
WALKING 5 left and 5 right runs of a fig 20 target.
Instructions
As above.
Practice 8. Identify and apply points of aim for a moving target. Incorporating wind. Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
10 rds or a belt of 50
Target/ Exposure
RUNNING 5 left and 5 right runs of a fig 20 target.
Instructions
As above.
End of Lesson Procedure
10-55
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Firing at the Limit of Night Visibility — LMG Instructional Shoot and Assessment A. RCO Notes 10181. Aim. To practise and assess the firers in target engagement at the LNV. 10182. Conduct. The lesson is normally fired on an ETR (with SARTS), but may be fired on a GR or CGR where Range Orders allow. 10183. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. 10184. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the practice details. 10185. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x Fig 11 per firer at LNV 90 x 5.56 mm Rounds (ball link or 4B/1T) per firer. 10186. Miscellaneous. a. Timed exposures are to be controlled by whistle blasts. A suggested method is to start the exposure with a short blast and end the exposure with a long blast. b. The LNV is to be established using the sight to be used for the firing practice (see Chapter 4 of Reference A (Pamphlet No 21)).
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 10187. Safety. Normal safety precautions (to include checking of barrels for obstructions). 10188. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) 10189. Use of Tracer. Check range orders for limitations on use of tracer. Practice Details 10190. The practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Range/Positioning
LNV Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 10 rounds in bursts of 3-5 Rounds. 2. Identify the MPI.
10-56
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Range/Positioning
LNV Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Figure 11. 2. 1 x 60 second exposure. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch, Listen and Shoot”. 3. Fire 20 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds. 4. Targets up and hold.
Practice 3. Range/Positioning
LNV Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Figure 11. 2. 4 x 6 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch, Listen and Shoot”. 3. Fire one burst of 3-5 rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
Practice 4. Range/Positioning
LNV Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Figure 11. 2. 1 x 60 second exposure. 1. Firer in the nominated position 2. Order “Watch, Listen and Shoot”. 3. Fire 20 rounds in bursts of 3-5 Rounds. 4. Targets up and hold.
Practice 5. Range/Positioning
LNV Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Figure 11. 2. 4 x 5 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch, Listen and Shoot”. 3. Fire one burst of 3-5 Rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
10-57
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Scoring 10191. The sighting practice is not scored. Practices 2 and 4
—
1 point per hit.
Practices 3 and 5
—
5 points per effective engagement.
Firers Goals and Progress 10192. Instructional Practices 4 and 5. HPS — 40 Pass — 28 End of Lesson Procedure
Time Chart 10193. One extra second has been included for target movement.
10-58
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
Remarks
1
LNV Figure 11
No time limit
Up and hold.
2
LNV Figure 11
Up and hold.
3
LNV Figure 11
4 5
LNV Figure 11 LNV Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 1:06 UP DOWN 05 12 16 23 28 35 41 48 As for Practice 2 UP DOWN 05 11 14 20 25 31 36 42
Fall when hit.
Up and hold. Fall when hit.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Firing with NVD/TI — LMG Zeroing (Daylight Shoot) A. RCO Notes 10194. Aim. To superimpose the firers Mean Point of Impact (MPI) on the Correct Zero Position (CZP) using NVD and TI sights. 10195. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on either a CGR (with or without SARTS), an ETR (if converted to SARTS) or a GR. 10196. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. 10197. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x 1.220 m screens with Fig 11 per firer each with a 75 mm x 100 mm white/ thermal patch positioned with the bottom centre of the patch on the centre of the figure SARTS converted range 1 x Fig 12d per firer 25 x 5.56 mm Rounds (ball link or 4B/1T) per firer 10198. Miscellaneous. a. This shoot should take place in daylight immediately before the night practices in LMG Assessment. Check Range Orders for details of live firing timings. b. Firers are to achieve a burst group size of 675 mm with 20 Rounds in Practice 1 before sights are adjusted. c. In Practice 2 the sight is correctly zeroed if the distance from the CZP to the MPI is within 50 mm. d. Only the Gunner is to make adjustments to the sight. Once the zero has been confirmed the other fire team members are then to fire and record any requirement to aim off. This aim off distance must be recorded and confirmed by firing.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 10199. Safety. Normal safety precautions (to include checking of barrels for obstructions). 10200. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))
10-59
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice Details 10201. The practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Grouping Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
Figure 11 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d 1. Fire 20 Rounds in bursts of 3-5 at the same aiming mark. Stand up after every second burst. 2. Discuss the group size and position. 3. Identify the MPI and adjust for zero if necessary.
Practice 2. Check Group Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
Figure 11 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d 1. Fire a five round burst to determine MPI. 2. If the correct zero is not achieved, repeat Practice 1 using the group plus a further 15 Rounds.
Firers Goals and Progress 10202. A five round burst group size of 450 mm in Practice 2. End of Lesson Procedure
10-60
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Firing With NVD/TI — LMG Assessment A. RCO Notes 10203. Aim. To practice the firers in target engagement with NVD and TI sights at night. 10204. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on either a CGR (with or without SARTS), an ETR (if converted to SARTS) or a GR. 10205. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to complete all practices. 10206. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the Practice Details. 10207. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x Fig 11 per firers at 100 m (right coffin on CGR) 1 x Double Fig 11 per firer at 200 m (left coffin on CGR) SARTS Fig 11 Target 65 x 5.56 mm Rounds (ball link 4B/1T) per firer 10208. Miscellaneous. a. Due to ‘tunnel vision’ at night, the RCO should ensure that targets are identified to firers before firing at each range. b. The RCO must be able to control practices. The use of a personal NVD is recommended.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 10209. Safety. Normal safety precautions (to include checking of barrels for obstructions). 10210. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 10211. The practice details are as follows:
10-61
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 1. Sighting Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 10 rounds in bursts of 3-5 Rounds. 2. Identify the MPI.
Practice 2. Timed Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Figure 11. 2. 1 x 45 second exposure. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 20 rounds in burst of 3-5 Rounds. 4. Targets up and hold.
Practice 3. Timed Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
35 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Double Figure 11. 2. 7 x 3 second exposures with irregular intervals over a period of two minutes. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one burst of 3-5 rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
Scoring 10212. One point per hit in Practices 2 and 3. Standard HPS — 55 Pass — 27 End of Lesson Procedure
10-62
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
TIME CHART 10213. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges this will be insufficient, therefore, additional time for target movement is to be allowed. Practice
Range/Target
Timings
1
100 m Figure 11
2
100 m Figure 11
Up Down 05 51
Up and hold.
3
200 m Double Figure 11
Up Down 05 09 25 29 51 55 1:10 1:14 1:19 1:23 1:42 1:46 1:56 2:00
Up and hold.
No time limit
Remarks Up and hold.
10-63
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
LMG Vehicle Mounted Shoots – Static Vehicle Shoot A. RCO Notes 10214. Aim. The aim of this is shoot is to teach firers how to fire the LMG at static targets from a static vehicle. 10215. Conduct. This lesson can be conducted on a LFTTA applying the rules contained in Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21) (See Miscellaneous paragraph). Either electric, stick in or pull up targets are required to conduct the shoot. RCO’s may use a fixed target line or a fixed firing point this will depend on the ground avail- able and Range Standing Orders. 10216. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. 10217. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the practice details. 10218. Stores. Normal range stores Single Fig 11 on a screen Double Fig 11 on a screen Triple Fig 11 on a screen Stick in Fig 11 Stick in Double Fig 11 Stick in Triple Fig 11 Electric Targets Single, Double & Triple Fig 11’s Pull up Single, Double & Triple Fig 11’s Paste pot & patches Whistle Mine Tape 100 x 5.56 mm Rounds Ball/4B1T Vehicle Goggles
As required As required As required. As required As required As required As required As Required Per firer As required 1 per firer
10219. Vehicles. This practice can be conducted from all permissible vehicle platforms. Firing is not permitted over the front or the rear of the vehicle. RCO’s are to ensure that they read and understand the rules contained in Reference A prior to conducting this shoot. 10220. Miscellaneous. a. Only one firer and one safety supervisor is permitted per vehicle. Below is a diagram of a suggest layout of the range. b. RCO’s are to liaise with Range Control over the most suitable range on which to achieve the aim of the lesson. 10-64
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 10221. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 10222. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules (See Reference A Pamphlet No. 21). Practice Details 10223. All Practices are to be fired from the standing position with the bipod of the gun on the roof of the vehicle, practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Range/Positioning
100m (Static)
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a screen.
Instructions
1. Firers in the standing position (See miscellaneous paragraph). 2. Firer to fire 10 Rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds. 3. Targets up and hold. 4. MPI of all the bursts to be identified and recorded.
Practice 2. Range/Positioning
100m (Static)
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. 1 x Figure 11. 2. 1 x 45 second exposure. 1. Firers in the standing position (See miscellaneous paragraph). 2. Order ”Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 20 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds. 4. Targets up and hold.
Practice 3. Range/Positioning
100m (Static)
Ammunition
30 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. 2 x Figure 11. 2. 2 x 30 second exposure (one exposure of each target). 1. Firers in the standing position (See miscellaneous paragraph). 2. Order ”Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 20 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds. 4. Targets up and hold.
10-65
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 4. Range/Positioning
200m (Static)
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Double Figure 11 on a screen.
Instructions
1. Firers in the standing position (See miscellaneous paragraph). 2. Fire 10 rounds in bursts of 3-5 Rounds. 3. Targets up and hold. 4. MPI of all the bursts to be identified and recorded.
Practice 5. Range/Positioning
200m (Static)
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. 1 x Double Figure 11. 2. 4 x 6 second exposure. 1. Firers in the standing position (See miscellaneous paragraph). 2. Order ”Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 1 burst of 3-5 rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
Practice 6. Range/Positioning
200m (Static)
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. 2 x Double Figure 11. 2. 1 x 60 second exposure (Both targets to be shown simultaneously). 1. Firers in the standing position (See miscellaneous paragraph). 2. Order ”Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 10 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
Practice 7. Range/Positioning
300m (Static)
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11 on a screen.
Instructions
1. Firers in the standing position (See miscellaneous paragraph). 2. Fire 10 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds. 3. Targets up and hold. 4. MPI of all the bursts to be identified and recorded.
10-66
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 8. Range/Positioning
300m (Static)
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. 1 x Triple Figure 11. 2. 4 x 6 second exposure. 1. Firers in the standing position (See miscellaneous paragraph). 2. Order ”Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 1 burst of 3-5 rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
Practice 9. Range/Positioning
300m (Static)
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. 2 x Triple Figure 11. 2. 1 x 60 second exposure (Both targets to be shown simultaneously). 1. Firers in the standing position (See miscellaneous paragraph). 2. Order ”Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 10 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
Scoring 10224. Practices 1, 4 and 7 are not scored. 10225. Practices 2, 3, 5, 6, 8 and 9 – 1 Point per hit on the figure targets Standards 10226. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at each firing distance in practices 2, 3, 5, 6, 8 and 9. Failure to achieve the OMS at any firing distance will constitute a fail of the live firing lesson, however, only the practices at the firing distances where the OMS was not achieved needs to be fired again. Firers who fail are to undergo further practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness, before re-testing. Ser
Range
Total Rounds
1
100m
2 3
OMS Requirement No of Engagements
Score
HPS
40
3
28
40
200m
40
5
28
40
300m
40
5
28
40
End of Lesson Procedure 10-67
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Time Chart 10227. One extra second has been included for target movement if using electric targets. If using stick in targets then a whistle is to be used to control the exposures. A test of the target mechanism should be conducted to ensure that one second is sufficient time to allow for the movement of the target. Practice
Range/ Target
Timings
1
100m Figure 11 on screen
2
100m Figure 11
Up Down 05 51
3
100m Figure 11
Up Down Tgt 1 05 Tgt 2 41
4
200m Double Figure 11 on screen
5
200m Double Figure 11
Up Down 05 12 20 27 30 37 40 47
6
200m Double Figure 11
Up Down Tgt 1&2 05
7
300 Triple Figure 11 on screen
8
300m Double Figure 11
Up Down 05 12 21 27 30 37 40 47
9
300m Double Figure 11
Up Down Tgt 1&2 05
10-68
Remarks
No time limit
1. Up and hold. 2. MPI of the 10 Rounds to be identified (up to 3 burst) Up and hold.
36 1:02
No time limit
Up and hold.
1. Up and hold. 2. MPI of the 10 Rounds to be identified (up to 3 burst) Up and hold.
1:06
No time limit.
Up and hold.
1. Up and hold. 2. MPI of the 10 Rounds to be identified (up to 3 burst) Up and hold.
1:06
Up and hold.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Suggested Layout of the Range 10228. Below are two examples of the range layout, the first example is for a LFTTA where the target line is fixed. The second example is for a fixed firing position with targets that range from 100 m - 300 m. RCO’s are to liaise with Range Control to ensure that Range Standing Orders permitted this type of exercise. 10229. The illustration below is a suggested layout for the range, depending on the size of the range you may be able to have more than one vehicle on the point.
10-69
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
LMG Vehicle Mounted Shoots Flank Contacts in a Moving Vehicle Shoot A. RCO Notes 10230. Aim. The aim of this is shoot is to teach firers how to fire the LMG. This shoot covers firing at static targets from a moving vehicle when engaged from either flank. 10231. Conduct. This lesson can be conducted on a LFTTA applying the rules contained in Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21). Either electric, stick in or pull up targets are required to conduct the shoot. RCOs are to apply either the template for flat ground or rough ground. RCOs must also comply with Range Standing Orders. The shoot is to be conducted twice, from; a.
Smooth Track. Tarmac road building up to a maximum speed of 40 kph.
b. Rough Track. Rough surface but without chamfers, pot holes or divots building up to a speed of 25 kph. c. Rough Ground. Track or ground with chamfers, pot holes and divots building up to a speed of 10 kph. 10232. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. 10233. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the practice details. 10234. Stores. Normal range stores Stick in Single Fig 11 Stick in Double Fig 11 Stick in Triple Fig 11 Electric Targets/Pull up Single Fig 11 Electric Targets/Pull up Double Fig 11 Electric Targets/Pull up Triple Fig 11 Paste pot & patches Whistle Mine Tape 90 x 5.56 mm Rounds Ball/4 B1t Belted Red and white poles Vehicle Goggles
10-70
As required As required As required As required As required As required As required As required As Required Per firer As required As required 1 per firer
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
10235. Miscellaneous. Only one firer and one safety supervisor is permitted per vehicle. a. Red and white poles need to be positioned at the extremities of the triangulation limits, this is essential to ensure that all fire remains within the arcs of fire allocated for the range. b. Below is a diagram of the suggested layout of the range, the lay- out will vary depending on the range complex, however, the ranges to and the target exposures in the table that follows are to be adhered to.
Suggested Layout of the Range
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 10236. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 10237. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules (See Reference A Pamphlet No. 21).
10-71
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Weapon Safety Rules a. Practice are generic and may be conducted on all permissible vehicle platforms. However, it is the responsibility of the Range Conducting Officers to ensure additional safety considerations, such as the safe firing angle and prefiring checks, are considered before the start of the activity. The information contained in the respective UOR Platform Crew Training Course Folder and training publication is to be adhered to. b. Rollover and drop down drills and a non firing rehearsal are to be practiced by all firers no more than 24 hours prior to live firing. c. Where necessary, external fittings such as antennas and stowage bins are to be removed prior to live firing. d. The limits of engagement must be clearly identifiable on the ground. If no natural features are available, coloured pegs can be used. Firing from a moving vehicle must only take place providing personnel in the vehicle are not within the WDA and the fire is kept within the arc. e.
The LMG is to be zeroed prior to conducting the live firing lesson.
f.
The live firing lesson may be conducted on three different surfaces: (1)
Smooth track (tarmac road) building up to a maximum of 40 kph.
(2) Rough track (rough surface but without chamfers, pot holes or divots) building up to a maximum of 25 kph. (3) Rough ground (track or ground with chamfers, pot holes and divots) building up to a maximum of 10 kph. g. The appropriate WDA template is to be applied. The SA safety angle must be increased by adding the appropriate C of F shown in Ref A. The RCO is to check the condition of the ground on the day of firing. h. Firing from a moving vehicle platform is only to be conducted when firers have successfully completed the static vehicle practices. Additionally, firers are to complete practices on a smooth track before progressing to a rough track and then on to rough ground. i. Safety supervisors are to be positioned in such a way that they can physically and swiftly intervene. Depending on the vehicle type, this may be on the vehicle, on the ground, or in a vehicle following close by. Whatever the circumstances, communications must be maintained between the RCO, supervisor, vehicle crew, and firer at all times.
10-72
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice Details 10238. All Practices are to be fired from the standing position with the bipod down resting on the cab of the vehicle, practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Range/Positioning
100m
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. 3 x Single Figure 11. 2. Slow moving (see note) 1. Firers in the standing position (See miscellaneous paragraph). 2. Vehicle is to move along the track at the required speed. 3. Firer to fire 1 burst of 3-5 rounds at each target. 4. Target up and hold.
Practice 2. Range/Positioning
200m
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. 3 x Double Figure 11. 2. Slow moving (see note) 1. Firers in the standing position (See miscellaneous paragraph). 2. Vehicle is to move along the track at the required speed. 3. Firer to fire 1 burst of 3-5 rounds at each target. 4. Target up and hold.
Practice 3. Range/Positioning
300m
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. 3 x Triple Figure 11. 2. Slow moving (see note) 1. Firers in the standing position (See miscellaneous paragraph). 2. Vehicle is to move along the track at the required speed. 3. Firer to fire 1 burst of 3-5 rounds at each target. 4. Target up and hold.
Note: The shoot is to be conducted from a slow moving vehicle travelling at 10 kph, after the firer has been debriefed it is then to be conducted from a fast moving vehicle travelling at 25 kph. Scoring 10239. One point per hit on target.
10-73
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Standards 10240. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at each firing distance and at both speeds. Failure to achieve the OMS at any firing distance will constitute a fail of the live firing lesson, however, only the practices at the firing distances where the OMS was not achieved needs to be fired again. Firers who fail are to undergo further practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness, before retesting.
Range
Total Rounds
100m
15
OMS Requirement No of Engagements 3
200m
15
3
3
300m
15
4
100m
15
200m 300m
Ser 1 2
5 6
Vehicle Speed 10 kph
25 kph
Score
HPS
6
15
6
15
3
6
15
3
6
15
15
3
6
15
15
3
6
15
10241. A number of methods are available for the collation of scores, if using electronic targets then the score can be retrieved from the target box, another method is to glue paper figure 11 targets to the rear of the target. End of Lesson Procedure 10242. The vehicle is permitted to face any direction and firing may take place from any side of the vehicle, however, all targets being engaged are to be contained with- in the arc of fire for that range. 10243. If the range does not have a track or road for the vehicle to drive along then you are to mark the route for the vehicle using pegs and mine tape or a suitable method. This will ensure that drivers move along the same route and will assist with control to ensure that fire is contained within the arc of fire for that range. RCOs are to liaise with range control with regards vehicle on the range.
10-74
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Section 3 Sharpshooter Rifle L129A1 Application of TLFTT Shoots 10244. Firing At The LNV. Firing at the LNV is to be conducted prior to TLFTT/ LFTT if the training during these stages of training the battle shot involve night shooting and as pre-operational training for all combat infantrymen serving in a regular and Reserve battalion. The results of Firing at the LNV Assessments are to be recorded on unit computer systems.
Contents ADVANCED APPLICATION OF FIRE 700 – 800 METRES FIRING AT MOVING TARGETS — ASSESSMENT FIRING AT THE LIMIT OF NIGHT VISIBILITY FIRING WITH MUNS — ASSESSMENT FIRING WITH HMNVS AND LA INTRODUCTORY SHOOT AT 25 METRES FIRING WITH HMNVS AND LA AT 100 METRES FIRING WITH HMNVS AND LA — ASSESSMENT
10-76 10-79 10-82 10-86 10-89 10-91 10-93
10245. Firing with NVD/TI. NVD/TI Shoots are to be fired prior to TLFTT/LFTT (if NVD is to be used) and as pre-operational training for all combat infantrymen serving in a regular and reserve battalion. The results of Firing with NVD/TI - Assessments are to be recorded on unit computer systems. 10246. Firing At Moving Targets. Firing at Moving Targets shoots are to be fired Within 12 months prior to any LFTT exercise where the firer would be firing at moving targets. The results of Firing at Moving Targets - Assessments are to be recorded on the unit computer systems. Operational Shooting Skills and TLFTT Shoots 10247. Operational Shooting Skills and TLFTT Shoots. The details of Opera tional Shooting Skills and TLFTT Shoots are contained in the remaining pages of this chapter. Each practice is contained in separate pages for easy use. 10248. Dress. The dress is to include belt order webbing, Combat helmets and Body Armour, to be worn for all LF lessons. The dress for the firers is to include belt order webbing, combat helmets and body armour for all LF lessons. Once completed dress may be altered to reflect the operational role.
10-75
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Advanced Application of Fire 700 – 800 Metres A. RCO Notes 10249. Aim. To practise the firer in engaging targets by snap and rapid fire from the prone position. 10250. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on a LFTTA or CGR which allows firing up to 800 metres. 10251. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the Practice Details. 10252. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 20 minutes to complete all practices. 10253. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x Triple Figure 11 per firer or Portable SARTS Figure 11 with triple Figure 11 image on monitor per firer (if available). 35 Rounds 7.62 mm Ball ammunition per firer
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 10254. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 10255. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 10256. Practice details as follows: Practice 1. Grouping Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
10-76
Figure 12 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d. 1. Fire 1 x 5 rounds groups at the aiming mark. 2. Discuss the group, record the group size.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Snap Range/Positioning
700 m Prone
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Triple Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 5 x 10 second exposures with intervals of 10 seconds. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 3 rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
Practice 3. Snap Range/Positioning
800 m Prone
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Triple Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11. 2. 5 x 10 second exposures with intervals of 10 seconds. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 3 rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets up and hold.
Scoring 10257. One point per hit. Standard 10258. The OMS for each practice or group of practices shown in the table below is a guide to progress. Prac
Range
Total Rounds
OMS Requirement
HPS
2
700 m
15
12
15
3
800 m
15
12
15
End of Lesson Procedure
10-77
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Time Chart 10259. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed.
10-78
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
2
700 m Triple Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 16 26 37 47 58 1:08 1:19 1:29 1:40
3
800 m Triple Figure 11
As for Practice 2.
Remarks Up and Hold
Up and Hold
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Firing at Moving Targets — Assessment A. RCO Notes 10260. Aim. To practise and assess the firer using the methods of engaging crossing targets on the MMTT. 10261. Conduct. The shoot is to be conducted on an MMTTR. 10262. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 50 minutes to complete all practices. 10263. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x screen per firer with 2 x Figure 20 targets (outwards facing) Spotting discs 56 Rounds 7.62 mm Ball ammunition per firer 10264. Miscellaneous. If firers are unfamiliar with the MMTTR, the range layout and procedure is to be explained. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)).
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 10265. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 10266. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 10267. Practice details are as follows: Practice - Sighters Range/Positioning
50 m Standing Unsupported and Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2 x Figure 20. 2. 8 x exposures in the following order: 2 x slow, 2 x fast, 2 x slow, 2 x fast. 1. Firer in the standing unsupported position. 2. Fire 1 round at each of the first 4 exposures then adopt the kneeling unsupported position and fire 1 round at each of the remaining exposures. 3. Each shot hole is to be indicated by a spotting disc. 4. Discuss the shoot.
10-79
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 1. Range/Positioning
50 m Standing Unsupported
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. 2. 1. 2. 3. 4.
2 x Figure 20. 6 x exposures (3 x slow and 3 x fast) in random order. Firer in the nominated position. Order “Watch and Shoot”. Fire 2 rounds at each exposure. Record the scores.
Practice 2. Range/Positioning
50 m Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 20. 2. 6 x exposures at the slow speed. 1. Firer in the standing alert position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to adopt the nominated position and fire 2 rounds at each exposure. 4. Between exposures order ”Adopt the standing alert position”. 5. Record the scores.
Practice 3. Range/Positioning
100 m Standing Unsupported
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. 2. 1. 2. 3. 4.
2 x Figure 20. 6 x exposures (3 x slow and 3 x fast) in random order. Firer in the nominated position. Order “Watch and Shoot”. Fire 2 rounds at each exposure. Record the scores.
Practice 4. Range/Positioning
100 m Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
10-80
1. 2. 1. 2. 3. 4.
2 x Figure 20. 6 x exposures (3 x slow and 3 x fast) in random order. Firer in the nominated position. Order “Watch and Shoot”. Fire 2 rounds at each exposure. Record the scores.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Scoring 10268. 1 point per hit on the target. Standard HPS — 48 Pass — 38 End of Range Procedure
10-81
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Firing at the Limit of Night Visibility (LNV) Instructional Shoot and Assessment A. RCO Notes 10269. Aim. To practise and assess the methods of engaging targets at the limit of night visibility (LNV). 10270. Conduct. The lesson can be conducted on an ETR, CGR or GR. 10271. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. It may be necessary during Phase 1 training to allocate 1 x 40 minute period by day for rehearsals. 10272. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the practice details. 10273. Stores. Normal range stores (including): Red Lamps as required by local range regulations 1 x torch fitted with red filter per coach 1 x whistle 1 x Figure 11 stick-in target (draped) per firer (SARTS Figure 11 if using an ETR with SARTS) 30 Rounds 7.62 mm Ball ammunition per firer 10274. Miscellaneous. a. Before being trained to shoot at night, the firer must be taught the night vision lessons from Infantry Training, Volume 1, Pamphlet No. 2, Fieldcraft, Battle Lessons and Exercises. The LNV is to be established using the sight to be used for the firing practice (see Chapter 4 of Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)), however the maximum range at which the shoots are to take place is 100 metres. b. Where necessary, the instructional phase of this lesson should be taught or revised on the range while waiting for the correct light level. Range discipline and night range procedures should then be explained and ‘walked through’ before firing begins. c. Timed exposures are to be controlled by whistle blasts. A suggested method is to start the exposure with a short blast and end the exposure with a long blast.
10-82
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 10275. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 10276. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) 10277. Establishing LNV. Using the most applicable method to suit the range establish LNV. (See Chapter 4 of Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Night Shooting 10278. Red Dot CQB Sight. Explain and demonstrate by day: a.
Observe the target with both eyes open.
b. Correctly position the butt in the shoulder and the cheek on the cheek piece with the rifle angled down below the target. c. Whilst initially observing the target with both eyes and looking over the top of the rear sight, start to raise the weapon until the light source is observed in the bottom of the field of view. d. Continue to raise the weapon until the light source appears just below the POA and the sight aperture is presented in front of the right eye. e.
As soon as the light source is on the POA, operate the trigger.
10279. ACOG. Explain and demonstrate by day: a. Look through the sight and adjust the brightness until the tip of the chevron is adequately illuminated. b.
Hold, aim and fire as for daylight shooting.
10280. Confirmation. Confirm by practice. Practice Details 10281. Practice details are as follows:
10-83
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 1. Sighting Range/Positioning
LNV Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 stick-in (draped).
Instructions
1. Fire in the nominated position. 2. Fire five rounds. 3. Identify the MPI. 4. Targets up and hold.
Practice 2. Snap Range/Positioning
LNV Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 11 stick- in (draped). 2. 5 x 5 second exposures with irregular intervals between 5 and 10 seconds. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch, Listen and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Record the scores. 5. Targets up and hold (ETR only – targets fall when hit).
Practice 3. Snap Range/Positioning
LNV Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 11 stick- in (draped). 2. 5 x 6 second exposures with irregular intervals between 5 and 10 seconds. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch, Listen and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Record the scores. 5. Targets up and hold (ETR only – targets fall when hit).
Practice 4. Rapid Range/Positioning
LNV Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-84
1. Figure 11 stick- in (draped). 2. 1 x 15 second exposure. 1. Firer in the standing alert position. 2. Order “Watch, Listen Out”. 3. At the start of the exposure the firer is to adopt the prone position and fire five rounds rapid at the exposure. 4. Record the scores. 5. Targets up and hold.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Standards 10282. Instructional Practices 2, 3 and 4. HPS — 15 Pass — 11 10283. Assessment Practices 5 and 6. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS (see table below). Firers who fail are to undergo further practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness, before re-testing. Ser
Range
Total Rounds
1
LNV
10
OMS Requirement Score 7
HPS 10
End of Lesson Procedure
Time Chart 10284. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed. Practice
Range/Target
Timings
1
LNV Figure 11 stick-in (draped)
2
LNV Figure 11 stick-in (draped)
3
LNV Figure 11 stick-in (draped)
4
LNV Figure 11 stick-in (draped)
UP DOWN 05 21
Up and hold.
5
LNV Figure 11 stick-in (draped)
UP DOWN 05 10 15 20 26 31 37 42 48 53
Up and hold. (ETR only – targets fall when hit)
6
LNV Figure 11 stick-in (draped)
UP DOWN 05 18
Up and hold.
No time limit UP DOWN 05 11 19 25 30 36 45 51 58 1:04 As for Practice 2
Remarks Up and hold. Up and hold. (ETR only – targets fall when hit)
Up and hold. (ETR only – targets fall when hit)
10-85
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Firing With MUNS Night Sight — Assessment A. RCO Notes 10285. Aim. To practise and assess firers in engaging an enemy at night with the MUNS night sight fitted to the rifle. 10286. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on an ETR (with or without SARTS), CGR or a Gallery Range. 10287. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 15 minutes to complete all practices. 10288. Stores. Normal range stores including: Red lamps as required by local range regulations 1 x torch per coach fitted with red filter 1 x Figure 11 per firer at 100, 200 and 300 metres CGR Left Coffin – Figure 11 40 Rounds 7.62 mm Ball ammunition per firer. 10289. Miscellaneous. a. Due to ‘tunnel vision’ at night, range conducting officers should ensure that targets are identified to firers before firing at each range. b.
A time chart is provided after the practice details.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 10290. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 10291. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate where necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 10292. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Snap Range/Positioning
100 m Standing Unsupported
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
10-86
1. 1 x Figure 11. 2. 5 x 5 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Rapid Range/Positioning
100 m Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. 1 x Figure 11. 2. 1 x 20 second exposure. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire 10 rounds rapid. 4. Targets up and hold.
Practice 3. Snap Range/Positioning
200 m Sitting
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 1 x Figure 11. 2. 5 x 6 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit. 5. Record the scores.
Practice 4. Rapid Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
1 x Figure 11. 1 x 20 second exposure. Firer in the nominated position. Order “Watch and Shoot”. Fire 10 rounds rapid at the expo- sure. Targets up and hold. Record the scores.
Practice 5. Deliberate Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 1 x Figure 11. 2. 10 x 6 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firer in the nominated position. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit. 5. Record the scores.
10-87
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Scoring 10293. One point per hit. Standards HPS — 40 Pass — 28 End of Lesson Procedure
Time Chart 10294. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed.
10-88
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
Remarks
1
100 m Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 11 18 24 28 34 39 45 50 56
Fall when hit.
2
100 m Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 26
Up and hold.
3
200 m Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 12 19 26 30 37 43 50 55 1:02
Fall when hit.
4
200 m Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 26
Up and hold.
5
300 m Figure 11
UP DOWN 05 12 19 26 30 37 43 50 55 1:02 1:08 1:15 1:20 1:27 1:31 1:38 1:43 1:50 1:55 2:02
Fall when hit.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Firing With HMNVS and LA — Introductory Shoot at 25 Metres A. RCO Notes 10295. Aim. To confirm that the firer can aim, hold and fire the rifle using HMNVS and LA from the sitting, kneeling, standing and patrol position. 10296. Firing Requirement. The Introductory Shoot is only fired during initial training. 10297. Conduct. The lesson is to be conducted on a 25 metre range or ETR with screens placed 25 metres from the firers. 10298. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 20 minutes to complete all practices. 10299. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x witness screen with 4 x 25 mm square (black) aiming marks per firer 30 x 7.62 mm ball Rounds per firer Bore sighting Chart 10300. Miscellaneous. Firers are to adjust both IR and red dot lasers, with the aid of an assistant, onto the CZP using the Bore sight Chart before Practice 1.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 10301. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 10302. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 10303. The practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Grouping (Fired twice – first with red dot, the with IR laser) Range/Positioning
25 m Sitting, Kneeling and Standing Positions
Ammunition
2 x 15 round magazines
Target/ Exposure
3 x 25 mm square aiming marks
Instructions
1. Fire a five round group from prone, kneeling and standing positions. 2. Discuss the groups and record the group sizes. 3. Repeat the practice using IR laser.
10-89
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Firers Goals and Progress 10304. The group sizes that should be achieved are: Sitting
—
75 mm
Kneeling —
80 mm
Standing —
140 mm
End of Lesson Procedure
10-90
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Firing with HMNVS and LA — Grouping and Laser Aimer Alignment at 100 Metres A. RCO Notes 10305. Aim. To superimpose the firer’s Mean Point of Impact (MPI) on to the Correct Zero Position (CZP) for the HMNVS, LA and host weapon. 10306. Conduct. The lesson is to be conducted on either a CGR (with or without SARTS), an ETR (if converted to SARTS) or a GR. 10307. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. 10308. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x 1.220 m screen with Fig 12 per firer (1 x 1.220 m screen per firer on an ETR or MMTTR) each with a 75 mm x 100 mm white patch positioned with the bottom centre of the patch on the centre of the Fig 11 target at 100 metres 30 x 7.62 mm ball Rounds per firer 10309. Miscellaneous. a. Firers’ personal weapons are to be optic/iron sight zeroed prior to this practice. b. Firers are to adjust both IR and red dot lasers, with the aid of an assistant, onto the CZP using the Bore sighting Chart before Practice 1. c.
The HMNVS and LA CZP is the same as the host weapon.
d. In Practice 1, the weapon is correctly zeroed if the distance from the CZP to the MPI is 30mm or less (PV). e.
All practices should be fired at night.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 10310. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 10311. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))
10-91
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice Details 10312. The practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Check groups Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 12 on a 1.220 m screen
Instructions
1. Switch on red dot laser. 2. Fire one group of five Rounds. 3. Identify the MPI and adjust red dot laser for zero if necessary. 4. Fire another five round group if necessary. 5. Switch on HMNVS, place in operating position and focus at 100 metres. 6. Switch on IR laser. 7. Fire one group of five. 8. Identify the MPI and adjust LA for zero if necessary. 9. Fire another five round group if necessary.
Practice 2. Register POA Range/Positioning
100 m Kneeling and Standing Alert Positions
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As for Practice 1
Instructions
Fire a five round group in each firing position with each laser to determine POA.
Firers Goals and Progress 10313. The group sizes that should be achieved in Practices 1 and 2 are: Prone - 200mm Kneeling - 225mm Standing - 450mm End of Lesson Procedure
10-92
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Firing with HMNVS and LA — Assessment A. RCO Notes 10314. Aim. To practice and assess the firer in engaging targets using NVS and LA from the sitting, kneeling and standing positions. 10315. Conduct. The assessment is to be conducted on a CGR (with or without SARTS), an ETR (with or without SARTS) or a GR. 10316. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 20 minutes to complete all practices once. 10317. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x Fig 12 per firer 1 x Fig 11 per firer at 200m 30 x 7.62 mm ball Rounds per firer 10318. Miscellaneous. a.
All practices must be fired at night using the IR Laser.
b. Firers’ personal weapons are to be optic/iron sight zeroed prior to this practice. c. Firers are to adjust both IR and red dot lasers, with the aid of an assistant, onto the CZP using the Bore sighting Chart before Practice 1. d.
No extra time will be given for stoppages.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 10319. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 10320. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) Practice Details 10321. The practice details are as follows:
10-93
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 1. Snap/ Rapid Range/Positioning
100 m Standing and Kneeling Positions
Ammunition
10 Rounds 1. Figure 12. 2. 2 x 20 second exposures with an interval to allow firers to adopt the standing alert position. 1. Firer in the Standing Alert position with the HMNVS and LA ‘On’ and focused at 100 metres. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. On the appearance of the target the firer is to fire one round from the standing position then adopt the kneeling position and fire a further four rounds at the exposure. 4. Firers must adopt the Standing Alert position between exposures. 5. Target up and hold.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 2. Snap Range/Positioning
100 m Standing Alert
Ammunition
5 Rounds 1. Figure 12. 2. 5 x 6 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firer in the nominated position with the HMNVS and LA ‘On’ and focused at 100 metres. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
Target/ Exposure Instructions
Practice 3. Snap Range/Positioning
200 m Sitting
Ammunition
5 Rounds 1. Figure 11. 2. 5 x 8 second exposures with irregular intervals. 1. Firer in the nominated position with the HMNVS and LA ‘On’ and focused at 200 metres. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire one round at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
Target/ Exposure Instructions
Practice 4. Rapid Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds 1. Figure 11. 2. 5 x 12 second exposures. 1. Firer in the nominated position with the HMNVS and LA ‘On’ and focused at 200 metres. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. Fire two rounds at each exposure. 4. Targets fall when hit.
Target/ Exposure Instructions
10-94
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Scoring 10322. Scores are to be recorded and announced on conclusion of each practice. Practices 1 to 4 — One point per hi Standard HPS — 30 Pass — 18 End of Lesson Procedure
Time Chart 10323. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed. Practice
Range/Target
1
100 m Figure 12
Up Down 05 26
Timings
1. Reset watch and repeat once. 2. Up and hold.
Remarks
2
100 m Figure 12
Up Down 05 12 18 25 29 36 41 48 51 58
Fall when hit.
3
200 m Figure 11
Up Down 05 14 19 28 32 41 45 54 1:01 1:10
Fall when hit.
4
200 m Figure 11
Up Down 05 18 24 37 42 55 1:02 1:15 1:19 1:32
1. Fall when hit. 2. Score one point for each exposure hit.
10-95
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Section 4 Close Quarter Marksmanship - Rifle/Pistol 10324. Close Quarter Marksmanship. CQM shoots are mandatory for firers employed in the DCC Role. The results are to be recorded on unit computer systems.
Contents CQM - THE TRANSITION CQM - FIRING WHILST PIVOTING OR TURNING CQM - FIRING WHILST CLOSING CQM - MOVING TARGET
10-98 10-103 10-105 10-107
10325. Dress. The dress for the firers is to include belt order webbing, combat helmets and body armour for all LF lessons. Once completed dress may be altered to reflect the operational role. 10326. Stores. The following stores are required: Pistols with an appropriate holster Rifle with Picatinny Rail System and Down Grips ACOG Lightweight Day Sight Magazines Cleaning Kits Issued, serviceable hearing protection Combat Helmets Body Armour Personal Shooting Record Book Coaching Aide Memoire (AF B 71158) First Aid Kit and Stretcher Stopwatches 10327. Coaching. Chapter 2 contains full details of coaching requirements. Some essential points are to ensure that: a. The Conducting Officer and all the coaches on the range must have prior knowledge of CQM coaching and firing techniques. b. Where possible, a coach should be with each firer. If there are insufficient coaches, the Master Coach system should be used. c. All POAs should be recorded on the firers’ personal shooting record card. d. Coaches are to be in possession of binoculars during practices to avoid the need for dressing forward when possible. e. Shot cadence or tempo can be judged in the following manner, for half second cadence say “and” between shots “(1 and 2 and 3)” and for quarter second cadence, the sights should just have time to bounce onto the target prior to pulling the trigger again (1, 2, 3, 4).
10-96
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
f. CQM LFMT 5 Pistol can be carried out as a single action. double action or press drill practice to cover all the nuances of the weapon. g. From CQM LFMT 6 onwards the firer should be encouraged to wear their primary weapon and carry out a dry transition. This will not only practice the firer in a realistic situation but reinforce the fact that the pistol is a secondary weapon system and only used in an emergency. h. The accuracy of the rifle and pistol differs and the scoring areas on the tar- get reflect this(See fig 10-1a). 10328. Spotters. Where possible, to enable the firers and coaches to gain the maximum benefit from the shots being fired, members of the waiting detail should be employed as spotters, using binoculars to plot the arrival of each shot. To achieve maximum training value from this type of firing, it is essential that firers are given every opportunity to discuss the results of their shooting with their coach.
10-97
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Close Quarter Marksmanship CQM (Rifle and Pistol) — The Transition A. RCO Notes 10329. Aim. To teach the firer how to quickly employ his secondary weapon system in the event of a stoppage with his primary weapon in close quarters. 10330. Conduct. Planning Officers are to check Range Orders and/or confirm with the RAU that CQM practices are permitted. CQM practices may be conducted on LFTTA providing the RCO is suitably qualified. CQM is not to be conducted on 1908 Design Barrack Ranges. 10331. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. 10332. Stores Normal range stores 1 x Fig 11/21 CQM target per firer 1 x Fig 28 per firer (Practice 1) 16 Rounds 5.56mm Ball and 16 Rounds 9 mm Ball ammunition per firer Preliminaries
B. Conduct of the Lesson
10333. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 10334. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary. An anti back splash curtain is required for CQM practices closer than 10m on a 25m Barrack Range. a. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) b. Firers must have been formally taught, practiced and deemed competent in the technique of engaging from the left side of the body. The RCO is to confirm this before firing from the left side of the body is permitted. c. Firing from the left side must only be conducted using the CQB red dot sight. Under no circumstances should left sided firing be attempted using any other sight. d. Firers are to be reminded to take great care when firing from the left side of the body and to keep the head away from the movement of the cocking handle in order to prevent serious injury. e. When firing from the left hand side of the body the firers must keep their hands in the conventional position and the weapon should be tilted to the right to reduce the risk of the firer being struck by ejected cases. 10-98
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
10335. Firing Practice. Explain to firers that shot accountability is an essential part of CQM and that when carrying both a rifle and a pistol, the pistol will be immediately employed in the event of a stoppage at 15 metres and under. Practice Details 10336. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Shot Accountability Range/Positioning
3m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 28 4 x 4 second Exposures 1. Firer is to be in the CQB stance on the command stating a shape, colour or position eg blue square fire 2 Rounds. 2. Firer is to make up shots for any that fall outside of the area or dot. 3. Order Watch and Shoot. 4. Repeat four times 5. Record scores
Practice 2. Shot Accountability Range/Positioning
3m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 28 2 x 4 second Exposures 1. Firer is to be in the CQB stance on the command stating two shapes,colours or positions eg blue square and top dot fire 2 Rounds at each. 2. Firer is to make up shots for any that fall outside of the area or dot. 3. Order Watch and Shoot. 4. Repeat practice. 5. Record scores
Practice 3. Left Shoulder Firing Range/Positioning
3m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
Fig 11/21 2 x 4 second Exposures 1. Firer in the CQB stance. 2. Fire two shots at the body and two at the head in each engagement. 3. Discuss the fall of shot. 4. Repeat the practice
10-99
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 1. Static Transition from Rifle to Pistol Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
15 m Standing 2 x 5.56mm Rounds 4 x 9mm Rounds 1. Fig 11/21. 2. 2 x 7 second exposures. 1. Firer in the Standing CQB Position. 2. Once the target is exposed and on attempting to fire the second round, the firer identifies that he has a stoppage. 3. Transit to the pistol and engage with two Rounds. 4. Carry out the empty magazine stoppage drill between exposures. 5. Repeat the practice. 6. Record scores.
Practice 2. Static Transition from Rifle to Pistol during a Failure to Stop Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10 m Standing 6 x 5.56mm Rounds 4 x 9mm Rounds 1. Fig 11/21. 2. 2 x 8 second exposures. 1. Firer in the Standing CQB Position. 2. On the appearance of the target, the firer will carry out a fail to stop engagement until identifying that he has a stoppage. 3. Transit to the pistol and engage with two rounds to the head. 4. Carry out a magazine empty stoppage drill between exposures. 5. Repeat the practice. 6. Record scores.
Practice 3. Static Transition from Rifle to Pistol during a Failure to Stop Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
10-100
5 m Standing 6 x 5.56mm Rounds 4 x 9mm Rounds 1. Fig 11/21. 2. 2 x 8 second exposures. As per Practice 2.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 4. Static Transition from Rifle in the Standing to Pistol in the Kneeling Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3 metres Standing and Kneeling 2 x 5.56mm Rounds 4 x 9mm Rounds 1. Fig 11/21. 2. 2 x 7 second exposures. 1. Firer in the Standing CQB Position. 2. On the appearance of the target, the firer engages with two Rounds and on attempting the fire the second identifies a stoppage. 3. Dropping to the Kneeling position while transiting to the pistol and engage with two Rounds at the lower aiming mark only. 4. Carry out a magazine empty stoppage drill between exposures. 5. Repeat the practice. 6. Record scores.
Scoring 10337. For the rifle Two points per hit within the inner scoring area. One point within the outer scoring area. No points anywhere else on the target. For the pistol Two points per hit within the inner and outer scoring area. One point per hit anywhere else on the target. Firers Goals and Progress Practice 1&2 HPS – 16 Pass - 11 Practice 3 familiarisation only Practice 4-7 HPS - 64 Pass –45 End of Lesson Procedure
10-101
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Fig 10-1a Figure 21 CQM Target
Fig 10-1c Figure 22 CQM Target
10-102
Fig 10-1b Figure 11 CQM Target
Fig 10-1d Figure 28 CQM Target
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Close Quarter Marksmanship CQM (Rifle and/or Pistol) — Firing Whilst Turning or Pivoting A. RCO Notes 10338. Aim. To train firers to rapidly acquire and engage threats located at a wide angle from the direction of orientation. 10339. Conduct. Planning Officers are to check Range Orders and/or confirm with the RAU that CQM practices are permitted. CQM practices may be conducted on LFTTA providing the RCO is suitably qualified. CQM is not to be conducted on 1908 Design Barrack Ranges. 10340. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices 10341. Stores. Normal range stores 2 x Fig 11/21 CQM target per firer 32 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball or 9 mm Ball ammunition per firer
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 10342. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 10343. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary. Firers must have sufficient space between each other to avoid interference should two firers pivot in opposite directions to each other. 10344. Firing Practice. Explain to firers that during urban operations threats may appear at very close distances from unexpected directions, or the firer may have to pivot to engage an enemy from differing directions. Practice Details 10345. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Static 90 degree pivots to the LEFT Range/Positioning
10 metres
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2 x Fig 21/11. 2. 5 x 4 second exposures 1. Ensuring that safety catches are applied and muzzles are pointed in a safe direction, face to the RIGHT. 2. If pistols are used, then each expo- sure must begin with weapons de- cocked and holstered. 3. On command or appearance of the target, pivot to the LEFT and engage with two Rounds. 4. Repeat four times.
10-103
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Static 90 degree pivots to the RIGHT Range/Positioning
10 metres
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2 x Fig 21/11. 2. 5 x 4 second exposures 1. Ensuring that safety catches are applied and muzzles are pointed in a safe direction, face to the LEFT. 2. On command or appearance of the target, pivot to the RIGHT and engage with two Rounds. 3. Repeat four times.
Practice 3. Static 180 degree pivots to the LEFT and RIGHT Range/Positioning
10 metres
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2 x Fig 21/11. 2. 6 x 4 second exposures 1. Ensuring that safety catches are applied and muzzles are pointed in a safe direction the firer starts facing away from the target. 2. On the command “LEFT or RIGHT Threat”, pivot in the given direction and engage with two Rounds. 3. When pivoting to the left, the firer’s will engage the target on the left; from the right, the target on the right. 4. Repeat five times, alternating left and right. 5. Discuss results and record scores.
Scoring 10346. TLFTT3109. For the rifle Two points per hit within the inner scoring area. One point within the outer scoring area. No points anywhere else on the target. For the pistol Two points per hit within the inner and outer scoring area. One point per hit anywhere else on the target. Firers Goals and Progress HPS – 64 Pass – 44 End of Lesson Procedure
10-104
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Close Quarter Marksmanship CQM (Rifle and/or Pistol) — Firing Whilst Closing A. RCO Notes 10347. Aim. To practice the firer in using Rifle and/or Pistol engaging the enemy whilst closing with him. 10348. Conduct. Planning Officers are to check Range Orders and/or confirm with the RAU that CQM practices are permitted. CQM practices may be conducted on LFTTA providing the RCO is suitably qualified. CQM is not to be conducted on 1908 Design Barrack Ranges. 10349. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. 10350. Stores. Normal Range stores 2 x Fig 11/21 CQM target per firer 54 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball or 9mm Ball ammunition per firer
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 10351. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 10352. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)) 10353. Firing Practice. Whilst moving, threats may appear at very close distances and the firer may not be able to cease movement to engage for a number of tactical reasons. In order to keep or regain the initiative, the firer must be able to fire effectively whilst closing with the enemy. Practice Details 10354. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Shooting whilst closing Range/Positioning
15 to 3m Standing Firing whilst closing
Ammunition
18 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. 2 x Fig 21/11. 2. 3 x 5 second exposures 1. Firer starts in the Standing CQB position at the 25m point. 2. On command or appearance of the target, fire six shots whilst closing. 3. Repeat the practice twice. Record the scores.
10-105
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Pivoting to the Left and closing Range/Positioning
15 to 3m Standing Firing whilst closing
Ammunition
12 Rounds 1. 2 x Fig 21/11. 2. 2 x 7 second exposures 1. Firer starts in the Standing CQB position at the 25m point facing RIGHT. 2. On command or appearance of the target, pivot to the Left, fire six shots whilst closing. 3. Repeat the practice. Record the scores.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Pivoting to the Right and closing Range/Positioning
15 to 3m Standing Firing whilst closing
Ammunition
12 Rounds 1. 2 x Fig 21/11. 2. 2 x 7 second exposures 1. Firer starts in the Standing CQB position at the 25m point facing LEFT. 2. On command or appearance of the target, pivot to the Right, fire six shots whilst closing. 3. Repeat the practice. Record the scores.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Pivoting 180 degrees to the Left and Right and closing Range/Positioning
15 to 3m Standing Firing whilst closing
Ammunition
12 Rounds 1. 2 x Fig 21/11. 2. 2 x 8 second exposures 1. Firer starts in the Standing CQB position at the 25m point facing REARWARDS. 2. On command or appearance of the target, pivot 180 degrees to the Left/Right as ordered, fire six shots whilst closing. 3. Repeat the practice. Record the scores.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Scoring 10355. Two points per hit in the CQM scoring area and one point per hit any- where else on the target Firers Goals and Progress HPS –
108
Pass – 75 End of Lesson Procedure 10-106
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Moving Target Close Quarter Marksmanship Identifying Lead With Personal Weapons A. RCO Notes 10356. Aim. To identify lead when engaging moving targets at close quarters. 10357. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on a suitable training area using Marker Round Training System (MRTS) using correctly protected demonstration troops as enemy. Alternatively the lesson can be conducted on the DCCT. 10358. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to complete all practices. 10359. Stores. Normal range stores. 2 x Figure 20 Target. MRTS conversion kits per weapon 112 Rounds 5.56 mm or 9 mm MRTS ammunition per firer.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 10360. Safety. Demonstration troops must equipped with the PPE required for force on force training. It is recommended that demonstration troops wear coveralls to avoid damage to their PCS. 10361. Firing Practice. Explain that establishing lead at close quarters will allow a soldier to increase his chance of bringing effective fire onto his target with his initial shots. Soldiers should combine their CQM elevation POA (from static engagements) with lead. Practice Details 10362. Practice details are as follows:
10-107
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 1. Identify and apply lead Range/Positioning
3, 5, 10 and 15m. Standing CQB Position
Ammunition
48 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
AT EACH RANGE. SLOW 3 x left and 3 x right runs of the enemy. Followed by FAST 3 x left and 3 x right runs of the enemy. 1. At each exposure fire 1 round. 2. During the shoot discuss (or firers identify) the fall of shot in relation to the POA and the centre of the target. 3. Record lead at each range.
Practice 2. Confirmation and application of lead Range/Positioning
3, 5, 10 and 15m. Standing CQB Position
Ammunition
64 Rounds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
SLOW / FAST 4 x left and 4 x right runs of the enemy. At each range 50% fast 50% slow in random order. 1. At each exposure fire 2 Rounds. 2. Record lead after each range
Scoring 10363. The shoot is not scored as the aim is to identify POA and lead. End of Lesson Procedure
10-108
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Section 5 Close Quarter Marksmanship- LMG 10364. Close Quarter Marksmanship. CQM shoots are mandatory for firers employed in the DCC Role. The results are to be recorded on unit computer systems.
Contents CQM - IDENTIFY POA CQM - ACCELERATED FIRE CQM - FAILURE TO STOP CQM - MULIPLE TARGETS CQM - FIRING WHILST TURNING/PIVOTING CQM - FIRING WHILST CLOSING
10-111 10-112 10-114 10-116 10-118 10-120
10365. Dress. The dress for the firers is to include belt order webbing, combat helmets and body armour for all LF lessons. Once completed dress may be altered to reflect the operational role. 10366. Sights. Use of the CQB sight (where issued) should be introduced wherever possible. The shot accountability practices provide an opportunity for firers to practice using the CQB sight. 10367. Stores. The following stores are required: ACOG Lightweight Day Sight Cleaning Kits Issued, serviceable hearing protection Combat Helmets Body Armour Personal Shooting Record Book Coaching Aide Memoire (AF B 71158) First Aid Kit and Stretcher Stopwatches 10368. Coaching. Chapter 2 contains full details of coaching requirements. Some essential points are to ensure that: a. The Conducting Officer and all the coaches on the range must have prior knowledge of CQM coaching and firing techniques. b. Where possible, a coach should be with each firer. If there are insufficient coaches, the Master Coach system should be used. c. All POAs should be recorded on the firers’ personal shooting record card. d. Coaches are to be in possession of binoculars during practices to avoid the need for dressing forward when possible. e. Shot cadence or tempo can be judged in the following manner, for half second cadence say “and” between shots “(1 and 2 and 3)” and for quarter second cadence, the sights should just have time to bounce onto the target prior to pulling the trigger again (1, 2, 3, 4). 10-109
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
10369. Spotters. Where possible, to enable the firers and coaches to gain the maximum benefit from the shots being fired, members of the waiting detail should be employed as spotters, using binoculars to plot the arrival of each shot. To achieve maximum training value from this type of firing, it is essential that firers are given every opportunity to discuss the results of their shooting with their coach.
10-110
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Close Quarter Marksmanship LMG CQM LF 1 — Identifying Points of Aim (POA) A. RCO Notes 10370. Aim. To identify the firers point of aim and point of impact at 3m to 15m. 10371. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on a DCCT. Planning Officers are to check Range Orders permit the firing of CQM practices for all other ranges. These practices may also be fired on a LFTTA providing the RCO is suitably qualified. 10372. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to complete all practices. 10373. Stores. Normal range stores. 2 x Figure 21 Targets with 2 x 25mm square aiming marks per target. 48 Rounds 5.56 mm ball linked ammunition per firer.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 10374. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 10375. Firing Practice. Explain that establishing points of aim at close quarters will allow a firer to increase his chance of bringing effective fire on to his target with his first burst of fire Practice Details 10376. Practice details are as follows: The shoot will establish the points of aim required in order to centralize the burst on to the selected point of impact. Practice 1. Identify and apply POA Range/Positioning
3, 5, 10 and 15m. Standing CQB Position.
Ammunition
2 x belts of 24.
Target/ Exposure
2 x Figure 21 targets with 2 x 25mm aiming marks.
Instructions
1. From each range fire 2 bursts of 2-3 rds at a 25mm white patch. 2. Discuss the fall of shot in relation to the point of aim. 3. Repeat the practice to confirm the established POA. 4. Record the POA.
Firers Goals and Progress 10377. Record all Points of Aim. End of Lesson Procedure 10-111
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Close Quarter Marksmanship LMG CQM LF 2 — Accelerated Fire Training A. RCO Notes 10378. Aim. To practice and confirm the ability of a firer to apply accelerated firing techniques in order to achieve multiple, rapid and accurate hits on target. 10379. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on a DCCT. Planning Officers are to check Range Orders permit the firing of CQM practices for all other ranges. These practices may also be fired on a LFTTA providing the RCO is suitably qualified. 10380. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. 10381. Stores. Normal range stores 2 x Fig 21 Targets per firer. 144 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball linked ammunition per firer.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 10382. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 10383. Firing Practice. Explain that learning to increase shot cadence will allow a firer to quickly engage his target with minimal time for retaliation. Practice Details 10384. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Accelerated Fire Range/Positioning
15m Standing.
Ammunition
2 x belts of 18
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-112
1. Fig 21. 5 second exposures until 18 rds completed. 1. During each exposure at the left hand target fire 2 bursts of 2 to 3 rds with a 2 second shot cadence. Up to 18 Rounds. 2. Dress forward and discuss the results. 3. Repeat the practice on the right target. 4. Dress forward and discuss the results, record the scores on the right target only.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Accelerated Fire Range/Positioning
10m Standing
Ammunition
2 x belts of 18
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 21. 5 second exposures until 18 rds completed
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
Practice 3. Accelerated Fire. Range/Positioning
5m Standing
Ammunition
2 x belts of 18
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 21. 5 second exposures until 18 rds completed.
Instructions
As for Practice 1 but with a 1.5 second shot cadence.
Practice 4. Accelerated Fire Range/Positioning
3m Standing
Ammunition
2 x belts of 18
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 21. 5 second exposures until 18 rds completed.
Instructions
As for Practice 1 but with a 1 second shot cadence.
Scoring 10385. Two points per hit within the inner scoring area. One point within the outer scoring area. No points anywhere else on the target. Firers Goals and Progress HPS – 144 Pass – 86 End of Lesson Procedure
10-113
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Close Quarter Marksmanship LMG CQM LF 3 — Failure to Stop A. RCO Notes 10386. Aim. To confirm the firer’s ability to rapidly engage a target using two POA. 10387. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on a DCCT. Planning Officers are to check Range Orders permit the firing of CQM practices for all other ranges. These practices may also be fired on a LFTTA providing the RCO is suitably qualified. 10388. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. 10389. Stores. Normal range stores 1 x Fig 21 target per firer 64 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball linked ammunition per firer.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 10390. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 10391. Firing Practice. Explain that the firer may be required to engage the body and subsequently the head with well aimed rapid shots in order to defeat an enemy with types of body armour. Practice Details 10392. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Failure to Stop Range/Positioning
15m Standing
Ammunition
1x belt of 16
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-114
1. Fig 21. 2. 4 second exposures until Rounds completed. 1. Firer in the CQB stance. 2. Order “Watch and Shoot”. 3. During each exposure fire a burst of 2-3 rds to the body and one burst to the head. 4. Discuss the fall of shot, record scores and patch up. 2 second shot cadence.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Failure to Stop Range/Positioning
10m Standing
Ammunition
1x belt of 16
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Fig 21. 2. 4 second exposures until Rounds completed. As for Practice 1. 2 second shot cadence.
Practice 3. Failure to Stop Range/Positioning
5m Standing
Ammunition
1x belt of 16
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Fig 21. 2. 4 second exposures until Rounds completed. As for Practice 1. 1.5 second shot cadence.
Practice 4. Failure to Stop Range/Positioning
3m Standing
Ammunition
1x belt of 16
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Fig 21. 2. 4 second exposures until Rounds completed. As for Practice 1. 1 second shot cadence.
Scoring 10393. Two points per hit within the inner scoring area. One point within the outer scoring area. No points anywhere else on the target. Firers Goals and Progress HPS – 128 Pass – 77 End of Lesson Procedure
10-115
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Close Quarter Marksmanship LMG CQM LF 4 - Multiple Targets 15 - 3 Metres A. RCO Notes 10394. Aim. To practice the firer in engaging multiple targets at close range. 10395. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on a DCCT. Planning Officers are to check Range Orders permit the firing of CQM practices for all other ranges. These practices may also be fired on a LFTTA providing the RCO is suitably qualified. 10396. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. 10397. Stores. Normal range stores 2 x Fig 21 targets per firer 128 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball linked ammunition per firer.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 10398. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 10399. Firing Practice. Explain that when confronted with multiple targets at close range, a firer must quickly and accurately switch from an initial target to a secondary threat. Practice Details 10400. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Pairs Range/Positioning
15m Standing
Ammunition
2 x belts of 16
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-116
1. Fig 21. 2. 4 second exposures until Rounds completed. 1. On command or appearance of the targets, firers are to engage both targets in the order given in the safety brief with a burst of 2-3 Rounds. 2. After completion of the first belt dress for- ward and discuss the results. Clean targets. 3. Repeat the practice and record the scores of the repeat practice only. 2 second shot cadence.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Pairs Range/Positioning
10m Standing
Ammunition
2 x belts of 16
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Fig 21. 2. 4 second exposures until Rounds completed. As for Practice 1. 1.5 second shot cadence.
Practice 3. Pairs Range/Positioning
5m Standing
Ammunition
2 x belts of 16
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Fig 21. 2. 4 second exposures until Rounds completed As for Practice 1. 1 second shot cadence.
Practice 4. Pairs Range/Positioning
3m Standing
Ammunition
2 x belts of 16
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Fig 21. 2. 4 second exposures until Rounds completed. As for Practice 1. 1 second shot cadence.
Scoring 10401. Two points per hit within the inner scoring area. One point within the outer scoring area. No points anywhere else on the target. Firers Goals and Progress HPS – 128. Pass – 77 End of Lesson Procedure
10-117
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Close Quarter Marksmanship LMG CQM — Firing Whilst Turning or Pivoting A. RCO Notes 10402. Aim. To train firers to rapidly acquire and engage threats located at a wide angle from the direction of orientation. 10403. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on a DCCT. Planning Officers are to check Range Orders permit the firing of CQM practices for all other ranges. These practices may also be fired on a LFTTA providing the RCO is suitably qualified. 10404. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 20 minutes to complete all practices. 10405. Stores. Normal range stores 2 x Fig 21 per firer 44 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball linked ammunition per firer.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 10406. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 10407. Explain and demonstrate as necessary. Firers must have sufficient space between each other to avoid interference should two firers pivot in opposite directions to each other. Remid the firers that the safety catch must not be placed to “F” until they have aligned onto the target. 10408. Firing Practice. Explain to firers that during urban operations threats may appear at very close distances from unexpected directions, or the firer may have to pivot to engage an enemy from differing directions. Practice Details 10409. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Static 90 degree pivots to the LEFT Range/Positioning
10 metres
Ammunition
1 x belt of 12 rds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
10-118
1. Fig 21 2. 5 second exposures until Rounds complete. 1. Ensuring that safety catches are applied and muzzles are pointed in a safe direction, face to the RIGHT. 2. On command or appearance of the target, pivot to the LEFT and engage with a burst of 2-3 Rounds.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Static 90 degree pivots to the RIGHT Range/Positioning
10 metres
Ammunition
1 x belt of 12 rds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
1. Fig 21 2. 5 second exposures until Rounds complete. 1. Ensuring that safety catches are applied and muzzles are pointed in a safe direction, face to the LEFT. 2. On command or appearance of the target, pivot to the RIGHT and engage with a burst of 2-3 Rounds.
Practice 3. Static 180 degree pivots to the LEFT and RIGHT Range/Positioning
10 metres
Ammunition
1 x belt of 20 rds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 21 2. 5 second exposures until Rounds complete. 1. Ensuring that safety catches are applied and muzzles are pointed in a safe direction the firer starts facing away from the target. 2. On the command “LEFT or RIGHT Threat”, pivot in the given direction and engage with a burst of 2-3 Rounds. 3. When pivoting to the left, the firer’s will engage the target on the left; from the right, the target on the right. 3. Discuss and record scores.
Scoring 10410. For the rifle Two points per hit within the inner scoring area. One point within the outer scoring area. No points anywhere else on the target. For the pistol Two points per hit within the inner and outer scoring area. One point per hit anywhere else on the target. Firers Goals and Progress HPS – 88 Pass – 53 End of Lesson Procedure
10-119
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Close Quarter Marksmanship LMG CQM — Firing Whilst Closing A. RCO Notes 10411. Aim. To practice the firer in engaging the enemy whilst closing. 10412. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on a FDA Range. Planning Officers are to check Range Orders and/or confirm with the RAU that CQM practices are permitted. CQM practices may be conducted on LFTTA providing the RCO is suitably qualified. 10413. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to complete all practices. 10414. Stores. Normal Range stores 2 x Fig 21 per firer 81 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball linked ammunition per firer.
B. Conduct of the Lesson Preliminaries 10415. Safety. Normal safety precautions. 10416. Firing Practice. During the Close Quarter Battle a firer may not be able to cease movement to engage for a number of tactical reasons. In order to keep or regain the initiative, the firer must be able to fire effectively whilst closing with the enemy. Practice Details 10417. Practice details are as follows: Practice 1. Shooting whilst closing Range/Positioning
15 to 3m Standing Firing whilst closing
Ammunition
3 x belt of 9 rds
Target/ Exposure Instructions
10-120
1. Fig 21. 2. 1 x 8 second exposures 1. Firer starts in the Standing CQB position at the 15m point. 2. On command or appearance of the target, fire 3 bursts of 2-3 rds whilst closing. 3. Repeat the practice twice. Record the scores.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Pivoting to the Left and closing Range/Positioning
15 to 3m Standing Firing whilst closing
Ammunition
2 x belt of 9 rds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 21. 2. 1 x 8 second exposures. 1. Firer starts in the Standing CQB position at the 15m point facing RIGHT. 2. On command or appearance of the target, pivot to the Left; fire 3 bursts of 2-3 rds whilst closing. 3. Repeat the practice. Record the scores.
Practice 3. Pivoting to the Right and closing Range/Positioning
15 to 3m Standing Firing whilst closing
Ammunition
2 x belt of 9 rds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 21. 2. 1 x 8 second exposures. 1. Firer starts in the Standing CQB position at the 15m point facing LEFT. 2. On command or appearance of the target, pivot to the right; fire 3 bursts of 2-3 rds whilst closing. 3. Repeat the practice. Record the scores.
Practice 4. Pivoting 180 degrees to the Left and Right and closing Range/Positioning
15 to 3m Standing Firing whilst closing
Ammunition
2 x belt of 9 rds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 21. 2. 1 x 8 second exposure. 1. Firer starts in the Standing CQB position at the 15m point facing REARWARDS. 2. On command or appearance of the target, pivot 180 degrees to the Left/Right as ordered, fire 3 bursts of 2-3 rds whilst closing. 3. Repeat the practice. Record the scores.
Scoring 10418. Two points per hit in the CQM scoring area and one point per hit any- where else on the target Firers Goals and Progress HPS – 162 Pass – 81 End of Lesson Procedure 10-121
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Section 6 Fire and Movement Test 10419. Introduction. The Fire and Movement Test is only to be conducted by firers employed in the Basic Close Combat Role in accordance with the Commanders Guide Table 1 within Chapter 1. It is intended to conduct this shoot on completion of the ACMT in lieu of any form of LFTT, but will enable a 4-man team to operate together whilst advancing towards the enemy. 10420. Constraint. It is not permissible to move from the Fire and Movement Test to LFTT without complying to the Progression of Training table specified in Chapter 1 of this publication. 10421. Dress. Should include belt order webbing. Combat helmets and Issued Body Armour are to be worn.
10-122
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Fire and Movement Test (BCC Role) 10422. Ranges. The Fire and Movement Test is ideally suited to being fired on an ETR. It may also be fired where Range Orders permit on a CGR using the FETs or GR using targets positioned in front of the mantlet. 10423. Time Chart. A time chart to assist range staff is after the practice details. 10424. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to complete the whole test. This includes a 300m march. 10425. Organisation. The test is designed to test as many firers as possible in the organisation in which they fight. A maximum of two fire teams can fire simultaneously. Fire teams should be organised as follows: a.
Nominated Fire Team Comd (Rifle).
b.
2 x Riflemen.
c.
1 x LSW Firer.
10426. Aim. The aim of the test is to identify the fire team’s ability to put down effective fire whilst under physical stress.. 10427. Rules. a. Firers must have passed the ACMT and conducted a dry rehearsal of the F&M test before the test is fired In particular the actions to take in the event of a stoppage during the test must be practiced. This is especially important for less experienced firers. b. The time for the 300m move is 90 seconds, carrying the equipment described below. All the fire team members must complete the move together. On arrival at the 300m firing point they are allowed 30 seconds to prepare themselves for the start of the shooting practice. No extra time will be given for stoppages during the shoot. Any firer that fails to be in position to start the shoot in the required time frame will not be permitted to continue with the test. The firer is to be re-tested at the earliest opportunity. c. Dress and equipment for this test is to be combat dress, belt order webbing (including filled magazines), combat body armour (as issued), combat helmets, (issued, serviceable hearing protection is to be worn on the range). Equipment is to be packed in accordance with unit SOPs and should weigh 11.4 kg (25 lb) for males and females. The weight is in addition to the helmets, body armour and personal weapons. d.
Cross lane shooting is not permitted.
10-123
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
e.
Coaching is not permitted.
f.
Exposure times are to be taken from the time the target is up and steady.
g. Once made ready, all movement must be conducted with the safety catch applied. h. Once the firers target has been hit or lowered, the firer is to apply their safety catch in preparation of the move forward 10428. Ammunition/Magazines. Firers are allocated 21 Rounds. Magazines are to be filled 1 x 5, 1 x 16. 10429. Scoring. One point per hit. 10430. Standards. During each tactical bound each firer must hit all Fig 12 exposures (HPS 7) or the firer will be deemed to have failed the test. Any firer that fails the OMS is to be re-tested at the earliest opportunity as part of a composite Fire Team. 10431. Explanatory Notes. a. The minimum words of command should be given by the conducting officer. It is important that control of the fire team is exercised by the fire team commander and that all firers understand the practices they are to fire. b. It is the firers’ responsibility to ensure that they have sufficient Rounds loaded in their weapon. c. Safety Supervisors are to be positioned behind the rear men of the Fire Teams throughout the Fire and Movement phase. d. It is recommended to have two dedicated console monitors to check if the targets have been hit during each bound, in addition to an OIC console. 10432. Range Rigging. The range is to be rigged as follows: ETR 100m — Figure 12 CGR Figure 12 placed in FETs GR Figure 12 Target line forward of the mantlet. 6 x 8m markers are to be positioned as per Fig 10-2b.
10-124
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Fire and Movement Test Practice/Position - Approach March Range
ETR from 600 m to 300m CGR/GR from 400m to 100m
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Firers are to adopt the prone position at the 600m (ETR) or 400m (CGR/GR) firing point and be aligned to their respective lane number. 2. Once in position, order “Load, Watch Out, Watch Out”. 3. Following a one second flash exposure of the Fig 12 targets, the firers are to move to the 300m Fixed Firing Point (ETR) or the 100m Firing Point (CGR) within 90 seconds. At the Firing Point the Fire Team is to cover off the targets as follows: a. Fire Team 1. (1) Rifleman — Tgt1 (2) Comd — Tgt 2 (3) LSW — Tgt 3 (4) Rifleman — Tgt 4 b. Fire Team 2. (1) Rifleman — Tgt 9 (2) Comd — Tgt 10 (3) LSW — Tgt 11 (4) Rifleman — Tgt 12 4. On arrival at the 300m Fixed Firing Point (ETR) or 100m Firing Point (CGR) and after the 90 seconds has expired, the FIre Team is awarded an additional 30 seconds to prepare to continue with the shoot, this will include RCO initial words of command and a move to the 75m Firing Point on a GR (120 seconds in total). 5. Once the team is in position at the Firing Point and during the 30 seconds preparation time, RCO is to order “Adopt the kneeling or squatting position, ready?”. 6. When the word of command “Ready” is issued and if a firer is not in a position to continue with Practice 1, the firer is to be disqualified and will not complete the remainder of the shoot.
10-125
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 1. Range
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
ETR/CGR 100m to 52m GR 75m to 27m ETR 100m to 52m GR 75m to 27m Figure 12 Targets fall when hit throughout. 1 x 7 second exposure, ALL lanes followed by 5 seconds down. 1 x 7 second exposure, lanes 1, 2, 9, 10 followed by 5 seconds down. 1 x 7 second exposure, lanes 3, 4, 11, 12 followed by 5 seconds down. 1 x 7 second exposure, lanes 1, 2, 9, 10 followed by 5 seconds down. 1 x 7 second exposure, lanes 3, 4, 11, 12 followed by 5 seconds down. 1. On completion of the 30 seconds preparation time Order “Watch and Shoot”. All firers are to observe to their front. No further words of command should be issued by the RCO but paragraphs 2 to 10 explains the procedure that should be followed. 2. 10 seconds after the command “Watch and Shoot” there will be a 7 second exposure of Figure 12 targets in ALL lanes. All Firers are to engage their own target with a maximum of 3 Rounds. Targets fall when hit. 3. As soon as ALL targets have been hit down by that Fire Team or at the end of the exposure, the nominated Fire Team Commanders (in lanes 2 and 10), may order “Move” and together with the firer in lane 1 and 9, move 8m forward to bound 1, adopt the kneeling or squatting position and release safety catches ready for the next exposure. (Remaining firers to stay firm at the FP and observe arcs) 4. 5 seconds after the first exposure, targets in lanes 1, 2, 9 and 10 only will be exposed for up 7 seconds. Those Firers only are to engage their target with up to 3 Rounds from bound 1. 5. As soon as firers at bound 1 open fire at their targets, the remaining firers in lanes 3, 4, 11, and 12 are to move forward level with their battle partner under the cover of fire to bound 1. ALL firers within the Fire Team should now be level at bound 1. 6. On completion of the exposure and after a 5 seconds gap, targets in the other lanes (3, 4, 11 and 12) will be exposed for up to 7 seconds. Those firers only are to engage their target with up to 3 Rounds. No forward movement is allowed at this point. Once all the Fire Teams targets are hit down or at the end of the exposure the first pair’s only (lane 1, 2, 9, 10) can move to bound 2 and prepare for their next exposure. The second pair remains at bound 1 and observes their arc. 7. 5 seconds after the exposure, targets in lanes 1, 2, 9 and 10 only will be exposed for up 7 seconds. Those Firers only are to engage their target with up to 3 Rounds from bound 2.
10-126
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
8. As soon as firers at bound 2 open fire at their targets, the remaining firers in lanes 3, 4, 11, and 12 are to move forward level with their battle partner under the cover of fire to bound 2. ALL firers within the Fire Team should now be level at bound 2. 9. On completion of the exposure and after a 5 seconds gap, targets in the other lanes (3, 4, 11 and 12) will be exposed for up to 7 seconds, Those firers only are to engage their target with up to 3 Rounds. No Instructions Contd forward movement is allowed at this point. Once all the Fire Teams targets are hit down or at the end of the exposure the first pair’s only (lane 1, 2, 9, 10) can move to bound 3 and prepare for their next exposure. The second pair remains at bound 2 and observes their arc. 10. This procedure shown from para 7 through to 9 is continued at bounds 3, 4, 5 and 6. All firers will be level at bound 6 on completion of the last exposure.
Fire and Movement Test Time Chart Practice
Range
Lanes
Approach March
600m/400m
1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11 and 12
1
The Move 600m to 300m FFP or 400m to 100m FP ETR/CGR 100m
Timings Up Down 10 12
N/A
No targets exposed. After 120 seconds, reset stopwatch.
1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11 and 12
10 18
92m or 67m 1, 2, 9 and 10 First Pairs Bound Marker 1
23 31
GR 75m
1 (Cont)
Remarks 1 second flash exposure at 600m 120 second delay: 90 seconds for the move, 30 seconds to be into position and receive initial instructions. Stopwatch reset. “Watch and Shoot” is ordered, then a 10 second pause followed by the first 7 second exposure as shown. Targets fall when hit. When all targets are down, 1, 2, 9 and 10 only move from FFP to bound 1. Remaining firers stay firm at 300m FFP. 7 second exposure. Targets fall when hit. When targets are engaged rear pairs can move up level to bound 1 and go firm.
10-127
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice
Range
Lanes
92m or 67m 3, 4, 11 and First Pairs 12 Bound Marker 1
10-128
Timings Up Down 36 44
84m or 59m 1, 2, 9, 10 First Pairs Bound Marker 2
49 57
84m or59m 3, 4, 11, 12 Bound Marker 2
1:02 1:10
76m or 51m 1, 2, 9, 10 Bound Marker 3
1:15 1:23
76m or 51m 3, 4, 11, 12 Bound Marker 3
1:28 1:36
68m or 43m 1, 2, 9, 10 Bound Marker 4
1:41 1:49
68m or 43m 3, 4, 11, 12 Bound Marker 4
1:54 2:02
60m or 35m 1, 2, 9, 10 Bound Marker 5
2:07 2:15
60m or 35m 3, 4, 11, 12 Bound Marker 5
2:20 2:28
52m or 27m 1, 2, 9, 10 Bound Marker 6
2:33 2:41
52m or 27m 3, 4, 11, 12 Bound Marker 6
2:46 2:54
Remarks Second pairs engage targets in their own lanes. When all targets go down, first pairs only to move to bound 2. Remaining firers to go firm at bound 1. 7 second exposure. Targets fall when hit. When targets are engaged rear pairs can move up level to bound 2. The above procedure is continued up to bound 6.
All firers to be level at bound 6 after the last exposure.
75
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Fig 10-2a – Layout of the GR for the Fire and Movement Test
Fig 10-2b – Layout of the ETR/CGR for the Fire and Movement Test 10-129
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
10-130
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
CHAPTER 11 LIVE FIRING TACTICAL TRAINING (PERSONAL WEAPONS) Scope 1101. Chapter 11 covers the final stage of Training the Battle Shot — Live Firing Tactical Training (LFTT). This is the culmination of Army Operational Shooting training.
Contents SCOPE 11-1 IFFC 11-1 THE FIRE TEAM ATTACK CONCEPT 11-1 THE CHAIN OF COMMAND 11-2 SAFETY 11-3 THE FIRE TEAM ATTACK 11-4
1102. LFTT is to be designed and conducted to ensure soldiers can meet the Operational Marksmanship Standards for their personal and alternate personal weapons in realistic, testing and demanding tactical conditions that match Operational Shooting Requirements. 1103. For regular Infantry battalions, LFTT is mandatory. While formation objectives may well permit LFTT to battle group level, by day and by night, certain minimum training objectives are to be achieved during Infantry Field Firing Camps (IFFC). IFFC 1104. Training Progression. As a minimum requirement DCC Roled units are to undertake a progressive LFTT programme that ensures mastery of individual basic skills and collective battle drills from fire team to company level by day and platoon level by night. At all levels, training is to vary in emphasis between offensive and defensive operations in line with training and operational priorities. Wherever possible LFTT is to integrate grenade throwing and firing of platoon and battalion support weapons; but this will form part of the direction given by Formation Commanders, depending upon their annual priorities. 1105. Minimum Training Objectives. COs are to achieve the minimum training objectives outlined within the Guidance to Commanders tables contained within Chapter 1 during an IFFC, although the detailed syllabus to achieve these objectives, and its execution, remain the responsibility of COs. The Fire Team Attack Concept 1106. The fire team attack is part of the Progression of Training Table and as such, it is mandatory for each DCC Roled fire team to conduct this training annually. 1107. The use of Small Arms Range Target System (SARTS) will greatly enhance the capture of accurate fire effect and used effectively will improve after action reviews.
11-1
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
1108. To enable the Chain of Command to assess each fire team within a sub unit, the fire team attack as described in Section 1 of this chapter is to be conducted. With good range planning and use of resources, the 18 fire teams within a DCC Roled Company will be able to be exercised over the same ground during a two day training package. However, it may not be possible to assess the standards between companies if the same ground is not used due to the differences between each LFTTA. 1109. Evaluation. Evaluation of tactical fire effect will be important. Under direction from Formation Commanders, an assessment of operational capability is to be made. 1110. MFP2. COs are to report the achievements of IFFCs as part of unit MFP2 returns. Any resource or administrative difficulties limiting the achievement of IFFCs are also to be recorded in a PXR and referred to the relevant formation HQ and range organisation. The Chain of Command 1111. Role of Formation Commanders. Formation Commanders have a key responsibility in directing and facilitating IFFCs in the following ways: a. Establishing training and operational priorities for COs to ensure the right doctrinal emphasis and the right balance of offensive and defensive LFTT exercises. b. Ensuring COs have the resources to achieve the minimum mandatory objectives during IFFCs. c. Resourcing COs to undertake battalion-level LFTT when and where achievable and in line with overall priorities. d. Directing COs to undertake IFFCs as part of overseas training exercises (OTX), when battalions are allocated such an exercise and otherwise would be unable to complete field firing within their annual training year. e. Monitoring LFTT to ensure MFP2 returns are completed and meet the mandatory requirements of Army Operational Shooting. 1112. Reserve Infantry Battalions and BCC Roled Units. It is recognised for Reserve Infantry battalions that the opportunities for LFTT will be limited. Therefore whilst it cannot be a mandatory requirement for Reserve Infantry battalions to carry out an IFFC, where possible a four day IFFC(Reserve) should be conducted on all Annual Camps/Concentrations where facilities exist and ammunition is available. Furthermore, LFTT is not mandatory for Other Arms and Services. Such units are to undertake LFTT as directed and re-sourced within the Chain of Command; and LFTT records are to be completed as part of unit MFP returns. The LFTT should reflect the unit’s operational role.
11-2
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Safety 1113. Under no circumstances is a soldier to progress to LFTT unless the soldier has achieved the required standards on the mandatory LFMT and TLFTT shoots (see Progression of Training Table in Chapter 1) in the previous 12 months, WHTs have been completed within the previous six months and the zero of his personal weapon has been checked. 1114. All LFTT is to be planned and executed in strict accordance with Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21). Reference A gives sufficient scope to achieve the required results. In particular, safety and supervision regulations are not to be compromised in the pursuit of realism.
11-3
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The Fire Team Attack 1115. Ranges. The fire team attack is to be conducted on an LFTTA by day, in accordance with Table 1. 1116. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 70 minutes to complete the whole shoot, including briefs and debriefs. Fire teams should not start the march until the previous detail has finished and the range staff have returned to the battle preparation area. An Exercise Time Chart is provided as a guide for the RCO. 1117. Organisation. The shoot is designed to test as many soldiers as possible in the organisation in which they will fight. Fire teams are to be organised as follows: a.
Fire Team Comd (Rifle).
b.
SDM (LSW).
c.
Gunner (LMG).
d.
Rifleman (Rifle and UGL).
1118. Aim. The aim of the shoot is to identify the Fire Team’s ability to put down effective fire, this includes suppressive fire, and assault an enemy position. The Fire Team will complete this whilst under physical stress, having first completed an approach march. 1119.
Rules. a. The Fire Team must have zeroed weapons, passed the ACMT, completed the relevant operational shooting skills and completed the Progression of Training Table (laid out in Chapter 1) before conducting the Fire Team Attack. Where UGL Practice rounds and grenades are employed the nominated users must be qualified in line with the regulations. b. The Fire Team will complete a 1.2km approach march before the Live Firing phase of the FTA. The finish point of the approach march should be the Battle Preparation Area, where they will be given an additional 2 mins preparation time before starting the Advance. c. The time for the 1.2 km approach march should be determined by the Commanding Officer and may be varied to cater for abnormal local terrain and weather conditions. As a guide, 10 minutes should be allocated. All the fire team members must complete the approach march together.
11-4
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
d. Dress and equipment for this assessment is to be combat dress, belt order webbing (including filled magazines), combat body armour, combat helmets. Issued serviceable hearing protection is to be worn on the range. Equipment is to be packed in accordance with SOPs and should weigh a minimum of 11.4 kg (25 Ib). 1120.
Ammunition/Magazines. Ammunition allocation is: a.
Fire Team Comd (Rifle)
– 120 x 5.56mm ball/tracer
b.
SDM (LSW)
– 90 x 5.56mm ball/tracer
c.
Gunner (LMG)
– 400 x 5.56mm ball/tracer
d.
Rifleman (Rifle and UGL) – 120 x 5.56mm ball/tracer and 2 x 40mm Prac UGL rounds.
e. In addition the following ammunition is to be allocated to the Fire Team - 1 x Prac Grenade, 1 x Smoke screen grenade (to be issued as the FT Commander dictates). 1121. Scoring. As an interim measure before the Small Arms Range Target System (SARTS) is delivered, which will properly measure suppressive fire, RCOs should record the hits on target only and compare this with the Fire Teams expended ammunition count. An example of how to do this is shown in the explanatory notes. 1122. Standards. The FTA is a test. The test standard is 25% hits on targets from all rounds fired. 1123. It is permissible for the fire team commander to accompany the range staff when counting the hits on targets. 1124.
Explanatory Notes. a. A safety brief is to be delivered to all exercising troops prior to the approach march commencing in accordance with Pamphlet No. 21 (Reference A). b. The Fire Team Comd is to be briefed by the RCO that his mission is to complete the approach march in the specified time, arrive in the battle preparation area, where he is allocated two minutes for team administration and then advance and destroy all enemy within his area. c. Weapons will be loaded (less UGL) prior to the approach march, but only made ready in the battle preparation area, which must be contained within the LFTT movement box. d. The minimum words of command should be given by the conducting officer. It is important that control of the fire team is exercised by the fire team commander. 11-5
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
e. It is the firers’ responsibility to ensure that they have sufficient rounds loaded on their weapon. f. A generic layout of the FTA is shown at Fig 11.1. Each different Field Firing Area location will dictate the final layout and different assault options but distances should be adhered to. The RCO should plan the FTA so that as many tactical skills as possible are assessed such as suppressing the enemy, Pairs F&M, PoF and the use of the Grenadier. The use of effects weapons to represent covering fire support from flanking fire teams should also be considered. g. A key part of the debrief will include marksmanship and raising awareness of suppressive fire is. The following points should be covered: (1)
Hits on target.
(2)
An understanding of suppressive fire.
(3)
How to gain or re-gain suppressive fire.
(4)
Ammunition expenditure and conservation. (5) Fire Control.
h. Once SARTS is in service the new targets will provide the means to measure suppressive fire through an automated after action review. This FTA is designed, in part, to build awareness of the use of suppressive fire. i. The following example shows the calculation to be used to obtain the Fire Teams percentage of hits on target against rounds fired and thus provide a percent score. (1)
Rounds issued to the Fire Team = 730
(2)
Rounds handed back in unexpended = 150
(3)
Total Hits on target recorded = 200
Firstly identify how many rounds were fired. Then take the total hits on target and divide it by the total rounds fired. Then multiply this figure by 100 to give you the % score.
11-6
(4)
730 - 150 = 580 rounds fired
(5)
200 / 580 = 0.34
(6)
0.34 x 100 = 34% assessment score
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Suggested Exercise Time Chart Guide Serial
Location
1
1.2 km from Battle Preparation Area
2
Arrive Battle Preparation Area (Within Movement Box)
3
Approx Running Time 0 – 10 mins
Instruction/Activity NSPs, Safety and range briefings, load weapons, order Fire Team to move to Battle Preparation Area
10 mins
Make weapons ready less LMG
Battle Preparation Area
10 – 12 mins
Fire Team Preparation then order Fire Team Comd to advance
4
Fire Team arrive at Contact Line
17 mins
5
Contact Line
17 – 20 mins
Fire Team to take cover and suppress the enemy. Targets up and hold
6
Contact Line
20 – 21 mins
Fire Team to fire and manoeuvre forward to Fire Support Position
7
Fire Support Position
21 – 24 mins
Fire Team break down and begin flanking assault. Targets continue to be exposed intermittently.
Raise targets at main enemy position
Optional effects weapon to simulate “D” FT providing covering fire whilst “C” FT are moving toward PoF. 8
Point of Fire arrive in position and grenadier advances
30 mins
Targets dropped on main objective to allow grenadier to advance. Switch fire target exposed for PoF to engage.
9
En position
35 mins
Position taken – All targets down. Fire Team re-org on main En Posn.
11-7
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Fig 11-1. – Layout of Fire Team Attack 11-8
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
CHAPTER 12 AMMUNITION SCALES (PERSONAL WEAPONS) Scope 1201. This chapter sets out the ammunition scales required in all Live Firing (LF) lessons for Personal Weapons contained in Volume 1 of the OSP. The distribution is based on the scale for each individual by weapons for Live Firing Marksmanship Training (LFMT) up to and including Collective Performance (CP) level 2, the Annual Combat Marksmanship Test (ACMT) and the LF Shoots for Operational Shooting Skills.
Contents SCOPE 12-1 LAYOUT 12-1 RIFLE AMMUNITION TABLES 12-1 LSW AMMUNITION TABLES 12-3 LSW (SDM) AMMUNITION TABLES 12-3 L129A1 SHARPSHOOTER 12-4 LMG AMMUNITION TABLES 12-5 PISTOL AMMUNITION TABLES 12-7 OPERATIONAL SHOOTING SKILLS 12-8 GUIDE TO LFTT 12-10
1202. The scales of ammunition also include those shoots that have been designed to be fired using DCCT but which can also be fired live in the absence of simulators. Layout 1203. Each weapon has a series of tables indicating quantities of ammunition allocated for the various stages of LFMT for Training the Battle Shot. 1204. Ammunition for Transition to Live Firing Tactical Training (TLFTT) (Fire and Movement Test and IBSR Shoots) and Live Firing Tactical Training (LFTT) is to be provided from Theatre and command pools. Rifle Ammunition Tables 1205. Regular and Reserve Units — Initial Training. Listed in the following tables are the quantities of ammunition a trainee requires to complete one attempt at each of the LFMT lessons that are to be fired during initial training.
12-1
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Ser
LF Lesson
5.56 mm Ball Ctn Qty
1
2
40
2
4
50
3
5
12
4
6
24
5
7
80
6
8
64
7
9
64
Remarks
LFMT Stage 1 Grouping and Zeroing
LFMT Stage 2 Application of Fire
8
11
45
9
12
50/60
10
14
32
11
15
32/45
12
16
20
13
17
20
14
18
10
BCC/DCC BCC/DCC
LFMT Stage 3 Annual Combat Marksmanship Test (ACMT) 15
ACMT
69/79
16
CBRN
40
Grand Total
588/685
BCC/DCC BCC/DCC
1206. Regular and Reserve Units — Annual Training. Listed in the following table are the quantities of ammunition a firer requires to complete one attempt at each of the LFMT lessons fired annually: Ser
LF Lesson
5.56 mm Ball Ctn Qty
Remarks
LFMT Stage 1 and 2 1
ACMT Prep
85/91
BCC/DCC
LFMT Stage 3 ACMT 2
ACMT
79
3
CBRN
40
Grand Total
12-2
204/210
BCC/DCC
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
LSW Ammunition Tables 1207. Regular and Reserve Units — Initial Training. Listed in the following tables are the quantities of ammunition a trainee requires to complete one attempt at each of the LFMT lessons that are to be fired during initial training. Ser
LF Lesson
1
1
2
2
5.56 mm Ball Ctn Qty
5.56 mm 4B1T Qty
Remarks
LFMT Stage 1 Grouping and Zeroing 34
-
12
-
LFMT Stage 2 Application of Fire 3
3
33
-
4
4
-
54
5
5
6
ACMT
93 LFMT Stage 3 Annual Combat Marksmanship Test (ACMT)
7
CBRN Grand Total
-
73
40
-
119
220
1208. Regular and Reserve Units — Annual Training. Listed in the following table are the quantities of ammunition a firer requires to complete one attempt at each of the LFMT lessons fired annually: Ser
LF Lesson
5.56 mm Ball Ctn Qty
1
ACMT Prep
-
5.56 mm 4B1T Qty
Remarks
LFMT Stage 1 and 2 80
LFMT Stage 3 ACMT 2
ACMT
-
73
3
CBRN
40
-
40
153
Grand Total
LSW (SDM) Ammunition Tables 1209. Regular and Reserve Units — Initial Training. Listed in the following tables are the quantities of ammunition a trainee requires to complete one attempt at each of the LFMT lessons that are to be fired during initial training.
12-3
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Ser
LF Lesson
5.56 mm Ball Ctn Qty
5.56 mm 4B1T Qty
1
1
34
-
2
2
12
-
3
3
20
-
4
4
-
35
5
5
-
35
6
6
-
62
7
7
-
41
8
ACMT
Remarks
LFMT Stage 1 Grouping and Zeroing
LFMT Stage 2 Application of Fire
LFMT Stage 3 Annual Combat Marksmanship Test (ACMT) 9
CBRN Grand Total
-
85
40
-
106
258
1210. Regular and Reserve Units — Annual Training. Listed in the following table are the quantities of ammunition a firer requires to complete one attempt at each of the LFMT lessons fired annually: Ser
LF Lesson
5.56 mm Ball Ctn Qty
1
ACMT Prep
75
5.56 mm 4B1T Qty
Remarks
LFMT Stage 1 and 2 -
LFMT Stage 3 ACMT 2
ACMT
-
85
3
CBRN
40
-
115
85
Grand Total
Sharpshooter L129A1 Ammunition Tables 1211. Distributed Training. Listed in the following table are the quantities of ammunition required to complete one attempt at each of the LFMT lessons that are to be fired by all trainee Sharpshooters when completing the distributed training within units:
12-4
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Ser
LF Lesson
7.62 mm Ball Ctn Qty
Remarks
LFMT Stage 1 Grouping and Zeroing 1
1
56 LFMT Stage 2 Application of Fire
2
2
39
3
3
21
4
4
27
5
5
50
6
6
33
7
ACMT
LFMT Stage 3 ACMT 8
61
CBRN
40
Grand Total
327
Including ACMT.
1212. Regular and Reserve Units — Annual Training. Listed in the following table are the quantities of ammunition a firer requires to complete one attempt at each of the LFMT lessons fired annually: Ser
LF Lesson
7.62 mm Ball Ctn Qty
Remarks
LFMT Stage 1 and 2 1
ACMT Prep
63 LFMT Stage 3 ACMT
2
ACMT
61
3
CBRN
40
Grand Total
164
LMG Ammunition Tables 1213. Combat Infantrymen, Regular and Reserve Units — Initial Training. Listed in the following table are the quantities of ammunition required to complete one attempt at each of the LFMT lessons that are to be fired during initial training:
12-5
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Ser
LF Lesson
5.56 mm Ball Belted Qty
5.56 mm 4B1T Belted Qty
Remarks
LFMT Stage 1 Grouping and Zeroing 1
1
30
—
2
2
60
—
3
3
60
—
4
4
—
60
See Note 1.
5
5
—
65
See Note 1.
6
6
—
95
See Note 1.
7
ACMT
-
145
See Note 1.
-
160
See Note 1.
150
525
See Note 2.
LFMT Stage 2 Application of Fire
LFMT Stage 3 ACMT 8
CBRN Grand Total
Notes: 1. 5.56 mm 4B1T may be substituted with 5.56 mm Ball Belted during Tracer bans. 2. Dependant on sighting system used. 1214. Regular and Reserve Units — Annual Training. Listed in the following table are the quantities of ammunition required to complete one attempt at each of the LFMT lessons that are to be fired annually by all whose personal weapon is the LMG: Ser
LF Lesson
5.56 mm Ball Ctn Qty
1
ACMT Prep
125
5.56 mm 4B1T Qty
Remarks
LFMT Stage 1 and 2 LFMT Stage 3 ACMT 2
ACMT
-
145
See Note 1.
3
CBRN
-
160
See Note 1.
125
305
Grand Total
12-6
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Pistol Ammunition Tables 1215. Pistol User — Initial Training. Listed in the following table are the quantities of ammunition required to complete one attempt at each of the LFMT lessons that are to be fired during initial training by all Arms and Services personnel whose personal weapon is the pistol: Ser
LF Lesson
9 mm Ball Ctn Qty
Remarks
LFMT Stage 1 Grouping and Zeroing 1
1
30
2
2
24
3
3
48
4
4
32
5
5
32
6
6
39
7
ACMT
32
LFMT Stage 2 Application of Fire
LFMT Stage 3 ACMT 8
CBRN Grand Total
18 255
Including ACMT
1216. Pistol User — Annual Training. Listed in the following table are the quantities of ammunition required to complete one attempt at each of the LFMT lessons that are to be fired during annual training by all Arms and Services personnel whose personal weapon is the pistol: Ser
LF Lesson
9 mm Ball Ctn Qty
Remarks
LFMT Stage 1 and 2 1
ACMT Prep
38
2
ACMT
32
CBRN
18
LFMT Stage 3 ACMT 3
Grand Total
88
12-7
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Operational Shooting Skills 5.56 mm Ball Ctn Qty
9 mm Ball Ctn Qty
Ser
LF Lesson
1
Firing at Moving Targets — Using FP Cover
24
2
Firing at Moving Targets — Assessment
72
3
Firing at the LNV — Rifle/LSW Instruction and Assessment
30
4
Firing With NVD/TI — Rifle/LSW Zeroing (Daylight Shoot)
25
5
Firing With NVD/TI — Rifle/LSW Assessment
40
6
Firing with HMNVS and LA — Introductory Shoot (25 metres)
30
7
Firing with HMNVS and LA — Grouping and Alignment
50
8
Firing with HMNVS and LA — Assessment
25
9
Automatic Fire — Instruction
120
10
Automatic Fire — Assessment
50
11
IBSR Def Phase
16
12
Rifle/LWS (Bipod Legs folded) Vehicle Mounted Shoots – Flank Contacts in a Moving Vehicle
60
13
Rifle Long Range Suppression
48
14
CQM (Rifle And Pistol) — The Transition
16
16
15
CQM (Rifle And/Or Pistol) Firing Whilst Turning Or Pivoting
32
32
16
CQM (Rifle And/Or Pistol) Firing Whilst Closing
54
54
12-8
5.56 mm 4B1T/Ball Belted Qty
Remarks
If DCCT not available
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Ser
LF Lesson
5.56 mm Ball Ctn Qty
9 mm Ball Ctn Qty
112
112
5.56 mm 4B1T/Ball Belted Qty
Remarks
17
CQM Moving Target - Identifying Lead With Personal Weapons
MRTS
18
LMG Moving Targets Preparation and Assessment
19
LMG Moving Targets at Longer ranges
100
20
Firing At The Limit Of Night Visibility — LMG Instructional Shoot And Assessment
90
21
Firing With NVD/TI — LMG Zeroing (Daylight Shoot)
25
22
Firing With NVD/TI — LMG Assessment
65
23
LMG Vehicle Mounted Shoots – Static Vehicle Shoot
100
24
LMG Vehicle Mounted Shoots – Flank Contacts in a Moving Vehicle Shoot
90
25
LMG CQM LFMT 1
26
LMG CQM LFMT 2
27
LMG CQM LFMT 3
28
LMG CQM LFMT 4
29
LMG CQM — Firing Whilst Turning Or Pivoting
30
LMG CQM — Firing Whilst Closing
31
Annual Firing In CBRN Conditions - Pistol Assessment
CLF Directive to be fired annually
32
L129A1- Annual Firing In CBRN Conditions - Instructional Shoot Assessment
CLF Directive to be fired annually
33
L129A1-Advanced Application Of Fire 700 – 800 Metres
If DCCT not available If DCCT not available
12-9
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Ser
LF Lesson
34
L129A1 - Firing At Moving Targets — Assessment
35
Firing At The Limit Of Night Visibility — Instructional Shoot And Assessment
36
Firing With MUNS Night Sight — Assessment
37
Firing with HMNVS and LA — Introductory Shoot (25 metres)
38
Firing with HMNVS and LA — Grouping and Alignment
39
Firing with HMNVS and LA — Assessment
5.56 mm Ball Ctn Qty
9 mm Ball Ctn Qty
5.56 mm 4B1T/Ball Belted Qty
Remarks
A Guide to the Ammunition Requirements for LFTT Ball Ctn (per Rifle)
Ball/4B1T (per LSW)
Ball/4B1T Belted (per LMG)
Offensive
–
–
–
IBSR and Individual CQB
40
60
50
Pairs Fire and Manoeuvre
60
60
100
Team Fire and Manoeuvre
60
180
200
Section Attack (Day)
120
180
200
Platoon Attack (Day)
120
330
600
Company Attack (Day)
120
330
400
Defensive
–
–
–
Section in Defence (Day and Night)
20
120
200
Platoon in Defence (Day and Night)
30
120
200
Company in Defence (Day )
20
120
200
TOTALS
600
1500
2150
12-10
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
CHAPTER 13 OPERATIONAL SHOOTING COMPETITIONS General 1301. The aim of this chapter is to provide guidance for the planning and subsequent management of an Operational Shooting Competition (OSC). 1302. The chapter is structured in a such a way as to provide the user with the overarching information and key considerations required to plan an OSC as well as the more intimate detail of subsequent management. In order to give planners maximum autonomy, the guidance avoids, where possible, mandating procedure and instead offers examples of proven good practice that may be replicated in their entirety or simply referenced as a guide. A number of enclosures are included (electronic version only), offering examples of the key documents required in the planning process. Enclosures associated with this chapter are:
Contents GENERAL 13-1 POLICY & MANAGEMENT 13-2 PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS 13-2 GENERAL RULES 13-4 COMPETITORS AND TEAMS 13-5 DRESS AND EQUIPMENT 13-6 MOBILE COMMUNICATION 13-7 EXCESS HITS 13-7 PROTESTS AND RE-SHOOTS 13-8 MARKING AND SCORING 13-8 CLOSE QUARTER BATTLE STYLE SCORING 13-9 CHALLENGES 13-10 DISQUALIFICATION 13-11 FORFEITURE AND DEDUCTION OF POINTS 13-11 ILLEGAL MODIFICATION OF WEAPON 13-11 WEAPON BREAKAGES 13-11 TYPES OF TARGET & VALUE OF HITS 13-12 TIMING 13-13 GUIDANCE FOR RANGE STAFF 13-16 STATISTICAL STAFF 13-17 SAFETY 13-17 FIRING POINT PROCEDURE 13-17 SQUADDING CARDS 13-18 AMMUNITION 13-18
a.
Administration Instruction
b.
Scoring Matrix
c.
Squadding Matrix
d.
Squadding Cards
e.
Guide to OSC Range Booking
f.
Butt Registers
g.
Marshalling Duties.
13-1
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Policy & Management 1303. Chapter 1 gives clear direction on the policy and management of operational shooting. In the interests of consistency it is essential that direction from this OSP is given primacy over all others and is adhered to at all times. Planning Considerations 1304. The enclosures to this publication, whilst generic in their nature, can be manipulated to suit the specific requirements of an OSC. 1305. Entry Fees and Forms. Whenever possible, OSC’s should be publicly funded and therefore entry fees will be set to cover the cost of the prize list only. 1306. Types of Assessments. The emphasis should be on team events. Wherever assessment conditions permit, team and individual assessments should be fired concurrently. This adds necessary interest to the meeting and also saves time and ammunition. The shoots in Chapter 14 of this publication are considered the most appropriate for an OSC, but units should not be restricted to such shoots. The organising unit is at liberty to include additional shoots from endorsed publications and/or another formalised OSC as they see fit. Where the aim of the competition is to qualify for another specific competition it would be prudent to align the assessments with that of the senior competition. 1307. Assessment Selection and Conditions. It is suggested that LF assessments from Chapter 14 to this publication are used because: a. They provide a challenge to the participants to develop marksmanship skills beyond those required for the Annual Combat Marksmanship Tests. b. Providing assessment conditions are as published in Chapter 14, individuals and units can compare their performance against the results achieved at the Defence Operational Shooting Competition (DefOSC). 1308. Programme and Timetable. To enable training and planning to commence in good time, the outline programme for the OSC should be published well in advance and included as an annex to the administration instruction. 1309. The programme will depend on the following factors: a.
Time available.
b.
Range space.
c.
Number of competitors.
d.
Ammunition available.
1310. The programme and time table for issue to staff and competitors must contain:
13-2
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
a.
The programme.
b.
The time table for each assessment.
c.
An outline of assessment conditions and prizes.
d.
Any special rules not contained in this publication.
e.
Administrative arrangements.
1311. Timings. The preparation of timetables requires knowledge of the time taken to fire the various assessments. Care must be taken to allow sufficient time for each detail, otherwise competitors may be rushed or the programme will run late. Timings for each shoot are in Chapter 14. 1312. Composition of Teams. Teams should be organised at various levels, e.g. Company, Platoon and Section. It is recommended that the assessments should be based on Section teams with inter-Sub Unit championships decided on the aggregate of scores made by a number of Section teams. The rank structure of the team will depend on the rank structure of the unit. The aim must be to devise a rank structure which will exercise a cross section of the unit and should always include a number of Officers, NCOs and new competitors. 1313. Squadding. Well planned squadding arrangements are the key to an efficient operational shooting competition. An example of a squadding matrix is included as an enclosure to this publication. The following is a guide to the steps required to squad a unit meeting: a. Plan the design of the squadding cards (if used). Specimen cards are included as an enclosure to this publication. b. Use a colour code particularly for the different practices of a specific assessment. c. If the cards are to be printed commercially order them well in advance and ensure that there is sufficient income to cover the cost. d.
Enter squadding details on the cards e.g. detail and target numbers.
e. Prepare a list of teams and individuals entered for the meeting and allot a serial number to each team and individual. These serial numbers will save a great deal of time and prevent errors being made in the identification of cards. f.
Prepare a squadding plan for each assessment.
g. Squad the assessment by entering the team/individual serial numbers in the appropriate spaces. h.
Make up squadding cards into team packs.
i. Issue squadding cards and/or range programme to Team Captains the day before the meeting. 13-3
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
j. During the squadding process location of ranges and distance between them must be considered. k. If transport to and from ranges is necessary, teams should be squadded together for assessments in order to reduce the transport burden. 1314. Team Captain Briefing. A mandatory conference and briefing for Team Captains should be held on the day prior to the start of the meeting. Details will be published on registration. 1315. Prizes and Ties. The individual and team prizes available to competitors should be promulgated prior to the competition. An example prize list with details of the tie procedure is included as an annex to the enclosed administrative instruction. 1316. The decision to award individual and aggregate prizes is entirely at the discretion of the organisers i.e. a series of scores from separate assessments may be combined to award a ‘Champion at Arms’ or ‘Champion Team’ prize. 1317. Team Selection and Training. Much of the value of an OSC lies in the selection and training of individuals and teams. Details of the meeting should be published as far ahead as possible, and the programme should allow time for individuals and teams to train. General Rules 1318. These rules are intended as a guide and as such units are at liberty to make alterations as they see fit providing that safety and the general spirit of competition shooting is not compromised. 1319. Any infringements of the rules may disqualify a team or individual or cause penalties to be inflicted. This is entirely the decision of the organising unit, with consistency and fairness being of the utmost importance. 1320. The SPO is empowered to alter the programme, including the cancellation of assessments, should the weather conditions or other unforeseen circumstances warrant it. 1321. Weapons General. Service weapons must be ‘as issued’. They are not to be modified in anyway and must not include privately purchased accessories i.e. down grips, hand protectors etc. 1322. Rifles. The Service Rifle may be equipped with either Optic or Iron sights. Competitors with Iron sights should not compete against those with Optics and vice versa. In circumstances where both types of sights are used at an OSC, a separate prize list should be published.
13-4
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
1323. Ammunition. Only ammunition issued for the assessment will be used. Unfired rounds in any phase/practice will be forfeited and not used for any subsequent phase/practice, unless otherwise stated in the assessment conditions. Competition planners should not allow teams to bring and fire their own ammunition. Competitors and Teams 1324. Eligibility. Eligibility criteria will be detailed in the administrative instruction and is to be fair and unambiguous. All competitors must have passed Weapon Handling Tests (WHT) and Annual Combat Marksmanship Test (ACMT) on all weapons they are to fire during the competition. In addition, and where applicable they must have also passed the appropriate operational fitness tests for their role. It is the responsibility of the organising unit to promulgate the eligibility criteria within a suitable time frame in order to allow competitors to meet the standards. 1325. Team Composition. Each team member must be assigned to a unit on a unit PID, temporary or attached personnel are not eligible. The composition of each team is the decision of the organising unit and will be included in a Calling Notice and/or Administrative Instruction. 1326. Team Captains. Whilst not mandatory, it is advisable to insist on the appointment of a Team Captain for each participating team. The Team Captain provides a focal point for planners and can deal with administrative and managerial issues. 1327. Coaching. Whilst the decision on whether or not to allow coaching and to what degree lies with the organising unit, the following detail is a guide: a. Coaching is the giving or receiving from any other person any assistance or advice, including any indication as to how the time is passing, from the start of a practice until the score is known. In individual assessments casual conversation between competitors on the firing point may be considered as coaching and may lead to penalties being imposed on both parties. b. Unless allowed in assessment conditions, coaching is NOT permitted in any individual assessment, including during the firing of sighting shots. c. Coaching is permitted in team assessments by members of the team, the team captain, or team coach if one is permitted. The team captain or coach is allowed to move about the firing point in the execution of their duties, but must not screen competitors from wind or light.
13-5
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Dress and Equipment 1328. General. Unless otherwise stated in the conditions of an assessment and in the interests of consistency, the dress and equipment of competitors will be as set out in the OSC admin instruction and/or Calling Notice with the additional points below. It is to be ‘as issued’ and worn in the authorised manner throughout the whole competition. The spo may penalise competitors who are not dressed or equipped according to these rules. The penalty is to be applied when the practice or assessment is completed with the RCO reporting the offence to the SPO who will decide on the level of penalty to be applied. 1329. Hearing Protection. These items are mandatory for all firing and must meet service issue standards. 1330. Boots. Regulation boots as issued. 1331. Head Dress. Competitors must wear the issued combat helmet unless assessment conditions specify otherwise. 1332. Gloves. The wearing of issued gloves is permitted. 1333. Padding. Improvised padding should not be worn under the combat jacket. Exterior or strap-on pads are permitted if issued. 1334. Uniform. Issued combat jacket and trousers with combat helmet unless assessment conditions specify otherwise. Waterproof clothing as issued may be worn in all assessments by the competitor, captain and the coach. 1335. Belt Order Webbing. In accordance with the OSC admin instruction and/or Calling Notice to this publication, with the following additions: a. When assessment conditions require the wearing of a respirator, it must always be returned to the belt mounted issued haversack when not in use. b.
For Pistol competitors — As per Rifle plus pistol case/holster as issued.
1336. Optics. The following rules will apply: a. Spectacles. Prescription spectacles and contact lenses may be worn in any assessment. b. Binoculars. The use of issued binoculars is permitted where assessment conditions allow. c.
13-6
Telescopes. Telescopes should only be allowed in Sniper Assessments.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Mobile Communication 1337. Personal communication devices, including mobile telephones and/or ‘walkie talkie’ type radios, are not to be used for unauthorised communication between the Firing Points and Butts. Once a firer enters the marshalling process he/she is forbidden from using any form of mobile communications until such time as he/she is marshalled from the firing point. Excess Hits 1338. Marking. When, in any practice or series of practices, the total number of hits on a competitor’s target or targets exceeds the number of shots fired and when there are no means of identifying these shots, the procedure will be as follows: a. If it can be proved that the excess hits in any phase or practice were made by the competitor or team firing more than the number of shots allowed, the score will be disallowed and the penalty may be disqualification. b. When the number of excess hits does not exceed one half of the number of shots allowed, the score will be adjusted by cancelling first a hit of the LOWEST value, then a hit of the HIGHEST value and so on alternately until the hits left are equal to the shots permitted to be fired in that practice. c. When the number of excess hits exceeds one half of the number of shots allowed, the score will be cancelled and the competitor will re-shoot. New scores will be given for spoilt targets only, all other practices will stand. d. When different targets are used at different times, during a practice, the score made on the target without excess hits will stand, and the above rules will only apply to a target with excess hits. e. If firing point staff observe a competitor firing on another competitor’s target he is to be informed immediately that he is cross firing. No allowance will be made for shots cross fired, and no additional penalty will be applied. f. SARTS Only. In cases of excess rounds during points per hit competitions. The competitors target with excess rounds on will be examined by the RCO. If the excess rounds are over 50% of the total fired the competitor must re shoot. If under 50% the firer is given the benefit of doubt. All hit shots to a maximum of the HPS are counted. Missed shots should not be counted. If different scoring areas are being used the rule for excess hits for manual scoring should be applied.
13-7
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Protests and Re-Shoots 1339. At the end of a practice or phase, all firers will be given the opportunity to protest against any perceived irregularity. 1340. If an irregularity of procedure occurs, such as the incorrect timing of an exposure or a target or frame breaking, a firer in an individual assessment or team captain in a team assessment may protest to the RCO before the score is known or the targets seen. After a protest has been upheld, no information will be given to an individual or a team as to the score made in the first shoot. 1341. No re-shoot will take place unless the occurrence upon which the protest is based is vouched for by a member of the Range Team. Re-shoots must take place at the earliest opportunity. 1342. If a re-shoot is granted as a result of a protest in a continuous fire and movement assessment or practice then the individual or team must re-shoot the whole practice or assessment. Where it is possible to separate the score into phases (when ammunition is NOT carried forward) only the score made in that phase or by that group in which the irregularity occurs will count in the re-shoot. The final score will be the new score, the remainder of the original score plus all penalty points awarded in both shoots. 1343. Team captains are responsible for the conduct of their firers. At the discretion of the Senior Planning Officer, habitual protestors and firers failing to observe normal military protocols and conduct will be disqualified from assessments or the competition. Marking and Scoring 1344. Manual. The decision to use butt registers and/or squadding cards at the OSC lies with the organising unit. Team captains and individuals are, at all times, responsible for checking the number of hits on their squadding cards before leaving the range. a. When the practice has been completed the RCO will ask for any protests. If there are no protests (or on completion of any re-shoots allowed) the RCO will signal to the butts to check the targets. b. Scores will be taken and the total number of hits and their value recorded and communicated to the Firing Point. The Range Staff will repeat these details so that competitors can hear, and record them on the team register or individual squadding card. c. Spotting discs will be placed in as many shot holes as possible on the scoring area and targets raised at the same time. d. Once the competitors have seen targets and/or received scores, the RCO will ask for any challenges.
13-8
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
e. Once challenges have been dealt with, or if there are no challenges, the RCO will order the butts to patch out. 1345. Spotting Discs. Only the regulation orange spotting discs will be used. Colour blind competitors may request for their spotting discs to be reversed so that the white side is shown. No spotting discs will be put in the shot holes until the score has been taken. No shot holes will be pasted over or partially patched out until the order to patch out is given. 1346. SARTS. For deliberate and timed practices the scoring procedure is as follows: a.
At the end of the practice or shoot, the RCO will ask for any protests.
b. Once protests have been dealt with or if there are no protests the RCO will order the console operator to read out the scores. The console operator will read out the number of hits by ranges or the total number of hits in each lane. Once this has been done, the RCO will ask for any questions. A competitor may ask for his score to be read out again. Scores recorded on the console may not be challenged. Once the assessment is complete a butt register will be printed out and signed by the firers. c. If a competitor believes their lane is malfunctioning, it is to be brought to the attention of the RCO. The RCO may, at his/her discretion, interrogate SARTS to see if shots have been captured accurately. The RCO may compare previous and later shoots on the lane in question. If the lane is working correctly the score will stand. If any doubt exists, a re-shoot is to be awarded and the lane will not be used until it has been investigated by a qualified engineer. d. The use of tough books may impact on time and therefore the decision to use them is at the discretion of the Planning Officer, who should consider the total number of firers and associated practices before making the decision. Close Quarter Battle Style Scoring 1347. The RCO and his staff will go to the targets and record the number of hits. This process will be witnessed by the firer. Range staff will order that no one touches the target until they have evaluated the score, it has been agreed by the Team Captain or individual competitor and has been recorded. 1348. As an alternative, competitors may be required to score for each other. In this case, competitors will work in twos or threes. If working in threes, one competitor will check the target, whilst another competitor records the number of hits. The firer will be asked to agree or disagree. In case of doubt or disagreement the RCO will be called to give a decision which will be final.
13-9
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
1349. In assessments where the target appears and disappears by mechanical means a hit will NOT count, if the length of the hole exceeds twice the diameter of the bullet. For the purpose of this rule twice the diameter of the 7.62 mm round will be 15 mm, in the case of the 9 mm round 18 mm and in the case of the 5.56 mm round 12 mm. Challenges 1350. Challenges. A competitor or team has the right to challenge, once only, the value of a hit or the score. A competitor or team may not challenge the score of another competitor or team. Once challenged, the Butts IC is to check the target and score. If the score was incorrect, the correct score will be recorded. If the original score is proven to be correct, the challenge fee detailed below will be incurred. As a guide the challenge fee might be; individual assessments - 5 points and team assessments - 20 points. Challenge Procedure. a. The RCO will contact the Butt IC and the target will be lowered. The spotting disc or discs removed and the target examined by the Butt IC. The correct value (altered or not) will be signalled and the result confirmed by telephone. b.
If the original score is confirmed then the challenge fee is forfeited.
1351. Non-Scoring Area. A hit on the non-scoring area, i.e. outside the border of the target will be signalled with a spotting disc, but without score. Penalties 1352. General. Any competitor who is reported to the SPO for dangerous or discreditable conduct on the ranges or in camp may be ordered, if the occurrence is proved to the satisfaction of the SPO, to forfeit all entrance fees and prizes and/or to be disqualified from the current and/or any future competition. Procedure 1353. Warning. A member of the Range Team should warn a competitor who appears to be about to break a rule, or is breaking a rule. This may occur at any stage during an assessment. Depending on the infringement a penalty may be applied by the RCO. In this instance, a competitor cannot protest about being disturbed by a member of the Range Team. 1354. Dangerous Practice. For any dangerous practice, the firer will be immediately stopped (except at discretion of the RCO during a fire and movement practice) and ordered to unload. During a fire and movement practice the firer will NOT normally be stopped until the detail stops at the next firing point. The penalty is disqualification for that phase, practice or assessment, or in very bad cases from the whole meeting. 13-10
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Disqualification 1355. All recommendations for disqualification will be referred by the RCOs to the SPO who will confirm or reject the disqualification or impose a lesser penalty. 1356. Negligent Discharge. A negligent discharge is defined as any round fired accidentally, unless it is fired at or in the direction of the target after the order “Watch and shoot” has been given and before the order “Unload” has been given. If the circumstances are such that the negligent discharge was due to any dangerous practice, for example careless handling, the competitor will be reported to the SPO. In the event of a negligent discharge, the competitor will invariably be disqualified from the assessment, and a report forwarded to his unit. In all cases the Armourer’s report is final. In the event of a negligent discharge, the weapon involved is to be removed from the firer and handed to the Armourer by a member of the range staff. Forfeiture and Deduction of Points 1357. The RCO and SPO are empowered to award a forfeiture of up to one fifth of the HPS which could be made by an Individual or team in the practice or phase (if this is possible) concerned, instead of disqualification, when they consider that disqualification would be too harsh a penalty. Illegal Modification of Weapon 1358. The RCO and/or the SPO has the authority to have a weapon inspected by the Armourer at any time after a competitor has fired: a. If any illegal modification is found, the score made in that assessment will be disallowed. Further, the Armourer is to prepare a neglect, misuse and damage report on AFN 9268 and forward it to the firer’s Commanding Officer. The weapon is not to be used again until rectified. b. If, on inspection, there is no illegal modification the firer may re-zero the weapon and, where necessary, shoot any practices lost. c. In the event of illegal weapon modifications being found by the Armourer in the normal course of his duties, an AFN 9268 is to be forwarded to the firer’s Commanding Officer. The weapon is not to be used until the illegal modification has been rectified. Weapon Breakages 1359. The OSC administrative instruction/calling notice should detail the criteria for weapon breakage re-shoots. In the event of a breakage during an assessment, the competitor is to inform a member of the Range Team who will summons to Armourer. Subject to confirmation from the appointed OSC Armourer, the following breakages during an assessment will warrant a reshoot: a.
Extractor or Firing Pin damage. 13-11
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Types of Target and Value of Hits 1360. General. The targetry and scoring areas covered in this section conform to the LF shoots in Chapter 14. During competition planning, planners may consider increasing scoring areas to suit the standard of competitor, however SARTS is restricted to the scoring areas listed in this publication and cannot be modified. 1361. Figure 11. The target has 4 inscribed circles, 80 mm, 160 mm, 240 mm (blue) and 300 mm. Diameter of circle and their scoring values are: a. In Pistol and Rifle CQM assessments, a shot that touches or is within the 80 mm circle scores 5, touching or within the 160 mm circle scores 4, touching or within the 300 mm circle scores 3 and anywhere else on the target scores 2. The blue circle (240 mm) is not used. b. In all other Rifle assessments, the 240 mm (blue circle) is used. A shot that touches, or is within the 240 mm circle scores 5 and a shot hitting anywhere else on the target scores 4. 1362. Figure 12. This target has two inscribed circles, 300 mm and 240 mm. A shot that touches, or is within the 240 mm circle scores 5 and a shot hitting anywhere else on the target scores 4. 1363. Figure 12c. This target has two inscribed circles, 200 mm and 150 mm (older versions may only have one 200mm circle). A shot that touches, or is within the 200 mm circle scores 5 and a shot hitting anywhere else on the target scores 4. 1364. Figure 14. This target has one inscribed circle which is 100 mm. A shot that touches, or is within the 100 mm circle scores 5 and a shot hitting anywhere else on the head scores 4. 1365. Figure 14 Window Target. It consists of a Fig 14 pasted on top of an inverted Fig 12 cut off at the shoulder. It may be mounted on a Fig 11 or Fig 12 veneer. Scoring areas are the 100 mm inscribed circle, the remainder of the head and anywhere else on the window. A shot touching or inside the 100 mm circle scores 5, a shot on the remainder of the head scores 4, and a shot anywhere else on the window scores 3. 1366. Figure 20 (Running Man). This target has one scoring rectangle which is 300 mm x 150 mm; a shot which touches or is inside this area scores 5. Remainder of the body and the head above the bottom of the jacket scores 4. Legs below the bottom of the jacket scores 3. 1367. Triple Fig 11. A standard Triple Fig 11 target. Scoring on the centre Fig 11 is 5 points for a hit within the 240 mm circle and 4 elsewhere on the target. Hits on the flanking targets score 2 points.
13-12
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
1368. SARTS Suppression Triple Fig 11. The target consists of one Fig 11. A shot that touches or is inside the 240 mm circle scores 5. A shot anywhere else on the Fig 11 scores 4 and anywhere else within a 1.22 metre circle from the centre of the target scores 2. 1369. Fig 21 CQM Target. A standard Fig 21 CQM target using the scoring areas to the body and head. Scoring is 5 inside the inner body area, 4 inside the outer body area and on the remainder of the target, including the head 3 unless stated otherwise in assessment conditions. 1370. Fig 22 CQM Target. A standard Fig 22 CQM target using the scoring areas to the body and head. Scoring at 25, 20, 15 and 10m is 5 inside the inner body area, 4 inside the outer body area and 3 on the remainder of the target. 1371. Fig 26 CQM Target. A blank Fig 11 target with 8 x 185 mm black circles. Scoring 5 if within or touching the nominated circle. 1372. Fig 27 CQM Target. A blank fig 11 target with 15 x 130 mm black circles. Scoring 5 if within or touching the nominated circle. 1373. Fig 28 CQM Target. Scoring 5 inside the nominated coloured/numbered circle. Timing 1374. Where automated systems are not used, a stop-watch is to be used for the timing of exposures or the duration of firing. 1375. Whenever possible, target exposures for rapid, snap and fire with movement practices are to be timed by the IC Butts. When timing is carried out at the firing point, and there is no mechanical means available a whistle is to be sounded as the signal to indicate the time limit (except when stated otherwise in the assessment conditions). 1376. Timed Exposures. In a timed exposure the raising and lowering of targets is to be carried out as quickly as possible. They are to be exposed straight up and down, and are not to be twisted or turned . In all types of practices the exposure will be timed from the moment the slowest target is up and stationary until the time the order is given to lower the target. Targets exposed on a gallery range must be kept completely below the mantlet until the order to expose is given. No verbal indication as to how the time is passing is allowed.
13-13
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Fig 11
Fig 14
Fig 20 Running Man
13-14
Fig 12
Fig 12c
Fig 14 Window Tgt
Triple Fig 11
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Fig 22 CQM
Fig 21 CQM
Fig 26 CQM
Fig 27 CQM
Fig 28 CQM
13-15
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
1377. Electrical/Mechanical Target Control. On the electric target range or when swivel target apparatus is used, the signal to fire will be the appearance of the target or targets and the end will be the disappearance of the target or targets. The exposure will be timed from the time the target or targets are full facing and will end when the targets start to fall or turn side on. No indication of the passage of time or the end of the time limit will be given. 1378. Exposure Timings. Time charts are provided in the relevant chapter. IC Butts is to ensure competitors receive the full exposure times. Guidance for Range Staff 1379. Principles. The whole tone of an OSC depends on the skill and efficiency of the RCO, who is responsible for the detailed conduct of all firing on his range. 1380. The conditions of the assessment must be the same for all competitors. Under no circumstances give a ruling which could have the effect of altering the conditions in the middle of the assessment. If in doubt consult the SPO. Uniform conditions are even more important when an assessment is being fired on more than one range. 1381. Competition shooting must be fun. Do all you can to keep it that way. If you see a competitor is about to contravene a rule, it is your duty to warn him before the practice begins. 1382. If there is still disagreement, the SPO should be consulted. 1383. Rules. RCOs cannot be expected to know every rule off by heart, but they must have a working knowledge of the most important ones and know where to find them. Before an assessment, the firing point staff must study the conditions for the assessment, the firing point procedure and the general rules. Statistical Staff (‘Stats’) 1384. There is no mystery about the duties of the Stats Staff, but it is most important that the work should be carefully planned beforehand.The use of flow charts will facilitate the briefing of the Stats Staff and will help to eliminate errors. 1385. The checking of scores entered onto the squadding cards or butt registers is a key aspect of ensuring that the correct Order of Merit is achieved successfully. Consideration should be given to the use of simple Excel spreadsheets for inputting data, sorting Order of Merit and publication of results. An example of a squadding matrix is included as an enclosure to this publication. 1386. Recording. Quick and accurate display of scores is essential if interest is to be maintained. The following information is required: a.
13-16
On the range — leading scores.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
b. On the main score board — every competitor name must appear on the team score sheets. Put up provisional scores as soon as the cards have been checked for accuracy and sorted. Maintain leader boards for team and individual assessments. c. Arithmetic errors found by Stats must be corrected on the cards and an appropriate amendment made to the provisional score boards. 1387. Prize Giving. Take care when selecting assessments and aggregates eligible for prizes, to avoid too many prizes going to the same individual or team. Hold formal prize giving soon after the last shot has been fired and keep it as short as possible. Staffing 1388. A Permanent Range Team (PRT) is required for an OSC, with standard range appointments and additional staff nominated as Marshals, Runners, Stats IC etc. If provision of markers for the gallery range proves difficult, then marking by competitors should be organised. The simplest method being to put the last two details into the butts and replace them at half time with the first two details. To reduce the requirement for butt markers, consider making use of the electric target ranges. 1389. Marshalling. Efficient marshalling is critical to the success of the OSC. A detailed example of the marshalling duties is included as an enclosure to this publication. Safety 1390. Operational Shooting Competitions are subject to normal range safety procedures and it is imperative that the relevant rules and regulations are fully enforced at all times. Firing Point Procedure 1391. RCOs will require: a.
Relevant sections of this publication and pamphlet 21.
b.
A copy of the competition programme.
c.
Binoculars.
d.
Stopwatch.
e.
Flag and armband (as required).
f.
Tags, message cards, last detail cards.
1392. Procedures for each assessment are as per the published conditions. Efficient communications with the butts is essential and the procedures are to be rehearsed thoroughly. 13-17
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Squadding Cards 1393. When the decision has been made to employ squadding cards, careful handling is essential to the smooth running of the OSC. The following points must be kept in mind: a. The Marshal is to ensure that the Rank, Name, Initials and Unit are entered on each card. b. The number of hits is to be entered in ink or ballpoint. Any alterations are to be made clearly and initialled. Competitors and/or Team Captains are to be given an opportunity to see their cards before the scores are cancelled on the SARTS range or the targets patched out on the Gallery Range. No alterations can be made to the number of hits recorded on the squadding card once scores have been cancelled or targets patched out. c. The RCO is to check and sign the card. Arithmetic should also be checked by Stats or Marker. d. Once the last detail for the period has been completed, attach a ‘last detail card’ to the bundle and ensure that all cards are dispatched to Stats. Ammunition 1394. Detailed instructions regarding the handling of ammunition are issued separately. RCOs are responsible for the following: a. The ammunition point must be inside the firing point enclosure and is to be closely supervised by the Marshal. In the absence of a Marshal the ammunition point is to be located next to the RCO’s table and is to be supervised by the RCO or an assistant. b. Checking the stock of ammunition to ensure it matches the voucher in the possession of the ammunition point staff. c. Ensuring that the ammunition point staff understand that they are not to issue ammunition without express permission of the RCO. d. Careful handling of ammunition to ensure that it reaches the competitor in the best possible condition e. Ensuring that un-fired rounds are collected from the competitors before they are allowed to leave the firing point. f. Ensuring that all empty cases are collected and handed in by competitors.
13-18
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
CHAPTER 14 ADVANCED OPERATIONAL MARKSMANSHIP ASSESSMENTS Scope 1401. This chapter includes a number of advanced operational marksmanship assessments designed to measure and validate operational marksmanship standards in a variety of conditions.
CONTENTS SCOPE 14-1 LF ASSESSMENTS 14-1 DRESS AND EQUIPMENT 14-2 SARTS SCORING 14-2
1402. The assessments allow units to measure their Operational Marksmanship Standards (OMS) on purpose built ranges where only limited resources are required. They offer excellent training value and complement the LF Syllabus for rifle, pistol and LSW with a focus on snap shooting from positions other than prone. Where time and resources allow, the assessments should be conducted in order to gauge the unit’s marksmanship effectiveness and help to identify where additional practice is required. 1403. The shoots contained within this chapter form the basis for all Unit, Bde, Div and Army Operational Shooting Competitions. LF Assessments 1404. The following LF Assessments are included in this chapter: a.
Rural Contact Assessment (p14-3)
b.
Defence Assessment (p14-7)
c.
Urban Contact Assessment (p14-11)
d.
Advance to Contact Assessment (p14-17)
e.
Advanced Fleeting Encounter Assessment (p14-22)
f.
Attack and Re-Organisation Assessment (p14-25)
g.
Fleeting Encounter Assessment (p14-30)
h.
Long Range Rural Contact Assessment (p14-33)
i.
Short Range Rural Contact Assessment (p14-37)
j.
Pistol CQM Assessment (p14-42)
k.
Fire-Team Falling Plates Assessment (p14-46) 14-1
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
l.
Fire-Team Combat Snap Shooting Assessment (p14-48)
m.
Fire-Team Close Combat Assessment (p14-52)
n.
Fire Team Attack Assessment (p14-56)
o.
Fire-Team Night Engagement Assessment (p14-61)
p.
Fire Team Advance to Contact Assessment (p14-64)
q.
Section Advance to Contact Assessment (p14-69)
r.
Section Attack Assessment (p14-74)
s.
The Machine Gun Assessment (p14-79)
t.
The Sniper Assessment (p14-83)
Dress and Equipment 1405. All assessments should be conducted in mission specific dress and equipment. SARTS Scoring 1406. Unless stipulated in assessment conditions. The following scoring areas will be scored automatically by the Small Arms Range Targetry System (SARTS): a. Suppression Fig 11 (Only a single fig will be seen by the firer). Within 240mm from the centre of the target 5, anywhere else on target 4 and anywhere off target but within a 1.22m circle from the centre of the target 2. b. Fig 11, within 240mm from the centre of the target 5, anywhere else on target 4. c. Fig 12, within 240mm from the centre of the target 5, anywhere else on target 4. d. Fig 12c, within 200mm from the centre of the target 5, anywhere else on target 4. e. Fig 14, within 100mm from the centre of the target 5, anywhere else on target 4.
14-2
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The Rural Contact Assessment 1407. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a four practice shoot designed to replicate rural engagements likely to be encountered on operations. 1408. Ranges. The assessment must be fired on a gallery range. 1409. Time Chart. A time chart to assist range staff is included after the practice details. 1410. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to complete. 1411. Organisation. The shoot can be fired by each detail completing all practices before firing details change or by all details completing each practice before commencing further practices. 1412. Rules. Firers must have zeroed their weapons and passed the ACMT for their weapon system before the assessment is fired. 1413. Ammunition. 40 rounds per firer, in four magazines of 10 rounds. 1414. Targetry. Each lane will require: 1 x Triple Fig 11. 1 x Fig 11. 1 x Fig 12. SARTS Fig 11 left (also providing suppression fig solution) Fig 12 right. 1415. Scoring. Suppression Fig 11, 5, 4, 2 points per hit. Fig 11. 5 and 4 points per hit. Fig 12. 5 and 4 points per hit.
14-3
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
1416. Standards. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at each firing distance (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement will constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the assessment individual practices may be fired again. Ser
Practice
Total Rounds
% Hits
Score
Highest Possible Score (HPS)
1
Practice 1
10
60%
30
50
2
Practice 2
10
60%
30
50
3
Practice 3
10
60%
30
50
4
Practice 4
10
60%
30
50
120
200
Pass
OMS Requirement
1417. Explanatory Notes. a. Once loaded the RCO is to ensure safety catches are applied before any movement between firing positions. b.
Scores will be given at the end of each practice.
Assessment Details Practice 1. Range/Positioning
500m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-4
Triple Fig 11 or SARTS suppression Fig 11. 1 x 60 second exposure. Order “Load, ready, adopt the standing alert position, watch out”. On the appearance of the targets firers are to adopt the prone position open fire with 10 rounds. Targets Up and Hold. Post practice order. “Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease springs, pick up brass and await scores”.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 2. Range/Positioning
500m to 100m Run down. 500m and 300m Prone. 400m and 200m Sitting, Kneeling or Squatting. 100m Standing.
Ammunition
10 Rounds 500m Triple Fig 11 or SARTS suppression Fig 11. 400m Triple Fig 11 or SARTS suppression Fig 11.
Target/ Exposure
300m, 200m and 100m Fig 12. 1 exposure of 15 seconds followed by
Instructions
4 x 45 second exposures with 15 second intervals. Order “Load, ready adopt the standing alert position, watch out”. On the appearance of the targets firers are to adopt the prone position and fire 2 rounds. The next 4x exposures of 45 seconds are the signal to run to the next firing point and engage the target with 2 rounds from the nominated position. Targets Up and Hold. Post practice order. “Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease springs, pick up brass, return to 200m and await scores”.
Practice 3. Range/Positioning
200m Kneeling or Squatting for first exposure, prone for the second exposure.
Ammunition
10 Rounds Fig 11.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1 x 20 second exposure followed 8 seconds later by 1 x 15 second exposure of a Fig 12. Order “Load, ready, adopt the standing alert position, watch out”. On the appearance of the targets firers are to adopt the kneeling or squatting position for the first exposure and then immediately adopt the prone position for the second exposure, fire 5 rounds at each exposure. Targets Up and Hold. Post practice order. “Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease springs, pick up brass, move back to 300m and await scores”.
14-5
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 4. Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12. 10 x 3 second exposures over 4 minutes. Order “Load, ready, adopt the prone position, watch and shoot”. On the appearance of the targets firers are to engage each exposure with 1 round. Targets Fall when Hit. Post practice order. “Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease springs, pick up brass, move back to 500m and await scores”.
The Rural Contact Assessment Time Chart Practice
Range
Target Frame
1
500m
2
500m-400m
Triple Fig 11 (SARTS suppression Fig 11) Up and Hold Triple Fig 11(SARTS suppression Fig 11) Up and Hold
14-6
300m-100m
Fig 12 Up and Hold
3
200m
4
300m
1 x Fig 11 1 x Fig 12 Up and Hold Fig 12. Fall when Hit
Timings Up
Down
05
1.06
05 36
21 1.22
1.37 2.38 3.39 05 35
2.23 3.24 4.25 26 51
05 30 1.05 1.35 2.10 2.25 2.40 2.59 3.20 3.54
09 34 1.09 1.39 2.14 2.29 2.44 3.03 3.24 3.58
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The Defence Assessment 1418. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a four practice shoot designed to replicate situations likely to be encountered on operations. 1419. Ranges. The assessment can be fired on an ETR. 1420. Time Chart. A time chart to assist range staff is included after the practice details. 1421. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 20 minutes to complete. 1422. Organisation. The assessment is an individual defence shoot preceded by a 100 metre run to simulate a rapid deployment during a stand to. Firers have 25 seconds to arrive at the stand to position. 1423. Rules. Firers must have zeroed their weapons and passed the ACMT for their weapon system before the assessment is fired. 1424. Ammunition. 40 rounds per firer, in four magazines of 10 rounds. 1425. Targetry. 1 x Fig 14 at 100 metres 1 x Fig 12 at 200 metres 1 x Fig 12 at 300 metres 1426. Scoring. Four points per hit. 1427. Standards. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at each practice (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement will constitute failure of the Assessment. Due to the nature of the assessment individual practices may be fired again. Ser
Practice
Total Rounds
% Hits
Score
Highest Possible Score (HPS)
1
Practice 1
10
60%
24
40
2
Practice 2
10
60%
24
40
3
Practice 3
10
60%
24
40
4
Practice 4
10
60%
24
40
96
160
Pass
OMS Requirement
14-7
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
1428. Explanatory Notes. a. Once loaded the RCO is to ensure safety catches are applied before any movement between firing positions. b.
Scores will be given at the end of each practice.
Practice 1. Range/Positioning
100m-300m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
100m Fig 14. 200m Fig 12. 300m Fig 12. 1 x 25 second Exposure followed by 2 x 3 second exposures at 100m. 1 x 6 second exposure at 200m. 4 x 4 second exposures at 300m. 100m from firing point.
Instructions
Order “Load, adopt the standing alert position, watch out”. When targets appear firers are to run to the firing point, adopt the prone position, make ready and open fire with one round at each exposure at 100m. Fall when hit. 3 rounds at the single exposure at 200m. Up and hold. 1 round at each exposure at 300m. Fall when hit. Post practice order. “Make safe, dress in to the fire trench and await scores”.
Practice 2. Range/Positioning
100m-300m Fire Trench.
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
100m Fig 14. 200m Fig 12. 300m Fig 12.
Instructions
14-8
1 x 4 second exposure at 300m, followed by 9 random exposures at 100m for 2 seconds, 200m for 3 seconds or 300m for 4 seconds. Order “Ready, adopt the standing supported position, watch and shoot”. When the targets appear the firer is to engage with 1 round per exposure. Targets Fall when hit. Post practice order. “Make safe, dress out of the fire trench and await scores”.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 3. Range/Positioning
100m-300m Kneeling Supported.
Ammunition
10 Rounds 100m Fig 14. 200m Fig 12. 300m Fig 12.
Target/ Exposure
5 x double exposures of 6 seconds for the first target and 3 seconds for the second target. 15 seconds between each double exposure.
Instructions
Targets will appear in random order with a minimum of 4 exposures at 300m, 3 at 200m and 3 at 100m. 3m behind the firing point. Order “Ready, adopt the standing alert position, watch out”. When the targets appear the firer is to move onto the firing point, adopt the kneeling supported position and engage with 1 round. The firer is to remain in the kneeling supported position and fire 1 round at the next exposure. After each second exposure the firer is to apply the safety catch and return to the standing alert position 3m behind the firing point. Targets Fall when Hit. Post practice order. “Make safe, await scores”.
Practice 4. Range/Positioning
100m-200m Standing, Kneeling or Squatting.
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100m Fig 14. 200m Fig 12. 5 x 4 second exposures at 200m and 5 x 3 second exposures at 100m, in random order. Order “Ready, adopt the standing alert position, watch out”. During each exposure firers are to fire 1 round from the standing, kneeling or squatting position. Firers must return to the standing alert position after each exposure Targets Fall when Hit. Post practice order. “Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease springs, pick up brass and await scores”.
14-9
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The Defence Assessment Time Chart Practice
Range
1
100m 100m 100m 200m 300m 300m 300m 300m 300m 200m 300m 100m 300m 100m 200m 100m 300m 200m 200m 300m
2
3
Target Frame Fig 14 Fall when Hit Fig 12 Up and Hold Fig 12 Fall when Hit
Fig 14 and Fig 12 Fall when Hit
Fig 14 and Fig 12 Fall when Hit
100m 200m 300m 100m 300m 200m 100m 300m 4
14-10
100m 200m 100m 200m 200m 100m 200m 100m 100m 200m
Fig 14 and Fig 12 Fall when Hit
Up 05 35 44 53 1.05 1.14 1.23 1.32 05 12 18 25 30 37 42 48 53 1.00 05 14 33 42 1.01 1.10 1.29 1.38 1.57 2.06 05 20 35 52 1.15 1.33 1.47 2.05 2.20 2.38
Timings Down 31 39 48 60 1.10 1.19 1.28 1.37 10 16 23 28 35 40 46 51 58 1.04 12 18 40 46 1.08 1.14 1.36 1.42 2.04 2.10 09 25 39 57 1.20 1.37 1.52 2.09 2.24 2.43
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The Urban Contact Assessment 1429. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a continuous four phase shoot designed to replicate situations likely to be encountered in urban conditions on operations. 1430. Ranges. The assessment can be fired on a 100 metre range. 1431. Time Chart. A time chart to assist range staff is included after the practice details. Each phase has been separated to allow the RCO to control the speed depending on the level of experience of the firers. 1432. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 25 minutes to complete. 1433. Organisation. The assessment is an individual CQB shoot. a.
The assessment is a continuous shoot conducted in 4 phases.
b.
The assessment can be conducted with the rifle, LSW and pistol.
1434. Rules a. Firers must have zeroed their weapons and passed the ACMT for their weapon system before the assessment is fired. b.
All pistols must be holstered in accordance with current publications.
c. Only the number of shots permitted can be fired at each exposure. Rounds can not be carried forward into the next practice. 1435. Ammunition. 40 rounds of 5.56mm Ball in two magazines of 20 rounds. 40 rounds of 9mm Ball in four magazines of 10 rounds. 1436. Targetry. Each lane will require: 1 x Fig 11 target at 100 and 75 metres – (Target 1) 1 x Fig 14 window target at 50 metres – (Target 2 upper) 1 x Fig 14 window target at 25 metres – (Target 2 lower) 1 x Fig 21 target at 25 and 20 metres – (Target 3) 1 x Fig 22 target at 15 and 10 metres – (Target 4)
14-11
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
1437. Scoring. Phase 1 scoring 5, 4, 3 or 2 points per hit. Phase 2 scoring 5, 4 or 3 points per hit. Phase 3 scoring 5, 4 or 3 points per hit. Phase 4 scoring 5, 4 or 3 points in the head or 3, 2 or 1 points in the body. 1438. Standards. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at each phase (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement will constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the assessment conditions the entire shoot should be fired again. Ser
Practice
Total Rounds
OMS Requirement % Hits
Score
Highest Possible Score (HPS)
1
Practice 1 + 2
40
60%
120
200
2
Practice 3 + 4
40
60%
120
200
240
400
Pass
1439. Explanatory Notes. a. Once loaded the RCO is to ensure safety catches are applied before any movement between firing positions. The RCO is to issue all words of commands for magazine changes. b.
Scores will be recorded at the end of Phase 4.
Assessment Details Phase 1a. Range/Positioning
100m Standing Supported
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 11. 1 x 8 second exposure, followed by 4 x 3 second exposures. 3 metres behind the firing point. Order “Secondary weapon system (pistol), load, ready, return pistol. Primary weapon system, load, ready, adopt the standing alert position, phase 1 watch out”. When targets appear firers are to advance to the 100m firing point, adopt the standing supported position and fire two rounds at each exposure. Post phase 1a order. “Phase 1b, watch out”.
14-12
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Phase 1b. Range/Positioning
75m Kneeling Supported
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 11. 1 x 1 second exposure, followed by 2 x 6 second exposures. When the targets appear the firer is to move to the 75m firing point and adopt the kneeling supported position. On the next two exposures of the target the firer is to engage with 5 rounds per exposure. Post phase 1b order. “Primary weapon system make safe, ready, phase 2a watch out”.
Phase 2a. Range/Positioning
50m Kneeling or Squatting Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Fig 14 window (upper).
Instructions
1 x 1 second exposure, followed by 5 x 5 second exposures. When the target appears the firer is to move to the 50m firing point and adopt the standing position. On the next 5 exposures the firer is to engage the target with 1 round from the standing position immediately followed by 1 round from either the kneeling or squatting position. The firer is to return to the standing alert position after each exposure. Post phase 2a order. “ Phase 2b, watch out”.
Phase 2b. Range/Positioning
25m Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 14 window (lower). 1 x 1 second exposure, followed by 5 x 3 second exposures. When the target appears the firer is to move to the 25m firing point and adopt the standing position. On the next five exposures the firer is to engage the target with 2 rounds from the standing position. The firer is to return to the standing alert position after each exposure. Post phase 2b order. “Ensure your safety catch is applied and sling your rifle”. “Draw pistols, adopt the standing alert position, phase 3a, watch and shoot”.
14-13
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Phase 3a. Range/Positioning
25m Standing and Kneeling
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 21. 2 x 5 second exposures. On the appearance of the target the firer is to engage the target with 5 rounds from the standing position. The firer is then to adopt the kneeling position and on the next exposure is to engage the target with 5 rounds from the kneeling position. Firers should remain in the kneeling position at the end of the Phase. Post phase 3a order “Make safe, Sig Sauer and GSP ready, Sig Sauer de-cock return pistols, GSP return pistols, phase 3b watch out”.
Phase 3b. Range/Positioning
20m Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 21 1 x 1 second exposure followed by 5 x 3 second exposures. When the target appears the firer is to move to the 20m firing point, draw pistol and adopt the standing alert position. On the next and subsequent exposure the firer is to engage the target with 2 rounds from the standing position. Firers are to return to the standing alert position after each exposure. Firers should remain in the standing position at the end of the Phase. Post phase 3b order “ Make Safe, ready, return pistols, phase 4a watch out”
Phase 4a. Range/Positioning
15m Standing and Kneeling
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-14
Fig 22. 1 x 1 second exposure followed by 2 x 4 second exposures. When the target appears the firer is to move to the 15m firing point, draw pistol (make ready browning) and adopt the standing alert position. On the appearance of the target the firer is to engage with 5 rounds from the standing position. The firer should then immediately adopt the kneeling position and engage the next exposure with a further 5 rounds. Firers should remain in the kneeling position at the end of the Phase. Post phase 4a order “ Make Safe, ready, return pistols, phase 4b watch out”..
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Phase 4b. Range/Positioning
10m Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 22. 1 x 1 second exposure followed by 5 x 3 second exposures. When the target appears the firer is to move to the 10m firing point, draw pistol and adopt the standing alert position On the next 5 x exposures the firer is to engage the target with 2 rounds from the standing position. The firer is to return to the standing alert position between exposures. Post phase 4b order “Secondary weapon systems unload, for inspection draw pistols, show clear (once clear) ease springs return pistols. Primary weapon systems unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease springs, and await scoring instructions”.
14-15
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The Urban Contact Assessment Time Chart Practice
Range
1a
100m
Fig 11
1b
75m
Fig 11
2a
50m
Fig 14 Window (upper)
2b
25m
Fig 14 Window (lower)
3a
25m
Fig 21
3b
20m
Fig 21
4a
15m
Fig 22
4b
10m
Fig 22
14-16
Target Frame
Timings Up
Down
05 18 27 35 47 05 25 42 05 25 45 1.02 1.33 1.45 05 20 30 44 57 1.09 05 18 05 20 30 44 57 1.09 05 20 34 05 22 32 46 57 1.07
14 22 31 39 51 06 32 49 06 31 51 108 1.39 1.51 06 24 34 48 1.01 1.13 11 24 06 24 34 48 1.01 1.13 06 25 39 06 26 36 50 1.01 1.11
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Advance To Contact Assessment 1440. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a continuous five phase shoot designed to replicate situations likely to be encountered on operations. 1441. Ranges. The assessment can be fired on a Gallery range. 1442. Time Chart. A time chart to assist range staff is included after the practice details. 1443. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 25 minutes to complete. This includes the 500m approach march. 1444. Organisation. The assessment is an individual advance to contact shoot preceded by a 500m run to simulate the rapid deployment of a QRF. Firers have 3 minutes to complete the run, plus a maximum of 1 minute to assemble at the line of departure (500m firing point). The additional 1 minute is to be adjusted according to the distance of the 500m point from the finish line. a. Anyone not completing the run within 3 minutes will be deemed to have failed the test. b.
The test is a continuous fire and movement shoot fired in five phases.
1445. Rules. a. Firers must have zeroed their weapons and passed the ACMT for their weapon system before the assessment is fired. b. Only one shot is to be fired at each ‘Fall when Hit’ exposure in Phases 1, 2 and 3. Any unfired rounds may not be fired during subsequent phases. 1446. Ammunition. 40 rounds per firer, in one magazine of 20 rounds and two magazines of 10 rounds. 1447. Targetry. Each lane will require: 2 x Fig 12. 1448. Scoring. Four point per hit. 1449. Standards. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS for each phase (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS require- ment will constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the assessment conditions the entire shoot should be fired again.
14-17
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
OMS Requirement
Highest Possible Score (HPS)
Ser
Practice
Total Rounds
% Hits
Score
1
Phase 1
500m
3 mins
3 mins
0
2
Phase 2
10
60%
24
40
3
Phase 3
10
60%
24
40
4
Phase 4
10
60%
24
40
5
Phase 5
10
60%
24
40
120
200
Pass
1450. Explanatory Notes. a. Once loaded the RCO is to ensure safety catches are applied before any movement between firing positions. b. It is the firers’ responsibility to ensure they have sufficient rounds for each practice. Assessment Details Phase 1. QRF Deployment Range/Positioning
500m Run
Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
Firers are to have all equipment for the assessment including ammo. On the command “Go” firers have 3 minutes to run 500m, plus up to 1 minute to arrive at the 500m firing point and adopt the prone position. At the 500m firing point. Order “Load, phase 2 watch out”.
Phase 2. Range/Positioning
400m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-18
Fig 12. 1 x 40 second Exposure followed by 9 x 3 second Exposures. On the appearance of the target firers have 40 seconds to advance to the 400m firing point, adopt the prone position, make ready and fire 1 round at each exposure. Targets Fall When Hit. Post practice order. “Phase 3 watch out”.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Phase 3. Range/Positioning
300m Fire Trench
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12. 1 x 40 second Exposure followed 2 seconds later by 1 1 x 4 second exposure. This is followed by four double exposures of the left and right Fig 12 in that order. Each exposure is for 4 seconds with 2 seconds between each exposure. On the appearance of the target firers have 40 seconds to advance to the 300m firing point dress in to the fire trench and open fire. There will be a further 9 x 4 second exposures. Firers are to fire one round at each exposure. Targets Fall When Hit. Post practice order. “Phase 4, watch out”.
Phase 4. Range/Positioning
200m Standing, Kneeling or Squatting
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12. 1 x 1 second exposure followed 30 seconds later by 10 x 4 second exposures. The appearance of the target for 1 second is the signal for firers to advance to the 200m firing point and adopt the standing alert position. There will be 10 x 4 second exposures. At each exposure firers are to adopt the standing/kneeling/ squatting position and engage the target, returning to the standing alert position between exposures. Targets Fall When Hit. Post practice order. “Phase 5, watch out”.
Phase 5. Range/Positioning
100m Standing Unsupported.
Ammunition
10 Rounds Fig 12
Target/ Exposure
1 x 1 second exposure followed 30 seconds later by 5 x 5 second exposures.
14-19
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Instructions
The appearance of the target for 1 second is the signal for firers to advance to the 100m firing point and adopt the kneeling or squatting position. There will be 5 x 5 second exposures, at each exposure firers are to adopt the standing position and fire 2 rounds, returning to the kneeling/ squatting position between exposures. Targets up and hold. Post phase order. “Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease springs, pick up brass, return to the 500m firing point and await scores”.
Advance to Contact Assessment Time Chart Practice
Range
1
500m Run
2
400m
Target Frame
Down
05 47 1.00 1.08 2.00 2.15 2.40 3.50 4.30 4.57
46 51 1.04 1.12 2.04 2.19 2.44 3.54 4.34 5.01
Run Move to firing point (re-set watch) Fig 12 Tgt 1 (R) Tgt 2 (L) Tgt 1 Tgt 2 Tgt 2 Tgt 1 Tgt 2 Tgt 1 Tgt 1 Tgt 2 Fall When Hit
14-20
Timings Up
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice
Range
3
300m
Target Frame
200m
100m
04 47 54 1.01 1.08 1.15 1.22 1.29 1.36 1.43
45 52 59 1.06 1.13 1.20 1.27 1.34 1.41 1.48
25 55 1.09 1.20 1.40 2.04 2.22 2.36 2.59 3.18 3.40
26 1.00 1.14 1.25 1.45 2.09 2.27 2.41 3.04 3.23 3.45
05 40 51 1.16 1.30 1.50
07 46 57 1.22 1.36 1.56
Fall When Hit Fig 12 Tgt 2 Tgt 1 Tgt 2 Tgt 2 Tgt 1 Tgt 1 Tgt 2 Tgt 1 Tgt 2 Tgt 2 Tgt 1
5
Down
Fig 12 Tgt 1 Tgt 2 Tgt 1 Tgt 2 Tgt 1 Tgt 2 Tgt 1 Tgt 2 Tgt 1 Tgt 2
4
Timings Up
Fall When Hit Fig 12 Tgt 1 Tgt 1 Tgt 1 Tgt 1 Tgt 1 Up and Hold
14-21
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The Advanced Fleeting Encounter Assessment 1451. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a three phase shoot designed to assess the soldier in the engagement of moving targets from alternate pieces of cover in situations likely to be encountered on operations. 1452. Ranges. The assessment can be fired on an MMTTR. 1453. Time Chart. A time chart to assist range staff is included after the practice details. 1454. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 15 minutes to complete. 1455. Organisation. The assessment is an individual moving target shoot fired from different pieces of cover at varying ranges. It is fired in three phases. 1456. Rules. Firers must have zeroed their weapons and passed the ACMT for their weapon system before the assessment is fired. a.
A maximum of two rounds may be fired at each exposure.
b.
Bayonets will be fitted during phases 2 and 3.
1457. Ammunition. 40 rounds per firer, in one magazine of 24 rounds and one magazines of 16 rounds. 1458. Targetry and Scoring. There is no SARTS scoring solution for fig 20s on this shoot. A single Fig 11 target is to be used scoring 5 within the 160mm circle, 4 within the 300mm circle and 3 anywhere else on the target.A SARTS solution maybe available in the future. 1459. Standards. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement will constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the assessment conditions the entire shoot should be fired again. Ser
Practice
Total Rounds
% Hits
Score
Highest Possible Score (HPS)
1
Phase 1
24
60%
72
120
2
Phase 2
8
60%
24
40
3
Phase 3
8
60%
24
40
60%
120
200
Total
OMS Requirement
1460. Explanatory Notes. a. Once loaded the RCO is to ensure safety catches are applied before any movement between firing positions. b. The Range Staff are to inspect all bayonets prior to firing to ensure the blade is not bent. 14-22
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
c. It is the firers’ responsibility to ensure they have sufficient rounds for each phase. d.
Minimal words of command will be issued.
e.
Scores will be given at the end of Phase 3.
Assessment Details Phase 1. Range/Positioning
100m. As per the range furniture.
Ammunition
24 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 11 6 double exposures (50% slow / 50% fast in random order). An initial exposure of the target will initiate the contact. Targets are only exposed once firers are in position and the RCO has signalled to the target operator for the next double exposure.. 3m to the rear of the left piece of cover. Order “Load, ready”. On the appearance of the target the firer is to double forward and take cover. The firer will then receive 2 exposures of the Fig 20 and is to fire 2 rounds at the leading target for each exposure. After each second exposure the firer is to apply the safety catch and move to the next piece of cover. On completion of the last exposure the firer is to apply the safety catch and await further orders. Post practice order “Move to the left side of the wall, fix bayonets, phase 2, advance”.
Phase 2. Range/Positioning
90m 80m 70m 60m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 11 4 exposures (two fast and two slow) in random order. Targets should be exposed during the advance on signal from the RCO. There will be 4 exposures of the target during the advance. Firers are to fire 2 rounds at the leading target during each exposure from the standing position. Firers will be ordered to “advance” after each exposure. Post practice order “Move to the 50m firing point, phase 3 watch and shoot”.
14-23
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The Advanced Fleeting Encounter Assessment Time Chart Phase
Range
1
100m
Target Frame Fig 11 First target. (non firing)
Run When in place
Fast Slow Slow Fast Slow Fast Fast Slow Fast Slow Slow Fast
ON COMMAND FROM RCO. Once firers are in position. Slow Speed 2 Fast Speed 3
2
3
90m 80m 70m 60m
50m
Fig 11 ON COMMAND FROM RCO, Slow Speed 2 Fast Speed 3 Fig 11 Slow Speed 2 Fast Speed 3
14-24
Fast
When in place
When in place
Fast Slow Slow Fast
Slow Fast Fast Slow
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The Attack and Re-Organisation Assessment 1461. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a continuous three phase shoot designed to replicate attack and re-organisation situations likely to be encountered on operations. 1462. Ranges. The assessment can be fired on an ETR. 1463. Time Chart. A time chart to assist range staff is included after the practice details. 1464. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 20 minutes to complete. 1465. Organisation. The assessment is an individual attack and re-organisation shoot preceded by a 100 metre run to simulate the physical conditions encountered during the final phase of an attack. Firers have 25 seconds to arrive on the objective. The assessment is a continuous shoot conducted in three phases. 1466. Rules a. Firers must have zeroed their weapons and passed the ACMT for their weapon system before the assessment is fired. b. Any number of shots (a minimum of one) may be fired at each exposure during Phase 1. Only one shot is to be fired at each ‘Fall when Hit’ exposure in Phases 2 and 3. Any unfired rounds may not be fired during subsequent phases. 1467. Ammunition. 50 rounds per firer in one magazine of 20 rounds and three magazines of 10 rounds. 1468. Targetry. Each lane will require: 1 x Fig 14 at 100 metres 1 x Fig 12 at 200 metres 1 x Fig 12 at 300 metres 1469. Scoring. Four points per hit. 1470. Standards. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS for each phase (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement will constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the assessment conditions the entire shoot should be fired again.
14-25
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Ser
Practice
Total Rounds
OMS Requirement % Hits
Score
Highest Possible Score (HPS)
1
Phase 1
30
60%
72
120
2
Phase 2
10
60%
24
40
3
Phase 3
10
60%
24
40
120
200
Total
1471. Explanatory Notes. a. Once loaded the RCO is to ensure safety catches are applied before any movement between firing positions. b. It is the firers responsibility to ensure they have sufficient rounds for each phase. c.
Scores will be given at the end of Phase 3.
Assessment Details Phase 1a. Range/Positioning
100m 200m 300m Prone.
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
100m Fig 14. 200m Fig 12. 300m Fig 12.
Instructions
1 x 25 second exposure at 100m, followed by 1 x 10 second exposure at 200m and 1 x 25 second exposure at 300m. 100m to the rear of the firing point. Order “Load, phase 1a watch out”. When targets appear firers are to run to the firing point, adopt the prone position, make ready and engage the 100m target. Any number of rounds, up to a maximum of 20 may be fired at each exposure during this phase. Targets Up and hold. Post phase order. “ Phase 1b watch out”.
14-26
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Phase 1b. Range/Positioning
300m 200m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
200m Fig 12. 300m Fig 12. 10 x 3 second exposures at 300m or 200m in random order over a period of 7 minutes. 15 seconds after the last exposure of Phase 1a the first exposure from Phase 1b will appear. When the targets appear the firer is to engage with one round per exposure. Targets Fall when Hit. Post phase order. “Stand up, dress back 3m phase 2 watch out”.
Phase 2. Range/Positioning
300m 200m 100m Kneeling Supported.
Ammunition
10 Rounds 100m Fig 14. 200m Fig 12. 300m Fig 12.
Target/ Exposure
1 x 6 second exposure at 300m followed by three series of exposures at 300m, 200m and 100m in that order. Each exposure is for 2 seconds with 5 seconds between each exposure.
Instructions
There will be irregular intervals between each series of exposures. When the target appears the firer is to move on to the firing point and adopt the kneeling supported position and engage each exposure with one round. The firer is to remain in this position until the end of the phase. Targets Fall when Hit. Post phase order “Adopt the sitting position, phase 3 watch out”.
14-27
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Phase 3. Range/Positioning
300m 200m Sitting
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-28
300m Fig 12. 200m Fig 12. 5 double exposures of the 300m and then the 200m target. The 300m target will be up for 3 seconds followed 2 seconds later by a 3 second exposure of the 200m target. Firers are to fire one round at each exposure. Targets Fall when Hit. Post phase order “Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease springs, pick up brass, await scores”.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The Attack and Reorganisation Assessment Time Chart Phase
Range
1a
100 200 300 300 200 200 300 200 300 300 200 200 300 300 300 200 100 300 200 100 300 200 100 300 200 300 200 300 200 300 200 300 200
1b
2
3
Target Frame Fig 14 Fig 12 Up and Hold Fig 12 Fall when Hit
Fig 14 and Fig 12 Fall when Hit
Fig 12 Fall when Hit
Timings Up
Down
05 33 46 1.27 2.37 2.45 3.43 4.31 5.39 5.47 6.40 7.28 8.41 05 26 34 42 1.05 1.13 1.21 1.39 1.47 1.55 05 11 20 26 45 51 1.15 1.21 1.35 1.41
31 44 1.12 1.31 2.41 2.49 3.47 4.35 5.43 5.51 6.44 7.32 8.45 12 29 37 45 1.08 1.16 1.24 1.42 1.50 1.58 09 15 24 30 49 55 1.19 1.25 1.39 1.45
14-29
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The Fleeting Encounter Assessment 1472. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is designed to assess the soldier in the engagement of moving targets in situations likely to be encountered on operations. 1473. Ranges. The assessment can be fired on an MMTTR. 1474. Time Chart. A time chart to assist range staff is included after the practice details. 1475. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 15 minutes to complete. 1476. Organisation. The assessment is an individual moving target shoot preceded by four sighting shots. The assessment can be conducted with the rifle only. 1477. Rules. a. Firers must have zeroed their weapons and passed the ACMT for their weapon system before the assessment is fired. b. Once made ready, all movement must be conducted with safety catches applied. c.
A maximum of one round may be fired at each exposure.
1478. Ammunition. 14 rounds in one magazine of 4 rounds and one magazine of 10 rounds. 1479. Targetry. Each lane will require: There is no SARTS scoring solution for fig 20s on this shoot. A single Fig 11 target is to be used scoring 5 within the 160mm circle, 4 within the 300mm circle and 3 anywhere else on the target.A SARTS scoring solution maybe available in the future. 1480. Scoring. 5, 4, 3 points per hit. 1481. Standards. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement will constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the shoot conditions the entire assessment should be fired again.
14-30
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Ser
Practice
Total Rounds
OMS Requirement % Hits
Score
Highest Possible Score (HPS)
1
Sighting
4
0
0
Non Scoring
2
Practice 1
10
60%
30
50
1482. Explanatory Notes. a. It is the firers responsibility to ensure they have sufficient rounds for each phase. b.
Scores will be given at the end of the shoot.
Assessment Details Practice - Sighting shots Range/Positioning
100m Standing
Ammunition
4 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 11 There will be 4 x runs for sighting shots. 2 x slow and 2 x fast Order “Load, ready, adopt the standing alert position, watch and shoot”. When targets appear firers are to open fire with one round per exposure. After 4 runs order “Apply safety catches” Show results on SARTS. Once complete order “Adopt the standing alert position, Watch and shoot”
Practice 1. Range/Positioning
100m Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 11 There will be 10 x runs, 5 x fast and 5 x slow in random order. When the target appears firers are to open fire with one round per exposure. After the last run order “unload for inspection port arms (once clear) ease springs, pick up the brass await scores Give scores
14-31
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The Fleeting Encounter Assessment Time Chart Practice
Range
1
100
Target Frame Fig 11 L to R or R to L
2
100
Slow Speed 2 Fast Speed 3 Fig 11 L to R or R to L Slow Speed 2 Fast Speed 3
14-32
Timings Up Over 1 minute
Over 2-3 mi nutes
Down
Slow Slow Fast Fast
Slow Fast Fast Slow Fast Slow Slow Fast Fast Slow
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The Long Range Rural Contact Assessment 1483. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a four practice shoot designed to replicate long range engagements likely to be encountered on operations. 1484. Ranges. The assessment must be fired on a gallery range. 1485. Time Chart. A time chart to assist range staff is included after the practice details. 1486. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to complete. 1487. Organisation. The shoot can be fired by each detail completing all practices before firing details change or by all details completing each practice before commencing further practices. 1488. Rules. Firers must have zeroed their weapons and passed the ACMT for their weapon system before the assessment is fired. Once made ready, all movement must be conducted with safety catches applied. 1489. Ammunition. 40 rounds per firer, in four magazines of 10 rounds. 1490. Targetry. Each lane will require: 1 x Triple Fig 11. 1 x Fig 11. 1 x Fig 12. SARTS Fig 11 left, Fig 12 right. 1491. Scoring. Triple Fig 11(SARTS suppression fig 11) 5, 4, 2 points per hit. Fig 11. 5 and 4 points per hit. Fig 12. 5 and 4 points per hit. 1492. Standards. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at each firing distance (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement will constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the assessment individual practices may be fired again. Ser
Practice
Total Rounds
% Hits
Score
Highest Possible Score (HPS)
1
Practice 1
10
60%
30
50
2
Practice 2
10
60%
30
50
3
Practice 3
10
60%
30
50
4
Practice 4
10
60%
30
50
120
200
Pass
OMS Requirement
14-33
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
1493. Explanatory Notes. a. Once loaded the RCO is to ensure safety catches are applied before any movement between firing positions. b.
Scores will be given at the end of each practice.
Assessment Details Practice 1. Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
500m Prone 10 Rounds Triple Fig 11 or SARTS suppression Fig 11. 1 x 60 second exposure. Order “Load, ready, adopt the standing alert position, practice 1 watch out”. On the appearance of the targets firers are to adopt the prone position open fire with 10 rounds. Targets Up and Hold. Post practice order. “Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease springs, pick up brass and await scores”.
Practice 2. Range/Positioning
500 – 300m Run down 500m Prone 400m Sitting, kneeling or squatting 300m prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds Triple Fig 11 or SARTS suppression fig 11 at 500m and 400m. Fig 12 at 300m. 1 x exposure of 15 seconds at 500m.
Target/ Exposure
10 seconds later 1 x 1 second exposure, an interval of 30 seconds (run down). Then 2 x exposures of 6 seconds. Followed by 10 seconds later 1 x 1 second exposure, an interval of 30 seconds (run down). Then 2 x exposures of 6 seconds.
14-34
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Instructions
Order “Load, ready, adopt the standing alert position, practice 2 watch out” When targets appear firers are to adopt the prone position and fire 2 rounds. The next exposure of 1 second is the signal to run to the 400m firing point, adopt the sitting, kneeling or squatting position and engage the next two exposures with 2 rounds per exposure. The next exposure of 1 second is the signal to run to the 300m firing point, adopt the prone position and engage the next two exposures with 2 rounds per exposure. Targets Up and Hold. Post practice order. “Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease springs, pick up brass, and await scores”.
Practice 3. Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1x 15 second exposure of Fig 11 followed 8 seconds later by a further 15 second exposure of a Fig 12. Order “Load, ready, adopt the standing alert position, practice 3 watch out” On appearance of the target firers are to adopt the prone position. Fire 5 rounds at each exposure. Targets Up and Hold. Post practice order. “Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease springs, pick up brass, move back to 400m and await scores”.
Practice 4. Range/Positioning
400m Sitting, Kneeling or Squatting
Ammunition
10 Rounds Triple Fig 11 or SARTS virtual triple Fig 11.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1 x 15 second exposure followed by 4 x 5 second exposures, with irregular intervals between exposures. Order “Load, ready, adopt the standing alert position, practice 4 watch out” On the appearance of the target firers are to adopt the sitting, kneeling or squatting position (remaining in position) and fire two rounds at each exposure. Targets Up and Hold. Post practice order. “Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease springs, pick up brass, and await scores”.
14-35
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The Long Range Rural Contact Assessment Time Chart Practice
Range
Target Frame
1
500m
2
500m and 400m 300m
Triple Fig 11(SARTS suppression Fig 11) Up and Hold Triple Fig 11(SARTS suppression Fig 11) Up and Hold
14-36
3
300m
4
400m
Fig 12 Up and Hold 1 x Fig 11 1x Fig 12 Up and Hold Triple Fig 11(SARTS suppression Fig 11) Up and Hold
Up 05
Timings Down 1.06
05 31 1.02 1.13 1.30
21 32 1.09 1.20 1.31
2.02 2.13 05 29
2.09 2.20 21 45
05 28 45 55 1.06
21 34 51 1.01 1.12
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The Short Range Rural Contact Assessment 1494. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a five practice shoot designed to replicate short range engagements likely to be encountered on operations. 1495. Ranges. The assessment must be fired on a gallery range. 1496. Time Chart. A time chart to assist range staff is included after the practice details. 1497. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to complete. 1498. Organisation. The shoot can be fired by each detail completing all practices before firing details change or by all details completing each practice before commencing further practices. 1499. Rules. Firers must have zeroed their weapons and passed the ACMT for their weapon system before the assessment is fired. 14100. Ammunition. 50 rounds per firer. 14101. Targetry. Each lane will require: 1 x Figure 12. 1 x Fig 12c. SARTS Fig 12 Right, Fig 12c Left. 14102. Scoring. 5 and 4 points per hit. 14103. Standards. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at each firing distance (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement will constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the assessment individual practices may be fired again. Ser
Practice
Total Rounds
% Hits
Score
Highest Possible Score (HPS)
1
Practice 1
10
60%
30
50
2
Practice 2
10
60%
30
50
3
Practice 3
10
60%
30
50
4
Practice 4
10
60%
30
50
5
Practice 5
10
60%
Pass
OMS Requirement
30
50
150
250
14-37
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
14104. Explanatory Notes. a. Once loaded the RCO is to ensure safety catches are applied before any movement between firing positions. b.
Scores will be given at the end of each practice.
Assessment Details Practice 1. Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12 1 x 60 second exposure 3 metres behind the firing point Order “Load, ready, adopt the standing alert position, practice 1 watch out”. On the appearance of the target firers are to move onto the firing point, adopt the prone position and engage with 10 rounds. Targets Up and Hold. Order. Post practice order. “Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease springs, pick up brass and await scores”.
Practice 2. Range/Positioning
300 – 100m run down, 300m Prone, 200m Sitting, kneeling or squatting. 100m Standing.
Ammunition
10 Rounds Fig 12 1 x exposure of 15 seconds at 300m.
Target/ Exposure
10 seconds later 1 x 1 second exposure, an interval of 30 seconds (run down). Then 2 x exposures of 6 seconds with a 10 second interval. Followed by. 10 seconds later 1 x 1 second exposure, an interval of 30 seconds (run down). Then 2 x exposures of 6 seconds with a 10 second interval.
14-38
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Instructions
Order “Load, ready, adopt the standing alert position, practice 2 watch out”. On the appearance of the target firers are to adopt the prone position and engage the 15 second exposure with 2 rounds. The next exposure of 1 second is the signal to run to the 200m firing point and adopt the sitting, kneeling or squatting position and engage the next two exposures with 2 rounds per exposure. The next exposure of 1 second is the signal to run to the 100m firing point, adopt the standing alert position and engage the next two exposures with 2 rounds per exposure. Targets Up and Hold. Post practice order. “Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease springs, pick up brass and await scores”.
Practice 3. Range/Positioning
100m Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12c 5 x double exposures of 3 seconds with 2 seconds between each exposure. There will be irregular intervals between double exposures. Order “Load, ready, adopt the standing alert position, practice 3 watch and shoot”. On the appearance of the target firers are to engage the first exposure from the standing position then immediately adopt the kneeling or squatting position and engage the second exposure. Firers are to return to the standing alert position after each double exposure. Targets Up and Hold. Post practice order. “Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease springs, pick up brass, move back to 200m and await scores”.
14-39
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 4. Range/Positioning
200m Sitting, kneeling or squatting.
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12. 2 x 15 second exposures with an interval of 8 seconds. Order “Load, ready, adopt the standing alert position, practice 4 watch out”. On the appearance of the target firers are to adopt the sitting, kneeling or squatting position and engage each exposure with 5 rounds. Targets Up and Hold. Post practice order. “Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease springs, pick up brass, move back to 300m and await scores”.
Practice 5. Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-40
Fig 12. 10 x 3 second exposures with irregular intervals. Order “Load, ready, adopt the prone position, practice 5 watch and shoot”. Firers are to engage each exposure with one round. Targets Up and Hold. Post practice order. “Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease springs, pick up brass, and await scores”.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The Short Range Rural Contact Assessment Time Chart Practice
Range
1
300m
2
300m 100m
3
100m
4
200m
5
300m
Target Frame Figure 12 Up and Hold Figure 12 Up and Hold
Figure 12c Up and Hold
Figure 12 Up and Hold
Timings Up
Down
05
1.06
05 31 1.03 1.21 1.39 2.11 2.29 05 11 23 29 1.00 1.06 1.15 1.21 1.52 1.58 05 29 05 40 1.10 1.40 2.30 3.05 3.30 4.10 4.45 4. 56
21 32 1.10 1.28 1.40 2.18 2.36 09 15 27 33 1.04 1.10 1.19 1.25 1.56 2.02 21 45 09 44 1.14 1.44 2.34 3.09 3.34 4.14 4.49 5. 00
14-41
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The Pistol CQM Assessment 14105. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a four phase shoot designed to replicate situations likely to be encountered in CQM conditions on operations. 14106. Ranges. The assessment can be fired on a 25 metre range. 14107. Time Chart. A time chart to assist range staff is included after the practice details. 14108. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 20 minutes to complete. 14109. Organisation. The match is an individual CQM assessment. a.
The assessment can be conducted with the L131A1 GSP.
14110. Rules. a. Firers must have zeroed their weapon and passed the ACMT for their weapon system before the assessment is fired. b. Only the number of shots permitted can be fired at each exposure. Rounds can not be carried forward into the next practice. 14111. Ammunition. 40 rounds of 9mm Ball in four magazines of 10 rounds. 14112. Targetry. Each lane will require: 2 x Fig 21 CQM targets at 25m and 20m 1 x Fig 28 or 27 CQM target at 15m 1 x Fig 22 CQM target at 10m 14113. Scoring. Practice 1 & 2 scoring 5, 4 or 3 points per hit. Practice 3 scoring 5 points for each correct shape or circle hit. A maximum of 2 shots on each shape or circle will score. Practice 4 scoring 5, 4 or 3 points in the head or 3, 2 or 1 point in the body. 14114. Standards. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at each phase (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement will constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the assessment conditions the entire shoot should be fired again.
14-42
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Ser
Phase
Total Rounds
OMS Requirement % Hits
Score
Highest Possible Score (HPS)
1
Phase 1
10
60%
30
50
2
Phase 2
10
60%
30
50
3
Phase 3
10
60%
30
50
4
Phase 4
10
60%
30
50
120
200
Pass
14115. Explanatory Notes. a. The RCO is to issue all words of command, all movement is to be with pistols holstered. b.
Scores will be taken at the end of phase 4.
Assessment Details Phase 1. Accelerated Fire Range/Positioning
25m Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Fig 21. Target No 1.
Instructions
2 x 6 second exposures with a 4 second interval. Order “Load, ready, adopt the standing alert position, target number 1, watch and shoot”. During each exposure firers are to fire five shots to the body. Targets Up and Hold. Post practice order. “Make safe, ready, return pistols, advance to 20m”.
Phase 2. Accelerated Fire Range/Positioning
20m Standing.
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Fig 21. Target No 2.
Instructions
5 x 3 second exposures with irregular intervals. Order “Draw pistols, adopt the standing alert position, target number 2, watch and shoot”. During each exposure firers are to fire two shots to the body. Targets Up and Hold. Post practice order. “Make safe, ready, return pistols, advance to 15m”
14-43
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Phase 3. Shot accountability Range/Positioning
15m Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Fig 28 or 27. Target No 3.
Instructions
5 x 2 second exposures. Order “Draw pistols, adopt the standing alert position, target number 3, watch and shoot”. Targets exposed on orders from RCO. “Blue circle, number 5, 1 A (black dots) etc” During each exposure firers are to fire two shots at each shape, number or circle as indicated by The RCO. Targets Up and Hold. Post practice order. “Make safe, ready, return pistols, advance to 10m”.
Phase 4. CQM Range/Positioning
10m Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Fig 22. Target No 4.
Instructions
5 x 2 second exposures with irregular intervals. Order “Draw pistols, adopt the standing alert position, target number 4, watch and shoot”. During each exposure firers are to fire two shots to the body or the head. Targets Up and Hold. Post practice order. “Unload, for inspection draw pistols, show clear, (once clear) ease springs, return pistols”. Record scores.
14-44
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The Pistol CQM Assessment Time Chart Practice
Range
1
25m
2
20m
3
15m
4
10m
Target Frame Target No 1 Fig 21 Target No 2 Fig 21
Target No 3 Fig 28/27 Target No 4 Fig 21
Timings Up
Down
05 12 16 23 05 09 15 19 31 35 46 50 55 59 On command From RCO 08 11 22 25 31 34 35 38 46 49
14-45
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The Fire Team Falling Plates Assessment 14116. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is designed to replicate engagements after short periods of burst activity that are likely to be encountered on operations. 14117. Ranges. The assessment can be fired on various types of ranges where the use of falling plates is permitted. 14118. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 5 minutes to fire. 14119. Rules. Firers must have zeroed their weapons and passed the ACMT for their weapon system before the assessment is fired. 14120. Ammunition. 40 rounds per fire team. 14121. Targetry. 10 x 300mm square white targets per team. The targets must fall when hit and be placed in a straight line approximately 300mm apart. 14122. Scoring. The fire team to knock down all the targets in the quickest time will be declared the winner. If fire teams run out of ammunition before all the targets are down the one with most targets down will be declared the winner. If the times for getting all targets down are exactly the same the winners will be based upon the fire team who return the most unfired rounds. 14123. Standards. To achieve the required Operational Marksmanship Standard the fire team must knock down all the targets with their 40 rounds within 2 minutes. 14124. Explanatory Notes. The assessment is fired on a knockout principle, all byes being in the first round. Fire Teams will compete against each other in all rounds. Teams will draw for lanes.
14-46
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Assessment Details Practice 1. Range/Positioning
200m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds per Firer
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10 x 300m white plates. 2 Minutes 300m firing point. Order “Load, adopt the prone position, stand by go”. On the word of command “go” the fire teams are to run to the 200m firing point adopt the prone position, make ready and engage targets until they are all down, they have run out of ammunition or the opposing fire team has knocked down all targets. Post practice order. “Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear, (once clear) ease springs”. Range staff will declare the winners. “Pick up brass and return to the 300m firing point or marshalling area”
14-47
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The Fire Team Combat Snap Shooting Assessment 14125. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a two practice shoot designed to replicate engagements likely to be encountered on operations. 14126. Ranges. The assessment must be fired on a gallery range. 14127. Time Chart. A time chart to assist range staff is included after the practice details. 14128. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 20 minutes to fire both phases. 14129. Rules. Firers must have zeroed their weapons and passed the ACMT for their weapon system before the assessment is fired. Once made ready, all movement must be conducted with safety catches applied. 14130. Ammunition. 20 rounds per firer. 14131. Targetry. Direct liaison with Range Control must take place to establish firing lanes and targets to be used. SARTS maybe used for phase 1 but a hand held fig 11/12 is recommended for phase 2. If FETs are used the butts cannot be manned at the same time (Pam 21, page 4-33, para 04173c). Phase 1, 15 x Fig 12. Phase 2, 1 x Fig 12 and 1 x Fig 11 per team. SARTS 2 x Fig 12s in each lane. 14132. Scoring. Phase 1. Butt cleared in 25 seconds or less 500 points. Deduct 10 points for each multiple of 5 seconds over 25 before butt was cleared. Maximum time allowed is 75 seconds. Example butt cleared in 52 seconds, 27 seconds more than 25 seconds. 27 divided by full or part of multiples of 5 = 6. 6 x 10 points deducted =60. 500 – 60 = a score of 440. Add 5 points for each round handed back after phase 1. Example 13 rounds returned = 65. Add Score from timed assessment (450) to score from rounds handed back (65) = score of 515 for phase 1. The Clock can not be stopped until all members of the fire team are on the firing point in the prone position.
14-48
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
a.
If butts are not cleared no points are awarded for returned ammunition.
Time for All Targets Hit
Points
25 seconds or less
500
26 – 30 seconds
490
31 - 35 seconds
480
36 – 40 seconds
470
41 – 45 seconds
460
46 – 50 seconds
450
51 – 55 seconds
440
56 – 60 seconds
430
61 – 65 seconds
420
66 – 70 seconds
410
71 – 75 seconds
400
No of Rounds Returned
No of Rounds x5
Team Score (b) + (d)
b. Column (a) is the scoring guide start point. Once the time for all targets hit has been identified, move across the respective row until a final score has been identified and column (e) has been completed. c.
Phase 2. 5 or 4 points per hit.
14133. Standards. To achieve the required standard the team must achieve the OMS at each firing distance (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement will constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the assessment individual phases may be fired again. Ser
Practice
1
1 300m 2 200m
2 Pass
Total Rounds
OMS Requirement % Hits
Score
10
60%
405
Highest Possible Score (HPS) 675
10
60%
120
200
525
875
14134. Explanatory Notes. a. Once loaded the RCO is to ensure safety catches are applied before any movement between firing positions.
14-49
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
b. Phase 1. Three obstacles are to be used, placed at 23 metres (25 yards) intervals between the 400m and 300m firing points. The fire team go under the first which is a pole approx 600mm high, then over the second, a pole of approx 1000mm high and over the third, a wall of approx 1500mm high. The obstacles need to be securely pegged down. c. All targets are exposed one metre apart or as presented by SARTS (2 in each consecutive lane). d.
Phase 2. All firers are to engage the same target.
e.
Scores will be given at the end of each phase.
Assessment Details Practice 1. Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
10 rounds per firer
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12. A target appears every 5 seconds. Each target is with- drawn when hit. A fresh target can only be exposed if 1 or more targets remain exposed. Targets will appear from the left and be exposed in sequential order. 400m firing point. Order “Load, adopt the prone position, watch out”. When the first target appears the fire team is to run to the 300m firing point navigating obstacles as described in the notes. Adopt the prone position, make ready and engage exposed targets. Targets Fall when Hit. Post practice order. “Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear, (once clear) ease springs”. Range staff will collect and count unfired ammunition and calculate scores for phase 1. “Pick up brass and return to the 400m firing point or marshalling area” Or send immediately to phase 2.
14-50
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The Fire Team Combat Snap Shooting Assessment Time Chart Practice
Range
Target Frame
1
300m
15 x Fig 12 1 metre apart
2
200m
Fig 12 Fig 11 Fig 11 Fig 12 Fig 12 Fig 11 Fig 12 Fig 11 Fig 11 Fig 12
Timings Up
Down
0 05 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15
Fall When Hit
05 20 32 50 1.00 1.19 1.26 1.54 2.10 2.20
1.20 - All Tgt’s Down 10 24 36 55 1.05 1.23 1.31 1.58 2.14 2.25
14-51
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The Fire Team Close Combat Assessment 14135. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a continuous single practice shoot designed to replicate engagements likely to be encountered on operations. 14136. Ranges. The assessment must be fired on a 100 metre range with a swivel target mechanism with up to 4 targets per lane. 14137. Time Chart. A time chart to assist range staff is included after the practice details. 14138. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 15 minutes to complete. 14139. Organisation. The assessment is designed to be fired by fire teams that should be organised as follows: Nominated Fire Team Commander (Rifle) 2 x Riflemen 1 x LSW Firer. 14140. Rules. Firers must have zeroed their weapons and passed the ACMT for their weapon system before the assessment is fired. Once made ready, all movement must be conducted with safety catches applied. 14141. Ammunition. 40 rounds per firer. 14142. Targetry. 4 x Fig 11 per firer. 14143. Scoring. 5, 4, 3, 2 points. 14144. Standards. To achieve the required standard the team must achieve the OMS requirement. Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement will constitute failure of the assessment. Ser
Practice
1
1 (100 to 25m)
OMS Requirement
Total Rounds
% Hits
Score
160
60%
480
Highest Possible Score (HPS) 800
14145. Explanatory Notes. a. Once loaded the RCO is to ensure safety catches are applied before any movement between firing positions. b.
Magazines are to be loaded as follows: 1 x magazine containing 10 rounds 1 x magazine containing 30 rounds
14-52
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
c.
Firers are to change magazines on completion of exposure 1.
d. Commanders should conduct a non firing mission rehearsal on a suitable piece of ground before the assessment. Assessment Details Practice 1. Range/Positioning
100m to 25m
Ammunition
40 rounds per firer
Target/ Exposure
Fig 11
Instructions
3m behind the 100m firing point. Order “Load, ready, adopt the kneeling position, watch out”.
Practice 1 (Continued). Range/Positioning Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Standing Supported EXPOSURE 1 Left Fig 11 1 x 15 second exposure in lanes 1 and 2. 10 seconds after the command “Watch Out” there will be a 15 second exposure of the Fig 11 target in lanes 1 and 2. The firers are to move onto the 100m firing point and engage their own target with a maximum of 10 rounds.
Practice 1 (Continued). Range/Positioning Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Standing Supported EXPOSURE 2 Left Fig 11 1 x 15 second exposure in lanes 4 and 5. Immediately on completion of exposure 1 there will be a 15 second exposure of the Fig 11 target in lanes 4 and 5. The firers are to move onto the 100m firing point and engage their own target with a maximum of 10 rounds.
Practice 1 (Continued). Range/Positioning Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Kneeling Supported EXPOSURE 3 2nd Left Fig 11 1 x 20 second exposure for lanes 1 and 2. Immediately on completion of exposure 2 there will be a 20 second exposure of the Fig 11 target in lanes 1 and 2. The firers are to move onto the 75m firing point and engage their own target with a maximum of 10 rounds.
14-53
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 1 (Continued). Range/Positioning Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Kneeling Supported EXPOSURE 4 2nd Left Fig 11 1 x 20 second exposure for lanes 4 and 5. Immediately on completion of exposure 3 there will be a 20 second exposure of the Fig 11 target in lanes 4 and 5. The firers are to move onto the 75m firing point and engage their own target with a maximum of 10 rounds.
Practice 1 (Continued). Range/Positioning Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Kneeling or Squatting EXPOSURE 5 2nd Right Fig 11 1 x 20 second exposure for lanes 1 and 2. Immediately on completion of exposure 4 there will be a 20 second exposure of the Fig 11 target in lanes 1 and 2. The firers are to move onto the 50m firing point and engage their own target with a maximum of 10 rounds.
Practice 1 (Continued). Range/Positioning Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Kneeling or Squatting EXPOSURE 6 2nd Right Fig 11 1 x 20 second exposure for lanes 4 and 5. Immediately on completion of exposure 5 there will be a 20 second exposure of the Fig 11 target in lanes 4 and 5. The firers are to move onto the 50m firing point and engage their own target with a maximum of 10 rounds.
Practice 1 (Continued). Range/Positioning Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-54
Standing EXPOSURE 7 Right Fig 11 1 x 20 second exposure for lanes 1 and 2. Immediately on completion of exposure 6 there will be a 20 second exposure of the Fig 11 target in lanes 1 and 2. The firers are to move onto the 25m firing point and engage their own target with a maximum of 10 rounds.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Practice 1 (Continued). Range/Positioning Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Standing EXPOSURE 8 Right Fig 11 1 x 20 second exposure for lanes 4 and 5. Immediately on completion of exposure 7 there will be a 20 second exposure of the Fig 11 target in lanes 4 and 5. The firers are to move onto the 25m firing point and engage their own target with a maximum of 10 rounds. Post practice order. “Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear, (once clear) ease springs” Under control of the range staff move forward and take scores.
The Fire Team Close Combat Assessment Time Chart Practice
Range
Target Frame
1
100m
1 and 2 4 and 5 1 and 2 4 and 5 1 and 2 4 and 5 1 and 2 4 and 5
75m 50m 25m
Timings Up
Down
10 26 42 1.03 1.24 1.45 2.06 2.27
26 42 1.03 1.24 1.45 2.06 2.27 2.48
14-55
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The Fire Team Attack Assessment 14146. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a continuous six phase shoot designed to replicate situations likely to be encountered on operations. 14147. Ranges. The fire team attack assessment can be fired on a gallery range. 14148. Time Chart. A time chart to assist range staff is included after the practice details. 14149. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 25 minutes to complete. 14150. Organisation. The assessment is designed to allow 3 x fire teams to fire on a 12 lane range. The assessment can be fired with Rifles and a LSW as part of the fire team, split into two pairs. Fire teams should be organised as follows: a.
Sect Comd/2IC (Rifle).Lane 1, 2 or 3.
b.
2 x Riflemen.Lane 1, 2 or 3.
c.
1 x LSW Gunner. Lane 4.
14151. Rules. a. Firers must have zeroed their weapons and passed the ACMT for their weapon system before the assessment is fired. b. Once made ready, all movement must be conducted with safety catches applied. c. Any unfired rounds in any phase may not be fired during subsequent phases. 14152. Ammunition. 50 rounds per firer in one magazine of 20 rounds and three magazines of 10 rounds. 10 rounds will initially be issued for Phase 1 only. The remainder will be issued when the section arrive at the HLS during Phase 2. 14153. Scoring. a. All Phases Fig 11 and 12, 5 and 4 points per hit. Triple Fig or SARTS suppression Fig 11, 5, 4 or 2 points per hit. b. Phase 2. 100 points. Any member of the fire team failing to complete the CASEVAC and ammo re-supply in the allocated time will be deemed to have failed the assessment and the fire team will complete the shoot without those individuals that failed phase 2. Additionally the fire team will be deducted 25 points for each individual failure in phase 2. 14154. Standards. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS 14-56
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
for each phase (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement will constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the shoot conditions the entire assessment should be fired again. Ser
Phase
Total Rounds
% Hits
Score
Highest Possible Score (HPS)
1
Phase 1
40
60%
120
200
2
Phase 2
NA
NA
NA
NA
3
Phase 3
40
60%
120
200
4
Phase 4
40
60%
120
200
5
Phase 5
40
60%
120
200
6
Phase 6
40
60%
120
200
600
1000
OMS Requirement
Pass
14155. Explanatory Notes. a. Once loaded the RCO is to ensure safety catches are applied before any movement between firing positions. b. It is the firers’ responsibility to ensure they have sufficient rounds for each phase. c. 1 x simulated casualty is required at the 300m firing point, 1 per Fire Team and each weighing approx 75kg. d.
3 x weighted ammunition boxes are required at the 600m firing point.
e. Movement between firing points will be in bounds by pairs within the fire team under the overall control of the fire team commander. The initial 1 second exposure will be the signal for the first pair to move forward 35 metres and take cover (prone). Once the first pair are down the next pair will move forward 70 metres and take cover (prone). Once the second pair are down the first pair will move directly onto the next firing point followed by the second pair. Pairs may only move forward once the preceding pairs are in the prone position. f.
Scores will be given at the end of Phase 6.
14156. Range Rigging. a.
All Lanes
-
Triple Fig 11(frame)Fig 11, Fig 12
b.
All lanes.
-
(SARTS Fig 11 left Fig 12 right)
14-57
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Assessment Details Phase 1. Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
10 rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4 x Fig 12 1 exposure of 10 seconds followed by 5 x 3 second exposures with irregular intervals. Order “Load, ready, adopt the prone position, watch and shoot”. On the appearance of the first exposure firers are to fire 5 rounds. Firers are then to fire one round at each of the remaining five exposures. Targets Up and Hold Post last exposure order “Man down”
Phase 2. Casevac Range/Positioning
300m-600m
Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
As soon as the targets from phase 1 go down the Fire Team have 5 minutes to recover the casualty (out of contact) to the HLS (600m FP), conduct an ammunition re-supply and collect 3 full ammunition boxes. At the 600m point and 5 minutes after the last exposure in phase one order “Watch out”.
Phase 3. Range/Positioning
500m Prone
Ammunition
10 rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-58
4 x Triple Fig 11 (SARTS suppression Fig 11) 1 second flash followed 60 seconds later by 5 x 6 second exposures with irregular intervals. A one second exposure will be the signal for the Fire Team to move to 500m in bounds (see explanatory notes) 60 seconds later, there will be 5 x 6 second exposures of the targets which are to be engaged with 2 rounds per exposure. Targets Up and Hold.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Phase 4. Range/Positioning
400m Prone
Ammunition
10 rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4 x Triple Fig 11 (SARTS suppression Fig 11) 1 second flash followed 60 seconds later by 5 x 6 second exposures with irregular intervals. A one second exposure will be the signal for the Fire Team to move to 400m in bounds (see explanatory notes) 60 seconds later, there will be 5 x 6 second exposures of the targets which are to be engaged with 2 rounds per exposure. Targets Up and Hold.
Phase 5. Range/Positioning
300m Fire Trench / (Prone if FT not available).
Ammunition
10 rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4 x Fig 11 1 second flash followed 60 seconds later by 1 x 20 second exposure. A one second exposure will be the signal for the Fire Team to move to 300m in bounds (see explanatory notes) 60 seconds later, there will be 1 x 20 second exposures of the targets which is to be engaged with 10 rounds. LSW to fire in bursts of 2-3 rounds. Targets Up and Hold. The Three ammunition boxes are to be left at the 300m FP.
Phase 6. Range/Positioning
200m LSW – Prone Riflemen - Kneeling/ Squatting.
Ammunition
10 rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4 x Fig 12 1 second flash followed 60 seconds later by 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals. A one second exposure will be the signal for the Fire Team to move to 200m in bounds (see explanatory notes) 60 seconds later, there will be 5 x 4 second exposures of the targets which are to be engaged with 10 rounds. LSW to fire in bursts of 2-3 rounds. Targets Up and Hold. Post phase Order “Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear, (once clear) ease springs, return to 600m pick up brass and await scores”
14-59
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Fire Team Attack Assessment– Time Chart Phase
Range
Lanes
1
300m
1-2-3-4
2 3
CASEVAC
Target Frame
Down
Fig 12 Up and Hold
05 20 31 43 1.01 1.16
16 24 35 47 1.05 1.20
6.25 7.27 7.43 7.59 8.13 8.26 8.48 9.50 10.03 10.15 10.27 10.39 11.00 12.02 12.39 13.41 13.55 14.04 14.20 14.30
6.26 7.35 7.51 8.06 8.21 8.33 8.49 9.58 10.10 10.22 10.34 10.46 11.01 12.23 12.40 13.47 14.00 14.09 14.25 14.35
500m
1-2-3-4
Triple Fig 11 Or SARTS suppression Up and Hold
4
400m
1-2-3-4
Triple Fig 11 Or SARTS suppression Up and Hold
5
300m
1-2-3-4
6
200m
1-2-3-4
Fig 11 Up and Hold Fig 12 Up and Hold
14-60
Timings Up
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The Fire Team Night Engagement Assessment 14157. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a three phase shoot designed to replicate night time engagements likely to be encountered on operations. 14158. Ranges. The assessment can be fired on a CGR or gallery range. The stop butt should be evenly illuminated to silhouette the targets. Each fire team will require a bank of four targets. If using SARTS The Target illumination modules should be used. 14159. Time Chart. A time chart to assist range staff is included after the practice details. 14160. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 20 minutes. 14161. Rules. Firers must have zeroed their weapons and passed the ACMT for their weapon system before the assessment is fired. 14162. Ammunition. 120 rounds per fire team. 14163. Targetry. Each lane will require: 1 x Fig 11. 1 x Fig 12. 14164. Scoring. 4 points per hit. 14165. Standards. To achieve the required standard the fire team must achieve the OMS at each firing distance (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement will constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the assessment individual stages or practices may be fired again. Ser
Phase
1
1 200m 2 100m 3 100m
2 3
Total Rounds
OMS Requirement % Hits
Score
40
60%
120
Highest Possible Score (HPS) 200
40
60%
120
200
40
60%
120
200
480
800
Pass
14166. Explanatory Notes a. Once loaded all safety catches are applied before any movement between firing positions. b.
Scores will be given at the end of the shoot.
14-61
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Assessment Details Phase 1. Range/Positioning
200m Fire trench. Standing supported
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 11. 5 x 5 second exposure with irregular intervals. Order “Dress in to the fire trench, load, Ready, adopt the standing supported position, watch and shoot”. On the appearance of the targets firers are to engage each exposure. Any number of shots may be fired at each exposure. Targets Up and Hold. Post practice Order “Dress out of the fire trench” under control of the range staff advance to 100m. “ Adopt the standing alert position, watch out ”
Phase 2. Range/Positioning
100m Standing alert to kneeling or squatting
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12. 10 x 4 second exposure with irregular intervals. On the appearance of the targets firers are to adopt the kneeling or squatting position and fire one shot at each exposure. Firers are to return to the standing alert position after each exposure. Targets Fall when Hit. Post practice Order “Adopt the kneeling or squatting position, watch out ”
Phase 3. Range/Positioning
100m Kneeling or squatting to standing unsupported
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-62
Fig 12. 4 x 6 second exposure with irregular intervals. On the appearance of the target firers are to break cover by adopting the standing position and engage each exposure. Any number of shots may be fired at each exposure. Targets Up and Hold. Post phase Order “Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear, (once clear) ease springs, pick up brass and await scores”
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
THE Fire Team Night Engagement Assessment Time Chart Phase
Range
Target Frame
1
200m
Fig 11 Up and Hold
2
100m
Fig 12 Fall when Hit
3
100m
Fig 12 Up and Hold
Timings Up
Down
05 16 30 41 55 05 21 33 46 57 1.11 1.22 1.36 1.50 2.01 05 21 34 48
11 22 36 47 1.01 10 26 38 51 1.02 1.16 1.27 1.41 1.55 2.06 12 28 41 55
14-63
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The Fire Team Advance To Contact Assessment 14167. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a continuous five phase shoot designed to replicate situations likely to be encountered on operations. 14168. Ranges. The Fire Team advance to contact assessment can be fired on a Gallery Range. 14169. Time Chart. A time chart to assist range staff is included after the practice details. 14170. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete. 14171. Organisation. The assessment is designed to allow 3 x Fire Teams to fire on a 12 lane range. The assessment should be fired with an LSW as part of the Fire Team. Fire Team should be organised as follows. a.
Sec Comd / 2IC (Rifle). Lane 1,2 o r 3.
b.
2 x Riflemen. Lane 1,2 or 3.
c.
1 x LSW Gunner. Lane 4.
The assessment is a continuous shoot conducted in five phases. 14172. Rules. a. Firers must have zeroed their weapons and passed the ACMT for their weapon system before the assessment is fired. b. Once made ready, all movement must be conducted with safety catches applied. c. Any unfired rounds in any phase may not be fired during subsequent phases. 14173. Ammunition. a.
Riflemen – 20 rounds.
b.
Gunner – 50 rounds.
14174. Scoring. Phase 1. Any member of the section failing to complete the Approach March in the allocated time will be deemed to have failed the assessment and the fire team will complete the shoot without those individuals that failed phase 1. Additionally the section will be penalised - 50 points for each individual failure in phase 1. a. All Phases Fig 11 and 12. 5 or 4 points per hit. Triple Fig or SARTS suppression Fig 11 5 ,4 or 2 points per hit. 14-64
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
14175. Standards. To achieve the required standard the section must achieve the OMS for each phase (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement will constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the shoot conditions the entire assessment should be fired again. Total Rounds
% Hits
Score
Phase 1
0
60%
150
Highest Possible Score (HPS) 250
Phase 2
2 x 10 (20)
60%
30
50
3
Phase 3a
1 x 30
60%
6
10
4
Phase 3b
3 x 10 1 x 30
60%
6
10
5
Phase 4
60%
87
Gunners – 145
6
Phase 5
60%
81 120
Riflemen – 135 200
480
800
Ser
Phase
1 2
3 x 10 Remaining from Phases 3a and 3b 10 (80)
OMS Requirement
Pass
14176. Explanatory Notes. a. Once loaded the RCO is to ensure safety catches are applied before any movement between firing positions. b. It is the firers responsibility to ensure they have sufficient rounds for each phase. c. Phase 1 of the assessment consists of a section approach march of 2.4km in under 18 minutes. d.
Scores will be given at the end of Phase 5.
14177. Range Rigging. a.
Lane 1 - 3 -
Triple Fig 11, Fig 12.
b.
Lane 4
-
Triple Fig 11, Fig 11.
c.
SARTS
-
Fig 11 left, Fig 12 right.
14-65
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Assessment Details Phase 1. Approach March Range/Positioning
610m
Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
18 minutes to complete the approach march plus 2 minutes to form up 10m behind the 600m firing point. Fire Team will be formed up in the FOB with all equipment for the assessment. On the command “Go” the section will commence the 2.4km approach march following the designated route. 20 minutes after the command go Order “Load, ready, phase 2 watch out”.
Phase 2. Range/Positioning
600m Prone
Ammunition
LSW Gunner – 10 rounds 1 x Triple Fig 11 (SARTS suppression Fig 11)
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1 x 1 second exposure followed by 2 x 10 second exposures with a 5 second interval. A one second exposure will be the signal for the gunner to advance onto the 600m firing point and fire 10 rounds (single shot) at the two exposures. As soon as the gunner opens fire the remainder of the fire team can move onto the 600m firing point. Targets Up and Hold
Phase 3a. Range/Positioning
500m Prone
Ammunition
Riflemen - 10 rounds LSW Gunners – 30 rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-66
2 x Triple Fig 11 (SARTS suppression Fig 11) (left). 1 x 40 second exposure. The appearance of the targets is the signal for a pair to advance to the 500m firing point and open fire. Each firer MUST only engage their own target with up to 10 rounds. Targets Fall when Hit As soon as a pair open fire. The remainder of the fire team can advance to 500m and wait until their targets are exposed in phase 3b.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Phase 3b. Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
400m Prone Riflemen - 10 rounds Gunners – 30 rounds 2 x Triple Fig 11 Fig (SARTS suppression Fig 11) (right) 1 x 40 second exposure. The appearance of the targets is the signal for a pair to advance to the 400m firing point and open fire. Each firer MUST only engage their own target with up to 10 rounds. LSW Gunner is to fire single shots. Targets Fall when Hit As soon as a pair open fire The remainder of the fire team can advance to 400m and wait until the targets are exposed for phase 4.
Phase 4. Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
Remaining rounds from phases 3a and 3b 3 x Fig 12 1 x Fig 11
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1 x 1 second exposure of 3 x Fig 12 (Riflemen) followed 30 seconds later by 2 x 6 second exposures. Followed 20 seconds later by 2 x 15 second exposure of 1 x Fig 11 (gunners). The appearance of a one second exposure is the signal for the riflemen to advance to the 300m firing point. 30 seconds later there will be 2 x 6 second exposures of 3 x Fig 12. Not more than 9 rounds can be fired. Targets Up and Hold The LSW gunner may advance to the 300m firing point as soon as the riflemen open fire at their first exposure. 20 seconds after the second rifleman exposure there will be 2 x exposures of 15 seconds of 1 x Fig 11. The LSW gunner may fire not more that 29 rounds (in bursts of 2-3 rounds) at these exposures. Targets Up and Hold
14-67
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Phase 5. Range/Positioning
200m LSW – Prone Riflemen – Kneeling/ squatting.
Ammunition
Riflemen - 10 rounds Gunner – 10 rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4x Fig 12 1 x 1 second exposure of 3 x Fig 12 followed 30 seconds later by 5 x 4 second exposures. The appearance of a one second exposure will be the signal for the fire team to advance to the 200m firing point. 30 seconds later there will be 5 x 4 second exposures. Firers are to engage with 2 rounds per exposure. LSW to fire in bursts of 2-3 rounds. Targets Up and Hold. Post phase Order “Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear, (once clear) ease springs, return to 600m point, pick up brass and await scores”
The Fire Team Advance To Contact Assessment Time Chart Phase
Range
Lanes
Target Frame
1
2.4km
2
600m
4
3a
500m
1-2
3b
400m
3-4
4
300m
1-2- 3
Triple Fig 11 (SARTS suppression Fig 11) Up and Hold Triple Fig 11 (SARTS suppression Fig 11) Fall when Hit Triple Fig 11 (SARTS suppression Fig 11) Fall when Hit Fig 12 Up and Hold Fig 11 Up and Hold
5
14-68
200m
4 1-2-3-4
Fig 12 Up and Hold
Timings Up
Down
05 16 31 51
06 27 44 1.32
1.35
2.16
2.35 3.07 3.20
2.36 3.14 3.27
3.48 4.10 4.36 5.08 5.20 5.31 5.45 6.05
4.04 4.26 4.37 5.14 5.26 5.37 5.51 6.11
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The Section Advance to Contact Assessment 14178. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a continuous five phase shoot designed to replicate situations likely to be encountered on operations. 14179. Ranges. The section advance to contact assessment can be fired on a Gallery Range. 14180. Time Chart. A time chart to assist range staff is included after the practice details. 14181. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete. 14182. Organisation. The assessment is designed to allow a section to fire on a 12 lane range. The assessment should be fired with an LSW as part of the section. Sections should be organised as follows: Sec Comd lane 3 / 2IC lane 10 4 x Riflemen lanes 1, 2, 11 and 12 2 x LSW Gunners lanes 4 and 9 The assessment is a continuous shoot conducted in five phases. 14183. Rules. a. Firers must have zeroed their weapons and passed the ACMT for their weapon system before the assessment is fired. b. Once made ready, all movement must be conducted with safety catches applied. c. Any unfired rounds in any phase may not be fired during subsequent phases. 14184. Ammunition. Riflemen – 20 rounds. Gunners – 50 rounds. 14185. Scoring. Phase 1 = Any member of the section failing to complete the Approach March in the allocated time will be deemed to have failed the assessment and the section will complete the shoot without those individuals that failed phase 1. Additionally the section will be penalised - 50 points for each individual failure in phase 1. All Phases Fig 11 and Fig 12, 5 or 4 points per hit. Triple Fig or SARTS suppression Fig 11,5,4 or 2 points per hit.
14-69
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
14186. Standards. To achieve the required standard the section must achieve the OMS for each phase (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement will constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the shoot conditions the entire assessment should be fired again. Total Rounds
% Hits
Score
Phase 1
0
60%
300
Highest Possible Score (HPS) 500
Phase 2
2 x 10 (20)
60%
60
100
3
Phase 3a
60%
12
20
4
Phase 3b
60%
12
20
5
Phase 4
60%
174
Gunners – 290
6
Phase 5
1 x 30 3 x 10 1 x 30 3 x 10 Remaining from Phases 3a and 3b 10 (80)
60%
162 240
Riflemen – 270 400
960
1600
Ser
Phase
1 2
OMS Requirement
Pass
14187. Explanatory Notes a. Once loaded the RCO is to ensure safety catches are applied before any movement between firing positions. b. It is the firer’s responsibility to ensure they have sufficient rounds for each phase. c.
Scores will be given at the end of Phase 5.
14188. Range Rigging.
14-70
Lanes 1 – 3 & 10 - 12
-
Frame held Triple Fig 11, Fig 12
Lanes 4 & 9
-
Frame held Triple Fig 11, Fig 11
SARTS
-
Fig 11 left, Fig 12 right.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Assessment Details Phase 1. Approach March Range/Positioning
610m
Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
18 minutes to complete the approach march plus 2 minutes to form up on the FUP (10 metres to the rear of the 600m firing point). Section will be formed up in the FOB with all equipment for the assessment. On the command “Go” the section will commence the 2.4km approach march following the designated route. 20 minutes after the command “Go” order “Load, ready, phase 2 watch out”.
Phase 2. Range/Positioning
600m Prone
Ammunition
LSW Gunners – 10 rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
2 x Triple Fig 11or SARTS suppression Fig 11 1 x 1 second exposure followed by 2 x 10 second exposures. A one second exposure will be the signal for the gunners to advance onto the 600m firing point and fire 10 rounds (single shot) at the two exposures. As soon as the gunners open fire the remainder of the section can move onto the 600m firing point. Targets Up and Hold
Phase 3a. Range/Positioning
500m Prone
Ammunition
Riflemen - 10 rounds LSW Gunners – 30 rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4 x Triple Fig 11 or SARTS suppression Fig 11 1 x 40 second exposure (left Fire Team). The appearance of the targets is the signal for left Fire Team to advance to the 500m firing point and open fire. Each firer MUST only engage their own target with up to 10 rounds. LSW Gunners to fire single shots. Targets Fall when Hit As soon as the left Fire Team open fire the right Fire Team can advance to 500m and wait until their tar- gets are exposed in phase 3b.
14-71
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Phase 3b. Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
400m Prone Riflemen - 10 rounds Gunners – 30 rounds 4 x Triple Fig 11 or SARTS suppression Fig 11 1 x 40 second exposure (right Fire Team) The appearance of the targets is the signal for right Fire Team to advance to the 400m firing point and open fire. Each firer MUST only engage their own target with up to 10 rounds. LSW Gunners to fire single shots. Targets Fall when Hit As soon as the right Fire Team open fire the left Fire Team can advance to 400m and wait until the targets are exposed for phase 4.
Phase 4. Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
Remaining rounds from phases 3a and 3b 6 x Fig 12 2 x Fig 11
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-72
1 x 1 second exposure of 6 x Fig 12 (Riflemen) followed 30 seconds later by 2 x 6 second exposures. Followed 20 seconds later by 2 x 15 second exposure of 2 x Fig 11 (gunners). The appearance of a one second exposure is the signal for the riflemen to advance to the 300m firing point. 30 seconds later there will be 2 x 6 second exposures of 6 x Fig 12. Not more than 9 rounds can be fired. Targets Up and Hold The LSW gunners may advance to the 300m firing point as soon as the riflemen open fire at their first exposure. 20 seconds after the second rifleman exposure there will be 2 x exposures of 15 seconds of 2 x Fig 11. The LSW gunners may fire not more than 29 rounds (in bursts of 2-3 rounds). Targets Up and Hold
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Phase 5. Range/Positioning Ammunition Target/ Exposure
Instructions
200m LSW – Prone Riflemen – Kneeling/ squatting Riflemen - 10 rounds Gunners – 10 rounds 8 x Fig 12 1 x 1 second exposure of 8 x Fig 12 followed 30 seconds later by 5 x 4 second exposures. The appearance of a one second exposure will be the signal for the section to advance to the 200m firing point. 30 seconds later there will be 5 x 4 second exposures of the targets. Firers are to engage with 2 rounds per exposure. LSW to fire in bursts of 2-3 rounds. Targets Up and Hold Post phase Order “Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear, (once clear) ease springs, return to 600m point, pick up brass and await scores”
The Section Advance To Contact Assessment Time Chart Phase
Range
Lanes
Target Frame
1
2.4km
2
600m
4 and 9
3a
500m
1,2,3,4
3b
400m
9,10,11,12
4
300m
1,2,3,and 10, 11, 12
Triple Fig 11 (SARTS suppression Fig 11) Up and Hold Triple Fig 11 (SARTS suppression Fig 11) Fall when Hit Triple Fig 11 (SARTS suppression Fig 11) Fall when Hit Fig 12 Up and Hold
4 and 9 5
200m
1,2,3,4 9,10,11,12
Fig 11 Up and Hold 8 x Fig 12
Timings Up
Down
05 16 32 51
06 27 43 1.32
1.35
2.16
2.35 3.07 3.20
2.36 3.14 3.27
3.48 4.10 4.36 5.08 5.20 5.31 5.45 6.05
4.04 4.26 4.37 5.14 5.26 5.37 5.51 6.11
14-73
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The Section Attack Assessment 14189. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a continuous six phase shoot designed to replicate situations likely to be encountered on operations. 14190. Ranges. The section attack assessment can be fired on a Gallery Range. 14191. Time Chart. A time chart to assist range staff is included after the practice details. 14192. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 25 minutes to complete. 14193. Organisation. The assessment is designed to allow a section to fire on a 12 lane range. The assessment should be fired with Rifles and LSW as part of the section, split into two equal fire teams. Sections should be organised as follows: Sec Comd lane 3 / 2IC lane 10 4 x Riflemen lanes 1, 2, 11 and 12 2 x LSW Gunners lanes 4 and 9 14194. The assessment is a continuous shoot conducted in six phases. 14195. Rules. a. Firers must have zeroed their weapons and passed the ACMT for their weapon system before the assessment is fired. b. Once made ready, all movement must be conducted with safety catches applied. c. Any unfired rounds in any phase may not be fired during subsequent phases. 14196. Ammunition. 50 rounds per firer in one magazine of 20 rounds and three magazines of 10 rounds. 10 rounds will initially be issued for Phase 1 only. The remainder will be issued when the section arrive at the HLS during Phase 2. 14197. Scoring. a.
All Phases Fig 11 and Fig 12, 5 and 4. Triple fig 5, 4 and 2 points per hit.
b. Phase 2 = 200 points. Any member of the section failing to complete the CASE- VAC and ammo re-supply in the allocated time will be deemed to have failed the assessment and the section will complete the shoot without those individuals that failed phase 2. Additionally the section will be penalised - 50 points for each individual failure in phase 2.
14-74
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
14198. Standards. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS for each phase (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement will constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the shoot conditions the entire assessment should be fired again. Ser
Phase
Total Rounds
OMS Requirement % Hits
Score
1
Phase 1
80
60%
240
Highest Possible Score (HPS) 400
2
Phase 2
0
60%
200
200
3
Phase 3
80
60%
240
400
4
Phase 4
80
60%
240
400
5
Phase 5
80
60%
240
400
6
Phase 6
80
60%
Pass
240
400
1320
2200
14199. Explanatory Notes. a. Once loaded the RCO is to ensure safety catches are applied before any movement between firing positions. b. It is the firers responsibility to ensure they have sufficient rounds for each phase. 2 simulated casualties are required at the 300m firing point, 1 per Fire Team and each weighing approx 75kg. 6 x weighted ammunition boxes are required at the 600m firing point. c. Movement between firing points will be in bounds by Fire Teams within the fire teams under the overall control of the section commander. The initial 1 second expo- sure will be the signal for the first team to move forward 35 metres and take cover (prone). Once the first Fire Team are down the next Fire Team will move forward 70 metres and take cover (prone). Once the second team are down the first Fire Team will move directly onto the next firing point followed by the rear Fire Team. A Fire Team may only move forward once the preceding Fire Team are in the prone position. d.
Scores will be given at the end of Phase 6.
14200. Range Rigging. AlL Lanes
-
Triple fig 11, Fig 11, Fig 12.
SARTS
-
Fig 11 left, fig 12 right 14-75
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Assessment Details Phase 1. Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
8 x Fig 12. 1 exposure of 10 seconds followed by 5 x 3 second exposures. Order “Load, ready, watch and shoot” On the appearance of the first exposure firers are to fire 5 rounds. Firers are then to fire one round at each of the remaining five exposures. Targets Up and Hold. Post last exposure order “Man down”
Phase 2. Casevac Range/Positioning
300m to 600m
Ammunition Target/ Exposure Instructions
As soon as the targets from phase 1 go down the section have 5 minutes to recover the two casualties (out of contact) to the HLS (600m FP), conduct an ammunition re-supply and collect 6 full ammunition boxes.
Phase 3. Range/Positioning
500m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-76
8 x Triple Fig 11(SARTS suppression triple 11) 1 second flash followed 60 seconds later by 5 x 6 second exposures. 5 minutes after the last exposure in phase one order “Watch out”. A one second exposure will be the signal for the Section to move to 500m in bounds 60 seconds later, there will be 5 x 6 second exposures of the targets which are to be engaged with 2 rounds per exposure. Targets Up and Hold.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Phase 4. Range/Positioning
400m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
8 x Triple Fig 11. (SARTS suppression triple 11) 1 second flash followed 60 seconds later by 5 x 6 second exposure. A one second exposure will be the signal for the Section to move to 400m in bounds. 60 seconds later, there will be 5 x 6 second exposures of the targets which are to be engaged with 2 rounds per exposure. Targets Up and Hold.
Phase 5. Range/Positioning
300m Fire Trench/ (Prone if FT not available)
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
8 x Fig 11. 1 second flash followed 60 seconds later by 1 x 20 second exposure. A one second exposure will be the signal for the Section to move to 300m in bounds. 60 seconds later, there will be 1 x 20 second exposures of the targets which is to be engaged with 10 rounds. LSW to fire in bursts of 2-3 rounds. The six ammunition boxes are to be left at the 300m FP. Targets Up and Hold.
Phase 6. Range/Positioning
200m LSW – Prone Riflemen - Kneeling/ Squatting
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
8 x Fig 12. 1 second flash followed 60 seconds later by 5 x 4 second exposures. A one second exposure will be the signal for the Section to move to 200m in bounds. 60 seconds later, there will be 5 x 4 second exposures of the targets which are to be engaged with 10 rounds. LSW to fire in bursts of 2-3 rounds. Targets Up and Hold. Post phase Order “Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear, (once clear) ease springs, return to 600m pick up brass and await scores”
14-77
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The Section Attack Assessment Time Chart Phase
Range
Lanes
1
300m
All TGTS
2 3
CASEVAC
Target Frame
Up
Down
Fig 12 Up and Hold
05 20 31 43 1.01 1.16
16 24 35 47 1.05 1.20
6.25 7.27 7.43 7.59 8.13 8.26 8.48 9.50 10.03 10.15 10.27 10.39 11.00 12.02 12.39 13.41 13.55 14.04 14.20 14.30
6.26 7.35 7.51 8.06 8.21 8.33 8.49 9.58 10.10 10.22 10.34 10.46 11.01 12.23 12.40 13.47 14.00 14.09 14.25 14.35
500m
All TGTS
Triple Fig 11 Or SARTS suppression Up and Hold
4
400m
All TGTS
Triple Fig 11 Or SARTS suppression Up and Hold
5
300m
All TGTS
6
200m
All TGTS
Fig 11 Up and Hold Fig 12 Up and Hold
14-78
Timings
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The Machine Gun Assessment 14201. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a four phase shoot designed to replicate engagements likely to be encountered by machine gunners on operations. 14202. Ranges. The assessment must be fired on a gallery range. Each firer will require 2 Lanes. Phase 1 will be fired on his left hand lane. During the run down from 400m – 300m the gunners are to move across to their right hand lane for the remainder of the shoot. 14203. Time Chart. A time chart to assist range staff is included after the practice details. 14204. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 20 minutes to complete. 14205. Rules. a. Firers must have zeroed their weapons and passed the ACMT for their weapon system before the assessment is fired. b. Once made ready, all movement must be conducted with safety catches applied with the LSW. LMGs must be made safe. 14206. Ammunition. 80 rounds per firer, in one magazine/belt of 30 rounds, two magazines/belts of 20 rounds and one magazine/belt of 10 rounds. 14207. Targetry. Each firer will require: 2 x Triple Fig 11, 1 left lane and 1 right lane. Fig 11 left, fig 12 right. 14208. Scoring. Phase 1 and 2 - 5, 4 or 2 points per hit. Phase 3 and 4 - 5 or 4 points per hit.
14-79
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
14209. Standards. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at each firing distance (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement will constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the assessment individual phases may be fired again. Ser
Phase
1
1a and 1b 400m 2 300m 3 200m 4 100m
2 3 4
Total Rounds
OMS Requirement % Hits
Score
30
60%
90
Highest Possible Score (HPS) 150
20
60%
60
100
20
60%
60
100
10
60%
30
50
240
400
Pass
14210. Explanatory Notes. a. Once loaded the RCO is to ensure LSW’s apply safety catches before any movement between firing positions. LMG’s are to be made safe. b.
Scores will be given at the end of phase 4.
Assessment Details Phase 1a. Range/Positioning
500m to 400m Rundown Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1 x Triple Fig 11 or SARTS suppression Fig 11. 1 x 45 second exposure. Order “Load, adopt the prone position, phase 1a, watch out”. On the appearance of the target firers are to advance to the 400m firing point, make ready and open fire in bursts of 2-3 rounds with 20 rounds. The targets will be exposed for 45 seconds. Targets Up and Hold. Post phase Order “Phase 1b, watch and shoot”.
14-80
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Phase 1b. Range/Positioning
400m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1 x Triple Fig 11 or SARTS suppression Fig 11. 5 x 3 second exposures. On the next five exposures of the target firers are to open fire in bursts of 2-3 rounds at each exposure, with up to 10 rounds. Targets Up and Hold. Post phase Order “Phase 2, watch out”.
Phase 2. Range/Positioning
400m to 300m Rundown Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds 1 x Triple Fig 11 or SARTS suppression Fig 11.
Target/ Exposure
1 exposure of 1 second and an interval of 30 seconds.
Instructions
5 x 5 second exposures On the appearance of the tar- get firers are to advance to the 300m firing point, make ready (if required) and engage the targets in bursts of 2-3 rounds with up to 20 rounds. Targets Up and Hold. Post phase Order “Phase 3, watch out”.
Phase 3. Range/Positioning
300m to 200m Rundown Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1 x Fig 11. 1 exposure of 45 seconds. On the appearance of the target firers are to advance to the 200m firing point, make ready (if required) and open fire in bursts of 2-3 rounds with up to 20 rounds. Targets Up and Hold. Post phase Order “Phase 4, watch out”.
14-81
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Phase 4. Range/Positioning
200m to 100m Rundown Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds 1 x Fig 11.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1 exposure of 1 second and an interval of 30 seconds. 5 x 3 second exposures On the appearance of the tar- get firers are to advance to the 100m firing point, make ready (if required) and engage the targets in bursts of 2-3 rounds with up to 10 rounds. Targets Up and Hold. Post phase Order “Unload, for inspection port arms (or prepare guns for inspection), show clear (once clear) ease springs, pick up brass return to the 500m point, await scores”
The Machine Gun Assessment Time Chart Phase
Range
1a
400m
1b
400m
2
300m
Triple Fig 11 Or SARTS suppression Fig 11 Up and Hold
3
200m
4
100m
Fig 11 Up and Hold Fig 11 Up and Hold
14-82
Target Frame Triple Fig 11 Or SARTS suppression Fig 11 Up and Hold Triple Fig 11 Or SARTS suppression Fig 11 Up and Hold
Timings Up
Down
05
51
1.01 1.13 1.25 1.34 1.43 2.08 2.39 2.52 3.06 3.16 3.30 3.51
1.05 1.17 1.29 1.38 1.47 2.09 2.45 2.58 3.12 3.22 3.36 4.37
4.52 5.23 5.34 5.43 5.55 6.05
4.53 5.27 5.38 5.47 5.59 6.09
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The Sniper Assessment 14211. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a continuous four phase shoot designed to replicate situations likely to be encountered on operations. 14212. Ranges. Phase 1 of the assessment can be fired on a 600 m gallery range. Phase 2 can be fired on a 900 metre/1000 yard gallery range. 14213. Time Chart. A time chart to assist range staff is included after the practice details. 14214. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 25 minutes to complete. 14215. Organisation. a. The assessment is designed to be fired with snipers operating as pairs. Each sniper will fire each phase with the No 2 acting as a spotter. They will then repeat the shoot in reversed roles. The shoot can be conducted over a number of days. b.
Issued spotting scopes and binoculars are permitted throughout.
14216. Rules. a.
The assessment is only to be fired by qualified snipers.
b. Firers must have zeroed their weapons and passed the ACMT for their weapon system before the assessment is fired. c. A non scoring 5 round check group is to be fired before the commencement of Practice 1. d. Once made ready, all movement must be conducted with safety catches applied. e.
Only one shot can be fired at each exposure.
14217. Ammunition. Check Zero – 5 rds, Phase 1 – 35 rds, Phase 2 – 30 rds 14218. Scoring. 5 and 4 points per hit. If bonus shot 10 and 4 points per hit. 14219. Standards. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at each phase (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement will constitute failure of the Assessment. Due to the nature of the assessment conditions the entire shoot should be fired again.
14-83
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Ser
Phase
Total Rounds
OMS Requirement % Hits
Score
Highest Possible Score (HPS)
1
Phase 1a
1
40%
4
10
2
Phase 1b
9
60%
27
45
3
Phase 1c
10
60%
30
50
4
Phase 1d
1
40%
4
10
5
Phase 1e
4
60%
12
20
6
Phase 1f
10
60%
Pass
30
50
111
185
7
Phase 2a
1
40%
4
10
8
Phase 2b
9
60%
27
45
9
Phase 2c
10
60%
30
50
10
Phase 2d
10
60%
30
50
87
155
Pass
14220. Explanatory Notes. a. Once loaded the RCO is to ensure safety catches are applied before and movement between firing positions. b. It is the firers responsibility to ensure they have sufficient rounds for each phase. c.
Scores will be given at the end of each Phase.
14221. Range Rigging. Phase 1 1 x Fig 12 1 x Fig 14 Phase 2 1 x Fig 11 SARTS Phase 1 Fig 12 Right, Fig 14 Left. SARTS Phase 2 (targetry change) Fig 11 Left.
14-84
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Assessment Details Preliminary Zeroing Shoot Phase. Check Zero Range/Positioning
100 yards Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1 x 25mm square aiming mark.
Instructions
Fire a five round group to check zero.
Phase 1a. Deliberate/1st Shot Bonus Range/Positioning
600 yds Prone Sniper pair 2 m behind firing point.
Ammunition
1 Round
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12 frame held. 1 x 3 minute exposure. Order “Adopt the prone position, load, ready, phase 1 a, watch out”. On the appearance of the target the sniper has 3 minutes to crawl into position, set sights for range and wind and fire 1 round. Targets Fall when Hit. After all firers have fired, or targets down. Order “Apply safety catches” indicate shot with a spotting disc or SARTS for 30 seconds. Give scores. Remove discs and patch out. Post phase 1a. Order “ Phase 1b watch and shoot”
Phase 1b. Deliberate/Snap Range/Positioning
600 yds Prone
Ammunition
9 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12 frame held. 1 x 2 minute exposure Followed 30 seconds later by 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals. Sniper fires 4 rounds at the initial exposure then 1 round at each of the remaining 5 exposures. Targets Up and Hold for the 2 min exposure then Fall when Hit. Post Phase order “Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease springs, pick up brass, move to 500m, await scores”.
14-85
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Phase 1c. Deliberate/Snap Range/Positioning
500 yds Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12 frame held. 1 x 2 minute exposure Followed 30 seconds later by 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals. Order “Adopt the prone position, load, ready, phase 1c, watch and shoot”. Sniper fires 5 rounds at the initial exposure then 1 round at each of the remaining 5 exposures. Targets Up and Hold for the 2 min exposure then Fall when Hit. Post Phase order “Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease springs, pick up brass, move to 400m, await scores”.
Phase 1d. Deliberate/1st Shot Bonus Range/Positioning
400 yds Prone. Sniper pair 2 m behind firing poin
Ammunition
1 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 14 frame held. 1 x 3 minute exposure. Order “Load, ready, adopt the prone position, watch out” On the appearance of the target the sniper has 3 minutes to crawl into position, set sights for range and wind and fire 1 round. Targets Fall when Hit. After all firers have fired, or targets down. Order “Apply safety catches” indicate shot with a spotting disc for 30 seconds. Give scores. Remove discs and patch out. Post phase. Order “Phase 1e watch and shoot”
Phase 1e. Deliberate Range/Positioning
400 yds Prone
Ammunition
4 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-86
Fig 14 frame held. 2 x 10 second exposure. Sniper fires 2 rounds at each exposure. Targets Up and Hold. Post Phase order “Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease springs, await scores”.
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Phase 1f. Deliberate/Snap Range/Positioning
400 yds Sitting/ Kneeling
Ammunition
10 Rounds Fig 12 frame held.
Target/ Exposure
1 x 3 minute exposure Followed 30 seconds later by 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals. Order “Adopt the sitting or kneeling position,(when in position) Load, ready, phase 1f watch and shoot”
Instructions
Sniper fires 5 rounds at the initial exposure then 1 round at each of the remaining 5 exposures. Targets Up and Hold for the 3 min exposure then Fall when Hit. Post Phase order “Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease springs, pick up brass, await scores”.
Phase 2a. Deliberate/1st Shot Bonus Range/Positioning
1000 yds Prone Sniper pair 2 m behind firing point
Ammunition
1 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 11 frame held. 1 x 3 minute exposure. Order “Adopt the prone position, load, ready, phase 2 a, watch out”. On the appearance of the target the sniper has 3 minutes to crawl into position, set sights for range and wind and fire 1 round. Targets Fall when Hit. After all firers have fired, or targets down. Order “Apply safety catches” indicate shot with a spotting disc for 30 seconds. Give scores. Remove discs and patch out. Post phase 21a. Order “Phase 2b watch and shoot”
Phase 2b. Deliberate/Snap Range/Positioning
1000 yds Prone
Ammunition
9 Rounds Fig 11 frame held.
Target/ Exposure
1 x 4 minute exposure Followed 30 seconds later by 5 x 5 second exposures with irregular intervals.
14-87
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Sniper fires 4 rounds at the initial exposure then 1 round at each of the remaining 5 exposures. Instructions
Targets Up and Hold for the 4 min exposure then Fall when Hit. Post Phase order “Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease springs, pick up brass, move to 900m, await scores”.
Phase 2c. Deliberate/Snap Range/Positioning
900 yds Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds Fig 11 frame held.
Target/ Exposure
1 x 4 minute exposure Followed 30 seconds later by 5 x 5 second exposures with irregular intervals. Order “Adopt the prone position, load, ready, phase 2c, watch and shoot”.
Instructions
Sniper fires 5 rounds at the initial exposure then 1 round at each of the remaining 5 exposures. Targets Up and Hold for the 4 min exposure then Fall when Hit. Post Phase order “Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease springs, pick up brass, move to 800m, await scores”.
Phase 2d. Deliberate/Snap Range/Positioning
800 yds Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds Fig 11 frame held.
Target/ Exposure
1 x 4 minute exposure Followed 30 seconds later by 5 x 5 second exposures with irregular intervals. Order “Adopt the prone position, load, ready, phase 2d, watch and shoot”.
Instructions
Sniper fires 5 rounds at the initial exposure then 1 round at each of the remaining 5 exposures. Targets Up and Hold for the 4 min exposure then Fall when Hit. Post Phase order “Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease springs, pick up brass, await scores”.
14-88
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
The Sniper Match Time Chart Timings
Phase
Range/Target
Up
Down
Prelim
100 yds Fig 12 with 1 x 25mm aiming mark
Start 05
0 10.05
Check Zero Only
1a
600 yds Fig 12
Start .05
0 3.06
Fall when Hit
1b
600 yds Fig 12
Start 09
0 2.10
2.40 3.05 3.15 4.45 5.25
2.45 3.10 3.20 4.50 5.30
Start 19
0 2.20
2.51 3.35 4.35 5.05 5.55
2.56 3.41 4.40 5.10 6.00
1c
500 yds Fig 12
Up and Hold Fall when Hit
Up and Hold Fall when Hit
1d
400 yds Fig 14 window
Start 05
0 3.06
1e
400 yds Fig 14 window
Start 09 49
0 20 1.00
1f
400 yds Fig 12
Start 14
0 3.14
3.45 4.30 4.38 5.20 5.45
3.50 4.35 4.43 5.25 5.50
Fall when Hit
Start .05
0 3.06
Fall when Hit
2a
1000 yds Fig 11
Phase
Range/Target
Fall when Hit Up and Hold
Up and Hold
Timings Up
Down
14-89
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Phase
Range/Target
2c
900 yds Fig 11
2d
14-90
800 yds Fig 11
Timings Up
Down
Start .05
0 4.06
4.36 5.20 6.54 7.20 7.54
4.42 5.26 7.00 7.26 8.00
Start .25
0 4.26
4.56 6.00 6.10 6.54 7.40
5.02 6.06 6.16 7.00 7.46
Up and Hold Fall when Hit
Up and Hold Fall when Hit
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only